PROJECT MANUAL CANCER TREATMENT CENTER GUTHRIE CORTLAND MEDICAL CENTER 34 WEST MAIN STREET CORTLAND, NY 13045 OWNER: Guthrie Cortland Medical Center 134 Homer Avenue Cortland, NY 13045 ARCHITECT: Schopfer Architects LLP 1111 James Street Syracuse, NY 13203 CIVIL ENGINEER: Plumley Engineering 8232 Loop Road Baldwinsville, NY 13027 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: IPD: ENGINEERING One Webster's Landing Syracuse, NY 13202 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: IPD: ENGINEERING One Webster's Landing Syracuse, NY 13202 JOB NUMBER: SA1509A DATE: July 13, 2020 SET NO.
Transcript
PROJECT MANUAL CANCER TREATMENT CENTER GUTHRIE CORTLAND MEDICAL CENTER 34 WEST MAIN STREET CORTLAND, NY 13045 OWNER: Guthrie Cortland Medical Center
TITLE PAGE PROJECT: Cancer Treatment Center 34 West Main Street Cortland, New York 13045 PROJECT NUMBER: 1509A OWNER: Guthrie Cortland Medical Center (GCMC)
134 Homer Avenue Cortland, New York 13045
ARCHITECT: Schopfer Architects LLP
1111 James Street Syracuse, New York 13203
CIVIL ENGINEER: Plumley Engineering 8232 Loop Road Baldwinsville, New York 13027
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: IPD: Engineering
One Webster's Landing Syracuse, NY 13202
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: IPD: Engineering
One Webster's Landing Syracuse, NY 13202
DATE: July 13, 2020
END OF SECTION 00 0001
SA1509A TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0003-1
SECTION 00 0003 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION TITLE PAGE(S)
DIVISION 0 - BID REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00 0001 TITLE PAGE 1 00 0003 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 00 0004 LIST OF DRAWINGS 2 00 4100 REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL 8 EXHIBIT 1 BID FORM 4 EXHIBIT 2 CONTRUCTION AGREEMENT 70 00 8200 REFERENCE TO APPLICABLE AIA DOCUMENTS 1 00 8500 PROJECT FORMS AND DOCUMENTS 1 AIA G701-2017 CHANGE ORDER 1 AIA G702-1992 APPLICATION & CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT 1 AIA G703-1992 CONTINUATION SHEET 1 AIA G706-1994 CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT FOR PAYMENT 1 AIA G706A-1994 CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS 1 AIA G707-1994 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 1 AIA G709-2018 PROPOSAL REQUEST 1 AIA G710-1992 ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS 1 AIA G714-2007 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 1 AIA G715-1991 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 1
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 GENERAL SUMMARY OF WORK 1 01 1200 CONTRACTOR MANUAL 1 CONTRACTOR’S MANUAL 24 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 3 01 2300 ALTERNATES 1 01 3320 CUTTING AND PATCHING 2 01 3400 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2 SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET 1 01 3410 COORDINATION 3 01 3420 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1 01 3430 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1 01 3440 PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 7 01 4000 QUALITY CONTROL 4 01 4100 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION & PROCEDURES 6 01 4214 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 2 01 4215 ABBREVIATIONS 5 01 4216 DEFINITIONS 3 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 5 01 5200 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 2 01 5300 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 1 01 6000 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 4 01 7000 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 3 01 7010 CLEANING UP REQUIREMENTS 2 01 7020 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2 01 7030 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION & TRAINING 6 01 7040 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 2
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 4800 SOUND ISOLATION 5 13 4900 RADIATION SHELDING 6
DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION 21 0517 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE PROTECTION EQUIMENT 3 21 0518 ESCTCHEONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 3 21 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 7 21 0529 HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 7 21 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR THE FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUPMENT 5 21 1119 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 2 21 1313 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTMS 12
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 0517 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 3 22 0518 ESCTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 3 22 0523.12 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2 22 0523.14 CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2 22 0523.15 GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 7 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 6 22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 7 22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 5 22 1123.21 INLINE, DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 5 22 1124 FACILITY NATAURAL GAS PIPING 11 22 1316 STORM, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 9 22 4213.13 COMMERICAL WATER CLOSETS 4 22 4216.13 COMMERICAL LAVATORIES 5 22 4216.16 COMMERICAL SINKS 8 22 4500 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 4 22 4716 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 3 22 6113 COMPRESSED AIRE PIPING FOR LAB AND HEALTHCARE FACILITY 9 22 6313 GAS PIPING FOR LAB AND HEALTHCARE FACILITY 8 22 6400 MEDICAL GAS ALARMS 4 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2 23 0517 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 2 23 0518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 1 23 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 4 23 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 3 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 6 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 8 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION 7 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 12 23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 10 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 6 23 2116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 5 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 4 23 2513 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 3 23 3113 METAL DUCTS 9 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 7
SA1509A TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0003-4
DIVISION
TITLE PAGE(S)
DIVISION 23- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIRE CONDITIONING (HVAC) CONT. 23 3423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 4 23 3600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 4 23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS 5 23 7413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTERAL STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 9 DIVISION 24 – NOT USED DIVISION 25 – NOT USED DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 0500 BASIC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 9 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 3 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 8 26 0543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 26 0544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 3 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 4 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 5 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 6 26 2813 FUSES 1 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 6 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 6 27 1500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 8 27 5223 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 9 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513 CONDUCTORS AND CACLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 8 28 4621 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 11 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 1000 SITE PREPARATION 4 31 2000 SITE EARTHWORK 6 31 2001 BUILDING EARTHWORK 7 31 2500 EROSION CONTROL 6 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING 6 32 1313 SITE CONCRETE WORK 5 32 9000 PLANTING 6 32 9219 SEEDED LAWNS 7 DIVISION 33 – SITE UTILITITES 33 4001 STORM DRAINAGE 5 END OF SECTION 00 0003
SA1509A LIST OF DRAWINGS 00 0004-1
SECTION 00 0004 - LIST OF DRAWINGS DRAWING LIST GENERAL T1.0 COVER SHEET T1.1 CODE SUMMARY T1.2 LIFE SAFETY PLAN T1.3 MANEUVERING CLERANCES SITE C1.0 SITE DEMOLITION PLAN C1.1 SITE PLAN C1.2 PAVING, GRADING & DRAININAGE PLAN C1.3 EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN C1.4 LANDSCAPE PLAN C1.5 PHOTOMETRIC PLAN C2.1 EROSION, SEDIMENT CONTROLS & LANDSCAPE DETAILS & NOTES C2.2 PAVING, GRADING & DRAINAGE SYSTEMS DETAILS & SECTONS C2.3 PAVING, GRADING & DRAINAGE SYSTEM DETAILS C2.4 PAVING, GRADING & DRAINAGE SYSTEM DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS C2.5 PAVING, GRADING & DRAINAGE SYSTEMS DETAILS C3.1 DRAINAGE SYSTEM PROFILES STRUCTURAL S.100 GENERAL NOTES S.101 FOUNDATION PLAN S.102 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S.201 FOUNDATION DETAILS S.202 FOUNDATION DETAILS S.203 DETAILS S.301 FRAMING DETAILS S.302 FRAMING ELEVATIONS ARCHITECTURAL A1.1 PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN A1.2 ROOF PLAN A1.3 FURNITURE PLAN A2.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A3.1 SECTIONS A3.2 SECTIONS A3.3 SECTIONS A3.4 DETAILS A4.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & ENLARGED PLANS A4.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A4.3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A5.1 CEILING PLANS A6.1 DOOR SCHEDULE & DOOR DETAILS A6.2 INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE & DETAILS A6.3 FINISH PLAN A6.4 FLOOR FINISH PLAN
SA1509A LIST OF DRAWINGS 00 0004-2
ARCHITECTURAL (CONT.) A7.1 LINEAR ACCELERATOR PLANS & ELEVATIONS A7.2 LINEAR ACCELERATOR & CONTROL ROOM ELEVATIONS A7.3 BI-PARTING SLIDE DOOR PLAN A7.4 BI-PARTING SLIDE DOOR ELEVATION A7.5 BI-PARTING SLIDE DOOR SECTIONS A7.6 BI-PARTING DOOR PLAN, SECTION, & ELEVATION FIRE PROTECTION F-001 GENERAL INFORMATION F-101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN F-501 DETAILS PLUMBING P-001 GENERAL INFORMATION P-100 BELOW SLAB PLAN P-101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN P-102 ROOF PLAN P-501 DETAILS P-601 SCHEDULES HVAC M-001 GENERAL INFORMATION M-101 FIRST FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN M-102 FIRST FLOOR PIPING PLAN M-103 ROOF PLAN M-501 DETAILS M-502 DETAILS M-601 SCHEDULES M-701 CONTROLS ELECTRICAL E-001 GENERAL INFORMATION E-100 SITE PLAN - ELECTRIC E-101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN – POWER E-102 FIRST FLOOR PLAN – LIGHTING E-103 ROOF PLAN E-501 DETAILS & DIAGRAMS E-502 DETAILS & DIAGRAMS E-503 DETAILS & DIAGRAMS E-601 SCHEDULES ME-601 ME CONTROL SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION 00 0004
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
FOR
Construction Services
For The Guthrie Clinic Cortland Cancer Center, Cortland, New York
2. RFP Terms and Schedule…………………………………………………………………………..…. 3 2.1 Confidentiality…………………………………………………………………………...... 3 2.2 Contact Information and Questions……………………………………………………. 3 2.3 Bid Delivery Instructions………………………………………………………………….4
3. Scope of RFP – Our Project…………………………………………………………………………….4
3.1 Construction Summary..………………………………………….……………………....4 3.2 Other Bidder Information……………………………………………………………...….4 3.3 TGCCMC Responsibilities………………………………………………………………..7
Exhibit 1 Bid Form Exhibit 2 Lump Sum General Construction Agreement
3
Request for Proposal The Guthrie Clinic – Cortland Cancer Center July 20, 2020
1. INTRODUCTION The Guthrie Clinic Cortland Medical Center (TGCCMC) is seeking proposals for construction of a one story, free standing 10,100 square foot Cancer Center and associated sitework, located at 34 West Main Street in Cortland, New York. 2. RFP TERMS AND SCHEDULE
Schedule Milestones Date Issue RFP July 20, 2020 Prebid Conference July 30, 2020 at 10:30 AM Web
Meeting Last Day to Submit Questions August 7, 2020 Response to Final Questions August 12, 2020 Bids Due August 18, 2020 Estimated Bid Award (pending approval) Week of September 7, 2020 Work Must Begin By October 16, 2020 Work Must Be Completed By April 1, 2022
2.1 Confidentiality
TGCCMC may, at any time prior to, during or following the RFP process, request additional information, have discussions with or request presentation from any party as it relates to the scope of work indicated. This RFP is the property of TGCCMC and must be held in strict confidence. The RFP contains information regarding TGCCMC operations and is provided solely for the purpose of submitting a proposal. The Bidder shall not disclose to anyone, other than those who need to know in order to respond to this RFP, any information concerning this RFP. 2.2 Contact Information, Prebid Conference and Questions All questions pertaining to this RFP shall be in written form and sent via email to:
A virtual pre-bid conference is scheduled for Thursday, July 30, 2020 at 10:30 AM via Web Teams meeting. The deadline for submitting questions is August 7, 2020. Questions and answers received will be responded to and sent by e-mail to all Bidders by no later than August 12, 2020 at 5pm EST. 2.3 Bid Delivery Instructions All responses to the RFP must be received by 2 pm EST, August 18, 2020. Proposals shall be e-mailed. Please address email subject line “The TGCCMC – Cortland Cancer Center”. Attn: Jody Campbell Please address email to: [email protected]
Jody Campbell Purchasing Agent The Guthrie Clinic 356 Loder St Sayre, Pa. 18840 570-887-5342 570-887-5348 (fax)
3. SCOPE OF RFP – OUR PROJECT 3.1 Cortland Cancer Center Construction Summary The project consists of construction of free standing, one-story building, 10,100 square foot Cancer Center. The Cancer Center will house a linear accelerator, nine (9) infusion bays, medical oncology services and the associated clinical support services. The construction documents developed by Schopfer Architects detail the construction and associated sitework required under this Request for Proposal (RFP). The project documents can be found via Dropbox link. 3.2 Other Bidder Information General 1. All work for this project shall be performed under one contract. 2. Work will be required to be completed during normal day shift hours. 3. Worksite cleanliness cannot be stressed enough for this project as the project site is in the
middle of an active neighborhood and hospital campus.
5
Obligation of the Bidder
1. Each bidder must inform themselves fully of the conditions related to the project, work to be coordinated with other trades, and the employment of labor thereon. Consideration should also be given to the owner’s expectations related to maintaining a safe, secure, and clean jobsite environment.
2. At the time of opening of the bids, each bidder will be presumed to have visited the site to
become familiar with the field conditions affecting work under the contract, also to have read, and become familiar with the plans and specifications provided. The failure or omission of any bidder to visit the site, examine any form, instrument, or documents shall in no way relieve any bidder from obligation to furnish all equipment, labor and materials necessary to carry out the provisions of his contract. Consideration should be given to the added Infection Control requirements necessary for working within an operational operating department.
3. The bid is to be based upon the contents of this document without exception.
Laws and Regulations 1. The bidder’s attention is directed to the fact that all applicable Local, State and Federal Laws,
Municipal Ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the contract thoroughly, and they will be deemed to be included in the contract the same as though herein written out in full. Bidders shall be responsible for including in their proposals the cost of obtaining all applicable permits including but not limited to building permits, zoning permits, construction permits, etc. as described in the attached Contract documents.
Documents 1. Bidding/Contract Documents obtained by bidders for the purpose of bidding are not to be used for
any other purpose other than bidding and construction of the specified project for which they were issued.
2. Contract Documents are available in PDF format for printing. The contract documents dated July 13, 2020 by Schopfer Architects.
Interpretation or Corrections of the Bidding/Contract Documents 1. Any conflicts in, or questions pertaining to, the Bidding/Contract Documents should be immediately
brought to the Owner representative’s attention. If the Bidder, prior to the submission of the Bid, fails to call the Owner representative’s attention to the existence of any apparent ambiguity, inconsistency, or error in the Bidding/Contract documents, the bid will be conclusively presumed to have been based upon the interpretation of such ambiguity or inconsistency, or the directions correcting such error, which may subsequently be given by the Owner’s representative.
2. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding/Contract documents will be made by written notification by Owner’s Representative or Addendum. Interpretations, corrections, and changes of the Bidding/Contract Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them.
6
Addenda and Interpretations 1. No interpretation of the meaning of the Bidding/Contract Documents will be made to any bidder orally.
2. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder
from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Bidding/Contract Documents.
3. In submitting the bid, the bidder acknowledges that all addenda have been received which have been
issued by TGCCMC and that the requirements of any such addenda are reflected in the bid. Bidding Procedures 1. Each bid must be on the prescribed forms.
2. All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium.
3. Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in
words shall govern.
4. Interlineations, alterations, and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the bid.
5. All requested Alternates shall be in bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter “No Change”.
6. Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may state the Bidder’s refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other name.
7. Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of the legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to the contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the Bidder.
Modification or Withdrawal of Bid 1. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled by the Bidder within sixty (60) days following the
time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid.
2. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving the Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be given in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date and time stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids. A change shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.
7
Opening, Rejection and Acceptance of Bids 1. Properly identified Bids received on time will be privately opened. 2. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid which is in any way incomplete or
irregular is subject to rejection. 3. Any Bid received after the time and date specified will not be considered. 4. It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has
been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s best interests. A sample of the contract is provided with the RFP package.
Post-Bid Information 1. The bidder shall within five (5) days after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish
to the Owner Representative in writing: .1 Names of all subcontractors to be used .2 A proposed project progress/completion schedule, outlining how the work will be
completed. Please include a critical path only schedule for reference by owner. .3 Schedule of Values
2. Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Owner will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner,
after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder’s option, (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost associated by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited.
3. Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner have made no reasonable
objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner.
4. Please do not contact the Purchasing or Facilities Departments for status on the project or your bid.
We understand the time and effort you placed into this proposal and will contact every firm proposing on the project once a decision has been reached. Once the project has been awarded, we would be happy to entertain any question you may have regarding your proposal.
3.3 TGCCMC Responsibilities
TGCCMC will provide the following:
A. Assistance during the entire process as well as access to any existing drawings, documentation and facilities.
B. Arrange meetings as requested. C. Select Furniture and Equipment.
8
4. PROPOSAL CONTENT The proposal shall respond to the following items within the format described.
4.1 Proposal Format, Information and Bid Form
A. General Letter of Interest
Maximum of one page including the name of firm, address, telephone number, e-mail address, website address, facsimile number and contact person.
B. Firm Resources 1. Provide an Organization Chart graphically indicating the structure and
staffing of the proposed team. 2. List specific personnel proposed. Indicate the role or area of
responsibility for each individual.
C. Schedule Please provide a preliminary schedule with your Bid Proposal.
D. Bid Form The Bid Form is attached as Exhibit 1 and must be used in your proposal submission.
E. Bid Bond A bid bond is NOT required.
4.2 Standard Form of Agreement The proposed form of Contract shall be the Lump Sum General Construction agreement Attached as Exhibit 2. It is intended that this contract will be executed upon project award “as is”. Please provide any exclusions or proposed modifications with your bid otherwise the attached agreement shall be considered acceptable. 5. SELECTION PROCESS
The selection process will consider, but is not limited to, the following factors: Experience and outcome with projects of similar size and cost. Strength of the proposed team and their ability to work with others for a successful outcome. Ability to deliver the project within the stated schedule dates. Knowledge and familiarity with the local and state approval processes. Competitive fee structure. The TGCCMC, may at its discretion: Choose not to accept any or all proposals submitted in response to this RFP. Use additional selection criteria not identified in this document. Make an award based on factors other than the fee proposal. Request that a respondent submit an alternate sub-contractor. Retain all documents submitted in response to this proposal.
• END OF RFP
Exhibit 1 – Bid Form Date: _________________________ Proposal of: _____________________________________________________________ (Hereinafter called “Bidder”), a *_____________________, organized and existing under the laws of the State of _____________________, doing business as_________________________ ________________________________________________________________________. *Insert Corporation, Partnership, or Individual, as applicable. If Bidder is a Partnership, list below names of all partners. To: The Guthrie Clinic Purchasing Department Attn: Ms. Jody Campbell, Purchasing Agent Gentlemen and/or Ladies: The bidder, having examined the plans and specifications with related documents, and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project, including the availability of materials and supplies, agrees to perform all phases of the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, for the Stipulated Sum stated herein. This sum is to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents, of which this Proposal is a part. Cortland Cancer Center Project Addenda Received: #_____________________________________________ Lump Sum Proposal $___________________________________________________________ Written Lump sum Proposal______________________________________________________
2
Please provide the following bid breakdown: Sitework: $_________________________________________ General Trades: $_________________________________________ Finishes $_________________________________________ Millwork: $_________________________________________ Electrical: $_________________________________________
HVAC: $_________________________________________ Plumbing: $_________________________________________ O&P: $__________________________________________ All Other: $__________________________________________ Project Supervision: $__________________________________________ Total Lump Sum Proposal (from above):$___________________________ Alternates: Alternate #1 – Piped Oxygen: $ Other Proposed Alternates: Please describe any cost savings ideas your firm may have below: Payment and Performance Bonds Please provide a price for Payment and Performance Bonds. $
3
Unit Prices – Labor and Supervisory Rates Please provide complete hourly rates for personnel including any multipliers and overhead and profit. Unit Prices – Construction Please provide unit pricing per Specification Section 01 2200 – Unit Prices. S-1 Granite Curb $/LF S-2 Excavation & Backfill $/CY S-3 Asphalt Paving $/SF S-4 Concrete Sidewalk $/LF GC-1 Partition Type 1 $/LF GC-2 Ceramic Tile PWT-2 $/SF GC-3 Door Frame and Hardware $/EA P-1 Domestic Water Piping ¾” $/LF P-2 Sanitary Waste Piping 4” $/LF H-1 Supply Duct 12”x 10” $/LF H-2 Exhaust Duct 10” Diameter $/LF H-3 Hot Water Supply Piping 1-1/2” $/LF E-1 Light Fixture L1A $/EA E-2 Light Fixture L2 $/EA E-3 Duplex Electrical Outlet $/EA E-4 Communications Outlet $/EA
4
List of Subcontractors Proposed Please provide a list of proposed contractors for the major trade categories. HVAC: Plumbing: Electrical: Millwork: Flooring: Painting/Wall Surfaces: Shielding: Low Voltage: Security Systems: Roofing: Exceptions and Exclusions Please list all exceptions and exclusions utilized to develop your proposal. If none, please write “none”. Proposed Change Order Fees (Overhead and Profit) Please list amount of proposed fees for Overhead and Profit to be added to the cost of Labor and Materials proposed for change orders associated with additions or deletions to the agreed contract amount. O&P Fee as a percentage for Change Order Additions/Deletions (Credits) – Firm Supervising Work: % O&P Fee as a percentage for Change Order Additions/Deletions (Credits) – Firm Performing Work: % O&P Fee as a percentage for Change Order Additions/Deletions (Credits) - General Contractor % Submitted by: By :__________________________( SEAL- if bid is by Corporation) (Business Address)
End of Bid Form
{L0310080.8}
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
Between
Guthrie Cortland Medical Center (the “Owner”)
and
[CONTRACTOR NAME]
(the “Contractor”)
for
Cancer Center Project
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
{L0310080.8}
ARTICLE 1- ENGAGEMENT OF THE CONTRACTOR .......................................................................... 1 ARTICLE 2- DEFINITIONS........................................................................................................................ 1 ARTICLE 3- CONTRACTOR’S SERVICES .............................................................................................. 6 ARTICLE 4- OWNER’S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................... 17 ARTICLE 5- SUBCONTRACTS ............................................................................................................... 18 ARTICLE 6- SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................... 19 ARTICLE 7- CONTRACTOR’S COMPENSATION................................................................................ 22 ARTICLE 8- CHANGES IN THE PROJECT ............................................................................................ 22 ARTICLE 9- GENERAL OBLIGATIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF
THE CONTRACTOR ......................................................................................................... 26 ARTICLE 10- INDEMNITY, INSURANCE, WAIVER OF SUBROGATION [AND
BONDING] ......................................................................................................................... 27 ARTICLE 11- TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE AGREEMENT AND OWNER’S
RIGHT TO PERFORM CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS............................................ 31 ARTICLE 12- GOVERNING LAW........................................................................................................... 34 ARTICLE 13- PARTIAL OCCUPANCY .................................................................................................. 34 ARTICLE 14- APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ................................................................................... 34 ARTICLE 15- ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................................................... 39 ARTICLE 16- MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ................................................................................... 39 ARTICLE 17- CONFIDENTIALITY ........................................................................................................ 42 ARTICLE 18- UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF THE WORK .................................................. 44 ARTICLE 19- CONSTRUCTION (AND OTHER) LIENS ....................................................................... 46 ARTICLE 20- OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS ..................................................................................... 46 ARTICLE 21- OWNER’S RIGHT TO AUDIT ......................................................................................... 47 ARTICLE 22- TAXES ............................................................................................................................... 48 ARTICLE 23- RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES .......................................................................................... 49 ARTICLE 24- INTERPRETATION .......................................................................................................... 51
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
1
THIS LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT (this “Agreement”) is dated as of the [insert] of [insert month], 20__, by and between Guthrie Cortland Medical Center (the “Owner”) and [CONTRACTOR NAME] (the “Contractor”).
The Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1- ENGAGEMENT OF THE CONTRACTOR
1.1 The Owner engages the Contractor to supervise, direct, manage and cause the construction of the Project, and to provide all Work incidental or reasonably inferable that is necessary to provide the Owner with a fully complete and functional facility, consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents, all in accordance with this Agreement.
1.1.1 The Contractor accepts the relationship of trust and confidence established between the Contractor and the Owner by this Agreement.
1.1.2 The Contractor covenants and agrees with the Owner to furnish professional and competent construction services, including sufficient quantities of fully-qualified, competent and experienced personnel capable of performing the work and services required by this Agreement, to cooperate with the Owner’s Representative, the Design Professional and all other members of the Construction Team to further the interests of the Owner and to effect prompt completion of the Work within the Contract Time and the Contract Sum, as those terms are defined in this Agreement.
1.1.3 The Contractor represents that it has visited and become fully familiar with the Project and the Project site, has received and reviewed the Drawings and Specifications as revised up through the date of execution of this Agreement, and has correlated and will continue to correlate its observation of the progress of the Project with the Drawings and Specifications as they are further developed and with the Owner’s requirements for the Project.
1.2 The Contractor represents that it shall provide any Work which calls for the design of components or construction of components to a performance specification through a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New York. Except for the foregoing, nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to require, authorize or permit the Contractor to perform any act which would constitute the practice of architecture, professional engineering, certified public accounting or law.
ARTICLE 2- DEFINITIONS
2.1 Owner: Guthrie Cortland Medical Center, a non for profit entity duly formed and existing under the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, having its principal place of business at One Guthrie Square, Sayre, Pennsylvania 18840.
2.2 Contractor: [Contractor], a [entity type] duly formed and existing under the laws
of the [state of formation], having its principal place of business at [insert address].
2.3 Design
Professional: Schopfer Architects, LLP, a [entity type] duly formed and existing under the laws of the State of New York, having its principal place of business at 1111 James Street, Syracuse, New York 13203.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
2
2.4 Effective Date: [insert]
2.5 Project: Cancer Center Project
2.6 Start Date: [insert]
2.7 Date of
Substantial Completion:
[insert]
2.8 Date of Final
Completion: [insert]
2.9 Contract Sum: A fixed price of [insert amount in words and symbols] ($[]), as set
forth in detail in Article 7 of this Agreement. The Contract Sum is not subject to any adjustment on the basis of the Contractor’s cost experience in completing the Work of the Project in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, unless the subject of an agreed-upon Change Order under Article 8 of this Agreement. This Agreement places full responsibility upon the Contractor for all costs and resulting profit or loss.
2.10 [not used]
2.11 Addresses for
Notice: Notices should be addressed as follows:
Owner at: The Guthrie Clinic One Guthrie Square Sayre, PA 18840
Attn: Anita Kingsbauer Title: VP, Planning & Construction
Contractor at: [Contractor]
[Address] Attn: [Insert]
Title: [Insert] Design Professional at: Schopfer Architects, LLP
1111 James Street Syracuse, NY 13203
Attn: Robert J. Seigart, AIA, LEED A.P. Title: Partner
2.12 [not used]
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
3
2.13 Owner’s
Authorized Representative:
The Owner’s Authorized Representative or Owner’s Representative for the Project is Anita Kingsbauer. Any action which requires the approval of the Owner must be approved, in writing when required to be in writing, by this representative. No change in the Work or the Contract Sum shall be authorized unless first approved in writing by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.
2.14 Governing Law: The State of New York
2.15 Exhibits: Exhibit A Scope of Work
Exhibit B Listing of Drawings and Specifications Exhibit C Contractor’s Project Team and Labor
Billing Rates Exhibit D Contractor’s Unit Prices Exhibit E Insurance Requirements Exhibit F Not Used Exhibit G Substantial Completion/Final Completion Exhibit H Not Used
Exhibit I
Exhibit J
Addendum Not Used
2.16 “Construction Team” means the Contractor, the Owner and the Design Professional and all consultants employed or retained by each of them. The Contractor shall coordinate the activities of the Construction Team and take full responsibility for discharging all of its obligations under this Agreement.
2.17 “Contract Documents” means this Agreement, all Exhibits to this Agreement, the Drawings and Specifications (which are identified in Exhibit B), and all addenda issued prior to and all changes issued after execution of this Agreement. These form the Contract, and all are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or fully set forth herein.
2.18 “Contract Time” means time within which the Contractor is obligated to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contract Time shall be measured from the Project’s Start Date to the Date of Substantial Completion.
2.19 “Day” means calendar day unless otherwise specifically designated.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
4
2.20 “Drawings” means the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.
2.21 “Environmental Laws” means any federal, state or local law, common law doctrine, rule, order, decree, judgment, injunction, license, permit or regulation relating to environmental matters, including those pertaining to land use, air, soil, surface water, ground water (including the protection, cleanup, removal, remediation or damage thereof), public or employee health or safety or any other environmental matter, together with any other laws (federal, state or local) relating to emissions, discharges, releases or threatened releases of any pollutant or contaminant, including, without limitation, medical, chemical, biological, bio-hazardous or radioactive waste and materials into ambient air, land, surface water, groundwater, personal property or structures, or otherwise relating to the manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, disposal, transportation, discharge or handling of any contaminant, including, without limitation, the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C. §§ 9601 et seq.), the Hazardous Material Transportation Act (49 U.S.C. §§ 1801 et seq.), the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (42 U.S.C. §§ 6901 et seq.), the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. §§ 1251 et seq.), the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. §§ 1251 et seq.), the Toxic Substances Control Act (15 U.S.C. §§ 2601 et seq.), and the Occupational Safety and Health Act (29 U.S.C. §§ 651 et seq.), as such laws have been, or are, amended, modified or supplemented from time to time and any analogous future federal, or present or future state or local laws, statutes and regulations promulgated thereunder, in effect at the time the Work is performed, or published in a draft form such that it is reasonably foreseeable that they should come into effect thereafter to be adhered to by Contractor in execution of the Work.
2.22 “Hazardous Environmental Condition” The presence at the site of the Project of a Hazardous Material of a type or in a quantity that raises potential notification or other regulatory obligations under Environmental Laws (regardless of whether the relevant authorities have received notice of the presence of such Hazardous Material prior to the Effective Date of this Agreement) or presents a potential unanticipated exposure to persons, property or the environment in connection with the Work shall constitute an “Hazardous Environmental Condition.”
2.23 “Hazardous Material” A Hazardous Material is any substance or material identified now or in the future as hazardous under any federal, state or local law or regulation, or any other substance or material that may be considered hazardous or otherwise subject to statutory or regulatory requirements governing the handling, disposal and/or cleanup of such materials. For purposes of this Agreement, “Hazardous Material” includes, but is not limited to, all items regulated under Environmental Laws.
2.24 “Laws” means (i) all applicable laws (including all Environmental Laws), ordinances, rules, regulations, codes, lawful orders, judgments, decrees, injunctions or other legally-binding obligations and permit or approval terms and conditions of any federal, state or local governmental or regulatory authority with jurisdiction over Owner or Contractor or of the facilities of either of them, and (ii) all generally applicable industry or self-regulatory standards whether the same are regional, national or international and any changes thereto relating to the Work, including without limitation all health and safety rules and regulations imposed by all such authorities on Owner or Contractor in connection with the Work, in effect at the time that the Work is performed, or published in a draft form such that it is reasonably foreseeable that they should come into effect thereafter to be adhered to by Contractor in execution of the Work.
2.25 “Lien” or “Liens” shall have the meaning assigned to them in Paragraph 19.1 of this Agreement.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
5
2.26 “Material Change” means any Owner-authorized change in construction scope that adds major tagged equipment or results in additional scope not identified in the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents that requires additional cost and/or time under the Project Schedule. Material Change specifically does not include development of the design concept existing at the date of initiation of the Project.
2.27 “Other Contractors” means contractors other than the Contractor or its Subcontractors with whom the Owner contracts separately to perform construction or operations related to the Project.
2.28 “Project Schedule” means the schedule for completion of key events in connection with the Project, developed and adopted in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 3.2 of this Agreement.
2.29 “Regulatory Requirements” means collectively all of the following in effect as of the date of this Agreement or in a draft form made available to the public such that it is reasonably foreseeable that they should come into effect thereafter to be adhered to by Contractor in execution of the Work:
2.29.1 all Laws as defined above in Paragraph 2.24;
2.29.2 all building regulatory requirements, including Laws imposed on and/or applicable in any way to the carrying out of the Work, including, but not limited to, the requirements of the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the United States Food & Drug Administration, the United States Drug Enforcement Administration, the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration and those of similar state agencies;
2.29.3 all construction regulatory requirements applicable to the Work including requirements of the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (and similar state or local agencies) and relevant provisions of local building codes.
2.29.4 In the event of any inconsistency between any of the terms of the Regulatory Requirements, those terms which are most restrictive shall control unless otherwise agreed in writing.
2.30 “Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples” or “Submittals” Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples are referred to collectively as “Submittals.” Submittals are not Contract Documents.
2.31 “Specifications” means that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.
2.32 “Subcontractor” means each subcontractor, vendor or supplier of Contractor, and each subcontractor, vendor or supplier of any of the foregoing, and any other persons or firms employed or retained by, through or under any of the foregoing.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
6
2.33 “Work” means the construction and services required for the Project by the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor and its Subcontractors to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Owner reserves the right to contract directly with Other Contractors to provide some of the work necessary to complete the Project. To the extent that work to be provided by Other Contractors under direct contract with Owner may affect the Work performed under this Agreement, the Contractor will make every effort to coordinate and direct the work of the Owner’s Other Contractors to assure the orderly and timely performance of their work, and the integration of their work into the overall Work of the Project.
ARTICLE 3- CONTRACTOR’S SERVICES
3.1 Upon receipt of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall carefully examine and compare the Contract Documents with one another and with its observations of the Project site.
3.1.1 The Contractor shall recommend changes in the Drawings and Specifications and alternatives based on different technologies or construction techniques and procedures which are intended to reduce the cost of construction or the cost of operation of the Project, reduce the time to complete the Work or increase the inherent value of the Project to the Owner. In addition, the Contractor shall advise the Construction Team and make recommendations for alternate or substitute technologies, construction techniques, methods and practices based on cost savings, time savings and/or other economies. In making such recommendations the Contractor shall not assume any of the responsibilities of the Design Professional. Contractor shall not implement any of its recommendations without the prior written approval of the Owner.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall immediately report in writing to the Owner and the Design Professional any error, inconsistency, discrepancy, ambiguity, insufficiency of detail or explanation, omission, or variance with existing physical conditions on the Project site that the Contractor discovers in reviewing the Contract Documents (all or any of which are hereinafter referred to as an “Error in the Contract Documents”).
3.1.3 Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor of an Error in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall cause the Design Professional to give an appropriate written interpretation to the Contractor, which interpretation shall be final.
3.1.4 Should the Contractor fail to report in writing an Error in the Contract Documents which, in the exercise of ordinary care would have been discovered by a Contractor with experience in construction projects of the complexity of the Project or, having reported same, fail to wait for the Design Professional’s instructions before proceeding with the Work, then any Work affected by the Error in the Contract Documents and performed by or on behalf of the Contractor, directly or indirectly, after its discovery of such Error in the Contract Documents shall be at the Contractor’s own risk and expense, and the Contractor shall be liable for all damages and corrective action resulting therefrom.
3.1.5 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
7
3.2 Scheduling. As soon as practicable, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s information, review and approval, a project construction schedule prepared utilizing a “critical path” methodology, together with schedules for each separate trade involved in the Project. The Schedule prepared by Contractor shall provide for completion of the Work by the Date of Substantial Completion and/or by any relevant interim milestone date established by the Owner or otherwise reasonably required by the Owner.
3.2.1 When developed to a point acceptable to the Owner and thereafter approved by the Owner in writing, the project time schedule shall be adopted as the Project Schedule and it shall thereafter remain unchanged, except for those changes later approved in writing by the Owner.
3.2.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Project Schedule, as updated from time to time in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and its Exhibits.
3.2.3 The Contractor shall update the Project Schedule at least two (2) times per month, or more frequently if requested by the Owner. The monthly Project Schedule updates shall identify reasons for changes, with recommendations for procedures which would allow any time additions to the Project Schedule to be made up as the Project progresses, incorporating a detailed schedule for each separate trade thereof, including realistic activity sequences and durations, allocation of labor and materials, processing of Submittals and delivery of products requiring long lead time procurement.
3.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner of any delays affecting the Project with explanations and recommendations of actions which may reverse any adverse impact on the Project, including the impact on the Owner’s occupancy requirements, showing portions of the Project having occupancy priority and the effect of such delays on such areas.
3.3 Construction Planning. The Contractor shall prepare a Project procurement and expediting plan for the Project, which Contractor shall update monthly. In addition, the Contractor shall recommend for purchase, expedite, and complete the procurement of all long-lead items to effectuate their delivery by the required dates and notify the Owner of any anticipated delay in delivery. The Contractor shall identify items which require off-site storage, including their estimated values, together with proposed locations for storage during the course of the Project. Such locations shall be selected to provide a maximum of protection and minimum of cost and delay associated with delivery from storage to the site.
3.3.1 The Contractor shall develop a cash flow and a manpower loading curve for the duration of the Project.
3.4 Subcontracts and Bidding.
3.4.1 The Contractor shall make recommendations to the Owner and the Design Professional regarding the division of activities required by the Project Documents to facilitate the bidding and awarding of “Subcontracts”, allowing for the coordination of construction. Such recommendations shall give due consideration, among other things, to:
3.4.1.1 the ease and degree of enforcement of vendors’ and contractors’ guaranties and warranties;
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
8
3.4.1.2 minimizing the ability of Subcontractors to shift blame for delays, improper integration of work into the Project and defects in materials or workmanship;
3.4.1.3 minimizing or eliminating jurisdictional overlap or disputes among Subcontractors and friction among work forces;
3.4.1.4 factory versus on-site production costs;
3.4.1.5 shipping costs and size limitations;
3.4.1.6 building code restrictions;
3.4.1.7 the availability of labor;
3.4.1.8 provisions for temporary facilities;
3.4.1.9 the effect on economic and efficient phasing of procurement and construction;
3.4.1.10 the appropriate sizing and combination of construction packages to take advantage of and reflect the expertise and capabilities of local contractors; and
3.4.1.11 identification of undefined scope included in each bidding package which could result in future change order requests from the successful bidder.
3.4.2 The Contractor shall prepare prequalification criteria for bidders, together with a list of recommended subcontractors to receive bid invitations, identifying such subcontractors’ specialties, unique qualifications and specific experience. The Contractor shall pre-qualify all subcontractors and suppliers to assure that all bidders have the necessary expertise. As part of the Subcontractor prequalification process, the Contractor will notify all subcontractors invited to bid of all safety requirements for working on the Owner’s site. The Contractor will review each potential subcontractor's current financial condition and current relevant worker’s compensation experience modifiers and, if any are found to be unacceptable, the Contractor will remove such subcontractor from the list of those invited to submit bids. The Contractor shall employ only Subcontractors who are duly licensed in the State of New York and qualified to perform the Work consistent with the Contract Documents. Once approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor without the Owner’s prior written approval.
3.5 Not Used.
3.5.1 Not Used.
3.5.2 The Owner does not discriminate in any form against persons on the basis of race, color, sex, national origin, religion, age, disability, or any other class protected by Law. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall similarly refrain from discrimination on any of these bases in connection with its performance of its obligations under this Agreement.
3.6 Project Safety Program. The Contractor shall consult with the Owner regarding safety precautions in effect for the Project site or otherwise in general and regarding its safety programs in connection with the Work, and shall develop and implement a “Project Safety Program” for the Project.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
9
3.6.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, including safety and protection of all persons and property during the performance of the Work. This requirement shall apply continuously during the duration of the Work and shall not be limited to normal working hours. The Contractor assumes full responsibility for all safety measures related to the Work, and shall provide its Project Safety Program to all employees, Subcontractors, and to any of Owner’s Other Contractors or other persons who will be working at the Project site during the course of the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all and have control over all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and shall ensure compliance with its Project Safety Program.
3.6.1.1 Safety Representative. Prior to commencing construction, the Contractor shall designate a “Safety Representative” with the necessary qualifications and experience to supervise the implementation and monitoring of all safety precautions and programs related to the Work, including the Project Safety Program. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor’s Safety Representative shall be an individual stationed at the Project site who may have responsibilities on the Project in addition to safety. The Safety Representative shall make routine daily inspections of the site and shall hold weekly safety meetings with the Contractor’s personnel, Subcontractors, and others as applicable.
3.6.2 The Contractor shall review the Project-specific safety programs submitted by each of its Subcontractors and of any of the Owner’s Other Contractors, make appropriate recommendations of modification, when necessary, to conform to the Project Safety Program, and follow through with such Subcontractors and/or Other Contractors to insure the implementation of the Contractor’s recommendations. The performance of such obligations by the Contractor shall not, as between Contractor and such Subcontractor or Other Contractor, relieve the Subcontractor or Other Contractor of its own responsibility for the safety of persons and property and for compliance with all Regulatory Requirements applicable to its conduct on the Project.
3.6.3 The Owner will coordinate safety requirements with the Contractor for the work of any of the Owner’s Other Contractors to ensure that such Other Contractors’ safety programs include all required safety measures and are in compliance with the Contractor’s approved Project Safety Program. The Contractor shall independently assure that each such Other Contractor’s safety program conforms to the Contractor’s approved Project Safety Program.
3.6.4 Reporting Incidents. In the event of any damage or injury to persons or property during the course of Work on the Project, the Contractor shall immediately report such damage or injury to the Owner, make appropriate reports to the relevant insurance carriers and, and to the extent mandated by Regulatory Requirements, to all government or quasi-government authorities having jurisdiction over safety-related matters involving the Project or the Work, with copies thereof to the Owner, and take steps to minimize or prevent further injury or damage.
3.7 Project Supervision, Communications and Construction Control. The Contractor shall:
3.7.1 Supervise, manage, coordinate, direct and monitor the work of its own personnel and that of its Subcontractors in a competent and professional manner using its best efforts to maintain the highest standards expected of a contractor with experience in projects of the complexity of the Project. In addition, the Contractor shall coordinate all phases of the
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
10
Project and its activities and responsibility hereunder with the Owner’s Other Contractors and the Design Professional and shall coordinate the work of Owner’s Other Contractors with the Contractor’s Work under this Agreement while such Other Contractors are on the Project site.
3.7.2 Maintain a competent and experienced full-time staff at the site to coordinate, provide supervision at all times when construction work is in progress and provide general direction of the Work and progress of the Subcontractors and shall provide such other and further support necessary to competently supervise and manage all tasks necessary to complete the Work, including competent procurement and negotiation services.
3.7.2.1 More particularly, the Contractor shall employ the services of the individuals identified as part of the Contractor’s Project Team in carrying out the Contractor’s services for the duration of the Project as set forth on Exhibit C. All members of the Contractor’s Project Team are subject to the Owner’s prior approval. Once approved, the Contractor shall promptly remove and replace any member of the Contractor’s Project Team at the Owner’s request, but shall not otherwise remove any member from the Project Team without the Owner’s prior approval, except for poor performance, or for death, illness or other similar circumstance beyond the Contractor’s control.
.1 If any member of the Contractor’s Project Team becomes unavailable to perform the Contractor’s services for any reason, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner of the removal of that person from the Project Team and shall propose a replacement with comparable skills and experience acceptable to the Owner within fifteen (15) Days.
3.7.3 Schedule, conduct, and keep minutes of periodic progress meetings (Owner’s meetings) (which shall be held every week or at such other frequency necessary to maintain orderly progress of the Work, as authorized by the Owner) at which the Subcontractors, the Owner, the Design Professional, and the Contractor can jointly discuss such matters as progress, procedures, problems and scheduling. The Contractor shall distribute minutes after each meeting to all parties in attendance within three (3) Days of such meeting. The minutes shall set forth any inaccuracies and/or corrections and indicate ratification of the minutes of the preceding meeting, as modified.
3.7.4 Regularly monitor construction progress and update the Project Schedule at least two (2) times per month, unless the Owner reasonably requires the Contractor to update the schedule more frequently. Any update shall identify, with detailed explanations, potential variances between scheduled and probable completion dates and recommend action required to meet schedule completion dates. The Contractor shall review the Project Schedule for phases of the Project not started or incomplete and recommend to the Owner alternate procedures or adjustments to meet the scheduled completion dates. The Contractor shall prepare and provide summary reports of each schedule review and shall document all changes in the Project Schedule and the Owner’s approval thereof and reflect the reasons therefor.
3.7.5 Prepare and maintain a daily supervisor’s report (signed by the Project Manager or Project Superintendent), and deliver the reports to the Owner at each meeting, indicating the date, weather, high and low temperatures, the Subcontractors on the job, number of workers by trade and employer at the Project, and other material developments on such date.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
11
3.7.6 Respond promptly to all communications from the Subcontractors, the Design Professional, or the Owner relating to defects, delays, labor disputes, shortages of labor or materials or other matters and confer with the Owner on all matters relating to delay or defect claims, labor disputes or shortages of materials or labor, or other matters which might disrupt the Project.
3.7.7 At least monthly, provide the Owner with a report showing the assignment of work to the appropriate Subcontractors to confirm that all work required for the construction of the Project has been included in a Subcontract. The Contractor shall also regularly review and report to the Owner regarding the adequacy of the Subcontractors’ personnel and equipment.
3.8 Physical Construction. The Contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, materials, construction equipment, tools, and subcontract items necessary for the completion of the Work.
3.8.1 Construction shall proceed in accordance with approved Submittals, except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Owner’s approval of Submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Owner in writing of such deviation at the time it forwards the Submittal and (i) the Owner has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (ii) a Change Order has been issued authorizing the deviation.
3.8.2 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Owner on previous Submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Owner’s approval of a Submittal on resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
3.8.3 Except for work provided by Other Contractors, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures.
3.8.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
3.8.5 Without the Owner’s prior written consent, the Contractor and any Subcontractor shall not install or maintain any sign, trademark, advertisement, or other identification symbol in or about the site. The Owner shall have the right, without notice to the Contractor, to remove at the Contractor’s e xpense a ny s ign, t rademark, advertisement, or ot her identification symbol installed in violation of this Paragraph 3.8.5.
3.8.6 The C ontractor s hall be liable for d amage t o e xisting f acilities, p arking lots, r oads, a nd grounds caused by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, their respective employees, or anyone else for whom they are responsible, and the Contractor shall be required to restore any such damaged areas to their original condition, at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.8.7 The Contractor shall confine operations a t the s ite to areas designated by the Owner and permitted by Regulatory Requirements, permits, and the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.
3.8.7.1 The Contractor shall at all times use its best efforts to conduct the Work in such manner as to protect persons and property and cause the least possible (i) interference
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
12
with the daily operations of adjacent businesses; (ii) obstruction of traffic; and (iii) inconvenience to the general public and visitors in the vicinity of the Work. No road or street shall be closed to the public except with the permission of the proper authorities and the Owner. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the Work site shall be kept accessible to firefighting equipment at all times. Temporary provision shall be made by the Contractor for the use of sidewalks and the proper functioning of all gutters, sewers, inlets, and drainage ditches, which shall not be obstructed or interrupted.
3.8.7.2 The Contactor shall exercise all reasonable precautions to minimize noise, vibration, fumes and any construction hazard which any way would cause discomfort or danger to the occupants of existing properties and pedestrians in the area surrounding the site.
3.8.8 Cutting, Fitting and Patching. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, patching and repair of any and all roads and streets providing access to the site that may be damaged during construction.
3.8.8.1 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Other Contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or an Other Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such Other Contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or an Other Contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
3.9 Quality Control. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control procedures for all parts of the Work, and take measures to prevent the installation of any Work not in conformity with the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, material or equipment not properly approved. If the Contractor identifies work not conforming to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall suspend operations upon the installation thereof, and report promptly to the Owner that the particular Work or material fails to conform to the Contract Documents. The Contractor’s quality control procedures shall also ascertain that all tests of soils, cement, concrete, structural or reinforcing steel, or any other material or equipment required to be tested under the terms of the Contract Documents are performed by qualified consultants.
3.10 Surveying. The Contractor shall manage, schedule, and perform all horizontal and vertical surveying for layout of all of the construction Work.
3.11 Inspection and Testing. The Contractor shall furnish structural, mechanical, chemical, civil, geotechnical, and other laboratory or on-site inspection, testing or reports as required by Regulatory Requirements, the Contract Documents or authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.
3.12 Other Contractors. The Contractor acknowledges that Owner may, at its option, engage Other Contractors to perform work on various other components of the Project, including without limitation the commissioning of the HVAC system (any and all of the foregoing being referred to herein as the “Other Development Work”). In the event that Owner employs any one or more such Other Contractors, the Contractor agrees that it shall:
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
13
3.12.1 Coordinate the Work with the Other Development Work to facilitate the timely, efficient, and safe completion of both the Work and the Other Development Work, which coordination shall afford any Other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the installation, execution, and storage of their respective work and materials, and shall otherwise be performed in such manner as the Owner may reasonably direct;
3.12.2 Cooperate in good faith with the Other Contractors for all contractors working on the Project to have the opportunity to complete their work on a timely, cost effective, and safe basis;
3.12.3 Where applicable, connect the Work properly with the Other Development Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents;
3.12.4 Attend meetings at the Project site or such other location as the Owner may direct with the Owner and the applicable Other Contractors to discuss the coordination of the Work with the Other Development Work, and other matters relevant to the respective portions of the Project, including access, storage, safety programs, hours of work, and labor relations. The Contractor shall prepare minutes of all such meetings and shall provide a copy of these minutes to the Owner and to all other meeting participants within three (3) business days after the date of each such meeting;
3.12.5 Coordinate and cooperate with the Other Contractors with respect to the installation and connection of mechanical and electrical interfaces and services in accordance with the specifications of the Other Contractors as needed to complete their work, especially during commissioning and balancing of their work, and in accordance with the Contract Documents;
3.12.6 Coordinate and cooperate with the Other Contractors with respect to all logistical aspects of the Work and the Other Development Work, including delivery, offloading, storage, protection, hoisting, and distribution of equipment and materials on the Project site; and
3.12.7 If part of the Work depends for proper execution or results upon the construction or operations by the Owner or any Other Contractor, then prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, thoroughly inspect and perform any reasonable or customary tests and promptly report in writing to the Owner any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction which would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report in writing shall constitute an acknowledgment that Owner’s or such Other Contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
3.13 Change Orders. The Contractor shall implement a system for the preparation, review, processing and approval of Change Orders by the Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article 8 of this Agreement. The Contractor shall recommend necessary or desirable changes to the Owner, review requests for changes and submit recommendations to the Owner and the Design Professional. The Owner shall require, and all Subcontracts shall provide for, reasonable time on the part of the Owner to review all Change Order requests. There shall be no claims or requests for extensions of Contract Time due to or purportedly resulting from the Owner’s review time. The Contractor shall not commence any proposed work under any Change Order request until either the Owner provides Contractor with its approval or Owner otherwise in writing directs such work to commence.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
14
3.14 Payment to Subcontractors. The Contractor shall establish and maintain a procedure for the review, processing and payment of applications by the Subcontractors for progress and final payments, in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such procedure shall ensure that the Contractor verifies the completeness of all applications for payment and assembles and checks all supporting documentation required by this Agreement or by the Subcontracts with respect to each application for payment, including all lien waivers and releases.
3.15 Permits, Fees and Legal Requirements.
3.15.1 The Contractor shall obtain, pay for, and cause to be kept in current force, all building permits and special permits for temporary and permanent improvements or structures required for the Project and shall assist in obtaining and updating, if necessary, approvals from all authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.
3.15.2 The Contractor shall obtain a temporary certificate or certificates of occupancy for the Project or any portion thereof which may be complete, at the earliest possible time, and shall also obtain a permanent certificate or certificates of occupancy for the Project upon its completion.
3.15.3 The Contractor shall, and shall cause the Subcontractors to, give all required notices or make other filings required in connection with, and comply fully with, all applicable Regulatory Requirements relating to the Work. The Contractor shall, and shall cause all applicable Subcontractors to, indemnify, defend and hold the Owner harmless from and against any and all claims, liabilities or fines arising from any failure of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors to have so complied in any respect with any such Regulatory Requirements.
3.16 Owner’s Consultants. The Contractor shall assist the Owner in selecting and retaining the professional services, if required, of surveyors, testing laboratories and special consultants, and shall coordinate these services with the Owner, or, if the Owner so requests, contract directly for such services with such consultants in a manner similar to that of its Subcontractors.
3.17 Inspection. On a regular basis, the Contractor shall review and inspect the Work (both its work and the work of its Subcontractors) for defects and deficiencies and for conformance with the Contract Documents.
3.17.1 The Contractor shall facilitate periodic inspections by the Owner, the Owner’s insurers, the Design Professional, and any government agency having jurisdiction over the Project and shall receive, review and provide comments and appropriate recommendations to the Owner in response to any inspection report generated as a consequence of such inspections within five (5) Days of receipt of same.
3.17.2 The Contractor shall protect the Owner against defects or deficiencies in the Work, and shall immediately advise the Owner, in writing, of any observed failure of the Work to conform to the Contract Documents or applicable Regulatory Requirements.
3.18 Interpretation of Documents. The Contractor shall refer all questions for interpretation of the documents prepared by the Design Professional to the Design Professional and the Owner. If the Design Professional’s interpretation conflicts with the Project Schedule or, in the Contractor’s opinion, impacts the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall notify the Owner, who shall endeavor to resolve the conflict.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
15
3.19 Shop Drawings, Project Data and Samples. In collaboration with the Design Professional, the Contractor shall establish and implement procedures for expediting the processing and approval of all Submittals for conformance with the Contract Documents.
3.19.1 The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the receipt, review and delivery of all Submittals.
3.19.2 The Contractor shall expedite all “certified” drawings required by the Design Professional to complete the design effort. This expediting effort extends to Owner-purchased items as well as to purchases made directly by the Contractor or its Subcontractors.
3.20 Project Documentation and Reporting.
3.20.1 Current Insurance Certificates. The Contractor shall maintain and timely file with the Owner current certificates of insurance for itself and for each of its Subcontractors showing all insurance required of such entities by this Agreement. All such certificates are to be filed with Owner prior to commencement of any work by any entity in connection with the Project and as soon as practicable after any renewal has been bound, but in no event later than thirty (30) Days prior to the expiration or termination of the insurance coverage reflected by any then-current certificate of insurance.
3.20.2 Subcontracts and Contract Documents. The Contractor shall maintain on site and on a current basis records of all necessary Subcontracts, Drawings, Specifications, Samples, purchases, materials, equipment, Shop Drawings, Submittals, maintenance and operating manuals and instructions, and other construction-related documents, including all revisions, and shall obtain data from the Subcontractors and maintain a current set of record Drawings and Specifications and operating manuals. At the completion of the Project (or earlier if required by the Owner), the Contractor shall deliver all such records to the Owner. Such records shall at all times be the property of Owner (subject to the Contractor having the right to retain copies thereof).
3.20.3 Accounting Records. The Contractor shall maintain cost accounting records as to all work performed on a “time and material” basis in accordance with sound accounting practices, afford the Owner access to all records relating to the Project in the Contractor’s possession or control during normal business hours, and preserve or cause them to be preserved for a period of six (6) years after “Final Payment”.
3.21 Start-Up, Testing and Commissioning
3.21.1 The Contractor shall organize and lead the startup, commissioning, and testing processes in cooperation with the Design Professional, to demonstrate that all systems and equipment are in compliance with manufacturer recommendations, code requirements, and design parameters.
3.21.2 The Contractor shall provide full mechanical completion to include:
3.21.2.1 all utility systems mechanically complete and functional per design parameters and under local control and via the building automation system. This includes all ductwork, piping, insulation, controls and accessories.
3.21.2.2 systems turned over to the Owner in a state of operational readiness.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
16
3.21.2.3 air and water systems balanced and a report issued in a format approved by the appropriate New York Department of Health by an independent certified firm approved by the Owner.
3.21.2.4 systems shall not be considered mechanically complete until all associated Punch List items have been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner and, where applicable, the independent commissioning agent.
3.21.3 The Contractor shall organize and lead the check out, mechanical completion, commissioning and startup of utilities, process operation systems and equipment for readiness and assist in their initial start-up and testing by the Subcontractors and, where appropriate, the vendors.
3.21.4 The Contractor shall arrange for appropriate training of the Owner’s personnel in the operation of all systems, including winter and summer start-up and operation, and all known or reasonably foreseeable redundant or failure modes of operation.
3.21.5 The Contractor shall develop all “Systems Turnover Packages” and attend to the commissioning of all systems, building systems and bid packages.
3.21.6 The Contractor shall commission and start up all component systems for compliance and operation within design parameters at all known or reasonably foreseeable contingency and failure modes.
3.22 Substantial Completion and Final Completion. When Contractor believes it has achieved Substantial Completion (as defined in Exhibit G) of the Work or of a designated portion thereof, it shall provide notice of Substantial Completion to the Owner and the Design Professional for their review and approval, along with (i) a list of incomplete or unsatisfactory items (“Punch List”), and (ii) a schedule for the prompt completion of each such item.
3.22.1 The Contractor shall give notice to the Owner and the Design Professional when it believes it has achieved Final Completion of a Project or any phase thereof and shall advise the Owner and the Design Professional that it is ready for final inspection. The Contractor shall thereafter participate and assist in final inspection.
3.22.2 Contractor shall complete the Project close-out activities set forth in Exhibit G.
3.23 Punch Lists. The Contractor shall prepare, monitor with the Design Professional, and cause to be completed, all Punch Lists with respect to the activity of each Subcontractor and shall report weekly to the Owner on outstanding Punch List items. All Punch List work shall be completed no later than thirty (30) Days after issuance of the final certificate of occupancy.
3.24 Warranty. The Contractor shall provide the warranties set forth in greater detail in Article 9 of this Agreement.
3.25 Discipline and Order. The Contractor shall require strict discipline and good order among its employees and those of its Subcontractors, including observation of all safety, environmental compliance, smoking, parking, use of facilities, and other rules governing the conduct of persons at the Project site. The Contractor shall not knowingly employ or knowingly permit to be employed on the Project any unfit person, anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him or anyone to whom the Owner has an objection.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
17
3.26 Labor harmony. The Contractor shall maintain labor harmony during the course of work on the Project.
3.27 Site Clean-Up. The Contractor shall continuously remove, and require its Subcontractors to remove, waste, debris, trash and garbage from the site during construction and, at the conclusion of each Subcontractor’s portion of the Work, deliver, and cause the Subcontractors to deliver, the Work in clean, first class condition.
3.28 Cooperation. The Contractor shall, at the Owner’s reasonable request, execute, acknowledge and deliver to the Owner all documents, certifications and other instruments as may reasonably be required to give full force and effect to the provisions of this Agreement, provided such requirements are in accordance with this Agreement and do not otherwise unreasonably expand or modify the Contractor’s obligations under this Agreement.
ARTICLE 4- OWNER’S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
4.1 The Owner shall timely provide the Contractor with all necessary information regarding its requirements for the Project.
4.2 The Owner has retained the Design Professional to design and prepare documents for the Project. The Design Professional’s services, duties and responsibilities are described in the agreement between the Owner and the Design Professional.
4.3 The Owner shall provide necessary land use approvals, site plan review, zoning variances, easements and assessments and other legal authorizations regarding site utilization and all other legal requirements as may be necessary to provide the items set forth in this Article 4, as well as such auditing services as it may require.
4.4 Other Contractors. The Owner may contract directly with vendors and be responsible for the procurement of and contract administration for all office furniture, telecommunications, video conferencing, computer equipment installation and any other part of the Project for which the Owner deems it is in its best interests to contract directly. The Contractor will provide the coordination and field management services necessary to integrate the work of Other Contractors into the Work of the Project. The Owner shall include within its separate agreements with its Other Contractors the provisions necessary to ensure the cooperation and responsiveness of Other Contractors to the requirements and directives of the Contractor in the performance of its duties under this Paragraph 4.4.
4.4.1 The Owner shall cause its Other Contractors to furnish the Contractor with certificates of insurance evidencing such Other Contractors’ insurance and their limits of coverage.
4.4.2 Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing contained in this Agreement shall provide a basis for a claim or assertion of any right of any of the Owner’s Other Contractors against the Contractor.
4.5 Notice of Error or Defect. If the Owner becomes aware of material fault or defect in the Work or any error, omission or failure of the Contractor to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, it shall give prompt notice thereof to the Contractor. Upon notice from the Owner, the Contractor shall take appropriate corrective measures.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
18
4.6 Owner’s Right to Reject Work. The Owner may reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Owner considers it necessary or advisable, the Owner shall have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.13 whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Owner nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Owner to the Contractor or to any of its Subcontractors or consultants.
4.7 Owner’s Right to Stop Work. If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. The right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or of any other person or entity.
4.8 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven (7) Day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to its other remedies, correct such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due to the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies. If payments due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall immediately pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 5- SUBCONTRACTS
5.1 By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor assumes toward the Owner and the Design Professional under the Contract Documents.
5.1.1 Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Design Professional under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
5.2 Subcontracts shall be between the Contractor and the respective Subcontractor. The Contractor shall strictly enforce the Subcontracts.
5.3 Subcontractor Warranties. The Contractor will require all Subcontractors and vendors under contract with the Contractor to provide warranties for their scope of work for not less than twelve (12) months from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer duration as may be set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will disqualify the bid of any Subcontractor or
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
19
vendor who is unable or unwilling to provide such warranty, unless upon receipt of notice of the Subcontractor’s or Vendor’s inability to provide the required warranty, the Owner nevertheless approves the engagement of the Subcontractor in writing.
5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts. The Contractor shall assign each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work to the Owner provided that such assignment is effective only after termination of this Agreement by the Owner and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing.
ARTICLE 6- SCHEDULE
6.1 The Contractor shall provide its services in connection with the Project in accordance with the Project Schedule developed and adopted as set forth in Paragraph 3.2 and this Article 6. The Contractor shall prepare, maintain and update the Project Schedule for the Project at least two (2) times per month, unless the Owner requires the Contractor to update the Project Schedule more frequently during performance of the Project.
6.2 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work is set forth above in Paragraph 2.7. Substantial Completion of the Project, or a designated portion thereof, is the later of the date of issuance of a certificate of occupancy by the appropriate local, state or federal government authority having jurisdiction and the date of issuance by the Design Professional of a certificate that all Work required by the Contract Documents has been substantially completed, as more fully described in Exhibit G, in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can, with the approval of local authorities having jurisdiction, legally occupy and utilize the Work or a designated portion thereof for the purpose for which it is intended, subject only to completion of Punch List items. Warranties called for by this Agreement or by the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Substantial Completion.
6.3 The Date of Final Completion is the date the Owner or the Design Professional issues a certificate that (i) all Work required by the Contract Documents has been completed, as more fully described in Exhibit G, to the satisfaction of, and is accepted by, the Owner, (ii) all Punch List items are completed and/or fully resolved and (iii) all financial matters are fully resolved and all lien waivers have been obtained (“Certificate of Final Completion”). Contractor shall reach Final Completion within sixty (60) Days of the date of Substantial Completion.
6.4 The Contractor shall commence Work on the Project when directed in writing to do so by the Owner, and shall diligently prosecute the Work until Final Completion.
6.5 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner for approval such detailed schedules, including progress measurement methodology and details, critical path network, progress curves (“S” curves) and other schedule management details as required by the Project Specifications covering all phases of Work and as further required by Paragraph 3.2 of this Agreement. Time is of the essence for the Project.
6.6 Delay
6.6.1 The Date of Substantial Completion may be changed only if the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Project by any of the following events (“Delay” or “Delays”):
6.6.1.1 “Excusable Delays”:
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
20
.1 acts of God, that is events, such as tornado, flood, or hurricane, resulting from an extraordinary natural force which the Contractor could take no reasonable steps to prevent or control; or
.2 labor disturbances which could not reasonably have been anticipated or prevented by the Contractor, not including those caused by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or
.3 shortages of material or labor which could not reasonably have been anticipated or prevented by the Contractor, not including those caused by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or
.4 riots, insurrections, and civil commotions; or
.5 sabotage or terrorist actions unrelated to labor activity; or
.6 the enactment of new laws, statutes, regulations, orders or judgments and other Regulatory Requirements which impact the performance of the Work.
.7 financial inability shall never be deemed an Excusable Delay.
6.6.1.2 “Potentially Compensable Delays”:
.1 any improper act or neglect of the Owner or of any of its agents or employees that creates an extension of the Contract Time; or
.2 Material Changes ordered in the Project by the Owner, to the extent that such Material Change causes an extension of the Contract Time; or
.3 delays caused by the Owner or the Owner’s Other Contractors, including delays that caused interference with the Contractor’s or its Subcontractors’ access to the worksite which impact the Contract Time; or
.4 suspension of the Work by the Owner for the Owner’s convenience, pursuant to Paragraph 11.2 which impacts the Contract Time.
6.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing within seven (7) Days after the first occurrence of the event or events causing either an Excusable Delay or a Potentially Compensable Delay and, if such Delay is approved by the Owner and is not susceptible of being made up, and the Contractor has demonstrated to the Owner using industry standard schedule analysis techniques that the event caused sequential delays in the Project Schedule, and the Delay cannot be recovered by re-sequencing activities, then the Project Schedule, Date of Substantial Completion, and Contract Time shall be extended in writing for a length of time reasonably necessary to compensate for such Delay pursuant to a Change Order approved by the Owner. Timely notice of a Delay is a material condition of the rights set forth in this Paragraph 6.6.2 and in Paragraph 6.6.3 below, and failure to provide notice within seven (7) Days of a Delay shall be considered conclusive evidence that the event is not significant and does not qualify as a Delay event under this Article 6.
6.6.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract Documents, an extension in the Contract Time, to the extent permitted as set forth above, and reimbursement of
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
21
Contractor’s actual Extended Direct Field Costs (as defined below in Paragraph 6.6.3.3), shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for an Excusable Delay. If and to the extent that delays for which extensions of time and compensation are properly allowed elsewhere in the Contract Documents (if at all), or in the event that the period of Potentially Compensable Delays exceeds twenty five (25) business days during the course of construction, and provided that no concurrent delay was caused in either instance by Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, then Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment of the Contract Price, an extension in the Contract Time, to the extent permitted as set forth above, and reimbursement of Contractor’s actual Extended Direct Field Costs, shall similarly constitute the sole remedy of the Contractor for or a Potentially Compensable Delay, unless such Delay is caused (i) by a Material Change in the Work or (ii) by acts of the Owner or the Design Professional, or an employee of either, constituting active interference with the performance of the Work, and only to the extent such acts continue after the Contractor furnishes the Owner with notice in writing of such interference.
6.6.3.1 In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any other compensation or recovery of any damages in connection with any Delay, including, without limitation, consequential damages, lost profits, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, loss of financing, home office overhead, loss of bonding capacity, loss of reputation or other similar remuneration.
6.6.3.2 The Contractor and the Owner understand and agree that the cumulative impact of change will not be accepted as a basis for an increase in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time.
6.6.3.3 Unless modified with reference to this Paragraph number 6.6.3.3 in Exhibit C, for purposes of Paragraph 6.6.3, “Extended Direct Field Costs” means the following direct expenses incurred by Contractor and/or any of its impacted Subcontractors in connection with a period of Delay: field supervision, utilities, insurance, extended equipment rental expense, and extended field office overhead.
6.6.4 Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Paragraph 6.6, in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to an extension of time or Extended Direct Field Costs for any period of Delay during which the Contractor is concurrently responsible for a Delay. Contractor shall not be entitled to cumulative increases in the Contract Time for multiple causes of delay which have concurrent or interrelated effects on the progress of the Work.
6.6.5 Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of the Contract Time, nor will delay or acceleration costs incurred by Design-Builder be allowable as increases to the Contract Price, with respect t o any delay caused i n w hole or in pa rt b y the f ault or n egligence of Contractor, a ny Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, or any other person or entity employed directly or indirectly by it, them, or any of them on the Project.
6.6.6. Contractor and ea ch Subcontractor, S ub-subcontractor, s upplier, c onsultant, and any ot her entity working on behalf of Contractor expressly agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the t ime specified, i t has made al lowances for certain foreseeable h indrances and delays. Extension of the Contract Time will not be granted for delays due to the fault or negligence of Contractor or its Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, or suppliers. The parties agree and Contractor acknowledges t hat many hindrances a nd de lays a re o rdinarily encountered on pr ojects o f t his t ype. The pa rties s pecifically a nticipate a nd c ontemplate
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
22
such hindrances and delays, including but not limited to labor disputes, those caused by or arising from schedule adjustments, the action or inaction of suppliers, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and other contractors (except as noted above), and have already factored the same into the Contract Time. Contractor agrees that ordinary delays of the t ype set fo rth above are included in the Contract Price and the Contract Schedule, and that they shall not constitute the basis of a time extension or a claim for additional compensation of any type, and do not constitute a Delay.
6.6.7. Any claim for an extension of the Contract Time shall be made in writing to Owner not more than seven ( 7) Days after the Contractor kn ows o r reasonably s hould ha ve known of t he beginning of the Delay or the need for the extension; otherwise it shall be waived. I n the case of a co ntinuing Delay, only one (1) claim shall be necessary. With any claim for an extension of Contract Time, the Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect such Delay will have on the progress of the Work, and such claim shall set forth in detail (i) the nature of the circumstances which form the basis for such claim; (ii) the date upon which each such al leged cause o f D elay b egan, o r b egan to af fect t he t imely p rosecution o f the Work; and (iii) the length of the extension (in number of Days) requested as a consequence of such Delay. The Contractor shall provide such additional supporting documentation as the Owner may require, including, where appropriate, a revised Contract Schedule indicating all of the activities affected by the circumstances which form the basis for the claim. The Owner shall have the right to defer its decision concerning any claim for an extension of the Contract Time until the facts or circumstances forming the basis for such claim can be fully assessed to its reasonable satisfaction.
6.6.8. Claims for an extension of the Contract Time arising in connection with changes to the Work shall be made in writing prior to or concurrent with the submission of Contractor’s Change Order proposal. No extension of time arising out of a change in the Work will be granted after the date on which the Contractor is authorized to proceed with such change unless the Change Order specifically provides that a claim may be made at a later time. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any time-related consequential damages.
ARTICLE 7- CONTRACTOR’S COMPENSATION
7.1 In consideration of the proper performance of all services and obligations of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor in current funds the Contract Sum set forth in Paragraph 2.9, subject to authorized additions and deletions as provided in Article 8 of this Agreement. The Contract Sum is inclusive of general conditions, the Contractor’s bond and insurance premiums and the Contractor’s overhead and profit. It is not subject to any adjustment on the basis of the Contractor’s cost experience in performing in accordance with the Contract Documents, unless the adjustment is the subject of an agreed-upon Change Order under Article 8 of this Agreement.
ARTICLE 8- CHANGES IN THE PROJECT
8.1 The Owner may order changes in the Project, consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, without invalidating this Agreement and, if appropriate, the Contract Sum and/or the Date of Substantial Completion may be adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Project shall be authorized as set forth in Paragraphs 8.3 and 8.4. Any and all changes and/or commitments by the Contractor, without prior written approval by the Owner as set forth below, shall be at the risk of the Contractor. The Owner shall only pay Contractor for change-related costs approved in advance by the Owner in writing.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
23
8.2 A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner (or its Authorized Representative), and the Contractor authorizing a change in the Project and/or an adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Date of Substantial Completion or any other agreed milestone date.
8.3 A change in the Contract Sum, or the Date of Substantial Completion and/or other milestone date shall be accomplished only by Change Order. No course of conduct or dealings between the parties, nor express or implied acceptance of alterations or additions to the Work, and no claim that the Owner has been unjustly enriched by any alteration or addition to the Work, whether or not there is, in fact, any unjust enrichment to the Owner, shall be the basis of any claim for an increase in any amounts due under the Contract Documents or for a change in any time period provided for in the Contract Documents.
8.4 Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree upon the time and cost impact of a Change Order, the Owner may elect from time to time to give the Contractor written approval to proceed with items of change work potentially affecting the Contract Sum, Date of Substantial Completion and/or other milestone dates on the basis of a construction change directive, which shall require the Contractor to proceed with the work of a change, subject to later adjustment, as appropriate, to the Contract Sum and/or Date of Substantial Completion (or other milestone date) in accordance with Paragraphs 8.5 and 8.6.
8.5 A change in the Contract Sum resulting from a change in the Project shall be determined in one or more of the following ways:
8.5.1 By mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;
8.5.2 By unit price or time and material rates stated in this Agreement or the Subcontract (if approved in advance by the Owner) or agreed upon; or
8.5.3 If the Owner and the Contractor do not agree on the use of either of the above methods, and the Owner nevertheless provides the Contractor with a written order to proceed with the change, then the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved in the change. The cost of such Work shall then be determined on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the work attributed to the change, including an increase (or decrease, if applicable) in the Contract Sum, as appropriate. The amount of decrease to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for any deletion or change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease. When both additions and credits are involved in any one or more changes, the increase (or decrease) shall be figured on the basis of net increase (or net decrease), if any.
8.6 The cost of Change Orders shall be calculated in accordance with the following:
8.6.1 Material and equipment shall be calculated at the actual quantity and Subcontractor cost for the change. Sales taxes, if any are required, shall be indicated and added after the cost of the change is calculated. No overhead or profit will be paid on sales tax.
8.6.2 Labor content shall be based on actual and realistic time required, as reasonably estimated by the Contractor, and reviewed, accepted and approved by the Owner. Use of labor content data published by trade groups providing labor hours to complete tasks will not be recognized as authoritative.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
24
8.6.3 Labor rates will be calculated based on trade and shall include only the worker’s actual base wage rate and those payroll burdens which worker’s employer (i.e., the Contractor, the Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor) is obligated to and does, in fact, pay for labor in connection with the change. The Contractor’s authorized labor rates are annexed hereto as Exhibit C. The Contractor shall submit labor rates for all of its Subcontractors in connection with the Project within ten (10) Days of contracting with such Subcontractor. Labor rates shall not include any amount for overhead-type expenses including, but not limited to, charges for home office costs, management supervision, training, vehicles and pickups, travel, reproduction, temporary facilities, computers, office equipment, small tools, expendables, safety, etc. Small tools are defined as tools that do not have a new unit cost in excess of $750.00
8.6.4 Notwithstanding any provision of the foregoing and except as otherwise agreed by the Owner and the Contractor in writing, a person (i.e., Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, etc.) actually performing the Work will be allowed up to a ______percent ( %) mark-up for overhead and profit. The overhead and profit mark-up shall be inclusive of all costs other than (i) labor, (ii) materials, (iii) equipment and/or (iv) equipment rental incurred in connection with the change work. No overhead and/or profit will be paid on sales taxes, insurance charges or bond costs.
8.6.4.1 Tiered contractors supervising subcontracted work will be allowed up to a ____ percent ( %) mark-up on all changes under their supervision.
8.6.4.2 Notwithstanding the above-mentioned mark-ups, tiered contractors supervising subcontracted work will be allowed no more than a ______( %) mark-up in the aggregate for overhead and profit on all changes under their supervision.
8.6.5 In determining the cost of a Change Order using unit prices, only unit prices less than or equal to those agreed to in this Agreement at Exhibit D or in the relevant Subcontract shall be used. All unit prices quoted must be complete furnished and installed prices and include all material, equipment, labor, insurance, taxes, overhead and profit. Change Order cost shall be determined by multiplying the quantities involved by the unit prices and accumulated totals. No additional charges will be allowed. If the unit price is not included in the relevant Subcontractor’s Subcontract with the Contractor, then the cost/value will be negotiated with the Owner’s Authorized Representative.
8.7 Requests for Increase in Contract Sum or Extensions of Contract Time in Connection with Changes. If the Contractor wishes to make a request for an increase in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Date of Substantial Completion (or any interim milestone date), the Contractor shall give the Owner written notice thereof within seven (7) Days after the Owner advises the Contractor to proceed with the change, and before proceeding to execute any of the Work associated with the change, except in an emergency endangering life or property, in which case the Contractor shall act, at its reasonable discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any change in the Contract Sum and/or Date of Substantial Completion resulting from an Owner change request shall be authorized by Change Order. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on schedule or cost impact resulting from a change, then the Contractor will proceed in accordance with Paragraphs 8.4 and 8.5.3.
8.8 Procedure for Requests for Increase in the Contract Sum or for Extensions of Time in connection with Delay. Requests for an increase in the Contract Sum, or for an extension of the Date of Substantial Completion or any milestone date, arising from Delay shall be made within seven (7)
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
25
Days after the first occurrence of the event or events causing the Delay, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 6.6.
8.9 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site which are (i) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or (ii) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall give notice to the Owner promptly before disturbing such conditions and in no event later than seven (7) Days after first observance of the conditions.
8.9.1 The Owner will cause the Design Professional promptly to investigate such conditions and, if, in the opinion of the Owner and/or Design Professional, they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of performing the Work or in the time required for performance of any part of the Work, the Owner and the Contractor shall agree upon an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or Date of Substantial Completion. If the Design Professional or the Owner determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents or that they do not differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in these construction activities, and, accordingly, that no change is justified, the Design Professional shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within seven (7) Days after the Design Professional has given notice of the decision, and the parties agree to proceed pursuant to Article 23 should resolution not be reached.
8.10 Hazardous Environmental Conditions
8.10.1 The Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the site unless such Hazardous Environmental Condition was created or exacerbated as a consequence of (i) the Contractor’s (or any of its Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible) (a) operations in a manner that is not consistent with the Contract Documents and/or (b) management of Hazardous Materials in a manner that is not consistent with the Contract Documents, or (ii) any Hazardous Material brought to the site by the Contractor, or its Subcontractors, suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.
8.10.2 If the Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition not properly described in or anticipated by the Contract Documents or if the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, the Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 16.10); and (iii) notify the Owner (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). The Owner shall promptly consult with the Contractor concerning the necessity for the Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or to take corrective action, if any.
8.10.2.1 The Contractor shall not resume Work in any area affected by a Hazardous Environmental Condition until the Owner has obtained the permits or governmental authorization to proceed, if applicable, related thereto and/or has delivered to the Contractor written notice:
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
26
.1 specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of the Work; and/or
.2 specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.
8.10.3 To the fullest extent permitted by applicable Laws, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner (and its officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and contractors) from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition arising out of or resulting from (i) the use or storage of Hazardous Materials in connection with the Work by the Contractor or by anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner not in keeping with the Contract Documents; (ii) disturbing Hazardous Materials found on the site by the Contractor or by anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible, to the extent that the Contractor had notice of the existence and location of the Hazardous Materials and the handling of such Hazardous Materials was not within the scope of Work of the Project; or (iii) handling of Hazardous Materials found on the site, in a negligent manner or in a manner which is not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents, by the Contractor or by anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible.
ARTICLE 9- GENERAL OBLIGATIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE CONTRACTOR
9.1 Warranty. The Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished in connection with the Project will be of good quality and new, and that the Work, whether performed by the Contractor’s own forces or by Subcontractors, will be free from defects, in conformance with the Contract Documents, and in compliance with all applicable Regulatory Requirements.
9.2 The Contractor warrants and represents to the Owner in connection with this Agreement that:
9.2.1 it is properly licensed in accordance with all applicable Regulatory Requirements and can lawfully provide the Work and undertake all related contractual obligations;
9.2.2 all of its Subcontractors are properly licensed in accordance with all applicable Regulatory Requirements;
9.2.3 it is experienced and qualified in the construction of facilities of the type of the Project;
9.2.4 it is now familiar with or will become familiar with all applicable Regulatory Requirements affecting the Work;
9.2.5 it and, to its knowledge, its Subcontractors are financially solvent, able to pay all debts as they mature and possess sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform its obligations under this Agreement;
9.2.6 it is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies, equipment, labor and supervision required to complete the Work and perform its obligations under this Agreement;
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
27
9.2.7 it is authorized to do business in the state in which the Project is located and will operate under appropriate licensing by all necessary governmental, public and quasi-public authorities having jurisdiction over it, the Work and the Project; and
9.2.8 the execution and performance of this Agreement is within its duly authorized powers.
9.3 In the event there is a defect in the Work and the same is reported to the Contractor by the Owner in writing after the Date of Substantial Completion but during the Correction Period (as that term is defined in Paragraph 18.2.1), the Contractor shall take action, subject to the prior approval of the Owner, necessary to remedy the defect, free of charge, so that the Work shall conform to the warranties set forth in this Article 9.
9.4 The foregoing warranties are in addition to, and not in lieu of, any and all other liability imposed upon the Contractor by Law with respect to the Contractor’s duties, obligations and performance under this Agreement. The Correction Period (warranty period) is not intended to constitute a period of limitations for any other rights or remedies the Owner may have regarding the Contractor’s other obligations or liabilities under the Contract Documents or a limitation of the Contractor’s liability under the Law for defective or nonconforming Work.
9.5 All representations and warranties set forth in this Agreement, including, without limitation, those of this Article 9, shall survive the Final Completion of the Project or the earlier termination of this Agreement. The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner is relying upon the Contractor’s skill, expertise and experience in connection with the Work called for in this Agreement.
9.6 Collection and Assignment of Warranties. The Contractor shall collect, assign, and deliver to the Owner any specific written warranties given by others.
ARTICLE 10- INDEMNITY, INSURANCE, WAIVER OF SUBROGATION [AND BONDING]
10.1 Contractor’s Indemnity. The Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify and hold the Owner, and its officers, directors, shareholders, agents and employees, the Design Professional and the Other Contractors (the “Indemnitees”) harmless from all claims, demands, actions, settlements or judgments, obligations and liabilities (and all costs and expenses including reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred in connection therewith) arising out of or related to any actual or asserted:
10.1.1 failure by Contractor to comply with any Regulatory Requirements or Law;
10.1.2 violation or infringement of rights in any patent, copyright, proprietary information, trade secret or other property right caused or alleged to be caused by the use or sale of goods, materials, equipment, methods, processes, designs or information (“Infringing Goods”) furnished by Contractor or its suppliers or Subcontractors; or
10.1.3 injury to or death of persons (including employees of the Owner, the Design Professional, the Contractor, its Subcontractors and suppliers, or Other Contractors) or damage to or loss of property (including the property of the Contractor or the Owner, but not including the Work itself) arising out of or related to, and to the extent of, the negligence, actions or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, in the performance of this Agreement; or
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
28
10.1.4 contamination, pollution, or public or private nuisance, arising directly or indirectly out of any acts or omissions by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable; or
10.1.5 negligence, actions or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable; or
10.1.6 noncompliance with the terms of this Agreement, including but not limited to, the failure to comply with the terms of Section 3.6, the Project Safety Program.
10.1.7 The above obligations of this Paragraph 10.1 shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist or which are expressly or impliedly created elsewhere in this Agreement.
10.2 Owner's General Indemnity. The Owner shall indemnify, hold harmless and defend the Contractor and its officers, directors, shareholders and employees from and against claims, demands, actions, settlements or judgments, obligations and liabilities (and all costs and expenses including reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred in connection therewith) to the extent arising out of injury to or death of persons (including employees of the Owner, the Design Professional, the Contractor, its Subcontractors and suppliers, or Other Contractors) or damage to or loss of property (including the property of the Contractor, but not including the Work itself) arising out of or related to, and to the extent of, the negligence, actions or omissions of the Owner, its agents, representatives and employees.
10.3 All Indemnities. In connection with any of the indemnities of Paragraphs 10.1 or 10.2 or elsewhere in this Agreement, the parties agree:
10.3.1 The indemnifying party shall be entitled to (i) prompt written notice of the occurrence that gives rise to a claim for indemnification under Paragraphs 10.1 or 10.2; and (ii) an opportunity to defend the claim, suit, or demand through counsel of its choosing.
10.3.2 The Owner and the Contractor intend that any indemnity obligations shall apply even if a claim or loss arises in part from the negligence, strict liability, statutory liability, or other wrongful act or omission of the indemnified party. In such event the indemnifying party’s obligations shall be reduced in proportion to the indemnified party’s contributing negligence or fault. It is hereby stipulated and agreed between the Owner and the Contractor, that with respect to any claim or action arising out of any services performed under or pursuant to this Agreement or goods purchased under this Agreement, each party shall only be liable for payment of that portion of any and all liabilities, costs, expenses, demands, settlements or judgments resulting from the negligence, actions or omissions of its own agents, representatives and employees (a Subcontractor shall be deemed to be an agent of the Contactor).
10.3.3 The Contractor shall also cause any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, to the maximum extent permitted by law, to indemnify, defend and hold the Indemnitees harmless from all claims for bodily injury or property damage (other than property damage to the Work itself) that may arise from such Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s negligent acts, willful misconduct, actions or omissions. Such provisions shall be in a form satisfactory to the Contractor and the Owner.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
29
10.3.4 In claims against any indemnitee by an employee of the Contractor, the Owner, the Design Professional, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor, the Owner, the Design Professional or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
10.3.5 The above obligations shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist or which are expressly or impliedly created elsewhere in this Agreement.
10.3.6 The obligations of the Owner and the Contractor set forth in Paragraphs 10.1 through this Paragraph 10.3 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement. Also, all indemnities set forth in this Agreement shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement.
10.4 Contractor’s Insurance. Before commencing Work on the Project, the Contractor shall furnish Owner with certificates of insurance evidencing insurance coverages as required by Exhibit E to this Agreement, and shall thereafter notify the Owner, in writing, at least thirty (30) Days in advance, of cancellation or material modification of such insurance coverages. Such certificates or policies shall be underwritten by a carrier and/or placed through a broker satisfactory to the Owner.
10.4.1 The Contractor shall permit no Subcontractor to enter upon or continue the performance of the Work unless such Subcontractor is and remains insured in accordance with the requirements of this Paragraph 10.4. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner for any loss suffered by it for the failure of any Subcontractor to be insured as required by this Paragraph 10.4.1.
10.5 Insurance to Protect Project.
10.5.1 The Owner shall obtain and maintain “All Risk” type Builder’s Risk Insurance coverage upon the Project for the full cost of replacement at the time of any loss. Such insurance will be written with a deductible. This insurance shall include the Contractor, its Subcontractors, and their Subcontractors, as Loss Payees, as their respective interests may appear.
10.5.2 Upon request, the Owner shall provide the Contractor with evidence of the Builder’s Risk insurance coverage.
10.5.3 In the event of a loss covered by Builder’s Risk insurance, which loss is not attributable to the fault or neglect of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or another person for whom the Contractor is responsible, the Owner shall be responsible for the deductible amount. If, however, the loss is attributable to the Contractor’s fault or neglect or to the fault or neglect of a Subcontractor or other person for whom the Contractor is responsible, the Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amount.
10.5.4 Such Builder’s Risk insurance will not cover, and the Contractor and the Subcontractors, will be responsible for, without reimbursement by the Owner, loss of or damage to any tools, temporary structures or equipment belonging to or rented by the Contractor or any Subcontractor.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
30
10.5.5 Any insured property loss shall be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner in good faith for the insured or insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each Subcontractor or consultant to make payments to its Sub-subcontractors or Sub-consultants in a similar manner.
10.5.6 Except for losses covered by the insurance provided pursuant to this Paragraph 10.5, The Contractor acknowledges that it shall bear the full risk of loss for any portion of the Work damaged, destroyed, lost or stolen until the Owner accepts and occupies the fully completed Project or any portions thereof, and all such Work shall be fully restored at the Contractor’s sole cost and expense in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall accept available insurance proceeds as payment in full for the cost of restoration.
10.6 Waiver of Subrogation.
10.6.1 The Owner and the Contractor waive all rights against each other, and their respective employees, agents, contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors, to the extent that such Subcontractor has executed a similar waiver benefiting the Contractor and the Owner, for damages caused by perils covered by the insurance provided under Paragraph 10.5, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner. The Contractor shall obtain equivalent waivers of subrogation in favor of the Owner from each Subcontractor as part of its Subcontract with such entities.
10.6.2 The Owner and the Contractor waive all rights against the Owner's Other Contractors, and each Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, consultant, or agent of either of them for damages caused by perils covered by the insurance provided under Paragraph 10.5, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner, but only to the extent that such persons have provided reciprocal and equivalent waivers of subrogation to the Owner and the Contractor.
10.6.3 If the policies of insurance referred to in this Paragraph 10.6 require an endorsement to provide for continued coverage where there is a waiver of subrogation, the owners of such policies shall cause them to be so endorsed at their expense.
10.7 Performance and Payment Bonds.
10.7.1 The Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner with this Agreement executed by the Contractor multiple obligee payment and performance bonds, each for a minimum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum, issued by companies (“Surety Companies”) licensed to do business in [State] and acceptable to the Owner.
10.7.2 The performance bond shall be written on the AIA A312-2010™ Performance Bond form or other form acceptable to the Owner or any lender in its sole discretion; conditioned upon the faithful performance of this Agreement in accordance with the Contract Documents; and solely for the protection of the Owner and its Lender.
10.7.3 The payment bond shall be written on the AIA A312-2010™ Payment Bond form or other form acceptable to the Owner in its sole discretion; solely for the protection of claimants
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
31
supplying labor or materials for use by the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work; and conditioned for the prompt payment of all such material furnished or labor supplied or performed in the prosecution of the Work. For purposes of this Paragraph 10.7, “labor or materials” include public utility services and reasonable rentals of equipment, but only for the periods when the equipment rented is actually used at the site.
10.7.4 Upon the request of any entity or person appearing to be a potential beneficiary of the bonds covering payment obligations arising under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of such bonds to such entity or person.
ARTICLE 11- TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE AGREEMENT AND OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS
11.1 Suspension by the Contractor. If the Owner should unjustifiably fail to issue a payment to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, then, upon thirty (30) Days’ written notice to the Owner, during which period the Owner fails to remedy such condition by payment either to the Contractor or into an escrow in favor of the Contractor and the Owner, the Contractor may suspend its performance under this Agreement until Owner complies with this Paragraph 11.1. However, the Owner shall not be obligated to deposit any funds in escrow that have been deducted for the causes identified in Articles 9, 11, 14, 18, 19 and 21 of this Agreement (or other applicable Article), and the Contractor shall not suspend its performance if the dispute is pending resolution pursuant to Article 23 of this Agreement.
11.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience. The Owner may for any reason whatsoever suspend performance by the Contractor of some or all of its Work on the Project for its convenience. The Owner shall give at least fourteen (14) Days’ written notice of such suspension to the Contractor specifying when such suspension is to become effective and the anticipated length of the suspension. If any suspension pursuant to this Paragraph 11.2 extends for a period in excess of one (1) year, the Contractor may, at the expiration of such one-year period, demand upon seven (7) Days’ notice, that the Owner advise Contractor of its employment pursuant to this Agreement and if such suspension will not expire within a time frame that is satisfactory to the Contractor, the Contractor may terminate its services for the Project. Any such termination shall be deemed a termination for the convenience of the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.4.
11.2.1 From and upon the effective date of any suspension ordered by the Owner, unless directed in writing by the Owner to the contrary, the Contractor shall:
11.2.1.1 incur no further expense and/or obligation in connection with the suspended portion of the Project, except for reasonable costs directly resulting from such suspension;
11.2.1.2 cease work on suspended portions of the Project;
11.2.1.3 bring the work in progress to a suitable state of completion, consistent with future resumption as agreed with the Owner; and
11.2.1.4 if so directed in writing by the Owner, perform such other activities and/or services as will facilitate the recommencement of the Project.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
32
11.2.2 In the event of a suspension of the Project pursuant to this Paragraph 11.2 and, subject to the Contractor having complied in full with its obligations under this Agreement and the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to:
11.2.2.1 payment on the basis of the approved progress of the Work in accordance with this Agreement through and including the date upon which any suspension commences;
11.2.2.2 payment for all materials, supplies and equipment on site or in approved storage facilities for which payment would not otherwise be due under the provisions of Articles 7 and 14 of this Agreement; and
11.2.2.3 payment for all reasonable costs associated with such suspension including any demobilization costs and any reasonable expenses incurred by the Contractor relating to Subcontracts entered into by the Contractor.
11.2.3 The Owner may direct the recommencement of any portion of the Work by notice in writing. On receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall promptly resume work on the Project.
11.3 Termination by the Owner for Cause
11.3.1 Without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor seven (7) Days’ written notice during which period the Contractor fails to cure, the Owner may terminate this Agreement and/or the services of the Contractor on the Project, and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon and may finish the Project by whatever method it may deem expedient:
.1 if the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt; or
.2 if the Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; or
.3 if the Contractor becomes insolvent, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency; or
.4 if the Owner has a good faith basis to believe or a reasonable belief that the Contractor is not timely meeting its financial obligations to its Subcontractors, provided that the Owner is timely meeting its financial obligations to the Contractor; or
.5 if Contractor fails to prosecute the Work promptly and diligently, or refuses or fails to supply or cause to be supplied by Subcontractors enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials; or
.6 if Contractor unreasonably fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor when due, or disregards any Regulatory Requirements; or
.7 if Contractor submits any falsified document; or
.8 if a Lien is filed with the appropriate governmental authority or served on the Owner and not bonded, discharged or insured over by the Contractor in a manner in accordance with the requirements of Article 19 of this Agreement; or
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
33
.9 if Contractor otherwise defaults in any of its obligations under this Agreement.
11.3.2 In the event of a termination of the Contractor under this Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Project achieves Final Completion and it is mutually agreed or judicially determined whether or not the Contractor is entitled to further payment.
11.3.2.1 The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for any additional costs incurred by the Owner in connection with the Project as a result of the Contractor’s breach of its obligations under this Agreement.
11.3.2.2 As a further condition to any payment to Contractor upon termination under this Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Owner all of the documentation required to accompany the Contractor’s applications for payment pursuant to Article 14, including full Lien waivers from the Contractor and all Subcontractors, all existing documents and instruments required to have been provided to the Owner by the Contractor under Article 3 and evidence that all payrolls and supply and material bills with respect to the Project, including all payments due to Subcontractors, have been paid and no Liens chargeable against the Project or Work or Project site exist, all in form reasonably satisfactory to Owner.
11.3.3 If a judicial or arbitral proceeding determines that Owner did not have proper cause for termination under this Paragraph 11.3, such termination shall be deemed to have been a termination for convenience under Paragraph 11.4.
11.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience. Upon fourteen (14) or more Days prior written notice to the Contractor, the Owner may elect, at any time during the course of the Project, and without delay or default of the Contractor, to terminate all or a portion of the Work.
11.4.1 In the event of such termination, the Contractor shall immediately after receiving notice of such termination or on such later date as specified in the said notice:
11.4.1.1 Bring the work in process to a suitable state of completion consistent with future resumption as time allows, and take appropriate steps to protect semi-finished work and supplies, materials, etc. on the site on or before the effective termination date, leaving the site and work in a clean, orderly condition.
11.4.1.2 Bring Subcontracts and purchase orders with Subcontractors and suppliers to a close in the event the Owner does not elect to assume these contracts and/or purchase orders.
11.4.1.3 Enable the Owner or its nominee to take over the Work as far completed and particularly to take possession of all equipment and materials for the Work in the possession of the Contractor.
11.4.1.4 Consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 5.4, upon the Owner’s request, assign to Owner, or its nominee, all or any rights under Subcontracts with Subcontractors or purchase orders with suppliers.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
34
11.4.1.5 Deliver to the Owner, or its nominee, all plans, schedules, drawings, specifications, Submittals, tracking reports, electronic files, and all other documents, information and data prepared by the Contractor in connection with the Work.
11.4.2 Termination of the Project under this Paragraph 11.4 shall entitle the Contractor as its sole remedy to receive as Final Payment (i) the progress payment due for all Work provided and supplies and materials delivered prior to the termination date (to the extent not previously paid by the Owner), and (ii) all reasonable costs associated with such termination including any demobilization costs and any expenses incurred by the Contractor relating to Subcontracts entered into by the Contractor. The Contractor shall satisfy the conditions for payment set forth in Paragraph 11.3.2.2 as a further condition of payment under this Paragraph 11.4.2. The Contractor shall have no claim otherwise resulting from said termination.
11.5 Provisions Surviving Termination. The obligations imposed by Articles 9 (General Obligations, Representations and Warranties of the Contractor), 10 (Indemnity, Insurance, and Waiver of Subrogation, Bonding), 17 (Confidentiality), 18, (Uncovering and Correction of the Work), 19 (Construction Liens), 20 (Ownership of Documents), 21 (Owner’s Right to Audit), 22 (Taxes) and 23 (Resolution of Disputes) shall survive any expiration or termination of this Agreement.
ARTICLE 12- GOVERNING LAW
12.1 This Agreement shall be governed by and construed according to the laws applicable to agreements to be wholly performed in the State of New York and without reference to choice of law principles. Venue regarding any dispute arising out of or relating to this Agreement shall be proper solely in the 7th District of State of New York or in the courts of the State of New York, located in Steuben County, New York, and the parties agree to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of that court for purposes of such dispute.
ARTICLE 13- PARTIAL OCCUPANCY
13.1 The Owner shall have the right to occupy or use a portion of the Project prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Project, provided that a temporary certificate of occupancy shall have been issued for such portion of the Project.
ARTICLE 14- APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
14.1 Contractor’s Applications for Payment. On or before the first business day of each month during the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall submit an Application for Payment to the Owner (to the persons and in the format reasonably required by the Owner) for all Work completed in the preceding calendar month (the “Application”), along with all documentation and information required by Article 3 and this Article 14 of this Agreement. The Owner may reject, in whole or in part, any Application which is incomplete, inaccurate or lacks adequate detail, specificity or supporting documentation or for any other reason set forth in Paragraph 14.3 of this Agreement. The Owner will review and approve the Application or advise the Contractor, in writing, of any error or corrections needed for approval of the Application. Upon the receipt of notice of approval or of errors or corrections needed in the Application, the Contractor shall promptly prepare, revise if appropriate and submit to the Owner an Application for Payment and invoice in a complete and documented form (the “Application for Payment”).
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
35
14.1.1 Time of Payment. The Owner shall pay each approved Application for Payment within forty-five (45) Days of submission of such Application in the approved form and with the required supporting documentation by the Contractor. The Owner’s payment of any Application for Payment, including the final Application for Payment, shall not constitute approval or acceptance of any item of the Work specified in such Application for Payment.
14.1.2 Schedule of Values. Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for its review and approval, a schedule of values (“Schedule of Values”) allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner may require. The aggregate dollar amount of the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Sum. After having been reviewed and approved by the Owner, the Schedule of Values shall be used as a basis for the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. The receipt and approval of the submitted Schedule of Values shall be a condition precedent to any payment under this Agreement.
14.1.3 Form of Application for Payment. The Contractor shall submit each Application for Payment to the Owner in such form and supported by such documentation (including all applicable Subcontractors’ applications for payment and copies of requisitions, bills and other supporting data) as the Owner may reasonably require for the purpose of establishing the amounts to be paid.
14.1.4 Frequency of Applications for Payment. The Contractor shall not submit more than one Application for Payment per month, unless it is necessary to maintain the progress of the Project, or for other special reasons, and in all events subject to Owner’s prior written approval in any given month.
14.1.5 Off-Site Materials. In the event the Contractor seeks and Owner approves, payment for off-site materials or equipment, such materials or equipment shall be stored and protected, in a manner approved by the Owner, by the Contractor at a bonded location acceptable to Owner, and the Contractor shall submit with the Application for Payment, evidence of insurance for the off-site storage facility, bills of sale or such other documentation as shall establish the Owner’s title to such materials or equipment and such other documentation as the Owner shall request to otherwise protect the Owner’s interest in such materials.
14.1.5.1 In the event the Owner approves payment for off-site storage of materials or equipment, the Contractor shall pay all reasonable expenses incurred by the Owner in connection with traveling to such off-site location to verify receipt and condition of such off-site materials and/or equipment.
14.2 Amount of Progress Payments. Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the approved Schedule of Values, and shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment.
14.2.1 Subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows:
14.2.1.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to properly completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
36
approved Schedule of Values, less retainage in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 14.10;
14.2.1.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials, equipment and products delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction, less retainage in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 14.10;
14.2.1.3 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials, equipment and products delivered and stored off-site in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 14.1.5, as to which Owner has authorized in writing payment for such off-site materials, less retainage in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 14.10;
14.2.1.4 Subtract the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner; and
14.2.1.5 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Owner has withheld or nullified payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.3.
14.2.1.6 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, no further payments shall be made to the Contractor after the Contractor achieves Substantial Completion of the Work, except for the Final Payment described in Paragraph 14.8.
14.2.2 The Contractor and the Owner agree that no interest will accrue or be or become due or payable on late payments.
14.3 Bases for Modification or Rejection of Applications for Payment. The Owner shall review and approve each of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. The Owner may decline to approve all of or a portion of an Application for Payment for such reasons as the Owner, in its sole discretion, may deem advisable, to the extent relating to:
14.3.1 inadequate or defective work on the Project not remedied, or unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work. The Owner shall decline all of or a portion of an Application for Payment related to corrective work, defective work, negligent work, or work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents; or
14.3.2 liens related to the Project filed against the Project or the site or any portion thereof, against monies due in connection with this Agreement or any Subcontract, or against the Owner, the Contractor or any Subcontractors; or
14.3.3 failure of the Contractor or any Subcontractor to make payments to its agents, employees, or subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment in connection with the Project, provided the Owner has paid the Contractor amounts due under the terms of this Agreement (less any applicable retainage); or
14.3.4 damage to another party caused by the Contractor’s or any Subcontractor’s activities, to the extent not fully covered by insurance; or
14.3.5 failure of the Contractor to submit documentation required in connection with Applications for Payment; or
14.3.6 work not performed but for which a requisition has been submitted; or
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
37
14.3.7 the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or the default by Contractor in its obligations under the Contract Documents or under this Agreement; or
14.3.8 duplicate costs or fees, or both, or costs for changes in the Work not in accordance with Article 8 (Changes in the Project); or
14.3.9 evidence that any cost or fee, or both, paid under any prior invoice(s) should not have been paid pursuant to this Article 14.
14.4 Certifications and Warranties in Connection with Applications for Payment.
14.4.1 The Contractor’s Applications for Payment in connection with the Project shall generally certify that the portion of the Project covered by the Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
14.4.2 The Contractor shall also submit with each Application for Payment a release and partial waiver of Liens and affidavit of payment (in a form conforming with all applicable Regulatory Requirements and approved by the Owner), from itself and from each Subcontractor covered by the Application for Payment, of all claims and Liens for all labor and materials furnished by the Contractor and each such Subcontractor up through the date of the immediately preceding Application for Payment (excluding retainage), in form satisfactory to the Owner.
14.4.3 The presentation of invoices for progress payments by the Contractor to the Owner as set forth in this Article 14 constitutes an express warranty and representation by the Contractor to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quantities and quality of the Work are in accordance with the Contract Documents.
14.5 Payment of Subcontractors by Contractor. The Contractor represents and warrants that it will pay all Subcontractors and others who perform Work in accordance with the invoices approved by the Owner within seven (7) Days of receipt of payment from the Owner. The Contractor shall require each of its Subcontractors, in turn, to pay its vendors and subcontractors in a similar time frame.
14.6 Trust Funds. All amounts paid over to the Contractor shall be trust funds for distribution in accordance with the approved Application for Payment.
14.7 Effect of Construction Lien Claims or Notices of Intention to File Lien. If at the time of an Application for Payment, a Lien or claim has been filed against the Project or the Owner, the Owner may set-off against any amount otherwise due to the Contractor under this Agreement an amount sufficient to discharge the Lien or claim together with any fees, interest or charges in connection therewith, provided that no amount other than costs and expenses (including attorneys’ fees) associated with removal by the Owner or the Contractor may be withheld if the Lien or claim is immediately vacated, discharged or bonded by the Contractor or the applicable Subcontractor. This right is in addition to all other rights and remedies of the Owner under this Agreement.
14.8 Final Application for Payment. The Contractor shall not submit, and the Owner shall not be required to act upon, a final Application for Payment in connection with the Project unless and until (i) the Contractor (a) satisfies in all respects the prerequisites for Final Completion as set forth in Exhibit G and (b) has made or caused to be made all corrections to the Work which are
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
38
required to remedy any defects therein or to obtain compliance with applicable Contract Documents, (ii) the Design Professional delivers its certificate to the Owner that all applicable Work has been finally completed, and, (iii) in addition to the documents otherwise required with an Application for Payment, Contractor submits,
14.8.1 an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Project, for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied;
14.8.2 a release and waiver of all claims and Liens against the Project in such form as the Owner may reasonably require, along with final releases and waivers of all claims and Liens from all Subcontractors;
14.8.3 assignment and delivery to the Owner of all warranties covering its and each of its Subcontractors’ portions of the Work;
14.8.4 a certificate evidencing that all insurance required of the Contractor and of its Subcontractors by the applicable Contract Documents is currently in effect, will remain in force after Final Payment and will not be canceled;
14.8.5 consent of surety to Final Payment, where applicable;
14.8.6 “record” drawings and operation and maintenance manuals for the Project;
14.8.7 such documentation as required by Article 22 of this Agreement; and
14.8.8 such other documentation as the Owner or the Design Professional may reasonably require or which is otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
14.9 Title. Title to all supplies and materials, including machinery, equipment and tools, shall be vested in the Owner no later than the time of delivery to the job site and prior to any installation or incorporation into the Work, subject to all rights of the Owner under this Agreement including without limitation the right to inspect and to reject the same for failure to conform to this Agreement or to the Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents.
14.10 Retainage.
14.10.1 As to each payment due to the Contractor under this Agreement, the Owner shall reduce such payment by retainage of ten percent (10%) of the amount otherwise due and payable under this Agreement.
14.10.2 At Substantial Completion, the Owner may reduce retainage to five percent (5%) of the value of the Work completed, not including the value of any incomplete, defective or unsatisfactory work, as long as the Contractor is otherwise entitled to such sum and subject to the other provisions of this Agreement.
14.10.3 The Owner shall pay any retainage remaining owing to the Contractor at the time of Final Completion of the Project as part of the Final Payment.
14.11 Effect of Payment. No payment by the Owner shall constitute acceptance by the Owner of the correctness of any charge or invoice. The Owner shall have the right to verify costs or fees
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
39
according to the provisions of Article 21 (Owner’s Right to Audit). No payment by the Owner shall be conclusive evidence of the proper performance of the Work either wholly or in part and no payment shall be deemed an acceptance of any defective, deficient, or non-conforming Work.
14.11.1 Acceptance of Final Payment by Contractor shall act as a full release and waiver by the Contractor of any further claims against Owner.
14.12 Refund. If at any time after Final Payment by Owner there is evidence of a Lien or claim in connection with the Work of the Project for which the Owner may become liable, the Contractor shall promptly pay to the Owner on demand all moneys that the Owner may be compelled to pay to discharge such Lien or claim.
14.13 Owner’s Right of Set-Off. Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary, whether express or implied, the Owner shall be entitled to set-off against any money otherwise payable to the Contractor for the Project any sums which the Owner is entitled to claim from the Contractor (as damages or otherwise) under this Agreement.
14.13.1 If it intends to exercise any right to set-off under this Paragraph 14.13, or otherwise under this Agreement, the Owner shall give the Contractor notice in writing of its intention providing full particulars of the amount which it intends to set-off. Such notice shall be given, where practicable, not less than ten (10) Days before the money against which the set-off is to be made becomes due and payable to the Contractor. Any written notice from the Owner under this Paragraph 14.13 shall be without prejudice to the Owner’s right to amend or vary any claim it asserts against the Contractor in any subsequent negotiations, litigation or other proceedings arising out of this Agreement.
ARTICLE 15- ASSIGNMENT
15.1 The Contractor shall neither assign its interest in this Agreement nor delegate its duties under this Agreement without the prior written consent of the Owner.
15.2 The Owner may assign its rights and delegate its duties under all or any part of this Agreement to any affiliated company.
15.3 The Owner may assign all or any part of this Agreement in connection with the mortgage, sale, exchange, swap or other transfer of ownership of the Project or the Project site, or otherwise, including assignment effected by sale of related business assets of the Owner, merger or operation of law. Upon receipt of written notice of its intention to make such an assignment, the Contractor shall reasonably cooperate with respect to such assignment.
ARTICLE 16- MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
16.1 No Third Party Benefit. No provision of this Agreement shall create or give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner or the Contractor beyond those that legally exist in the absence of any such provisions. Nothing in this Agreement or otherwise in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor and no Subcontractor shall have any rights against the Owner by virtue of this Agreement. The Owner, however, shall be considered an intended beneficiary of all contracts between the Contractor and its Subcontractors engaged for purposes of providing services in connection with the Project.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
40
16.2 Entire Agreement. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement of the parties regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No provision of the Contract Documents other than this Agreement and the Addendum can supersede the provisions of this Agreement and the Addendum.
16.3 Modification and Waiver. The provisions of this Agreement can only be modified by a writing signed by both parties. This Agreement cannot be changed or terminated orally.
16.3.1 The provisions of this Agreement cannot be waived in any manner, including but not limited to, by acts, omissions, practice or custom, or by making or receiving payments with knowledge of any default under the terms of this Agreement, except by an express waiver in writing.
16.3.2 No course of dealing between the Contractor and the Owner, nor any failure to exercise nor any delay in exercising, on the part of the Owner or the Contractor, any right, power or privilege granted by this Agreement shall operate as a waiver thereof; nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege under this Agreement preclude any other further exercise of such right, power or privilege or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege.
16.4 Time for Making Claims. No action or proceeding or claim shall lie or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless such action shall have been commenced within sixty (60) Days after the date of Substantial Completion.
16.5 Severability. In the event that any term or provision of this Agreement is held to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable under the laws, regulations or ordinances of any Federal, State or municipal government to which this Agreement is subject, such term or provision shall be deemed severed from this Agreement, and the remaining terms and provisions shall remain unaffected. In lieu of each provision of this Agreement that is illegal, invalid or unenforceable, a provision will be added as a part of this Agreement as similar in terms to such illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision as may be possible and be legal, valid and enforceable.
16.6 Binding Effect. Subject to the provisions of Article 15, this Agreement shall bind the executors, administrators, successors and assigns of the parties hereto.
16.7 Notices. All notices or communications required or permitted hereunder, or otherwise given by one party to the other, shall be in writing and shall be deemed delivered when sent by personal delivery, certified or registered mail, postage prepaid, return receipt requested or sent by express courier to the parties at the addresses set forth above in Paragraph 2.11 of this Agreement. All notices shall be deemed to have been given upon delivery or rejection as reflected on the return receipt. Any party or person to whom notices are sent or given pursuant to this Agreement may, by notice to all such other parties or persons mentioned herein, change the persons and addresses to which notice or other communications are to be sent by the methods stated above, provided that notice of such changes shall be effective upon receipt.
16.8 Conflicts of Interest. In connection with services provided pursuant to this Agreement, the Contractor shall not accept for its own account any trade discounts or contributions, or deal with (or recommend that the Owner deal with) any firm in which the Contractor has any financial or other interest, or undertake any activity or employment which would or could create a conflict of interest or compromise the Contractor’s professional judgment or prevent the Contractor from serving the best interests of the Owner. If the Contractor shall become aware of any facts which
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
41
are or may be in violation of the preceding provisions of this Paragraph or shall have any financial or other interest in any firm with which the Owner is dealing or proposes to deal in connection with the Project, the Contractor shall immediately so advise the Owner in writing.
16.8.1 The Contractor shall adhere to any further conflict of interest policy adopted by the Owner and promulgated to the Contractor during the term of this Agreement.
16.8.2 Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, it shall be deemed a conflict of interest and a material breach of the terms of this Agreement for the Contractor to employ at the Project or accept bids from Subcontractors employing, with respect to the Project, any relatives (including in-laws) of any of the officers, directors or supervisors of the Contractor.
16.8.3 Any breach hereunder shall entitle the Owner, in addition to all other remedies, to terminate this Agreement upon seven (7) Days’ prior written notice under Paragraph 11.3.
16.9 Patents. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner in writing if the Contractor has any reason to believe that any process, product, equipment, material or other element or feature of the Project required to be incorporated into the Project by the Owner or its Design Professional might be the subject of any adverse United States patent rights or other adverse rights, and if so, what such features may be at issue, and of any claim or potential claim of any such right which shall come to the attention of the Contractor during construction of the Project or at any time thereafter, and shall require its Subcontractors similarly to give notice of any such issue. To the extent that the Contractor or one of its Subcontractors is aware of such a potential or actual claim and fails promptly to give the Owner notice in writing of such actual or potential claim, the Contractor shall be required to make any license, damage or other payments required as a consequence of the utilization of such element or feature.
16.10 Emergencies. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and notify the Owner as soon as possible.
16.11 Independent Contractors
16.11.1 The parties to this Agreement are independent contractors and nothing contained in this Agreement shall be construed to place the parties in the relationship of employer and employee, partners, principal and agent, or joint venturers. Neither party shall have the power to bind or obligate the other party, nor shall either party hold itself out as having such authority.
16.11.2 The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any Contractor employee it furnishes to provide services under this Agreement is an employee of the Contractor and is not an employee of the Owner. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that all matters of compensation and benefits (including without limitation, pension plans, profit sharing plans, life insurance plans, medical plans, cafeteria plans, disability plans, severance plans, vacation or sickness arrangements, bonus or stock option arrangements, or any other compensation or incentive compensation arrangements) of any nature whatsoever for the Contractor employee is solely a matter between the Contractor and its employee. The ontractor acknowledges and agrees that it will withhold and submit to the applicable governmental authorities all applicable taxes from the Contractor’s employees’ paychecks.
16.12 Rights and Remedies. The duties and obligations imposed on the parties by the Contract Documents and this Agreement and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
42
addition to, and not a limitation of, the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by Law.
16.13 Tests and Inspections.
16.13.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by Regulatory Requirements shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner or to the relevant public authority. The Contractor shall give timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Owner may be present for such procedures.
16.13.2 If the Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Paragraph 16.13.1, the Owner shall in writing instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Owner may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Paragraph 16.13.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.
16.13.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Paragraphs 16.13.1 and 16.13.2 reveal failure of portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated testing, etc. procedures, shall be at the Contractor’s expense, to the extent that such failure results from the Work or services of the Contractor or that of any Subcontractor or consultant or anyone else for whom the Contractor is responsible. The Contractor also agrees that the cost of testing services required for the convenience of the Contractor in its scheduling and performance of the Work, and the cost of testing services related to remedial operations performed to correct deficiencies in the Work, shall be borne by the Contractor. To the extent any deficiencies are attributable to the Owner or Other Contractors, any associated costs of testing or re-testing shall be borne by the Owner.
16.13.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner.
16.13.5 If the Owner is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Owner will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.
16.13.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.
ARTICLE 17- CONFIDENTIALITY
17.1 The Contractor shall not disclose or permit the disclosure of any Confidential Information, except to its Subcontractors, suppliers, agents and employees who need such Confidential Information to perform the Work, provided that they are required to comply with the terms set forth in this Article 17, and shall not use or permit to be used any Confidential Information for anyone other than the Owner.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
43
17.2 As used herein, the term “Confidential Information” shall mean any and all information, know-how and data, technical or non-technical, in any way relating to the Project and its related Contract Documents and this Agreement, or to any process used or product or apparatus manufactured, used or sold by the Owner, which is disclosed to the Contractor by or on behalf of the Owner in connection with this Project. The Contractor shall in no event disclose that any Confidential Information is or is not being utilized by the Owner.
17.2.1 Confidential Information shall not include any information that:
17.2.1.1 was lawfully obtained by Contractor from a third party without any obligation of confidentiality;
17.2.1.2 is or becomes part of the public domain except by breach of this Agreement; or
17.2.1.3 is required to be disclosed by law, or judicial or administrative order, provided that the Contractor gives the Owner prompt written notice (i) of any such requirement(s) before disclosing such Confidential Information, and (ii) of the terms and circumstances surrounding such requirement(s), so that the Owner may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy before the Contractor is obligated to disclose said Confidential Information. The Contractor shall reasonably cooperate with the Owner in any attempt the Owner makes to avoid or limit any such disclosure.
17.2.1.4 In no event, shall the authorized distribution of documents containing Confidential Information to meet Regulatory Requirements be construed as or operate to place any Confidential Information in the public domain.
17.3 The Contractor acknowledges that the unauthorized use or disclosure of Confidential Information by the Contractor or its employees or agents or Subcontractors may give rise to irreparable injury and that money damages may not adquately compensate the Owner for such injury. Accordingly, the Owner may seek and obtain injunctive relief against the Contractor or its employees or agents or Subcontractors, or any individual furnished Confidential Information of the Owner hereunder to prevent the breach or threatened breach of any promise made in this Agreement or any Contract Document, in addition to any other legal remedies which may be available to the Owner.
17.4 The Contractor acknowledges that its employees, agents, subcontractors, consultants, suppliers and others acting on its behalf may come into contact with Patient Health Information ("PHI") while performing Work at the Project site. It is anticipated that this contact will be rare and brief (e.g. walking through a clinic where patient files may be visible, overhearing conversations between physicians while working or touring a hospital, noticing a relative or acquaintance receiving treatment in an Owner facility, etc.) and will be incident to a use or disclosure of the Owner otherwise permitted or required by 45 CFR Part 164 Subpart E of the HIPAA Privacy Rule. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative of any such contact. The Contractor agrees that any and all forms of PHI will not be examined, copied, photographed, or recorded in any manner, distributed or shared and the Contractor will adopt procedures to ensure that its employees, agents, Subcontractors, consultants, suppliers and others acting on its behalf will refrain from such activity. If Contractor, its employees, agents, Subcontractors, consultants, suppliers or others acting on its behalf do further examine, copy, photograph, or record in any manner, distribute or share this information, the Contractor will report such actions immediately to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. The Contractor will immediately take all steps necessary to stop any such actions and will ensure that no further violations of this
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
44
contractual responsibility will occur. The Contractor will report to the Owner’s Authorized Representative within five (5) Days after the Contractor gives the Owner’s Authorized Representative notice of the event/action of the steps taken to prevent future occurrences.
17.5 The rights of the Owner and the obligations of the Contractor under this Article 17 shall survive the complete performance of this Agreement or the earlier termination of this Agreement, until agreed otherwise in writing by both parties to this Agreement.
ARTICLE 18- UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF THE WORK
18.1 Uncovering the Work:
18.1.1 At any time before acceptance by the Owner of the Work, if any portion of the Work has been installed or covered contrary to the written instructions of the Owner or the Design Professional or contrary to the requirements of the Contract Documents or prior to inspection thereof, the Contractor shall, at its cost and without reimbursement by the Owner, remove or uncover, or cause to be removed or uncovered, such portion for examination, as may be directed by the Owner or the Design Professional.
18.1.1.1 After examination, the Contractor shall, at its cost and without reimbursement by the Owner, restore or cause to be restored the portion of the Project removed or uncovered to the standard required by the Contract Documents.
18.1.2 If any portion of the Work has been installed or covered consistent with the instructions of the Owner or Design Professional, or consistent with the direction or requirements of the Contract Documents, and the Owner or Design Professional directs that such work be removed or uncovered, then,
18.1.2.1 should the work thus exposed or examined prove to be in conformance with the Contract Documents, the uncovering or removing and the restoring of such portion of the Work shall be paid for by the Owner as a Change Order; or
18.1.2.2 should the portion so exposed or examined prove not to be in conformance with the Contract Documents, such removal or uncovering shall be at the cost of the Contractor (without reimbursement by the Owner).
18.2 Correction of Work. The Contractor will take full responsibility to correct any Work which is defective in material or workmanship or otherwise fails to conform to the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after the Date of Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, and shall further take responsibility for all necessary removal, replacement and/or repair of any other portion of the Project which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing any portion of the Work.
18.2.1 If, within twelve (12) months after the Date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable guarantee or warranty required by the Contract Documents (the “Correction Period”), any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
45
18.2.2 The Contractor shall remove, or caused to be removed from the site, if necessary, all defective or nonconforming work removed pursuant to this Article 18.
18.2.3 If the Contractor does not remove defective or nonconforming work from the site within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Owner, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within fourteen (14) Days of demand therefor from the Owner, the Owner may, upon fourteen (14) additional Days’ written notice, sell such work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all costs that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for additional Owner services. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner within thirty (30) Days of written demand by the Owner.
18.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of Other Contractors destroyed or damaged by removal or correction under this Article 18 in accordance with the provisions of this Paragraph 18.2.
18.3 Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work. If the Owner prefers to accept defective or nonconforming Work, it may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or Project Schedule, or, if the amount is determined after Final Payment, it shall be paid by the Contractor within thirty (30) Days of written demand by the Owner.
18.4 Nothing contained in this Article 18 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, the obligations imposed by Article 9. The establishment of the Correction Period relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which Contractor’s obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to its obligations other than its obligation specifically to return to the Project site and to correct the Work.
18.5 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the Contractor’s obligations and liabilities with respect to any Work that is found to be defective or not in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents discovered after the Correction Period (or after such longer period as may be required elsewhere in the Contract Documents) shall be determined by Law. If, after the Correction Period (or after such longer period as may be required elsewhere in the Contract Documents) but before the applicable limitation period has expired, the Owner discovers any Work which the Owner considers to be defective or not in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide written notice to the Contractor, and the Owner, in addition to any other remedies provided under the Contract Documents and under the Law, may commence correction of such defective or nonconforming Work with its own forces. If the Owner performs such corrective Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the Owner in performing such correction.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
46
ARTICLE 19- CONSTRUCTION (AND OTHER) LIENS
19.1 If any Subcontractor (including any Sub-subcontractor, laborer, materialman, supplier, or any other person directly or indirectly acting for, through or under the Contractor or any of them) at any time files or maintains any construction lien claim, mechanic’s or materialmen’s lien, mechanic’s or materialmen’s lien notices, notice of unpaid balance, notices of contract, statements of account, or stop payment notices (collectively, “Lien” or “Liens”) in connection with the Project, then, the Contractor agrees to cause such Liens to be satisfied, removed or discharged by bond, payment or otherwise within fourteen (14) Days from the date of the filing thereof.
19.1.1 If the Contractor fails to remove any such Liens as required by this Paragraph 19.1, the Owner shall have the right, in addition to all other rights and remedies provided under the Contract Documents or by Law, to cause such Liens to be satisfied, removed or discharged by whatever means the Owner chooses, including by withholding payment from the Contractor in an amount equal to the stated amount of all outstanding Liens until satisfactory evidence has been furnished to the Owner that said indebtedness has been satisfied or fully discharged. In addition, the Owner may deduct any costs it incurs in removing Liens, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, disbursements and other costs of litigation, from sums otherwise due to the Contractor for services performed under this Agreement or, if costs exceed amounts due, the Contractor shall promptly reimburse the Owner for the full cost of removing such Liens.
19.2 If any Lien or claim remains unsatisfied at completion or termination of this Agreement pursuant to Article 11, the Contractor shall promptly refund to the Owner all costs incurred by the Owner in extinguishing such Liens or claims, including any cost of filing and reasonable attorneys’ fees.
19.3 The Contractor agrees to cause a provision equivalent to the foregoing which fully protects the Owner against any and all Liens by any Subcontractor (including any Sub-subcontractor, materialman or supplier or any other person directly or indirectly acting for, through or under the Contractor) to be included in each contract with such person or entity in connection with the Project and that an executed copy thereof shall be delivered to the Owner at the commencement of the Work of each such Subcontractor (or other party) in form satisfactory to Owner.
ARTICLE 20- OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS
20.1 Ownership of Project Documents. All drawings, specifications, procurement documents, reports, studies, procedures, and any other data or information prepared or in preparation by the Contractor in the prosecution of the Work, or otherwise provided by the Contractor under this Agreement, whether in written or electronic form (“Project Documents”), shall be the exclusive property of the Owner from the moment of their creation and shall be marked accordingly and may be used by the Owner for any purpose or be disposed of by the Owner and its assigns without any limitation whatsoever. The Contractor may submit or distribute Project Documents as required to meet Regulatory Requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project. The Contractor shall obtain the Owner's written approval before submitting Project Documents as set forth above.
20.1.1 The Contractor shall not use Project Documents for any purpose other than performance of the Work.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
47
20.2 Ownership of Copyrights. All copyrights to Project Documents shall belong to the Owner from the moment of creation of Project Documents. The Contractor will take all steps necessary, where applicable, to transfer such rights to the Owner.
20.3 Ownership of Design, Concepts and Technical Information. In addition to the foregoing, the design, concepts and technical information portrayed by the Project Documents may be used by the Owner and its assigns for any purpose without any limitation whatsoever.
20.4 Delivery of Project Documents to Owner. Upon the Owner’s request, but in all event no later than at the time of Final Completion of the Project, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner all Project Documents, including all budget and other records or instruments of service created or generated by the Contractor pursuant to this Agreement.
20.4.1 The Contractor consents to the use of the Project Documents by another contractor hired by Owner to complete the Project.
20.5 This Article 20 shall survive the complete performance of this Agreement, or any earlier termination of this Agreement, until agreed otherwise in writing by both parties.
ARTICLE 21- OWNER’S RIGHT TO AUDIT
21.1 Records; Record Retention. For a period of six (6) years after Final Completion of the Project (or longer if required by Law), the Contractor shall maintain sufficient documentation to demonstrate its compliance with this Agreement, including at a minimum all of Contractor’s Records. Records to be maintained shall include those documents necessary to evaluate and verify direct and indirect costs (including overhead allocations) as they may apply to costs associated with this Agreement.
21.1.1 For purposes of this Article 21, the term “Records” shall include all data and records relating to each Project initiated pursuant to this Agreement (including both hard copies and digital, electronic or computer readable data), including, but not be limited to, time records, payroll records, accounting records, written policies and procedures, Subcontract files (including proposals of successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps, etc.), original estimates, estimating work sheets, correspondence (including electronic mail), change orders and change order files (including documentation covering negotiated settlements), backcharge logs and supporting documentation, general ledger entries detailing cash and trade discounts earned, insurance rebates and dividends, invoices, payments or claims submitted by the Contractor or any of its Payees, recordings, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, superintendent reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may in the Owner’s judgment have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Document.
21.2 Audit Rights. Within five (5) business days of the Owner’s written request, the Contractor shall make all Records available to the Owner, Owner’s agent or its designee, at the Contractor's place of business at reasonably convenient times to inspect, review and copy. The Contractor shall cooperate in such inspection, review and copying. In addition, the Contractor shall permit the Owner or its designee to interview any of the Contractor’s employees in connection with any such audit.
21.2.1 All such copying shall be done at the Owner's expense.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
48
21.2.2 The Contractor shall allow the Owner (or its designee), upon reasonable notice, to review and copy Records to validate the Contractor’s compliance with this Agreement. The Owner may also audit the procedures, systems and facilities of the Contractor, and its agents and Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors and suppliers, and may conduct interviews with people under their control.
21.2.3 Each such audit shall be subject to, and wholly covered by, the confidentiality protections of this Agreement.
21.3 Organization of Records. The Contractor shall maintain all Records in a commercially reasonable manner and in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.
21.4 Payee Records Subject to Audit. The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors and suppliers (“Payees”) to comply with the provisions of this Article 21 by insertion of the requirements hereof in a written contract agreement between the Contractor and Payee. The Contractor will cooperate fully and will cause all related parties and all of its Subcontractors (including those entering into lump sum Subcontracts) to cooperate fully in furnishing or in making available to the Owner from time to time, whenever requested, and in an expeditious manner, any and all requested Records or knowledgeable employees.
21.5 Consequences of Audit. If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Article 21 discloses any overcharge by the Contractor in connection with any Project initiated pursuant to this Agreement, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner the amount of such overcharge.
21.5.1 In addition, if an audit discloses overcharges (of any nature) by the Contractor to the Owner in excess of one percent (1%) of the total Contract Sum (as adjusted for Changes pursuant to Article 8) in connection with the Project or any other material violation of this Agreement, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the actual cost of the Owner’s audit.
21.5.2 Any adjustments and/or payments which must be made as a result of any audit or inspection of the Contractor’s Records shall be made within a reasonable period of time not to exceed sixty (60) Days from presentation of the Owner’s findings to the Contractor.
21.5.3 The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of correcting any deficiencies revealed by any such audit, unless the parties otherwise agree, in writing.
21.6 Notice of Receipt of Notice of Regulatory Audit or Inspection. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner after its receipt of notice of any proposed inspection, audit or warrant by or from a government or regulatory authority that relates to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated by it, and comply with the Owner’ reasonable instructions relating to such matter. In addition, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner after its self-identification of any material violation of this Agreement and/or any failure to comply with any applicable Regulatory Requirement by the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors or suppliers.
ARTICLE 22- TAXES
22.1 Unless otherwise provided in this Agreement, the Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of all:
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
49
22.1.1 taxes and fees imposed in connection with the Contractor’s performance of the Work;
22.1.2 taxes and contributions based on wages, salaries, or other compensation paid to the Contractor’s employees as imposed by applicable Law or union requirements;
22.1.3 import/export license fees and import/export taxes and duties on all services and tangible items either imported or exported by the Contractor; and
22.1.4 all federal income taxes, state taxes and fees levied on or measured by the Contractor’s net income.
22.2 The Contractor shall assist the Owner with the collection of and refund to the Owner of all state sales tax paid for services and/or materials subsequently determined to be exempt from state sales tax. The Owner will provide necessary state sales tax exemption forms to the Contractor. The Contractor shall share these forms with appropriate Subcontractors and vendors and obtain necessary sales tax credits, if permitted by Law. As part of the closeout process for the Contractor and each Subcontractor and vendor, the Contractor shall confirm and certify to the Owner that all records, invoices and back-up documentation related to sales tax have been provided to the Owner. Also, the Contractor shall cooperate with any requests by the Owner for additional documentation related to items of material and equipment on which any sales tax was paid and the amounts of each such tax payment.
22.3 The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and similar taxes for the Work. The Contractor acknowledges and confirms its understanding that under NY Tax §1116(a)(4), the sale at retail to or use by a construction contractor of building machinery and equipment (as defined in NY Tax §1116) and services with respect thereto that are transferred to a charitable organization such as the Owner are exempt from sales and use tax subject to any limitations that may exist under the foregoing statute(s). Accordingly, the Contractor agrees that: (i) it has not and will not include in the cost of the Project any sales or use tax on exempt items; (ii) it shall refund to the Owner, or permit the Owner to deduct from the amounts billed to the Owner pursuant to this Agreement, any sales or use taxes paid by the Contractor on exempt items; (iii) it shall maintain records separately identifying the items of material and equipment on which any sales tax was paid and the amounts of each such tax payment; and (iv) it shall afford the Owner the opportunity to review and inspect the Contractor’s books and records in accordance with the provisions of Article 21 of this Agreement regarding payment of any such taxes. The Contractor shall include this provision in all Subcontracts and professional services agreements.
22.4 Not Used.
ARTICLE 23- RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
23.1 Application. If any controversy or claim arising out of or relating to (i) this Agreement or any breach thereof or (ii) the Project is not resolved, the Owner and the Contractor agree to proceed as set forth in this Article 23.
23.2 Notice and Direct Negotiation. The party asserting the dispute shall provide notice to the other party in accordance with Paragraph 16.7 (Notices) detailing the unresolved subject, together with the proposed remedy and the associated safety, cost, schedule and quality consequences. The parties shall endeavor to reach resolution through good faith direct negotiation.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
50
23.3 Mediation. If the parties do not reach agreement through direct negotiation within sixty (60) Days from receipt of the notice required by Paragraph 23.2, the parties agree to refer the dispute to mediation with a mutually-acceptable mediator. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree upon the selection of a mediator within ninety (90) Days of receipt of the notice required by Paragraph 23.2, the parties shall submit the dispute to mediation with a mediator selected by the American Arbitration Association from its Construction Mediation Panel pursuant to its Construction Industry Mediation Rules and Mediation Procedures. Unless the Owner and Contractor agree otherwise, the mediator shall schedule and conduct a mediation session within thirty (30) Days of his or her selection or appointment. The mediation shall be held in Steuben County, New York, unless the parties mutually agree upon an alternate location. The parties shall each bear their own costs of mediation and shall share the costs of the mediator or mediators equally. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
23.4 Arbitration. If the parties do not reach agreement at mediation or within thirty (30) Days thereafter, the dispute shall thereafter be resolved by binding arbitration in accordance with the arbitration process set forth in the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, as modified by the provisions of this Paragraph 23.4. Each party waives their right to be heard in a court of law, with or without a jury. An arbitrator’s award shall be final and binding upon the parties, and judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction. The arbitration, if any, shall be held in Steuben County, New York, unless the parties mutually agree upon an alternate location. The parties shall each bear their own costs of arbitration and shall share the costs of the arbitrator or arbitrators equally.
23.4.1 Arbitration Panel. Unless otherwise mutually agreed, any arbitration of any dispute in which an amount greater than $1 million (net of claims and counterclaims, in the aggregate) is in dispute then the dispute shall be heard by a panel of three arbitrators.
23.4.2 Qualification of Arbitrators. Any arbitrator for such a panel shall be selected from a national list of potential arbitrators with experience in the construction industry. The parties shall not select an arbitrator for the panel if the potential arbitrator has had any prior relationship with either of the parties or any key representatives of the parties.
23.4.3 Arbitrators’ Award. Unless otherwise mutually agreed, the arbitrator or arbitrators shall provide a reasoned opinion with findings of fact and conclusion of law.
23.4.4 Consolidation and Joinder in Arbitration.
23.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (i) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation; (ii) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact; and (iii) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).
23.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
51
23.4.4.3 The Owner and the Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Article 23, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation extended to the Owner and the Contractor under this Agreement.
23.5 During the course of resolution of any dispute, the Contractor shall continue the Work unless the Owner, in its sole discretion, suspends or terminates the Work in accordance with Article 11 of this Agreement.
ARTICLE 24- INTERPRETATION
24.1 Each exhibit attached to this Agreement is an integral part of and is incorporated into this Agreement.
24.2 Any reference to an agreement or this Agreement means that agreement as amended or supplemented, subject to any restrictions on amendment contained in that agreement.
24.3 Unless otherwise specified, any reference to a statute or regulation means that statute or regulation as amended or supplemented from time to time and any corresponding provisions of successor statutes or regulations.
24.4 The captions or headings on Articles, Paragraphs, Subparagraphs or Clauses of this Agreement are intended for easy reference and convenience only and in no way define, limit or describe the scope and intent of this Agreement or in any way affect the Contract Documents except as expressly stated herein
24.5 Interpretation of specific words used in this Agreement shall be as follows:
24.5.1 Use of the word “including” shall not be interpreted to exclude anything else when following a general statement and shall not be construed to limit such statement to the specific items identified immediately after the word “including” to similar items, regardless of whether non-limiting language (e.g., “without limitation”, “but not limited to”) appear. Rather, use of the word “including” shall be deemed to refer to all other times that could reasonably fall within the broadest possible scope of the applicable general statement.
24.5.2 Use of the words “termination” or “expiration” are interchangeable unless the context requires otherwise.
24.5.3 Use of the words “will” and “shall” denote a mandatory duty, have the same meaning and are interchangeable unless the context requires otherwise.
24.5.4 Use of the word “may” denotes a discretionary right, not an obligation or duty.
24.5.5 The words “party” and “parties” refer only to a named party to this Agreement.
24.5.6 Reference to a “Paragraph” of this Agreement includes all sub-paragraphs and sub-sub-paragraphs of the identified Paragraph.
24.5.7 The parties expressly agree that this Agreement was jointly drafted, and that both parties had opportunity to negotiate its terms and to obtain the assistance of counsel in reviewing
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
52
its terms prior to execution. Therefore, this Agreement shall be construed neither against nor in favor of either party, but shall be construed in a neutral manner.
24.5.8 This Agreement may be signed in counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument. Electronic or facsimile signatures shall be deemed original signatures.
* * * * *
[SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW]
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT A Detailed Scope of Work
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT B
List of Drawings and Specifications
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT C
Contractor’s Project Team and Labor Billing Rates Contractor’s Project Team: [to be provided] Contractor’s Billing Rates: [to be provided]
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT D Contractor’s Unit Prices
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT E Insurance Requirements
1. Contractor’s Insurance. Before commencing Work on the Project and as a condition of payment, the
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect it from claims arising out of the performance of its Work under this Agreement, whether such services are provided by the Contractor or by any of its Subcontractors or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such insurance shall be provided by insurance companies acceptable to the Owner and licensed to conduct business in the state in which the Project is located. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance evidencing the following coverages and shall thereafter notify the Owner, in writing, at least thirty (30) Days in advance, of cancellation, reduction or material modification of such insurance coverages or reduction in the A.M. Best rating. Such certificates or policies shall be underwritten by a carrier or carriers having an A.M. Best (or equivalent) rating of A- or better, and the Contractor shall maintain such insurance for a period of at least six (6) years following Final Completion of the Project (or longer if required by law). In the event any form of insurance is claims made, the Contractor warrants and represents that they will purchase appropriate tail coverage for claims, demands, or actions reported in future years for acts or omissions during the term of this Agreement. In the event of insufficient coverage, or lapse of coverage, the Owner reserves the right to terminate this Agreement immediately with written notice to the Contractor without monetary penalty to the Owner.
2. Contractor’s Liability Insurance:
Kind of Insurance Minimum Limits
Workers’ Compensation Statutory
Employer’s Liability $1,000,000 each accident/disease
Commercial General Liability $1,000,00 per occurrence $3,000,000 annual aggregate Coverage shall include premises, products, completed operations, independent contractors, personal injury and blanket broad form contractual liability
Pollution Liability $1,000,000 per claim; $2,000,000 annual aggregate
Contractor’s Excess (Umbrella) Liability
$5,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for Bodily Injury and Property Damage, in excess over the CGL, professional liability, auto and pollution policies
Contractor’s Professional Liability
$1,000,000 per occurrence
Contractor’s Commercial Automobile Liability
$1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence including: Bodily Injury and Property Damage, and covering all owned, non-
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
owned and hired vehicles
Property Insurance In an amount equal to replacement value to cover the Contractor’s equipment and goods
a. The Contractor shall cause its commercial general liability coverage to include the Owner as an
additional insured.
3. The Contractor agrees that it and all of its Subcontractors will comply with all applicable Workers’ Compensation laws and that it will from time to time on the request of the Owner furnish evidence to the Owner that all payments required by such laws have been and are being made.
4. The Contractor will permit no Subcontractor to enter upon or continue the performance of the Work unless such Subcontractor is and remains insured in accordance with the requirements of this Exhibit E. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner for any loss suffered by it for the failure of any Subcontractor to be so insured. The indemnity shall survive expiration or termination of this Agreement.
5. The Contractor agrees to provide written notice to the Owner within two (2) business days upon becoming aware of any cancellation, reduction, material change in, or non-renewal, of the insurance required under this Exhibit E. Failure to maintain the required insurance shall be deemed a material breach of this Agreement. Evidence of insurance shall be provided upon execution of this Agreement and upon request thereafter and shall reflect the “additional insured” status for the Owner as required above. Should any required insurance be written on a “claims made” basis, the Contractor agrees to ensure continuity of coverage for claims which may be presented. The Contractor shall notify the Owner within thirty (30) Days of any claims made or loss expenses incurred against the Professional Liability policy. The Owner shall have the right to notify the insurance carrier directly of a claim against the policy.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT F
Not used
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT G Substantial Completion/Final Completion
The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Project shall be considered substantially complete and finally complete according to the following definitions:
PART A – SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
ARTICLE 1- GENERAL, AS TO EACH STRUCTURE WHICH IS PART OF THE PROJECT:
1.1 All temporary construction items not required for completion of the punch list, such as temporary walls, scaffolding, rigging, supports, strainers, blanks, etc., removed.
1.2 Floor broom cleaned and mopped and walls wiped clean.
1.3 Drains flushed and cleaned with covers/grates in place.
1.4 Site drainage system complete.
1.5 Elevators, stairs, etc., complete and functional
1.6 All painting except for minor touch-up complete.
1.7 All built-in cabinetry, casework and hardware complete (shelves, cabinets, counters, etc.).
1.8 Verify Contractor-provided utilities for Owner-supplied equipment are installed and functional as per plans and specifications.
1.9 Use permit issued by local authority and/or temporary certificate of occupancy (TCO) secured by Contractor from appropriate local authorities.
1.10 Wash Basins, showers, etc. complete and operational.
1.11 Building Management System operational.
1.12 All safety and fire protection systems tested and operational and proven to the Owner and Fire Marshall.
1.13 All communication, life safety and security systems tested and operational.
1.14 All doors installed and all air locks operational and tested.
1.15 All areas accessible and isolated from construction activities.
1.16 All signs in place.
1.17 Training of the Owner personnel on the safe operation of all building utility systems complete. Owner to make personnel reasonably available as needed.
1.18 All safety-related punch list items complete.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
ARTICLE 2- ELECTRICAL
2.1 All power, lighting, control equipment, circuitry, systems, etc., complete, cleaned, tested and functional. All Megger readings submitted and approved.
2.2 All protective devices set and functionally tested.
2.3 All lighting fixtures lamped per Contract Documents.
2.4 All receptacles functional, and properly marked with circuit(s) and panel number(s).
2.5 All emergency UPS and/or standby generator systems tested and operational including batteries fully charged. Battery chargers (power supplies) tested and functional.
2.6 At least one (1) set of (red-line) as-built drawings available for switching and troubleshooting.
2.7 List of fuses and overload heaters approved. Proper size fuses and overload heaters installed.
2.8 All spare parts (fuses, overload heaters, etc.) per Contract Documents available to the Owner.
2.9 All temporary power circuitry, conduit, etc. removed.
2.10 All electrical equipment cleaned per the Contract Documents.
2.11 All unused openings closed.
2.12 Security System installed and operational.
2.13 All circuits, panels and electrical devices labeled.
2.14 Card access system installed and operational.
2.15 Data and phone cabling installed and operational.
ARTICLE 3- INSTRUMENTATION
3.1 All field instruments installed, calibrated, documented and functionally tested.
3.2 All control valves and automated on/off valves installed, calibrated where required, documented and functionally tested.
3.3 All safety relief devices (valves/rupture discs) installed and functional. All blockages, plugs or blanks removed. Any documentation required by the specifications to be complete.
3.4 All tubing and signal/control wiring dressed and secured.
3.5 Control and I/O panels installed, tested, cleaned up and dressed out.
3.6 All control loops tested for functionality per loop sheets and P&ID’s.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
3.7 All manual back-up panels installed; all wired/tubed, instruments calibrated, documented and components functionally tested.
3.8 All labeling completed.
3.9 All panels verified clean.
ARTICLE 4- MECHANICAL
4.1 All utility systems mechanically complete, started up and functional per design parameters, including all ductwork, piping, insulation, controls and accessories.
4.2 All safety controls certified in operating condition.
4.3 All HVAC systems balanced to plus or minus ten percent (+10%) of design criteria.
4.4 Temporary construction and startup filters removed and final operating filters installed.
4.5 All HEPA filters tested and certified per specifications. All filters and framing systems inspected by filter manufacturer’s representative. All inspection reports and certifications, as required by specifications, to be submitted to the Owner
4.6 All piping hydrostatically or pneumatically tested and witnessed by the Owner. Any sections of pipe that fail the test shall be reworked and retested as required. All final tests to be witnessed by the Owner.
4.7 Flammable solvent based coatings applied and ventilated.
4.8 Piping systems painted and/or insulated and identified as required. All valves tagged and a valve ID form completed.
4.9 Instruments and controls calibrated, installed and connected to the system.
4.10 Piping systems flushed; all traps and strainers cleaned.
4.11 Piping systems chemically cleaned, passivated and/or sanitized (where required).
4.12 Electrical connections completed, tested and verified.
4.13 Electrical motors checked with respect to amperage and rotation. All information to be documented and submitted to the Owner.
4.14 Confirmation that all water systems are in compliance with project specifications.
4.15 Chemical and biological (where required) analysis of water, air, etc., in utility systems checked for concurrence with design criteria. Sampling, testing and protocol shall be subject to the Owner’s approval prior to such test.
4.16 Equipment checked for alignment, balancing and noise, and documentation, as required by specifications, submitted to the Owner.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
4.17 Utility equipment started up by factory representative, commissioned and installation certified.
4.18 In-place checkout and verification witnessed by the Owner of building system instrumentation and control systems.
4.19 Systems for controlling room air volumes or pressurization tested and calibrated and proven functional by manufacturer’s representative or personnel.
4.20 All clean steam systems functionally tested and calibrated.
4.21 Fire protection system complete and operational and Factory Mutual approved, including fire water storage, pumps, extinguishers, hoses, etc.
4.22 Waste treatment systems installation complete and functionally tested.
4.23 All safety devices such as emergency showers, eye washers, etc. complete, tested and operational.
4.24 All equipment labeled per the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 5- OPERATIONAL MANUALS AND PERSONNEL TRAINING
5.1 Operational manuals and “as-built” drawings made available to allow the Owner safely and efficiently to operate all equipment and systems installed by the Contractor.
5.2 Owner’s Operating Personnel trained by the Contractor on all building equipment as outlined in the Contract Documents.
5.3 The Contractor to provide maintenance and operational records and twenty-four (24) hours per day field personnel as required to properly operate all Contractor-installed equipment for any systems and equipment required to be run prior to Substantial Completion, as required by the Owner.
PART B – FINAL COMPLETION
ARTICLE 1- PROJECT FINAL COMPLETION. Final completion will be attained when the following has occurred:
1.1 The appropriate local governmental authority has issued a final certificate of occupancy.
1.2 All punch list work has been completed and accepted by the Owner.
1.3 The Contractor has confirmed to the Owner that it has provided the Owner with all as-built “red lined” documentation. The Owner will have a reasonable time to review the as-built documents submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall remedy any deviations found in the review process.
1.4 All turn over packages for mechanical, electrical, elevator, fire protection, and utility systems, building automation and distributed control systems, utility equipment, as well as architectural and civil bid packages have been assembled, reviewed and accepted by the Owner.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
1.5 All financial matters have been resolved and reconciled.
1.6 All Subcontractors have submitted final invoices and provided the documentation required under Article 14 of the Agreement, including a Final Lien Waiver and Release of Claims.
1.7 All warranty documentation has been provided to, reviewed by and accepted by the Owner.
1.8 The Design Professional has issued the certificate of Final Completion.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT H
Not Used.
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT I
Addendum
If there i s any c onflict between the terms of this A ddendum a nd the terms o f t his Agreement, t his Addendum controls. ACCESS TO RECORDS Upon written request, _____________ agrees to permit access by t he duly authorized representative of the S ecretary o f t he D epartment o f H ealth and H uman S ervices, an d t he C omptroller G eneral o f t he United States, to the Agreement and to _____________’s books, documents and records, as necessary to verify the cost of services provided hereunder, and to allow similar access to agreements between it and organizations related to i t, and to i ts books, documents and records for a period of four (4) years after such services are furnished under the Agreement or any sub-contracts, all in accordance with Section 952 of t he O mnibus R econciliation A ct of 1980 ( P. L . 90-499) a nd S ection 18 61 ( v) ( 1) ( I) of the S ocial Security A ct an d regulations i ssued t hereunder. I n or der for _______________ to pr ovide qu ality assurance m onitoring a nd acc ess co nsistent w ith t he O mnibus R econciliation A ct of 1980, ______________ shall collect, store and maintain data on all procedures performed by ______________, such data shall be the property of ______________. ___________________________________ ________________________________ Guthrie Cortland Medical Center Contractor Date: Date:
LUMP SUM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT CANCER CENTER PROJECT
{L0310080.8}
EXHIBIT J
Not Used.
SA1509A REFERENCE TO APPLICABLE AIA DOCUMENTS 00 8200-1
SECTION 00 8200 - REFERENCE TO APPLICABLE AIA DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS A. The following documents, latest edition, of the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue,
N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006, when applicable, will be used for the contract administration of the project.
DOC. NO. NAME OF DOCUMENT
G701 CHANGE ORDER
G702 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT (Refer to attached "Exhibit C")
G703 CONTINUATION SHEET
G704 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
G706 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS
G706A CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS
G707 CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT (if applicable) G709 PROPOSAL REQUEST G710 ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS G714 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
G715 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
PART 2 - PRODUCT - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 00 8200
SA1509A PROJECT FORM AND DOCUMENTS 00 8500-1
SECTION 00 8500 - PROJECT FORMS AND DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The forms listed in this section relate to the Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section lists the project forms used for administration of the project. 1.03 FORMS A. GENERAL
1. Equivalent/Substitution Form 2. Submittal Cover Sheet
B. AIA FORMS
1. Change Orders (AIA Document G701) 2. Application and Certification for Payment, (AIA Document G702) 3. Continuation Sheet (AIA Document G703) 4. Contractor’s Affidavit of payment of Debt and Claims, (AIA Document G706) 5. Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens, (AIA Document G706A) 6. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, (AIA Document G707) 7. Proposal request (AIA Document G709) 8. Architects Supplemental Instructions (AIA Document G710) 9. Construction Change Directive (AIA Document G714) 10. Certificate of Insurance (AIA Document G715)
PART 2 - PRODUCT - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
PROJECT: (Name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION: CHANGE ORDER INFORMATION: Contract For: General Construction Change Order Number: 001 Date: Date: OWNER: (Name and address) ARCHITECT: (Name and address) CONTRACTOR: (Name and address)
THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Insert a detailed description of the change and, if applicable, attach or reference specific exhibits. Also include agreed upon adjustments attributable to executed Construction Change Directives.) The original Contract Sum was $ 0.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ 0.00 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 0.00 The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of $ 0.00 The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be $ 0.00
The Contract Time will be increased by Zero (0) days. The new date of Substantial Completion will be NOTE: This Change Order does not include adjustments to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, or the Contract Time, that have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. ARCHITECT (Firm name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name)
SIGNATURE SIGNATURE SIGNATURE
PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE
DATE DATE DATE
1
PROJECT: APPLICATION NO::
PERIOD TO: :CONTRACT FOR: :
VIA CONTRACT DATE: :ARCHITECT: PROJECT NOS: / / :
a. 0$0.00 )=
b. 0 day of$0.00 )=
CONTRACTOR:
4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE (Column G on G703)……………….
5. RETAINAGE:
(Column F on G703:
1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM………………………………………………………
2. NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDERS…………………………………………………………..
3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 ± 2) ………………………………………..
(Line 3 less Line 6)
Total approved this Month
$0.00(Line 6 from prior Certificate)
DEDUCTIONSADDITIONS
TOTALS
Total changes approved in previous months by Owner
$0.00$0.00
$0.00$0.00
$0.00$0.00
NET CHANGES by Change Order
FIELD
$0.00CONTRACTOR:
$0.00
The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due.
Date:By:$0.00
CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTApplication is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract.Continuation Sheet, AIA Document G703, is attached.
State of:
AIA® Document G702™ – 1992
Application and Certificate for Payment
FROM
TO OWNER:OWNER
ARCHITECTCONTRACTOR
Distribution to:
Subscribed and sworn to before% of Stored Material
(Column D + E on G703: me this
County of:% of Completed Work$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE………………………………………………………
CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE……………………………………………. $0.00
This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract.
By:ARCHITECT:
AMOUNT CERTIFIED…………………………………………………………………
Date:
$0.00(Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied. Initial all figures on this
Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform with the amount certified.)
$0.00My Commission expires:Notary Public:
$0.00Total Retainage (Lines 5a + 5b or Total in Column I of G703)…………………………..
General Construction
7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT………………………………..
In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on-site observations and the data comprising this application, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED.9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE
GRAND TOTAL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00
AIA® Document G703™ – 1992
APPLICATION NO:
Continuation Sheet
AIA Document G702, APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT,containing Contractor's signed certification is attached.In tabulations below, amounts are in US dollars.Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply.
APPLICATION DATE:
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO:
PERIOD TO:
ITEM NO.
SCHEDULED VALUE
WORK COMPLETEDDESCRIPTION OF
WORK
TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE
(D + E + F)
MATERIALS PRESENTLY
STORED(NOT IN D OR E)
G
002
RETAINAGE(IF VARIABLE
RATE)
BALANCE TO FINISH(C - G)
% (G ÷ C)
Label 10Applica Application Period To:
LLLLC. G.
AIA®
Document G706TM – 1994 Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims
PROJECT: (Name and address) ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER: ARCHITECT:
CONTRACTOR: SURETY:
OTHER:
1 CONTRACT FOR: General Construction TO OWNER: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: STATE OF: COUNTY OF: The undersigned hereby certifies that, except as listed below, payment has been made in full and all obligations have otherwise been satisfied for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for damages arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above for which the Owner or Owner's property might in any way be held responsible or encumbered. EXCEPTIONS: SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: CONTRACTOR: (Name and address) 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. Whenever
Surety is involved, Consent of Surety is required. AIA Document G707, Consent of Surety, may be used for this purpose
Indicate Attachment Yes No
BY: The following supporting documents should be attached hereto if required by the Owner:
(Signature of authorized representative)
1. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens,
conditional upon receipt of final payment. (Printed name and title)
2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, to the extent required by the Owner, accompanied by a list thereof.
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date:
Notary Public: 3. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA
Document G706A). My Commission Expires:
AIA®
Document G706ATM – 1994 Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens
PROJECT: (Name and address) ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
OWNER:
ARCHITECT:
CONTRACTOR:
SURETY:
OTHER:
1 CONTRACT FOR: General
Construction TO OWNER: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: STATE OF: COUNTY OF: The undersigned hereby certifies that to the best of the undersigned's knowledge, information and belief, except as listed below, the Releases or Waivers of Lien attached hereto include the Contractor, all Subcontractors, all suppliers of materials and equipment, and all performers of Work, labor or services who have or may have liens or encumbrances or the right to assert liens or encumbrances against any property of the Owner arising in any manner out of the performance of the Contract referenced above. EXCEPTIONS: SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: CONTRACTOR: (Name and address) 1. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens,
conditional upon receipt of final payment.
2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from
Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, to the extent required by the Owner, accompanied by a list thereof.
BY: (Signature of authorized
representative)
(Printed name and title) Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date:
Notary Public: My Commission Expires:
AIA®
Document G707TM – 1994 Consent Of Surety to Final Payment
PROJECT: (Name and address) ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER:
ARCHITECT:
CONTRACTOR:
SURETY:
OTHER:
1 CONTRACT FOR: General Construction TO OWNER: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATED:
In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the (Insert name and address of Surety)
, SURETY, on bond of (Insert name and address of Contractor)
, CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety of any of its obligations to (Insert name and address of Owner)
, OWNER, as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date: (Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.) (Surety)
(Signature of authorized representative)
Attest: (Seal): (Printed name and title)
$,WAIA Document G709TM - 2018
Proposal Reguest
PROJEGT: (name and address) : CONTRACT INFORMATION:
OWNER: (name and address): ARCHITECT: (name and address): CONTRACTOR: (name and address)
The Owner requests an itemized proposal for ohanges to tho Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed
modifications to the Contract Documents described herein. The Contractor shall submit this proposal within
(_) days or noti$ the Architect in writing of the anticipated date of submission.(Insert a detailed description of the proposed rnodifications to the Contlact Documents and, if applicable, attach orr efer enc e sp e c ifi c exhibit s. )
THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER, A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE, OR A DIRECTION TO PROCEED WITH THE
WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS.
REQUESTED BY THE ARCHITEGT:
PRINTED NAME AND TITLE
AIA Document G7O9IM - 2018. Copyright @ 1993, 20Ol and 2018 by The American lnstitute of Archilects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAoDocument is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and lnternational Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAo Document, orany portion oi it, may result in severe civil and criminal penatties, and will be prosecuted to th6 maximum extent possible under tho law. Toreporl copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American lnstitute of Architects' legal counsel, [email protected].
PROJECT (Name and address): ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL OWNER:
ARCHITECT:
CONSULTANT:
CONTRACTOR:
FIELD:
OTHER:
1 INSTRUCTION NO: 001 OWNER (Name and address): DATE OF ISSUANCE: CONTRACT FOR: General Construction FROM ARCHITECT (Name and address):
CONTRACT DATE:
TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address):
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgment that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. DESCRIPTION: ATTACHMENTS: (Here insert listing of documents that support description.) ISSUED BY THE ARCHITECT:
(Signature) (Printed name and title)
AIA®
Document G714TM – 2007 Construction Change Directive
PROJECT: (Name and address) DIRECTIVE NUMBER: 001 OWNER: ARCHITECT:
CONSULTANT: CONTRACTOR:
FIELD: OTHER:
Miscellaneous DATE: CONTRACT FOR: General Construction TO CONTRACTOR: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
You are hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract: (Describe briefly any proposed changes or list any attached information in the alternative) PROPOSED ADJUSTMENTS 1. The proposed basis of adjustment to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price is:
• Lump Sum decrease of $0.00 • Unit Price of $ per • As provided in Section 7.3.3 of AIA Document A201-2007 • As follows:
2. The Contract Time is proposed to (remain unchanged). The proposed adjustment, if any, is 0 days. When signed by the Owner and Architect and received by the Contractor, this document becomes effective IMMEDIATELY as a Construction Change Directive (CCD), and the Contractor shall proceed with the change(s) described above.
Contractor signature indicates agreement with the proposed adjustments in Contract Sum and Contract Time set forth in this CCD.
PROJECT (Name and address): Miscellaneous INSURED A. General Liability Yes No N/A
1. Does the General Aggregate apply to this Project only? 2. Does this policy include coverage for:
a. Premises - Operations? b. Explosion, Collapse and Underground Hazards? c. Personal Injury Coverage? d. Products Coverage? e. Completed Operations? f. Contractual Coverage for the Insured's obligations in A201?
3. If coverage is written on a claims-made basis, what is the: a. Retroactive Date? b. Extended Reporting Date? B. Worker's Compensation
1. If the Insured is exempt from Worker's Compensation statutes, does the Insured carry the equivalent Voluntary Compensation coverage?
C. Final Payment Information 1. Is this certificate being furnished in connection with the Contractor's request for
final payment in accordance with the requirements of Sections 9.10.2 and 11.1.3 of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction?
2. If so, and if the policy period extends beyond termination of the Contract for Construction, is Completed Operations coverage for this Project continued for the balance of the policy period?
D. Termination Provisions 1. Has each policy shown on the certificate and this Supplement been endorsed to
provide the holder with 30 days notice of cancellation and/or expiration? List below any policies which do not contain this notice.
E. Other Provisions
Authorized Representative
Date of Issue
SA1509A GENERAL SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1000-1
SECTION 01 1000 - GENERAL SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Title of Project b. Scope of Work Summary c. Building Permit
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 TITLE OF PROJECT A. Guthrie Cortland Medical Center (GCMC) Cancer Treatment Center
34 West Main Street Cortland, NY 13045
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK SUMMARY A. The work includes the following, as set forth in the Contract Documents (areas are approximate):
1. Cancer Treatment Center Building: Complete construction of a new, freestanding, 10,896 SF, 1-story facility, including a 1,150 SF reinforced concrete vault (for the Linear accelerator) and an 11,00 SF entry (vehicular drop-off) canopy.
2. Related sitework on the 3.1 acre site, including storm drainage, asphalt pavement, landscaping, site lighting, curbing, etc..
1.04 BUILDING PERMIT
A. The Owner shall be responsible for (make all arrangements, secure, and pay for) the building permit.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for (making all agreements, secure & pay for) all other permits, licenses, inspections.
C. Contractor shall notify code enforcement officials and inspectors for inspection of work during
construction. Contractor shall coordinate with code enforcement officials and inspectors to ensure that timely notification is given for all necessary inspections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 1000
SA1509A CONTRACTOR MANUAL 01 1200-1
SECTION 01 1200 - CONTRACTOR MANUAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Contractor rights, responsibilities, safety procedures, etc. are delineated in the “Contractor Manual” included at the end of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 1200
rjs
Typewritten Text
911
rjs
Typewritten Text
911
rjs
Typewritten Text
911
SA1509A UNIT PRICES 01 2200-1
SECTION 01 2200 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the
Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.03 PROCEDURES A. Unit Prices listed below shall be used when and if required by the Owner for all additions and/or deletions
to the Contract Quantities and shall be inclusive of furnishing and installing all material, labor, overhead, profit, equipment, hoisting, scaffolding, trucking, handling, submissions, layout, permits, insurance, applicable taxes, coordination, hangers, inserts, couplings, testing, delivery, supervision, etc., and shall remain in effect throughout the course of this Contract. Items covered by these Unit Prices shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Specification and Drawing in quantities and locations as directed by the Owner. All work shall conform to the Contract Documents.
B. Unit Prices shall be subject to and include all terms and conditions of the Contract, all parts of Division 1,
all applicable parts of the Drawings and Specifications, and related documents. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor’s measurement of work-in-place that involves the use of
established unit prices and to have this work measured at the Owner’s expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to by Contractor.
D. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the work
under each Unit Price and to provide the complete construction required by Contract Documents. E. The unit prices listed shall be for additional work. If work is deleted, the cost shall be the unit price less
ten percent (10%) for contractor overhead and profit. F. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included on the Bid Forms. PART 2 - LIST OF UNIT PRICES 2.01 SITEWORK (S)
S-1 Granite Curb a. Description: Granite curb, including excavation and backfill, in accordance with the
drawings and specifications. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed.
S-2 Excavation & Backfill
a. Description: Excavation, structural fill, and compaction, in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
b. Unit of Measurement: cubic yard
S-3 Asphalt Pavement a. Description: Asphalt pavement, including geotextile fabric, subbase course, binder
course, and top course, in accordance with Drawing GD1.2 and the specifications. b. Unit of Measurement: Square foot, installed.
SA1509A UNIT PRICES 01 2200-2
S-4 Concrete Sidewalk a. Description: 5’ wide concrete sidewalk, including excavation and backfill, in accordance with
drawings and specifications. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed
2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION (GC)
GC-1 Partition Type 1 a. Description: Type 1 partition in accordance with the drawings and specifications. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed.
GC-2. Ceramic Tile PWT-2, installed
a. Description: All labor and materials specified in Section 09 3000. b. Unit of Measurement: Square foot, installed.
GC-3: Door Frame and Hardware (match Door 114A)
a. Description: Provide HM door and frame and hardware as required for Door 114A. b. Unit of Measurement: Each, installed.
2.03 PLUMBING (P)
P-1. Domestic Water Piping 3/4" a. Description: Provide new 3/4” copper piping and insulation, in accordance with Division
22 Specifications. Include hangers and supports as necessary. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed.
P-2. Sanitary Waste Piping 4”
a. Description: Provide new 4” sanitary waste piping (under ground), in accordance with Division 22 Specifications. Include hangers and supports as necessary.
b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed. 2.04 HVAC (H)
H-1. Supply Duct 12” x 10” a. Description: Provide 12” x 10” supply ductwork in accordance with Division 23
specifications. Include insulation, hangers, and supports as necessary. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed.
H-2. Exhaust Duct 10” Diameter
a. Description: Provide 10” diameter exhaust ductwork in accordance with Division 23 specifications. Include hangers and supports as necessary.
b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed.
H-3. Hot Water Supply Piping 1 ½” a. Description: Provide 1 ½” hot water supply piping in accordance with Division 23
specifications. Include insulation, hangers, and supports as necessary. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot, installed
2.05 ELECTRICAL (E)
E-1. Light Fixture ‘L1A’ a. Description: Provide Light Fixture ‘L1A’, including lamps, hangers, and 20 linear feet of
conductors and raceway, in accordance with the electrical drawings and Division 26 specifications.
b. Unit of Measurement: Each, installed.
SA1509A UNIT PRICES 01 2200-3
E-2. Light Fixture ‘L2’ a. Description: Provide Light Fixture ‘L2’, including lamps, hangers, and 20 linear feet of
conductors and raceway, in accordance with the electrical drawings and Division 26 specifications.
b. Unit of Measurement: Each, installed.
E-3 Duplex Electrical Outlet a. Description: Provide duplex electrical outlet, including cover plate, junction box, and 50
linear feet of conductors and raceway in accordance with the electrical drawings and Division 26 specifications.
b. Unit of Measurement: Each, installed.
E-4 Communications Outlet a. Description: Provide communications outlet, including cover plate, junction box, and 50
linear feet of conductors and raceway in accordance with the electrical drawings and Division 26 specifications.
b. Unit of Measurement: Each, installed. PART 3 – EXECUTION: NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 2200
SA1509A ALTERNATES 01 2300-1
SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES CONDITIONS APPLICABLER TO ALTERNATES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Conditions
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including DIVISION 0 & DIVISION 1 specification
sections, apply to this section. 1.02 CONDITIONS A. All applicable provisions of the Contract Documents apply to the work specified in this section. B. This section describes the alternate work and materials for which the Contract shall quote the costs,
whether adding to or deducting from his Base Bid. Or, where a particular alternate does not add to or deduct from the Base Bid, the word "NONE" shall be written in the Bid Form, using the appropriate spaces set forth therein. The alternate price quotations shall include all labor, materials, equipment, overhead, and profit necessary to add to or deduct from the total amount of each alternate proposal.
C. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Alternate Bids. D. See Bid Sheet for description of alternates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 2300
SA1509A CUTTING & PATCHING 01 3320-1
SECTION 01 3320 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Definitions b. Submittals c. Quality assurance d. Coordination
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "CUTTING AND PATCHING" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation of
other work, and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. PROCEDURAL PROPOSAL FOR CUTTING AND PATCHING: Where prior approval is required, submit
to Architect a complete description of the cut and patch procedure well in advance of the work. Include nature of work, material and methods description, reason why it can't be avoided, and, if involving utility disturbance, time, dates, utility company approvals, and duration of interruption.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STRUCTURAL WORK: Do not cut and patch structural work without Architect's review and written
approval.
B. PRODUCT PERFORMANCE: Cut and patch in a manner maintaining in full a product's originally intended performance, including maintenance, operational life, and durability.
C. Utilize, where possible, the original installer to cut and patch exposed work. 1.05 COORDINATION A. The mechanical and electrical subcontractors shall be responsible for the timely and accurate layout of
their work.
B. Where timely notice is not provided, cutting of completed surfaces of the building shall be done by other contractors at the expense of the contractor at fault.
C. Each sub-contractor shall provide for all cutting and patching required to perform his work. D. Any hole(s) cut incorrectly will be patched by the appropriately qualified sub-contractor at the expense of
the sub-contractor at fault.
E. Any openings required to be cut through the roof system shall include installation of headers and blocking to support remaining deck and other material above.
F. All openings in walls shall include installation of headers or lintels to support wall materials and masonry above opening.
SA1509A CUTTING & PATCHING 01 3320-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Architect, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials.
2. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect.
3. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal-or-better performance characteristics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Before the start of any cutting work, conduct "related trades" coordination meetings as required to
coordinate layout of the work and resolve potential conflicts. 3.02 PREPARATION A. TEMPORARY SUPPORT: The sub-contractor performing the work is fully responsible for all required
temporary support of work being cut and affected adjacent work.
B. PROTECTION: The sub-contractor performing the work is fully responsible for the protection of all adjacent work from damage resulting from his cutting and patching work.
3.03 PERFORMANCE A. GENERAL:
1. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. 2. Utilize methods least likely to damage retained or adjoining work. 3. Where necessary, extend patchwork into adjoining work to eliminate evidence of refinishing.
3.04 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed, including areas used as access.
END OF SECTION 01 3320
SA1509A SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3400-1
SECTION 01 3400 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Procedures described in this section: a. Procedures b. Shop drawings, product data, and samples c. Architect's action
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 GENERAL A. The procedures outlined here apply to all submittals unless stated otherwise.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling submittals to avoid delays in the work. A minimum of
ten (10) working days each is required for the Architect's review. C. All submittals (except samples) shall be submitted electronically, as .pdf files, by the Contractor.
Submittals shall be distributed by the Contractor simultaneously to Architect and Owner's representative. The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of each sample to the architect.
1.03 PROCEDURES A. All submittals must first be reviewed, approved, and appropriately stamped/signed by the Contractor for
verification of field dimensions and conformance to Contract Documents prior to being submitted to the Architect. 1. ANY SUBMISSION NOT APPROPRIATELY STAMPED WILL BE RETURNED IMMEDIATELY
WITHOUT REVIEW. B. Utilize "Submittal Cover Sheet," at end of this section, for all submissions.
C. When re-submittal is required, identify clearly all changes.
D. Distribute returned copies of reviewed submittals to the appropriate subcontractors.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents but requested by the Contractor, or supplied by those
under contract, need not be submitted to the Architect. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. Submit all Submittals (except samples) electronically. B. Submittals shall include:
1. Contractor's transmittal. 2. "Submittal Cover Sheet." 3. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 4. Applicable standards (i.e., ASTM, etc.). 5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents and justification for same. 6. Submit manufacturer's certificates indicating compliance with specifications, where applicable.
C. Submittals for materials and equipment requiring conformance to industry regulatory standards (i.e., UL, ASTM, FS, ANSI, etc.) shall conform with the following: 1. Compliance with the specified standards and/or test methods shall be clearly indicated. 2. The Architect will not establish equivalency between differing standards and/or test methods.
SA1509A SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3400-2
3. FAILURE TO SHOW COMPLIANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED STANDARDS AND/OR TEST METHODS SHALL BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION WITHOUT REVIEW.
D. REVIEW TIME: No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit
submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the work to permit the proper review and re-submittal time.
E. INSTALLATION COPY: 1. Do not proceed with the work until an Architect-approved copy of the submittal has been received
by the Contractor. Architect will return submittals, with comments/actions, electronically (As .pdf files).
2. Do not permit the use of unmarked copies of submittals. F. ARCHITECT'S ACTION:
1. FINAL UNRESTRICTED RELEASE: Where the submittals are marked "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN", the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the requirements of the contract documents.
2. FINAL-BUT-RESTRICTED RELEASE: When the submittals are marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED", the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the notations or corrections marked on the submittal and with the requirements of the contract documents.
3. RETURNED FOR RE-SUBMITTAL: a. When the submittal is marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", do not proceed with the work
covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Do not permit these submittals to be used at the project site, or elsewhere where work is in progress.
b. Review the marked notations, revise the submittal, and resubmit the submittal without delay.
4. REJECTED AND RETURNED: a. When the submittal is marked "REJECTED", do not proceed with work covered by the
submittal. Do not permit these submittals to be used at the project site, or elsewhere where work is in progress.
b. The submission is rejected for non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the regulatory requirements, and/or incomplete material submission.
c. Make a new submittal. G. RESPONSIBILITY:
1. By approving shop drawings and samples, the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing and sample with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
2. Review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not be construed as a complete check but will indicate only that the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review of such drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any error which may exist in the submittals, or conflict between that submitted and that shown in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 3400
SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET SUBMITTAL #
OWNER Guthrie Cortland Medical Center (GCMC) 134 Homer Avenue Cortland, NY 13045
ARCHITECT PROJECT: Schopfer Architects LLP GCMC Cancer Treatment Center 1111 James Street 34 West Main Street Syracuse, NY 13203 Cortland, NY 13045 ARCHITECT'S PROJECT #: 1509A DATE OF SUBMITTAL: SUBCONTRACTOR: SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION: REFERENCES: Specification Section(s) Paragraph(s) NO EXCEPTION TAKEN CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL STAMP MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED REJECTED REVISE AND RESUBMIT SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Notations are subject to the requirements
of the plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. SCHOPFER ARCHITECTS LLP Syracuse, New York DATE BY
REMARKS:
SA1509A COORDINATION 01 3410-1
SECTION 01 3410 - COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Project coordination procedures:
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 COORDINATION RESPONSIBILITY AND MEETINGS A. GENERAL:
1. These coordination requirements must be participated in by the Contractor and all Subcontractors, where applicable.
2. The Contractor may assign certain items of work to specific Subcontractors. B. MEETINGS:
1. The Contractor will schedule and hold bi-weekly general project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times that are convenient for the attendance of other prime contractors and other parties involved.
2. These meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular project meetings and special pre-installation meetings.
3. Required attendance includes the Contractor and every other entity identified by the Contractor as being currently involved with the coordination or planning for the work of the entire project.
4. Conduct meetings in a manner that resolves coordination problems. 5. The Contractor shall preside at each meeting, record meeting results, and distribute copies of the
meeting results to everyone in attendance and to others affected by the decisions and actions resulting from each meeting.
6. At the option of the Contractor, bi-weekly coordination meetings may be held integrally with weekly progress meetings.
1.03 CONTRACTOR’S SUPERINTENDENT A. The Contractor shall provide specific coordinating personnel as reasonably required for interfacing work
with others of total project. 1.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES A. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES:
1. The Contractor shall schedule and hold pre-installation meetings at the project site well before installation of each unit of work which requires coordination with other units of work.
2. Contractor will advise Architect of scheduled meetings, dates and times. 3. The following shall attend these meetings:
a. Sub-Contractors involved in the unit or work b. The installer c. Representatives of manufacturers d. Fabricators who are involved in or affected by that unit of work that has preceded or will
follow
SA1509A COORDINATION 01 3410-2
4. Review progress of other (related) work and required preparation for the unit of work under consideration.
5. Review the following specifics related to unit of work under consideration. a. Coordination with Owner b. Contract documents c. Options d. Related change orders e. Purchases f. Deliveries g. Shop drawings, product data and quality control samples h. Conflicts i. Compatibility problems j. Time schedules k. Weather limitations l. Manufacturer's recommendations m. Compatibility of materials n. Acceptability of substrates o. Temporary facilities p. Space and access limitations q. Governing regulations r. Safety s. Inspection and testing requirements t. Required performance results u. Recording requirements v. Protection
6. The Contractor shall record significant discussions, agreements, and disagreements of each conference, along with the final plan of action and distribute record of meeting promptly to all parties concerned, including the Owner and Architect.
7. The Contractor shall initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the work and shall reconvene pre-installation conference at the earliest feasible date.
B. RESPONSIBILITIES OF INSTALLER OF EACH MAJOR UNIT OR WORK:
1. Inspect the substrate to receive the work and conditions under which the work is to be performed and report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Contractor.
2. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
C. MOUNTING HEIGHTS:
1. Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry recognized standard-mounting heights for the particular application indicated.
2. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Architect for final decision. 1.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings where work by separate entities requires fabrication off-site of products
and materials, which must accurately interface.
B. Coordination drawings shall indicate how work shown by separate shop drawings will interface and shall indicate installation sequence.
C. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
D. Where coordination drawings cover primarily the work of one contract, with only minor amounts of work by other Contractors included, the Contractor with the major amount of work shall prepare coordination drawings, as designated by the Architect.
E. Where coordination drawings cover substantial amounts of work by more than one Contractor, including
the Contractor, the Contractor shall prepare coordination drawings.
SA1509A COORDINATION 01 3410-3
1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. SUBMITTALS OF STAFF NAMES, DUTIES:
1. Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a listing of the Contractor's and Subcontractor's principal staff assignments and consultants, naming persons and listing their addresses and telephone numbers.
1.07 SPECIAL REPORTS A. GENERAL:
1. Submit special reports directly to the Owner within one day of an occurrence. 2. Submit a copy of the report to the Architect/Engineer and other entities affected by the
occurrence. B. REPORTING ACCIDENT:
1. Prepare and submit reports of significant accidents, at site and anywhere else work is in progress.
2. Record and document data and actions. 3. For this purpose, a significant accident is defined to include events where personal injury is
sustained, or property loss of substance is sustained, or where the event posed a significant threat of loss or personal injury.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 3410
SA1509A MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 3420-1
SECTION 01 3420 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Procedures required for all specification sections: a. Schedule of values b. Application for payment c. Payments and completion
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a .pdf file of typed schedule to the Architect on AIA Form G703 Continuation Sheet within 10
calendar days from the date of award of the contract. 1.03 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. FORM: Notarized AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA
Document G703, Continuation Sheet, and AIA Document G706, Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens for all Contractors and All Major Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers." Submit 3 copies of application for payment and all supporting documents.
1.04 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. The Contractor will be paid monthly 90% prorated value of the work and the materials incorporated in the
Project or materials suitably stored and verified to be on the site.
B. Unless modified or changed in the Owner and Contractor Agreement, requisitions received by the Architect on or before the 25th day of the month will be submitted to the Owner by the 10th day of the next month. Payment to the Contractor will be made in 30 days from receipt of approved application. Failure to submit applications by the 25th will result in a full month delay in processing and payment. Unless modified or changed in the Owner and Contractor Agreement, 10% of the amount of each requisition shall be retained, until Completion, at which time, the retainage will be reduced to 0%.
END OF SECTION 01 3420
SA1509A CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01 3430-1
SECTION 01 3430 - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Change Order forms b. Documentation and correlation c. Construction change authorization d. Lump sum change orders
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE FORMS A. Utilize only the following forms:
1.03 DOCUMENTATION AND CORRELATION A. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes and to substantiate costs of changes
in the Work. Include, as a minimum, a labor and material unit cost breakdown for each component of the work.
B. All requests for change must be submitted and approved in writing by the Owner prior to any work being initiated.
C. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each approved Change Order.
D. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. Only the Owner is authorized to approve Change Orders. 1.05 LUMP SUM CHANGE ORDER A. Only Lump Sum Change Order requests will be considered, unless otherwise directed by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 3430
SA1509A PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 3440-1
SECTION 01 3440 - PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. All Contractors performing construction or construction related activities on the site, are responsible to
comply with the Project Safety Program and are directly responsible for the safety of their employees. 1.02 SITE SPECIFIC SAFETY PROGRAM A. The Contractor shall submit a written, site-specific, Health and Safety Plan to the Owner prior to the start
of the work. The Health and Safety Program/Plan must address the following items: 1. Emergency Action Plan (1926.35) for this site (maintained to reflect state of construction) 2. Hazard Communication (1926.59) 3. Emergency phone numbers of key Contractor/Subcontractor Personnel. The list of all emergency
telephone numbers must be maintained up-to-date and shall also be posted in any temporary office facilities along with a telephone for easy access by all employees of this Contractor/Subcontractor.
4. Incident Investigation procedure/forms 5. First Aid: include provisions for prompt medical attention in case of injury; names of qualified first
aid persons on site & locations of first aid kits. 6. Competent persons- Safety & Health (Include names of competent persons for scaffold erection
and trenching operations) 7. Plan to protect employees during specific work activities at this project. (Note: Fall prevention and
protection must always be specifically addressed). 8. Rescue plans for falls in harnesses, man-down in confined space and unexpected health issues. 9. Fall Protection Program 10. Method of providing fall protection for all work at heights of both personnel and material.
1.03 COMPETENT PERSON A. The Contractor shall have on the project site at all times while work is in progress, a Safety Competent
Person whose responsibility shall be to implement the safety program, coordinate with the Architect and Owner, maintain records, and organize and participate in training sessions. He/she shall have the authority to stop and/or correct all unsafe and unhealthy conditions. The Contractor shall perform his work in accordance with their Site Specific Project Safety Program, Architect and Owner requirements, all Federal, State and local fire, safety, and health regulations.
B. A Competent Person is one who has had specialize training to recognize hazardous and dangerous situations associated with a construction operation. The following operations require a Competent Person present when the operation is taking place: 1. Working at an elevated level where a fall is possible. 2. Erection and the integrity of scaffolds. 3. Excavations – integrity of subsurface soils while excavating and trenching. 4. The identification and use of hazardous substances. 5. Confined space entry.
1.04 TOOL BOX TRAINING A. Each Contractor shall conduct Weekly Safely Meetings and “Toolbox Talks” for all their employees on the
job. Copies of signed “Toolbox Talks” shall be submitted to the Owner on a monthly basis. 1.05 GENERAL SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS A. All construction personnel shall receive a photo identification badge from the Owner. This photo
identification shall be worn in a conspicuous place on the individual for quick identification by others.
SA1509A PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 3440-2
Construction personnel without photo identifications will not be allowed on site. Any lost or stolen photo identifications shall be reported to the Owner.
B. Contractor personnel shall wear appropriate clothing; hard hats and work boots meeting ANSI standards: long pants and shirts with a minimum of 4” sleeves are required at all times. Shorts and sneakers are unacceptable.
C. Contractors shall provide and enforce the use, at all times, of personal protective equipment, including, but not limited to eye protection, hearing protection, respiratory protection, as required by the Contractor’s Project Site Specific Safety Plan, Federal, State and Local Regulations, and/or manufacturer recommendations.
D. If, for any reason during performance of the work, perimeter cables, barricades, floor or roof opening covers, or any other safety-related items are removed to perform work, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor removing the safety related item to replace it promptly when leaving the area. This safety related items shall be replaced in a manner that meets OSHA requirements.
E. Clean up is a safety related condition. Refer to Specification SECTION 01 7010 - CLEAN UP REQUIREMENTS.
F. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to enforce with his subcontractors the Project Safety Program. Subcontractors are required to comply with all safety requirements in the same manner as the Contractor.
G. Insubordination, unsafe practices, abusive behavior or language, use of drugs, alcohol, possession of
firearms, solicitation, etc. will not be tolerated. There will be no warnings. Each contractor shall designate a responsible onsite supervisor to handle such situations that may arise, including immediate removal and termination from the project. The Owner reserves the right to remove anyone from the project deemed to be causing a hazard or acting in an unsafe manner where it can cause harm to other construction personnel and/or public.
H. The Contractor shall use proper tools for each task and maintain these tools in safe operating condition. Contractor shall verify that all employees are fully trained, have read, and fully understood, operating procedures before machinery or equipment is used.
I. The Contractor shall continuously check for and correct any unsafe practices or conditions that exist in the performance of their work, and shall report to the Owner any unsafe conditions created by others.
J. Smoking or the use of tobacco products on the Owner’s property is not allowed.
K. A plan showing the site and the most direct route to the nearest hospital and emergency phone numbers shall be posted at all job trailers and at key points within the construction.
L. Life Safety Systems in the Building, once operational, must be maintained. Any shut down of service must be approved by the Owner.
M. All operations that create dust and/or odors must be minimized. Construction dust and odors are not permitted in Owner occupied areas of the site.
N. No pest control measure can be used on the project. If there exists a pest control problem, contact the Owner.
O. The Contractor personnel should avoid Owner occupied areas of the site when business is in operation. P. The Contractor shall maintain a current list of all employees and their sub-subcontractor personnel on the
site.
SA1509A PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 3440-3
1.06 SITE RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall review with the Owner, prior to starting work, the impact of their work on the project
site and personnel and the potential impact of project site’s operations on the contractor/subcontractor’s operations or personnel.
B. The Contractor must fully coordinate any work occurring in or around, or which may potentially disrupt adjacent facilities, services or utilities operations with the Owner prior to start of work onsite.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner when any work which generates excessive dust or fumes in Owner-occupied portions of the site. Each Contractor shall provide suitable ventilation and dust control measures to maintain satisfactory conditions, or perform such work after the normal working hours of potentially impacted areas.
D. The Contractor shall obey the directives of all project signs. Contractors shall post signs and other warnings, as necessary for the safe performance and completion of their work.
E. The Contractor shall only use the designated site entry for access and egress, including employee access and equipment or material deliveries.
F. Contractor employees operating vehicles in excess of the speed limit, or in any otherwise unsafe manner, will be directed to leave the site and not be permitted to return. The speed limit within the project area is 5 MPH
G. Working hours for the project are 7 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Any changes to this
schedule must be only as permitted by the Owner.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing safe access in order to perform own work; i.e., ladders, scaffolding, stairs, lifts, ice removal, etc., and all conforming to OSHA standards.
I. The Contractor shall provide a competent person for ladders and scaffolds in accordance with applicable standards. Employees shall be properly trained and documentation of training provided to the Owner. Documentation stating that all ladders and scaffolding have been inspected and are in good working condition is required prior to their arrival at the jobsite and daily inspection prior to each shift. All ladders and scaffolding must be inspected and verified safe for use on a daily basis by their competent person.
J. The Contractor shall maintain continual general housekeeping in the work area and break area, and shall place all debris in specified areas or containers.
K. Hazardous materials, including asbestos in any form, shall not be disturbed, and shall be reported to the Owner immediately. Work in the area shall not proceed until appropriate mitigation or containment has been accomplished.
1.07 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment with quick hitch systems: Exclusion zones must be established and maintained around
operating earth moving machines to prevent workers being struck by either the machine or any tool due to the failure of any quick hitch system. No unauthorized persons should be allowed to work within 3 meters of an operating machine, or under any load or part of an operating machine at any time.
B. A competent crane coordinator is required to develop the site specific lifting plan and to coordinate and manage crane operations on site, including but not limited to: establishing exclusion zones; ensuring all permit requirements are satisfied; ensuring that daily coordination and task hazard briefing meetings are held with subcontractors and operatives; that all operators, slingers and signalers are competent, and that safe slinging practices are followed.
C. All cranes must be fitted with operational Automatic Safe Load Indicators (ASLI’s) and have clear visual
indicators of their rated capacity at given radii. Wind speed meters shall be provided and used and weather conditions monitored to ensure the safe working limits of cranes are not exceeded.
SA1509A PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 3440-4
1.08 ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENT REPORTS A. The Contractor shall make a complete investigation of all accidents/incidents to determine the cause so
that corrective action can be taken to prevent similar events in the future. In addition, Contractors shall report all accidents and injuries to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner, on a timely basis, with an incident report and copy of Employer’s C-2 report, along with any medical facility or physician reports.
C. Any Contractor who was directly or indirectly involved in the incident through his employees, equipment, installation, temporary facilities, or other related involvement, shall be required to prepare an independent incident/accident report in accordance with the Contractor’s procedures, and submit copies to the Owner within 24 hours of the incident.
1.09 MEDICAL SERVICES AND FIRST AID A. If a clinic, hospital or physician is not reasonably accessible; a person who has a valid certificate in first
aid training shall be available at the worksite to render first aid. Provide Owner with names of all persons qualified as first aid responders. A means of identifying these persons should also be available to Contractor’s personnel on site.
B. The Contractor shall provide first aid supplies, easily accessible to all workers (i.e. in job trailer and/or gang boxes).
C. Report all medical emergencies to the Owner immediately. 1.10 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR PROJECT A. Alarm: In the event of alarm of fire, a bomb threat, or other reason for emergency evacuation all
construction personnel must exit the building through the closest exit.
B. Exits: All exits must remain clear of materials, debris, equipment, snow and ice to allow egress for the building(s) occupants.
C. Muster Points: All construction personnel upon exiting the building shall move a minimum of 200 feet away from the building. Each construction crew supervisor shall check to see that everyone that was working in that crew is accounted for. Report immediately to the incident command post any construction personnel that appears to be missing. Until directed otherwise the crews shall remain together at a point of 200 feet from the exit they used to leave the building. (Stay together for accountability) Note – The incident command post is the fire officer or police officer in charge of the emergency.
1.11 FIRE PROTECTION – EMERGENCY PROCEDURES A. For Fire, Rescue, Ambulance or Police dial 911.
B. In case of fire, activate the fire alarm to the local fire department so they can respond. Report all fire
incidents to the Owner. 1.12 LICENSING/CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. The following individuals licensed/certified in the proper operation of the following equipment, to be used
by that individual on this project. Individual's license shall be produced for the Owner's review upon request: 1. Powder activated tools 2. Fork Trucks operations 3. Crane operations 4. Scaffolding 5. Scissor Lifts and Articulating Booms 6. Welding Certificates
SA1509A PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 3440-5
7. Hazardous Material Abatement 1.13 HOT WORK A. The Contractor shall maintain a fire watch during all cutting/welding operations using only qualified
personnel. The fire watch shall continue not less than thirty (30) minutes after the completion of cutting/welding operations each day. Contractors shall provide and maintain sufficient fire protection equipment in each ‘hot work’ area. Hot Work Permits are required to be issued by the Owner a minimum of 24 hours of using any open flame or welding.
B. A Hot Work Permit must be completed for each condition that creates “hot work” and submitted to the Owner prior to start of said “hot work”.
1.14 CONFINED SPACES A. All work in pipe tunnels, mechanical pits, well manholes, etc. shall be performed by skilled tradesmen and
laborers with current certification for working in confined space. Contractors shall bear all costs to provide all safety equipment, ventilation, etc. as required by State and Federal Regulations and shall obtain all necessary permits for such work.
B. The Contractor shall submit copies of current certifications and photo I.D. of all tradesmen and laborers who will be working in confined spaces on this project to the Owner for record.
1.15 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Construction personnel shall not use any of the Owner’s sanitary facilities.
B. Drinking water and water to wash by shall be provided by the Contractor for use by employees. 1.16 ELECTRICAL A. Adequate lighting must be provided by the Contractor as needed to enable workers safe access to and
egress from every place on the site where they are liable to work. This is in addition to task lighting. The Contractor is responsible for hanging of their temporary power cords, weld leads, hoses, etc., above the floor to avoid trip hazards and/or damage.
1.17 FLAMMABLE/COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS A. Flammable/Combustible material: Bulk storage of all flammable or combustible materials shall be a
minimum of twenty five (25) feet from any building in an area free of debris. No more than one (1) day’s working supply of flammable or combustible materials shall be permitted in the building. Only UL/FM approved containers and dispensing facilities shall be used.
1.18 SITE SECURITY SYSTEM A. The Contractor shall secure all areas when actual construction is not taking place in those areas.
B. All power equipment shall be secured when not in use. This shall be done by the removal of the keys
from large construction equipment and the operator’s area locked up where possible. In the case of smaller power tools, they shall be secured in locked gang boxes.
C. No one other than construction personnel shall be allowed in construction areas, unless authorized by the Owner.
SA1509A PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 3440-6
1.19 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials brought
onto the construction site per OSHA standards. The MSDS sheets must indicate hazardous properties, possible complications, and remedies or recommendations for treatment required due to exposure. Any additional materials that are brought on site, of a different composition than what has previously had an MSDS Sheet submitted, must have a sheet on file 48 hours in advance of the materials arrival onsite.
B. Hazardous Materials (HAZCOM) MSDS are supplied by the Contractor and kept in a central location in the Contractor's job site office. Any construction employee has the right to view these MSDS sheets. The Owner also maintains MSDS sheets on the materials that they use and they are available for inspection.
1.20 SAFETY VIOLATIONS A. The Contractor shall immediately correct any unsafe conditions. In the event that any work being
performed is deemed to represent immediate danger to persons or property, Contractors shall cease work immediately.
1.21 CONTRACTOR SAFETY PERFORMANCE A. Unsatisfactory safety performance may constitute grounds for termination of any construction personnel
in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. 1.22 FALL PROTECTION A. Goals:
1. Eliminate Risk of Falls – by design and/or construction methods that avoid/reduce the need for work at heights.
2. Implement Measures to Prevent (or mitigate) the risk of falls that will protect all by employing collective measures to protect people or materials from the risk of falling where work at heights cannot be eliminated.
3. Personnel Fall Prevention & Mitigation Systems (body harnesses) - used only as a last resort! B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain guardrails at all working places and other locations where
persons or materials could fall more than 6ft. Where this can not be physically achieved, suitable and sufficient fall protection devices that do not rely on individuals should be provided and used to establish a safe place of work. Harnesses and personal protective equipment must be used as a last resort. The decisions made and options implemented must be clearly detailed in the Site Specific Safety Plan.
C. Holes, shafts and edges from or through which persons could fall a distance of more than 6ft must be clearly marked with signage or other means and be adequately protected by covers or barriers by the contractor/subcontractor creating the hazard to prevent falls of persons and materials.
D. If, for any reason during the performance of the work, perimeter cables, barricades, floor or roof opening covers, or any other safety-related items are removed to perform work, it shall be the responsibility of that Contractor that removed the safety-related item to replace item promptly before leaving the area.
E. All persons working on suspended scaffolds/cradles/gondolas must wear and use appropriate fall prevention equipment so as to protect them effectively at all times when they are at risk from any failure of any part of the scaffold/cradle/gondola, including its suspension system.
F. Free-standing scaffold towers used externally must not be higher to the top platform level than three
times the minimum base dimension, unless secured to a permanent structure. For internal use only, the height to platform may rise to 3.5 times the minimum base dimension. Wheels must be locked when towers are in use. No person is permitted to remain on a tower platform while a tower is being moved.
SA1509A PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 3440-7
G. Lifting either adjacent to public areas or outside of the project boundary shall require the use of protective canopies or vehicle and/or pedestrian traffic control and closures. Full-time personnel shall be provided to redirect vehicular and pedestrian traffic and vehicle and pedestrian traffic shall be segregated.
H. Erection and dismantling of scaffold systems in or around the existing structure to be completed utilizing 100% tie off.
I. Ladders are to be used only for access and not as work platforms. A mechanical lift, rolling scaffold or adjustable podium step system is the preferred work platform. Where a ladder is required for work, three (3) points of contact on the ladder must be maintained at all times (not to include the 6’ and over 100% tie-off requirement.) In addition, the work must be of a short duration of less than ten (10) minutes.
END OF SECTION 01 3440
SA1509A QUALITY CONTROL 01 4000-1
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 0 and Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Responsibilities b. General quality control c. Workmanship d. Manufacturer's instructions e. Manufacturer's certificates f. Manufacturer's field services g. Testing laboratory services h. Repair and protection
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. GENERAL:
1. Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in the determination of probable compliance of the work with requirements specified or indicated.
2. These required services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with these requirements or for compliance with requirements of the contract documents.
B. DEFINITIONS:
1. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies and governing authorities, as well as directly by the Contractor.
2. Specific quality control requirements for individual units of work are specified in the sections of these specification that specify the individual element of the work.
3. These requirements, including inspections and test cover: a. Production of standard products b. Fabrication of customized work c. Quality control of the installation procedures
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory services are solely an assurance that contract provisions are being met.
B. Forward copies of results of tests by Contractor to the Architect and relevant parties within 24 hours. C. Required testing and test procedures are indicated under each Division of the Technical Specifications
and all federal, state, and local requirements.
D. The Contractor shall provide all testing services not specified to be the owner’s responsibility.
E. The Architect shall reserve the right to require additional information as is deemed necessary to fully evaluate testing results.
SA1509A QUALITY CONTROL 01 4000-2
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SECTION 01 3400:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service in duplicate, unless the
Contractor is responsible for the service. 2. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report of each inspection,
test, or similar service through the Contractor, in duplicate. 3. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the
authority so directs. C. REPORT DATA: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not be limited
to the following: 1. Name of testing agency or test laboratory 2. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections 3. Names of individuals making the inspection or test 4. Designation of the work and test method 5. Complete inspection or test data 6. Test results and compliance with Contract Documents 7. Project title 8. Architect's project number 9. Name and signature of laboratory inspector 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions 11. Identification of product and specification section 12. Type of inspection or test
D. Certificates of material properties and compliance with specified requirements may be submitted instead
of testing when acceptable to the Architect. 1. CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE: Must be signed by materials producer and Contractor.
1.06 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. 1.07 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when tolerances that are more restrictive or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or workmanship that is more precise B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, and racking. 1.08 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
B. Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before
processing
SA1509A QUALITY CONTROL 01 4000-3
1.09 MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in respective Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide qualified personnel
to observe: 1. Field conditions 2. Conditions of surfaces and installation 3. Quality of workmanship 4. Start-up of equipment 5. Test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable 6. And to make appropriate recommendations
B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations. 1.10 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Owner Responsibility: Where testing requirements are indicated in the Technical Specification section as
Owner’s responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency (SPECIAL INSPECTOR see 01 4100) to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies
engaged. The description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform is as outlined in the technical specifications.
2. Testing laboratory services provided by the Owner: a. Inspection of soils, concrete, masonry, and steel as outline in the Technical
Specifications. b. Testing related to remedial operations or possible deficiencies.
B. Contractor Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, provide all testing services specified.
1. The Contractor shall perform all testing and prepare all test reports and/or certifications required by the Contract Documents, and shall fully cooperate with any testing and/or inspection agencies retained by the Contractor, Owner, or the Architect and their consultants, including implementation of any remedial work recommended as a result of such inspections.
2. Where services are indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality control services. A qualified testing agency is an agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed.
3. Tests shall be scheduled by the appropriate Contractor requiring the testing and provide notification to the Owner to meet with the construction schedule milestones.
4. Testing and inspecting requested / required by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor’s responsibility.
5. Costs for re-testing and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
6. The Contractor shall complete all test report forms, including signature of the Owner's representative witnessing the test performed. Provide a copy of the completed test report to the Architect and Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR A. To facilitate testing services, the Contractor shall:
1. Furnish to the Laboratory such samples of materials as may be necessary for testing purposes. 2. Furnish such casual labor, equipment, and facilities as is necessary to obtain and handle samples
at the project. 3. Schedule the Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for completion of tests
and for the assignment of personnel.
SA1509A QUALITY CONTROL 01 4000-4
4. Provide and maintain, for the sole use of the Testing Agency, adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test cylinders on the project site for the first 24 hours as required by ASTM C31-69.
5. Maintain records at the project site showing the date and extent of each concrete placement. 6. Provide safe access to items to be tested. This includes sheeting and ladders for deep
excavation; scaffolding and ladders for inspection and testing of superstructure items. 7. Full cooperation with all firms performing testing and inspection work is expected from all
Contractor personnel.
B. If any portion of the work shows low test results, evidence of detrimental placing or curing conditions, the Owner may require additional testing, compaction, cored samples or re-welding at the Contractor's expense. In no case shall the inspector prescribe the method of repair of the defect. Repair recommendations will be provided by the Architect/Engineer.
3.02 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. GENERAL:
1. Upon completion of inspection, testing, samples-taking and similar services performed on the work, repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed finishes.
2. Comply with SECTION 01 3320: CUTTING AND PATCHING. 3. Protect work exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired work.
Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01 4000
SA1509A CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33-1
SECTION 01 4100 – CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES (Services provided, including cost, through the Owner)
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide special inspections and testing in accordance with Chapter 17 of the Building Code of New York
State and the attached Statement of Special Inspections. These services will be provided under a direct third party contract with the Owner and independent of the Architect and Contractor other than coordination.
B. The program of Special Inspection and Testing is a Quality Assurance program intended to ensure that the work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. This specification section is intended to inform the Contractor of the Owner’s quality assurance program and extent of the Contractor’s responsibilities. This specification section is also intended to notify the Special Inspectors, Testing Laboratory, and other Agents of the Special Inspectors of their requirements and responsibilities.
D. Any quality testing set forth in the specifications and not identified within this Section remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Required inspections and tests are described in the attached Statement of Special Inspections and in the
individual specification sections for the items to be inspected or tested.
B. The services and quantities of testing specified are approximate and may vary. Actual services and quantities of testing will be determined by the Architect during the construction period.
C. The Special Inspector will determine the locations for taking sample specimens for testing in accordance with the specifications.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Special Inspectors shall be qualified persons (hired directly by the Owner) who demonstrate
competence to the satisfaction of the Architect and Building Official.
B. The testing laboratory shall retain the services of a full-time registered Professional Engineer who shall certify all test reports. The Engineer shall be responsible for the training of the testing technicians and shall be in responsible charge of the field and laboratory testing operations.
C. Special inspections shall be performed by Special Inspectors who are certified as identified below, or are working under the direction of a registered Professional Engineer: 1. Technicians performing sampling and testing of concrete shall be ACI certified Concrete Field
Testing Technicians - Grade 1. 2. Inspectors performing inspections of concrete work such as inspections of concrete placement,
batching, reinforcing placement, curing and protection, shall be ACI certified Concrete Construction Inspectors of IBO certified Reinforced Concrete Special Inspectors.
3. Inspectors performing inspections of masonry shall be ICBO certified Structural Masonry Special Inspectors.
4. Technicians performing visual inspection of welding shall be AWS Certified Welding Inspectors or ICBO certified Structural Steel and Welding Special Inspectors; technicians performing non-destructive testing such as ultrasonic testing, radiographic testing, magnetic particle testing, or dye-penetrate testing shall be certified as an ASNT-TC Level II or Level III technician.
SA1509A CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33-2
5. Technicians performing standard tests described by specific ASTM Standards shall have training in the performance of such tests and must be able to demonstrate either by oral or written examination competence for the test to be conducted. They shall be under the supervision of a licensed Professional Engineer and shall not be permitted to independently evaluate test results.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Special Inspectors and Testing Laboratories shall submit to the Architect and Building Official for
review a copy of their qualifications which shall include the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests.
B. The Special Inspectors and testing laboratories shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested.
1.05 PAYMENT A. The Owner will engage, at his own expense, the services of the Special Inspectors and Testing
Laboratories.
B. If any materials which require Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant which is not located within 100 miles of the project, the Contractor is responsible for the travel expenses of the Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories.
C. The cost of any retesting or reinspection of work which fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents is the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with the Special Inspectors and Testing Laboratories so that the Special Inspections and
testing may be performed without hindrance or delay. Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to limit number of visits and time spent on site by Special Inspectors and testing laboratories. The Contract shall adequately notify the testing laboratory if testing cannot occur per pre-arranged schedule. An retesting or additional site visits required resulting from failure to notify shall be paid for by Contractor.
B. Review the Statement of Special Inspections and be responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections and tests. Notify the Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories at least 24 hours in advance of a required inspection or test. Uninspected work that required inspection may be rejected solely on that basis.
C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide safe access to the work to be inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. 1. Construct a storage box on site of sufficient size to store concrete cylinders which will afford
protection as required by ASTM C-31. 2. Provide the laboratory with representative initial samples, in requested quantities. 3. When source, quality, or characteristic of an approved material changes or indicates lack of
compliance with Contract requirements, submit additional samples of materials to testing laboratory.
4. Patch area where samples are taken for purposes of testing to the satisfaction of the Architect.
D. Retain the latest set of construction drawings, field sketches, approved shop drawings, and specifications at the project site for use by the inspectors and testing technicians.
E. The Special Inspection program does not, in any way, relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program. All work that is to be subjected to Special Inspections shall first be reviewed b the Contractor’s quality control personnel.
SA1509A CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33-3
F. The sole responsibility for construction site safety belongs to the Contractor. 1.07 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY A. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories will not have control over the Contractor’s means and methods of construction.
C. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories are not responsible for construction site safety. D. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories have no authority to stop the work. 1.08 RECORDS AND REPORTS A. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories shall submit daily reports of each inspection or test to the
Architect. Reports shall include: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Name of inspector or technician 3. Location of specific areas tested or inspected. 4. Description of test or inspection and results. 5. Applicable ASTM standard. 6. Weather conditions. 7. Signature of special inspector or technician.
B. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories shall submit interim reports to the Building official (with copies to the Architect and Contractor) which include all inspections and test reports received that week.
C. Any discrepancies from the contract documents found during a Special Inspection shall be immediately reported to the Contractor. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the Special Inspector shall notify the Architect and Building Official. Reports shall document all discrepancies identified and the corrected action taken.
D. The Testing Laboratory shall immediately notify the Architect by telephone or fax of any test results which fail to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories shall submit reports to the Architect within 7 days of the inspection or test. Hand-written reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available.
F. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories shall provide a statement to the Architect at the completion of the work requiring Special Inspections from each inspection agency and testing laboratory that all work was completed in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that all appropriate inspections and tests were performed.
1.09 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Complete Final Report of Special Inspections and submit to the Architect and Building official prior to the
issuance of a Certificate of occupancy.
B. The Final Report of Special Inspections will certify that all required inspections have been performed and will itemize any discrepancies that were not corrected or resolved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED
SA1509A CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33-4
STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Project: Cancer Treatment Center Location: 34 West Main Street., Cortland, New York 13045 Owner: Guthrie Cortland Medical Center Owner's Address: 134 Homer Ave., Cortland, New York 13045 Architect: Schopfer Architects LLP This Statement of Special Inspections is submitted as a condition for permit issuance in accordance with the Special Inspection requirements of the Building Code of New York State. It includes a Schedule of Special inspection Services applicable to this project, as well as the name of the Special Inspectors intended to be retained for conducting these inspections. The Special Inspectors shall keep records of all inspections and shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official and Architect. Discovered discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction. If such discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Building Official and Architect. The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibilities. Interim reports shall be submitted to the Building Official and Architect. A Final Report of Special Inspections documenting completion of all required Special Inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. Job site safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the contractor. Interim Report Frequency: As required Design Professional Seal Prepared by: Robert J. Seigart
(Type or Print Name)
(Signature) Owner's Authorization: Building Official's Acceptance:
Signature Date Signature Date
SA1509A CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33-5
The following construction sections require special inspections for this project. (See the attached "Required Verification & Inspection" schedule for more detailed information.):
a. Soils & Foundation b. Cast-in-Place Concrete c. Masonry d. Structural Steel
Inspection Agents Firm Address 1. Special Inspector
2. Testing Laboratory
3. Testing Laboratory
4. Other
Note: The qualifications of all personnel performing Special Inspection activities are subject to the approval of the Building Official. The inspection and testing agent shall be engaged by the Owner and not be the Contractor or Subcontractors. Any conflict of interest must be disclosed to the Building Official prior to commencing work. The credential of all Inspectors and testing technicians shall be provided if requested. It is recommended that the person administering the Special Inspections program be a Professional Engineer experienced in the design of buildings.
SA1509A CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33-6
REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTIONS SCHEDULE Verification & Inspection Continuou
s Periodi
c Referenced Standard
BC-NYS Referenc
e A. Earthwork Inspections:
1. Subgrade: verify proper preparation of
subgrade. 2. Fill placement: during placement and
compaction of fill material, verify that the material and the lift thickness comply with the specifications.
3. Evaluation of in-place density: verify that density complies with the specifications.
X
X
X
Specification Sections 31 1000 31 2000
§1705.6
B. Concrete Inspections:
1. Inspection of reinforcing steel. 2. Verify use of approved design mix 3. Testing fresh concrete for slump, air content,
temperature, and compressive strength 4. Inspection for maintenance of specified
curing temperatures and techniques
X X X
X
Specification Sections 03 1000, 03 2000,
& 03 3000,
§1705.3
C. Exterior Concrete:
1. Inspection of reinforcing steel 2. Verify use of approved design mix 3. Testing fresh concrete for slump, air content,
temperature, and compressive strength 4. Inspection for maintenance of specified
curing temperatures and techniques
X X
X
X
Specification Section 32 1313
§1705.3
D. Masonry Inspections:
1. Verify submittal for masonry components comply with specifications.
2. Verify compliance of a. Mortar mix proportions b. Mortar joint construction c. Type, size, and location of
reinforcement d. Type, size, and spacing of masonry
anchors
X
X X X
X
Specification Section 04 2000
§1705.4
E. Steel Inspections:
1. Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers
2. Inspection of high-strength bolting (bearing-type connections)
3. Inspection of steel frame joint details
4. Inspection of welding a. Single pass weld equal to or less
than 5/16” b. Metal deck welding c. Multi-pass welds single-pass welds
larger than 5/16”
X
X
X X
X X
Specification Section 05 1200
§1705.2
END OF SECTION 01 4100
SA1509A REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 4214-1
SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Code References b. Reference Standards
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 CODES REFERENCES A. Materials furnished and work installed shall meet the requirements of those regulatory agencies listed
within this specification or of those have jurisdiction.
B. Should the requirements of this specification stipulate a higher standard than the applicable codes and/or standards listed, these specifications shall govern.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. References to Standard Specifications establish minimum standards for quality, performance, and
standard test methods for all work on this Project. Such regulatory references shall be considered a supplement to this specification as if they were written herein in full.
B. Reference Standards are made in accordance with abbreviations noted: AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association/
American Architectural Manufacturer's Association ACI American Concrete Institute AIA Fire Prevention Code: American Insurance Association or
American Institute of Architects AIC American Insurance Code AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWSC American Welding Society Code CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards: U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of
Standards DOT Department of Transportation EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company FS Federal Specifications: General Services Administration,
U.S. Government IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers LSC Life Safety Code (NFPA Pamphlet No. 101) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAFM National Association of Fan Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
SA1509A REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 4214-2
NBC National Building Code: American Insurance Association NBS National Bureau of Standards NEC See NFPA below NESC National Electric Safety Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association:
No. 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems No. 70 - National Electric Code N.E.C. No. 101 - Life Safety Code
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association UL Underwriters' Laboratories USAS USA Standards: American Gas Association, Inc.
Federal, State and Local Ordinances and Codes PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 4214
SA1509A ABBREVIATIONS 01 4215-1
SECTION 01 4215 - ABBREVIATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Architectural abbreviations
1.02 ABBREVIATION A. The following general construction abbreviations may have been used in the Documents on details and in
notes to simplify and condense wordage that would otherwise be required.
A.I.A. American Institute of Architects ACT Acoustic Tile AFF. Above Finished Floor Allow. Allowance Alt. Alternate Alum. Aluminum Approx. Approximately Ave. Average B. Bottom BD Board B.O.F. Bottom of Footing B.F. Board Foot Bet. Between Bitum. Bituminous Bldg. Building B.L. Building Line Blk. Block Blkg. Blocking Bot. Bottom Brk. Brick BUR Built-Up Roofing C. Course or Coursing Cabt. Cabinet CB Ceramic Tile Base C.B. Catch Basin C.Blk. Concrete Block C.F. Cubic Feet CFM Cubic Feet per Minute C.M.U. Concrete Masonry Unit C.Y. Cubic Yard Cem. Cement C.I. Cast Iron Clg. Ceiling Clr Clear Col. Column Comp. Composition or Compressible Conc. Concrete Cont. Continuous Contr. Contractor Corr. Corrugated CPT Carpet CPT-B Carpet Base Csmt Casement
SA1509A ABBREVIATIONS 01 4215-2
Cu. Ft. Cubic Foot CT Ceramic Tile Ctr Counter D.F. Drinking Fountains Det. Detail D.H. Double Hung Diag. Diagonal Diam. Diameter Dim. Dimension D.L. Dead Load Dn. Down Do. Ditto Dwg. Drawing Dwr. Drawer E. East E.C. Electrical Contractor E.J. or Exp. Jt. Expansion Joint Embed. Embedment E.O. Every Other E.P. Electric Panel Ea. Each Ef./E.F. Each Face Elev./El. Elevation Enc. Enclosure Eq. Equal Equip. Equipment Est. Estimate E.W. Each Way EWC Electric Water Cooler Exp. Str. Exposed Structural Ext. Exterior Elec. Electrical Exh. Exhaust Exp. Exposed Fas. Fastened FA. Fire Alarm FE. Fire Extinguisher FEC. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet FD. Floor Drain Fdn. Foundation Fin. Finish Fin. Flr. Finished Floor Fix. Fixture Flr. Floor Fr. Frame F.S. Footing Step Ft. Foot Ftg. Footing F.M. Field Measure F.V. Field Verify G. Gas Ga. Gauge, gage Gal. Gallon Galv. Galvanized G.C. General Contractor Gen. General Glaz. Glazing Gr. Grade Grnd. Ground
SA1509A ABBREVIATIONS 01 4215-3
GWB or Gyp. Bd. Gypsum Board H. Height H.C. Handicapped Hdwr. Hardware H.M. Hollow Metal Horiz./Hor./H. Horizontal Ht. or Hgt. Height Htg. Heating H&V Heating and Ventilating HVAC Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning H.E.F. Horizontal Each Face I.D. Inside Diameter In. Inch Incl. Included, Including Ins. Insulation Int. Interior Inv. Invert IPS Iron Pipe Size Jt. Joint KO Knock Out L. Length L.F. Linear Foot Lam. Laminate Lav. Lavatory lb. Pound LL Live Load LLV Long Leg Vertical L.M.F. Light Metal Framing L.H. Left Hand Lt. Light M. Meter M.O. Masonry Opening Mat. Material Max. Maximum MCJ Masonry Control Joint Mech. Mechanical Met. Metal Mfgr. Manufacturer MH Man Hole Min. Minimum Misc. Miscellaneous Mtl. Metal, Material Mt. Mount N. North N.I.C. Not in Contract N.T.S. Not to Scale NA Not Applicable NRC Noise Reduction Coefficient Nat. Natural No. or # Number Nom Nominal O.C. On Center O.D. Outside Diameter O.H. Opposite Hand Opng. or Op'g. Opening Oz. Ounce Obs. Obscure PCF Pounds per Cubic Foot Per According To
SA1509A ABBREVIATIONS 01 4215-4
Perf. Perforated Pl. Plate P.L. Property Line PL Plastic Laminate PLF Pounds per Lineal Foot Plas. Plaster Plumb. Plumber Plywd. or Ply.or Pwd. Plywood Pnl. Panel PRE Power Roof Exhauster psf Pounds per Square Foot psi Pounds per Square Inch Prefab. Prefabricated Prefin. Prefinished Pt. Paint Pbd. Particle Board Ptn. Partition PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Pvmt Pavement Q.T. Quarry Tile Quan. Quantity RA Return Air Rbt. Rabbet R.D. Roof Drain R.H. Right Hand R.O. Rough Opening R.O.B. Run of Bank R.O.C. Run of Crush R.O.W. Right of Way Rad. Radius Rect. Rectangular Ref. Reference Reg Regular Reinf. Reinforced or Reinforcing Req'd. Required Rm. Room Rub. Rubber S. South S.C. Blk Scored Concrete Block S.D. Storm Drain S.F. Square Foot S.Y. Square Yard SGFT Structural Glazed Facing Tile Sht. Sheet S.O.G. Slab on Grade Sq. Square Sp. Gl. Spray Glaze SPM Single Ply Membrane Spec. Specifications St. Stain Std. Standard Stl. Steel Stl. T. Steel Trowel S.S. Stainless Steel Str. or Strcl. Structural S.L. Structural Line Surf. Surface Std. Standard Stor. Storage
SA1509A ABBREVIATIONS 01 4215-5
T. Top T.O.S. Top of Steel TCP Thin Coat Plaster T&G Tongue & Groove Ter. or Terr. Terrazzo T.F.E. Top of Footing Elevation Th. or Thk. Thick Tot. Total T.O.W. Top of Wall TV Television Typ. Typical Tel. Telephone T & G Tongue and Groove U.G. Underground U.L. Underwriters Laboratory Var. Varnish VB Vinyl Base V.E.F. Vertical Each Face Vert./V. Vertical VCT Vinyl Composition Tile V.I.F. Verify In Field W. West or Water WB Wood Base W.G. Wired Glass W.H. Wall Hung W.R. Water Resistant W/ With WC Water Closet WF Wide Flange W/O Without Wd. Wood Wt. Weight WWM Welded Wire Mesh WH Water Heater W.R. Water Resistant
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 4215
SA1509A DEFINITIONS 01 4216-1
SECTION 01 4216 - DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Definition of terms b. Format and interpretations c. Trade union jurisdictions
1.03 DESCRIPTION A. This section defines certain terms used in the specifications and other documents and explains the
following as used in the project manual and associated contract documents: 1. Organization 2. Format 3. Use 4. Language 5. Conventions
1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined in this article. B. Definitions contained in this section are not necessarily complete but are general for the work.
1. The term "Architect" refers to: Schopfer Architects LLP 1111 James Street Syracuse, NY, 13203 or their duly authorized representative.
2. The term "Owner" refers to: Guthrie Cortland Medical Center 134 Homer Avenue Cortland, NY 13045 Or their duly authorized representative.
3. INDICATED: a. Shown on drawings by notes, graphics, or documents b. Terms such as "SHOWN", "NOTED", "SCHEDULED", and "SPECIFIED" have same
meaning as "indicated" and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information 4. APPROVE:
a. Where used in conjunction with Architect's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitations of Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions.
b. In no case will "approval" by Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of contract documents.
5. PROJECT SITE: Space available to contractor at location of project, either exclusively or to be shared with separate contractors, for performance of the work.
6. PRODUCT: Materials, equipment, and systems. 7. FURNISH: Supply and deliver to the job site, ready for unpacking, assembly, and installation as
applicable in each instance, unless otherwise specified in greater detail.
SA1509A DEFINITIONS 01 4216-2
8. INSTALL: Used to describe the following operations at the project site: a. Handling b. Storage c. Unpacking d. Assembly e. Erection f. Placing g. Anchoring h. Applying i. Connecting j. Working to dimension k. Finishing l. Curing m. Protecting n. Cleaning o. Similar operations as applicable in each instance or unless otherwise specified in greater
detail. 9. PROVIDE: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use, as applicable in each
instance or furnish labor and materials required for installation of. 10. INSTALLER:
a. The entity (person or firm) engaged by Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of work at project site, including: 1) Installation 2) Erection 3) Application 4) Similar required operations
b. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in operations they are engaged to perform.
11. OVERLAPPING/CONFLICTING: a. Most stringent (generally) requirement written directly into the contract documents is
intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed written language written into the contract documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable.
b. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 12. "SUITABLE", "REASONABLE", "PROPER", "CORRECT" and "NECESSARY": Such terms shall
mean as suitable, reasonable, proper, correct, or necessary for the purpose intended as required by the contract documents, subject to the judgment of the Architect.
13. "INCLUDING", "SUCH AS": These terms shall always be taken in the most inclusive sense, namely, "including, but not limited to," and "such as, but not limited to."
14. "EXPOSED": Any item or surface, exterior or interior, which can be seen by a person outside the building, or a person inside any usable space within the building during normal activity.
15. "HEREIN" shall mean the contents of particular Section where this term appears. 16. "SECTION" shall mean one (1) of the portions of divisions of the Specifications. 17. "CONCEALED" where used in connection with painting of accessories, etc., shall mean that they
are hidden from sight as in trenches, chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings. 1.05 FORMAT AND INTERPRETATIONS A. DRAWINGS:
1. Product notes on the drawings are for the identification of materials. 2. Sections and details show typical products and assemblies. 3. Each product indicated on drawings shall be continuous throughout all parts of the project where
the section or the detail applies. 4. Add related products and suitable workmanship at corners and intersections to provide structural
integrity, weather tightness, and continuity of appearance. 5. Only major attachments and accessories are indicated in the drawings and specified in the
project manual. 6. Provide the following necessary to produce a firmly fastened, smoothly functioning, weathertight,
secure, and neat installation.
SA1509A DEFINITIONS 01 4216-3
a. Anchors b. Bolts c. Screws d. Nails e. All other fastening devices
7. Provide completely the materials partially indicated. 8. Larger scale drawings take precedence over small-scale drawings in general. 9. Use the figures given for dimensions. 10. Do not scale the drawings. 11. Check figures on drawings before starting the work affected. 12. Should necessary dimensions or figures be inadvertently omitted, notify the Architect and do not
proceed with the work without correct and definite information. B. SPECIFICATIONS:
1. The latest edition of CSI MASTERFORMAT is the basis for organization of the project manual and for the terminology generally used throughout the specifications.
2. The section title does not limit the content of meaning of the section, nor is it fully descriptive of the requirements specified therein.
3. Each section of the specifications has been subdivided into parts for uniformity and convenience. 4. These parts and the titles of these parts do not limit the requirement of the text. 5. The work specified in any one section is related to and dependent upon the work specified in
other sections. 6. The cross-reference paragraphs "RELATED WORK" are general items included for guidance of
project manual users and shall not be considered all-inclusive in any case. 7. IMPERATIVE LANGUAGE:
a. Used generally in specifications b. Except as performed by Contractor c. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to
describe responsibilities, which must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor, or when so noted, by others.
1.06 TRADE UNION JURISDICTIONS A. Maintain current information on jurisdictional matters, regulations, actions and pending actions, and
administrate/supervise performance of work in a manner which will minimize possibility of disputes, conflicts, delays, claims or losses.
1.07 SUBMITTALS A. PERMITS, LICENSES AND CERTIFICATES: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permit, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and records establishment in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 4216
SA1509A TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-1
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:
1. This Section specifies temporary services and facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection. Provide facilities ready for use. Maintain, expand and modify as needed. Remove when no longer needed, or when replaced by permanent facilities.
2. Work of this Section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: a. Field Office and Storage Sheds b. Temporary Sanitary Facilities c. Temporary Fire Extinguishers d. Temporary Water e. Temporary Electric Power Service and Interior Lighting f. Temporary Telephone Service and Facsimile Service g. Temporary Storm and Sanitary Sewer h. Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation i. Temporary Enclosures j. Temporary Exterior Lighting k. Progress Cleaning and Waste Removal l. Surface and Underground Water Control m. Protection of Installed Work
1) Environmental Protection 2) Dust Control 3) Barriers, Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights
n. Removal of Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls o. Project Construction Sign
3. All costs (utility fees, connection costs, use charges, etc.) for temporary facilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: The Contractor shall comply with industry standards and with applicable laws and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of
the temporary service to use of the permanent service. 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: The installer of each permanent service or facility shall
assume responsibility for its operation, maintenance and protection during its use as a construction service or facility prior to the Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a
safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site.
1.04 USE CHARGES A. General: Use charges for all utilities (water, electricity, heat, etc.) will be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
SA1509A TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4" heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 ft. long, with
pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system; provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge.
B. Electrical Contractor Shall Provide Temporary Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment.
C. Each Contractor Shall Provide Their Own Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress.
D. Electrical Contractor Shall Provide Temporary Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
E. HVAC Contractor shall Provide Temporary Heat as Required: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
F. Temporary Field Office 1. Contractor shall provide and maintain clean, temporary weather-tight offices at the site, in
location as approved by the Owner, for the use of the Contractor, his Subcontractors' agents, and the Architect. While the work is in progress, copies of permits, approved Shop Drawings, and a complete set of Contract Drawings and Specifications marked up to date with any revisions, shall be kept at said office ready for use at all times.
2. All expenses in connection with the field office, including installation, relocation, and use of heat, electricity, water, and janitor service shall be borne by the Contractor.
G. Temporary Storage Sheds: Each Subcontractor shall provide and maintain such additional offices,
storage sheds, and other temporary buildings or trailers on the project as required for his own use. Location of sheds and trailers shall be located where and approved by the Owner..
H. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities that include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures.
I. Contractor shall provide First Aid Supplies as required by governing regulations.
J. Contractor shall Provide Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class `A' fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class `ABC' dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by
location and class of fire exposure.
K. Contractor shall Provide Project Construction Sign 1. Supply and install (1) 4’ x 8’ x ¾”, painted plywood, temporary project construction sign. 2. Location to be as approved by Owner/Architect.
SA1509A TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they serve the
project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are not longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service. Where the company
provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations.
B. Water Service: 1. Install water service connected to nearest system, and distribution piping of sizes and pressures
adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use.
C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and main distribution switch gear. 1. The electrical work for construction purposes shall conform to all Federal and State requirements
as well as the requirements of the National Electric Code and National Electrical Safety Code. The Contractor shall obtain required applications, permits, and inspection pertaining to this work in accordance with the General Conditions.
D. Temporary Lighting:
1. Provide temporary lighting with local switching. 2. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements, without
operating the entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
3.03 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other temporary construction and support
facilities for easy access and in locations approved by the Owner.
B. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. 1. The Contractor shall provide heat, supplied with air, as follows:
a. At all times during normal working hours, provide sufficient heat to maintain a temperature of not less than 50F. and from 40 to 50F. during periods other than specified herein below.
b. At all times during the placing, setting, and curing of concrete, provide sufficient heat to ensure heating of the spaces involved to not less than 50F.
c. Well before gypsum board work begins and continuous throughout the setting and drying periods, a temperature range between 55 and 70F. shall be maintained day and night. During this period, no finish woodwork, wood finish flooring, resilient flooring or flexible wall coverings shall be installed or stored in the buildings, and no finish painting or applying of finish wall coatings shall be undertaken.
SA1509A TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-4
d. For a period of ten (10) days previous to the placing of interior wood finish and throughout the placing of this and other interior finishing, varnishing, painting, etc., and until final acceptance of the work or until full occupancy by the Owner, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 70F.
e. Heat and air shall be supplied in a manner which shall avoid the rapid drying of material but thoroughly dry to such an extent that no remaining moisture will affect finish material.
f. The Contractor shall operate the heating and ventilating systems each day, including Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays; operating shall include necessary labor and approved operating personnel in attendance as required by agencies having jurisdiction.
g. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate for the range of temperatures required for temporary heating, during this period, that temperature as recommended by the manufacturer of the materials as mentioned are stored in the building or being installed, and for the length of time recommended, following installation.
2. Temporary heating and ventilating equipment, piping, etc., shall be installed in such a manner as not to interfere with work of other trades or the permanent construction. If such interference does occur, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make any changes required to overcome the interference.
3. Except as hereinafter specified, the permanent heating and ventilating systems shall not be used for temporary heat. The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units for the purposes specified.
C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosure for protection of construction from exposure, foul
weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Where heat is needed and the building enclosure is incomplete, provide enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions.
D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: 1. Prepare project identification and other signs of the size indicated; install signs where indicated to
inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the project. Support on posts or framing of preservative treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
E. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply
with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than seven (7) days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80F. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner.
F. Surface and Underground Water Control: Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. Provide dewatering of site as required.
3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION: Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
A. Fire Protection: Until fire protection is supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire
protection of types needed to protect against predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations."
B. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest date, complete installation of the permanent fire protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 1. The permanent Fire Protection System shall be operational before any furniture is installed in
facility.
SA1509A TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-5
C. Enclosure Fence: Provide a minimum 6’ high chainlink enclosure around the entire project area. Provide a secure gated entry of a size required for construction activities.
D. Environmental Protection: Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints.
3.05 OPERATION: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability to intended use to minimize abuse. Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. A. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and the elements.
1. Maintain operation of enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis to achieve indicated results and to avoid damage.
2. Prevent piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
3.06 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL: Remove each facility when the need has ended, or replaced by a permanent facility or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or restore construction delayed because of interference with the facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. A. Temporary facilities are property of the Contractor.
B. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances or as otherwise
damaged by the construction activities.
C. At Substantial Completion, renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period, including but not limited to: 1. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. 2. Replace worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 3. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by substantial hours of use.
END OF SECTION 01 5000
SA1509A PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 01 5200-1
SECTION 01 5200 - PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Protection after installation b. Protection of existing site features c. Repair and replacement of damaged items
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent
operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
C. Protect finished floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage.
D. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
3.02 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SITE FEATURES A. Protect all existing site features to be salvaged (i.e., exterior walks, steps, roadways, curbs, paved and
landscaped surfaces, etc.) from damage during the operations of demolition or new construction.
B. Protect curbs with planks in the path of vehicle travel.
C. Protect paved surfaces from indentation or gouging where heavy equipment is moved or materials stored. 3.03 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED ITEMS A. Repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, all interior and exterior materials damaged during
the work of the contract. This applies to areas within and outside any designated construction limit lines.
B. Replace or repair items damaged during the work of this contract in a manner that restores performance specification, warranties, and visual appearance to a quality equal to, or better than, condition prior to damage.
C. At the end of the work, remove all damaged material and equipment and dispose of in a lawful manner.
SA1509A PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 01 5200-2
3.04 EXISTING BUILDING AND SITE A. The Contractor is to limit his activity to the designated construction area.
B. All portions of the existing Medical Center as well as portions of the Project area are scheduled to remain
unchanged are to be protected from contractor damage. If damage occurs, the Contractor causing the damage will repair or replace the damage at their cost.
END OF SECTION 01 5200
SA1509A ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01 5300-1
SECTION 01 5300 - ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Information described under this section: a. Dust control b. Debris removal c. Water control
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 DUST CONTROL A. Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction and demolition operations. 1.03 DEBRIS REMOVAL A. The Contractor shall provide dumpsters for removed materials and construction waste. The Contractor
shall be responsible for placing debris/waste materials in the appropriate dumpster each day. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all such materials from the site and for tracking the reuse/recycling of such materials.
B. The Contractor shall clean up all debris daily.
C. Burning of waste material on-site will not be permitted.
END OF SECTION 01 5300
SA1509A MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01 6000-1
SECTION 01 6000 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Procedures for products applicable to all sections of the specifications: a. Products b. Transportation and handling c. Storage and protection d. Product selections e. Substitutions e. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "PRODUCT" shall include material, equipment, assembly methods, manufacturer, brand, trade name, or
other description.
B. "EQUAL", "APPROVED EQUAL" or similar terms mean that approval of the Architect is required. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. All products shall be new and specifically purchased for the work of this project and in compliance with
the specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Ship and deliver all products in the manufacturer's undamaged crating and packaging to avoid product
damage.
B. The contractor shall receive, unload, check, store, record and protect all materials required for this project, whether furnished by the Owner or the Contractor.
C. Other contractors having contracts direct with the Owner shall receive any material becoming part of their work.
1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store all products off the ground on blocking or pallets.
B. Cover all products for protection from weather and vandalism damage.
C. Store finish products (i.e. paint, etc.) for at least 24 hours at room temperature, prior to installation.
D. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.
Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid
condensation.
SA1509A MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01 6000-2
G. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.
H. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to insure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
1.06 GENERAL A. Stamp all products requiring specific grading quality or certification with the appropriate designations.
B. Remove and replace all products damaged, defective, improperly installed, or used products.
C. Store, test, install and clean all products in accordance with the specifications and all specific
manufacturers' requirements.
D. The Contractor shall receive, unload, check, store, record and protect all materials required for this project whether furnished by the Owner or the Contractor.
E. SOURCE LIMITATIONS: 1. To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same generic kind, from a single source, for
each unit of work. 2. Where it is not possible to do so, match separate procurements as closely as possible. 3. To the extent that the product selection process is under the Contractor's control, provide
products that are compatible with previously selected products. 4. Where standard products are available that comply with specified requirements, provide those
standard products that have been used successfully before in similar applications, and that are recommended by the manufacturers' for the applications indicated.
F. NAMEPLATES: Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating date, do not
permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on the exterior of the completed project.
1.08 PRODUCT SELECTIONS A. Comply with the following requirements in the selection of products and equipment:
1. SINGLE PRODUCT NAME: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product, unless it is not available, is incompatible with existing work, or does not comply with specified requirements or governing regulations.
2. TWO OR MORE PRODUCTS NAMED: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, the selection is at the contractor's options, provided the product selected complies with specified requirements.
3. "OR EQUAL" PROVISIONS: Where products or manufacturers are specified by name accompanied by the term "or equal", provide either the product named, or comply with the requirements for gaining approval of "substitutions: for the use of unnamed product".
4. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS: Where the specifications require only compliance with an imposed standard (ASTM number), code or regulation, the Contractor has the option of selecting any product that complies with specified requirements provided the product names are indicated.
5. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: Where the specifications require compliance with indicated performance requirements, the Contractor has the option of selecting any product that complies with the specific performance requirements, provided no product names are indicated.
6. VISUAL REQUIREMENT: Where the specifications indicate that a product is to be selected from the manufacturer's standard options, without naming the manufacturer, the Architect has the option of making the selection, after the Contractor has determined or selected the manufacturers.
SA1509A MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01 6000-3
1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Owner and the Architect will consider formal requests for the substitution of products in place of
those specified when requests are reasonable, timely, fully documented, and only under one or more of the conditions set forth below: 1. The request is accompanied by complete data on the proposed equivalent substantiating
compliance with the Contract Documents including product identification and description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an itemized comparison or the proposed equivalent with the products specified or named by the Addenda, with data relating to contract time schedule, design, and artistic effect where applicable, and its relationship to separate contracts.
2. The request is accompanied by accurate cost data on the proposed, equivalent comparison with the product specified, whether or not modification of the contract Sum is to be a consideration.
3. All items submitted as equivalents by the bidder are deemed compatible with other related materials, systems and assemblies; acceptable to manufacturers of these other materials, systems and assemblies; and approvable for guarantee and warranty purposes.
4. The proposed substitution is related to an "or equal" or similar provision in the contract documents.
5. The required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with contract time requirements. 6. The required product cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, or cannot
be warranted or insured as specified. 7. The proposed substitution will offer a substantial advantage to the Owner after deducting
offsetting disadvantages including delays, additional compensation to the Architect for redesign, evaluation and other necessary services, and similar considerations.
8. The required product is not acceptable to the governing authorities. B. Submit complete data describing specified item along with data describing proposed substitution for
comparison purposes. 1. Information describing specified item to be same as required for proposed substitution (see
above, this section). 2. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE PRODUCT DATA
DESCRIBING SPECIFIED ITEM AS WELL AS PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION. C. Requests for substitution, when forwarded by the Contractor to the Architect, are understood to mean that
the Contractor: 1. Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined
that it is equal or superior to that specified, in all respects; 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that specified; 3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and the Architect's redesign costs; and that he waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and
4. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects.
D. The burden of proof to show equivalency or equal quality shall be that of the Contractor.
1. Submissions for this purpose shall follow the format described in SECTION 01 3400 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
2. Submittals shall be complete, informative and address all data required in the base bid without unusual effort or exhaustive research, review and making a judgment as to its equivalency.
3. Excessive or unusually lengthy periods of time required of the Architect by the Contractor to review, research and qualify items proposed as equivalents shall be charged to the Contractor at the current billing rate of the Architect.
E. Proposed equivalents will not be considered if:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawing submissions, without the formal request required in the "SUBSTITUTIONS" Paragraph in this section.
2. For their implementation they require a substantial revision of the Contract documents in order to accommodate their use, as determined by the Architect.
SA1509A MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01 6000-4
F. Equivalents approved by the Architect shall be made a part of the contract by Change Order issued thereafter.
1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete product documentation, including product data and samples, where appropriate.
B. Provide detailed performance comparisons and evaluation including testing laboratory reports where
applicable.
C. Provide coordination information indicating the effect of the substitution on other work and the time schedule.
D. Provide cost information for the proposed change order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation.
B. Reject damaged and defective items.
C. Proceeding with work signifies acceptance of materials or equipment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly.
B. Secure work true to line and level, and within recognized tolerances.
C. Allow expansion and building movement.
D. Provide uniform joint width in exposed work.
E. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect.
F. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to the Architect/Engineer for final decision.
G. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation.
H. Install each unit of work during weather conditions and project status, which will ensure the best possible
results in coordination with the entire work.
I. Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration.
J. Install all material, equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturer's directions and protect and keep in repair and proper operating condition until acceptance of the building.
K. Align equipment-requiring alignment in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
END OF SECTION 01 6000
SA1509A PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 7000-1
SECTION 01 7000 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes the process and requirements for project closeout procedures for all Contractors. 1.03 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. GENERAL: The Contractor shall complete the following before requesting the Architect's inspection for
certification of substantial completion, either for the entire work or for portions of the work: 1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents to the Architect. 2. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock of material and similar physical items to the Owner. 3. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance
personnel B. The Contractor shall complete the following before requesting the Architect's inspection for certification of
substantial completion, either for the entire work or for portions of the work: 1. Submit a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 3. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner's full, unrestricted use of the work and access to
services and utilities. 4. Provide occupancy permits 5. Make final changeover of locks and transmit the keys to the Owner. 6. Advise the Owner's personnel of the change-over in security provisions. 7. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and services from the project site,
along with construction tools and facilities, mock-ups, and similar elements. 1.04 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor:
1. Submit written notice to the Architect & Owner of that Project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete.
2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected and a list of all material to be turned over to the Owner.
B. Architect/Engineer in conjunction with the Owner will make an inspection within a reasonable time after
receipt of notice. C. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work is substantially complete:
1. Architect/Engineer shall prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, AIA G704, complete with signatures of Owner and Contractor, accompanied by a list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared by the Architect.
2. Owner occupancy of Project or designated portion of Project: a. Contractor shall:
1) Obtain permanent/temporary certificate of occupancy. 2) Perform final cleaning.
b. Owner will occupy Project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3. The Contractor shall complete work listed for completion or corrections prior to Owner occupancy.
SA1509A PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 7000-2
D. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work is not substantially complete: 1. Architect/Engineer shall immediately notify the Contractor, stating reasons. Contractor shall notify
contractors. 2. Contractor shall complete work and notify the Architect, certifying that Project, or designated portion
of Project, is substantially complete. 3. Architect/Engineer will reinspect work.
1.05 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
1. Perform all the work necessary to properly close out the project. 2. Submit the following items to the Architect for review and approval together with the final
Application for Payment. All documents shall be completed, signed, dated, and notarized as required before requesting Architect's final inspection. a. WARRANTIES, BONDS, AFFIDAVITS, AND CERTIFICATES:
1) Provide all bonds, affidavits or warranties as required in each section. 2) The effective date shall be the date the final Certificate of Payment is approved
by the Owner. 3) Except to the extent that the contract documents provide for a longer guaranty or
warranty period, all the work of the project shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of not less than one calendar year beginning from the date of the final Certificate of Payment.
4) CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT: AIA Document G707, if required.
5) Bonds in lieu of release or waiver of liens, if required 6) BUILDER'S WARRANTY: Provide fully executed and notarized warranties as
required. 7) CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS and CLAIMS: AIA
Document G706. 8) CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS: AIA Document G706A
for the Contractors. 9) CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS on the required forms for
Subcontractors 10) FINAL APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT: Provide fully
executed AIA Document G702 with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted.
11) ELECTRICAL INSPECTION CERTIFICATE 12) CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY: Obtain and pay for this certificate and deliver
to the Architect. 13) Certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 14) Updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract
Sum 15) Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements b. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: (SEE SECTION 01 7020 - PROJECT
RECORD DOCUMENTS) c. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA: SEE SECTION 01 7030 -
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATING AND TRAINING 1.06 FINAL INSPECTION PROCEDURES A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's Representative and are
operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection. 6. Owner’s designated staff have been instructed on all equipment and systems.
SA1509A PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 7000-3
7. All project record documents “As-Builts” have been submitted to the Architect/Engineer. 8. Operational and Maintenance Manuals have been submitted to the Architect/Engineer. 9. Owner has received the specified spare parts and maintenance items. A signed receipt by Owner
representative shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer. 10. All warranties and guarantees have been submitted to the Architect/Engineer.
B. Architect/Engineer will make final inspection within a reasonable time after receipt of certifications. C. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work is not finally complete:
1. Architect/Engineer shall notify the Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send second written
notice to Architect/Engineer certifying that work is complete. 3. Architect/Engineer will re-inspect work.
1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. PROJECT RECORDS DOCUMENTS - SECTION 01 7020
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA - SECTION 01 7030 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES - SECTION 01 7040
B. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: Conform to requirements of individual technical sections. C. Contractor shall deliver evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities to the Architect.
1. Certificates of Inspection a. Plumbing b. HVAC c. Electrical d. Others if required
D. Deliver Certificate of Insurance covering the warranty period as specified in the Contract Documents.
E. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall supply the following in addition to all other items listed herein:
1. Physical/Exams and Worker Acknowledgment. 2. All testing and lab results. 3. Transportation and disposal records.
1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Refer to Specification 01 3420 for final application for payment requirements.
END OF SECTION 01 7000
SA1509A CLEANING UP REQUIREMENTS 01 7010-1
SECTION 01 7010 - CLEANING UP REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections
Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes the requirements for clean up procedures for all contractors. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by
operations.
B. All occupied portions of the facility affected by the construction activity shall be cleaned at the close of each workday.
C. Upon Substantial Completion of Work, remove balance of waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials, and clean all exposed surfaces; leave project clean and ready for occupancy.
1.04 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: Maintain project in accord with safety and insurance standards.
B. Hazards Control
1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary
drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute cleaning to ensure that building, grounds and public properties are maintained free from
accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust. Erect dustproof barriers to keep
dust from drifting through the building.
SA1509A CLEANING UP REQUIREMENTS 01 7010-2
C. Each day, the Contractor shall affect the following: 1. Areas of intense activity, such as cutting and sawing must be swept clean and reorganized at the
end of each day. 2. Areas of moderate activity such as installation of plumbing, ductwork, electrical work must be
returned to good order at the end of each day. 3. Debris below scaffolds (and shoring/reshoring) must at all times, be kept sufficiently consolidated
to keep walkways free of tripping hazards. These work areas must also be swept clean immediately upon removal of scaffolds.
4. All swept up debris, waste materials, and packing must be removed and/or placed in the dumpster by noon of the following workday.
5. All stored material must be kept in good order. 6. As portions of the work are completed, all used and excess materials must be removed promptly. 7. Daily clean-up and good housekeeping is the responsibility of the Contractor and will be
monitored by the Owner. 8. Contractors shall promptly comply with requests to organize scattered materials.
D. Separate and recycle as required by the Owner.
E. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handling as possible; do not drop or throw materials
from heights.
F. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
G. Excess concrete, block, mortar, grout, plaster, drywall joint compound, etc. are the responsibility of
Contractors to remove. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. The Contractor shall provide complete the final cleaning of all work installed under this Scope of Work,
prior to acceptance by the Owner and the Architect, and prior to the Owners occupancy.
B. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surface so designated to shine finish.
C. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces. D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, the Owner will conduct an inspection of sight-
exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.
E. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by Owner.
END OF SECTION 01 7010
SA1509A PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7020-1
SECTION 01 7020 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes the requirements for project record documents. 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS (BY CONTRACTOR) A. Maintain, at job site, one copy of:
1. Contract Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Approved Shop Drawings 5. Supplemental Instructions 6. Change Orders 7. Other Modifications to Contract 8. Project Record Drawings/As-Built Drawings 9. Field Test Records 10. Correspondence File 11. Material Safety Data Sheets 12. All documentation required by OSHA, State, Federal and Local Authorities
B. Store documents in approved locations, apart from documents used for construction.
C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
D. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.
E. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
F. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Architect/Engineer and Owner.
G. File documents in accordance with Project Filing Format of Uniform Construction Index. 1.04 RECORDING (BY CONTRACTOR) A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in two-inch high printed letters.
B. Keep record documents current.
C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.
D. Contract Drawings
1. Legibly mark to record actual construction: a. All items from Addendums b. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to
visible and accessible features of structure. c. Field changes of dimension and detail. d. Changes made by Supplemental Instructions of Change Order. e. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
SA1509A PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7020-2
E. Specifications and Addenda 1. Legibly mark-up each section to record:
a. All items from Addendums b. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed. c. Changes made by Supplemental Instructions of Change Order. d. Other matters not originally specified.
F. Shop Drawings: Maintain as record documents. Legibly mark-up approved shop drawings to show
changes made after review.
G. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall transfer all "As Built" information to one (1) set of drawings. These "As Built" must be submitted and reviewed by Architect/Engineer prior to the release of retainage.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORT (BY CONTRACTOR) A. Information Required:
1. Day, Date 2. Name of Contractor/Subcontractors 3. Manpower breakdown by Contractor/Subcontractor with hours worked 4. Description of where working and operations 5. General description of material delivered 6. List of visitors 7. Remarks on accidents, progress of work, etc. 8. List of equipment 9. Listing of Manpower trades and classifications to be used 10. Temperature and weather conditions 11. Copy of construction waste manifestation tickets – to track amount of waste leaving site
1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS (BY CONTRACTOR) A. Deliver Contractor's Daily Report to the Owner at the end of the project.
B. At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect.
C. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate containing:
1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor, or authorized representative
END OF SECTION 01 7020
SA1509A OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION 01 7030-1 AND TRAINING
SECTION 01 7030 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals.
B. Subcontractors shall provide the required data to the Contractor, who shall put the data in the required formats (hard copy and electronic), and submit to the Architect.
C. Contractor shall coordinate demonstration and training with the Owner. Contractor shall perform demonstration and training in presence of the Owner.
1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of
products furnished under the Contract.
B. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other sections of Specifications.
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
1. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 2. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
1.05 FORM OF SUBMISSION A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. Additionally, provide all
submitted information in an electronic PDF format on disk. B. Format:
1. Size: 8 1/2 inch x 11 inch 2. Paper: 10-pound minimum, white, for typed pages. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 4. Drawings:
a. Reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
5. Provide tabbed indexed dividers for each separate product, piece of operating equipment, or system. a. Divide information by specification section, major equipment, or systems. b. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of equipment or system.
6. Cover: Identify each volume (front and spine) with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
SA1509A OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION 01 7030-2 AND TRAINING
7. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software. C. Binders:
1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2. Minimum ring size: 1 inch. Size 1/4" thicker than material for future inserts. 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings.
1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Subcontractors with addresses,
telephone numbers, and contacts.
B. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order describing all index tabs. 1. List of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 2. List with each product, the name, address, telephone number, and contacts of:
a Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers. b. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
3. Identify each product-by-product name and other identifying symbols as described in Contract Documents.
C. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Mark each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
1) Delete references to inapplicable information. D. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. a. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Start-Up Reports:
1. Copies of factory inspections and/or equipment start-up reports. F. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
G. Copy of each warranty, guarantee and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances that might affect the validity of warranties or guarantees.
1.07 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit two (2) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for all products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, composition b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. d. Applicable standards e. Chemical composition
SA1509A OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION 01 7030-3 AND TRAINING
f. Details of installation 1. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair.
C. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
D. Provide complete information for all products specified. 1.08 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit two (2) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Schedule and Procedures: a. Chart listing routine maintenance requirements and frequency. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting" c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly instructions. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication schedule: a. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for
maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. Copies of factory inspections and / or equipment start-up reports. 9. Schematic wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field conditions. 10. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 11. Each Contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color-coded piping diagrams. 12. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 13. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, suppliers, and recommended quantities to be
maintained in storage. 14. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment and / or system. 15. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards: a. Electrical service b. Controls c. Communications
a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions.
SA1509A OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION 01 7030-4 AND TRAINING
5. Maintenance Schedule and Procedures: a. Chart listing routine maintenance requirements and frequency. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting" c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly instructions. d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. Schematic wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field conditions. 8. Copies of factory inspections and / or equipment start-up reports. 9. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, suppliers, and recommended quantities to be
maintained in storage. 10. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment and / or system. 11. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of
Owner's personnel.
E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.09 DEMONSTRATING AND TRAINING A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully demonstrate and train Owner's designated personnel in the
operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Demonstration and training shall be structured and include the following:
1. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: a. Equipment, including food-service equipment, clock system, and communication system. b. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm. c. Heat generation, including boilers, feed water equipment, and pumps. d. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment and terminal equipment and devices. e. HVAC instrumentation and controls. f. Electrical service and distribution, including uninterruptible power supplies and motor
controls. 2. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: a. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
1) System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2) Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3) Operating standards. 4) Equipment function. 5) Operating characteristics. 6) Limiting conditions.
b. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: 1) Operations manuals. 2) Maintenance manuals. 3) Identification systems. 4) Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
c. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
1) Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. 2) Instructions on stopping. 3) Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 4) Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. 5) Sequences for electric or electronic systems. 6) Special operating instructions and procedures.
d. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: 1) Startup procedures.
SA1509A OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION 01 7030-5 AND TRAINING
2) Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3) Routine and normal operating instructions. 4) Regulation and control procedures. 5) Control sequences. 6) Normal shutdown instructions. 7) Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8) Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 9) Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
e. Adjustments: Include the following: 1) Alignments. 2) Checking adjustments. 3) Noise and vibration adjustments. 4) Economy and efficiency adjustments.
f. Troubleshooting: Include the following: 1) Diagnostic instructions. 2) Test and inspection procedures.
g. Maintenance: Include the following: 1) Inspection procedures. 2) Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3) List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4) Procedures for routine cleaning 5) Procedures for preventive maintenance. 6) Procedures for routine maintenance. 7) Instruction on use of special tools.
h. Repairs: Include the following: 1) Diagnosis instructions. 2) Repair instructions. 3) Instructions for identifying parts and components. 4) Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel
in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory authorized service representative, experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare and submit an outline of instructional program content for demonstration and training, including a
schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors’ names for each training module. Submit a minimum of three (3) weeks prior to proposed training dates.
B. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.02 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to
coordinate instructors, and to coordinate with Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.
SA1509A OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA/DEMONSTRATION 01 7030-6 AND TRAINING
B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Owner will furnish the Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner, with at least seven (7) days advanced notice.
D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.
END OF SECTION 01 7030
SA1509A WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 01 7040-1
SECTION 01 7040 - WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and guarantees
required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers' standard warranties on products and special warranties.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations:
1. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for
particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.
1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. All warranties shall be transferable to the Owner upon successful and final completion of contract work
performed by each Contractor.
B. Related Damages and Losses: 1. When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been
damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
C. Reinstatement of Warranty:
1. When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
D. Replacement Cost:
1. Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
E. Owner's Recourse:
1. Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. a. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
SA1509A WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 01 7040-2
F. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept work for the project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.05 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect written warranties prior to the date certified for Substantial
Completion. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by
separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, supplier or
manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties.
C. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or the
Contractor and Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer. D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two (2) copies of each required warranty and guarantee
properly executed by the Contractor, or by Subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. The Contractor shall organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.
E. The Contractor shall bind warranties and guarantees in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable three D-
ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a type description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.
2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES", the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor.
F. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional
copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.
END OF SECTION 01 7040
SA1509A SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION 02 0100-1
SECTION 02 0100 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION includes a full copy of the Geotechnical Report. It is provided for Contractor bid information. 1.02 SOILS INVESTIGATION A. A Geotechnical Report was commissioned by the Owner and performed by Kenny Geotechnical
Engineering Services, PLLC B. The subsurface information is provided for the convenience of the Contractor. It is not intended to
represent or warranty the accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is to be expressly understood that neither the Owner, nor Architect, will be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 02 0100
SA1509A CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000-1
SECTION 03 1000 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage
B. Openings for other work
C. Form accessories
D. Form stripping 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING
B. SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American
Concrete Institute; 2006
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2005
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute; 2008
D. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004
E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. PRODUCT DATA: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with Highways (Department of Transportation) standards of
the State of New York. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
B. Store forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place
concrete work.
SA1509A CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000-2
B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.
C. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork.
D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. FORM MATERIALS: At the discretion of the Contractor. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. FORM TIES: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, 1/2 inch back break dimension,
free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface.
B. FORM RELEASE AGENT: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete.
C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, through Bolts, and Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with
drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms are not permitted 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of
ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves,
bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
SA1509A CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000-3
3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency (Special Inspector) will perform field quality control tests, as specified in
SECTION 01 4000 and 01 4100. B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork
design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.08 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and
imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
END OF SECTION 03 1000
SA1509A CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000-1
SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 03 1000 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES.
B. SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International;
2005.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008.
C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
D. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007.
E. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007.
F. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007.
G. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2005.
H. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001.
I. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; Eighth Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars,
spacing of bars, and location of splices. 1. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of
work of this type and licensed in New York. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site. B. Provide Special Inspector with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement.
Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection.
SA1509A CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000-2
C. WELDERS' CERTIFICATES: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. REINFORCING STEEL: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Plain billet-steel bars. B. STEEL WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
1. Concrete (exposed to weather): 1 1/2 inch 2. Footings and Concrete Formed against Earth: 3 inches
E. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency (Special Inspector), as specified IN SECTION 01 4000 &
SECTION 01 4100, will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
END OF SECTION 03 2000
SA1509A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-1
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floors slabs on grade
B. Concrete foundations
C. Joint devices associated with concrete work
D. Vapor Retarder
E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads
F. Concrete curing 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American
Concrete Institute International; 2006
B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002)
C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005
D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007)
E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000
F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999
G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002)
H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001
I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008
J. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2007 K. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens;
2005
L. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2007
M. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005a
N. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007
O. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2007
SA1509A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-2
P. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006
Q. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2007
R. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2008
S. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005
T. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing; 2007 U. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999
V. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink);
2007a
W. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004
X. ASTM E 1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008)
Y. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997 (Reapproved 2004)
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit concrete mix designs for all mixes as well as manufacturers' data on
manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements.
C. SAMPLES: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of SECTION 03 1000 – CONCTRETE FORMING & ACCESSORIES 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of SECTION 03 2000 – CONCRETE REINFORCING 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. CEMENT: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal portland type.
B. FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES: ASTM C 33
C. FLY ASH: ASTM C 618, Class C or F
SA1509A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-3
D. WATER: Clean and not detrimental to concrete
E. FIBER REINFORCEMENT: Synthetic fiber shown to have long-term resistance to deterioration when
exposed to moisture and alkalis; 1/2 inch length 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement.
B. AIR ENTRAINMENT ADMIXTURE: ASTM C 260 C. ACCELERATING ADMIXTURE: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type C D. RETARDING ADMIXTURE: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type B
E. WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or
equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. (Single ply polyethylene is prohibited).10 mil thickness, minimum.
B. Chemical Hardener: Fluosilicate solution designed for densification of cured concrete slabs
C. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 psi
D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. LATEX BONDING AGENT: Non-dispersible acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C 1059 Type II.
B. JOINT FILLER: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D
1751, 1/2 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile.
C. SEALANT AND PRIMER: As specified in SECTION 07 9005 – JOINT SEALERS.. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. PROPORTIONING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. CONCRETE STRENGTH: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of
trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Schopfer Architects
LLP for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. ADMIXTURES: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by
manufacturer.
D. NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: As
indicated on drawings. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight 3. Water-Cement Ratio: As indicated on drawings.
E. MIX DESIGNS: See Structural Drawings
SA1509A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-4
2.08 MIXING A. ON PROJECT SITE: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less
than 1 1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
B. TRANSIT MIXERS: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
D. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
E. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R
C. Notify Special Inspector not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be
disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.
G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07 90 05 for finish joint sealer requirements.
I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
K. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with SECTION 07 9005 – JOINT SEALERS.
SA1509A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-5
L. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
N. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
O. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness.
P. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. UNEXPOSED FORM FINISH: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height.
C. EXPOSED FORM FINISH: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height. Provide finish as follows: 1. SMOOTH RUBBED FINISH: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not
more than 24 hours after form removal D. CONCRETE SLABS: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. SURFACES TO RECEIVE THIN FLOOR COVERINGS: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1R; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, and thin set ceramic tile.
2. SURFACES TO BE LEFT EXPOSED: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects a. Chemical Hardener: After slab has cured, apply water-diluted hardener in three coats per
manufacturer's instructions, allowing 24 hours between coats. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100
nominal. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature
drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days
C. FORMED SURFACES: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. SURFACES NOT IN CONTACT WITH FORMS:
1. INITIAL CURING: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.
2. FINAL CURING: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate
recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Special Inspector will perform field quality control tests, as specified in SECTIONS 01 4000 and
01 4100. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
SA1509A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-6
C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
D. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
3.07 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. TEST RESULTS: The Special Inspector shall report test results in writing to Schopfer Architects LLP and
Contractor within 24 hours of test.
B. DEFECTIVE CONCRETE: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Schopfer Architects LLP. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified
END OF SECTION 03 3000
SA1509A ARCHITECTURAL THIN BRICK 04 2100 - 1
SECTION 04 2100 – ARCHITECTURAL THIN BRICK
PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES THIN BRICK UNITS AND RELATED MATERIALS:
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 general requirements apply to this section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 67 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
B. ASTM C 270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
C. ASTM C 847 – Standard Specification for Metal Lath
D. ASTM C 1063 – Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior
Portland Cement Based Plaster
E. ASTM C 1088 – Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale
F. ASTM C 1330 – Standard Specification for Preblended Dry Mortar Mix for Unit Masonry
G. ASTM D 1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber
H. TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 – Specifications for Masonry Structures
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Complete product data and test reports on all materials 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 4. Installation methods
C. Installer & Manufacturer qualifications.
SA1509A ARCHITECTURAL THIN BRICK 04 2100 - 2
D. SAMPLES: Furnish not less than five individual thin brick as samples for each thin brick specified, showing extreme variations in color and texture, and each shape.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MASONRY STANDARD: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents.
B. Comply with all applicable codes, regulations, and standards. Where provision of applicable codes, regulations, and standards conflict with requirements of this section, the more demanding shall govern.
C. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: 1. Obtain materials from one manufacturer to ensure compatibility. 2. Obtain materials from company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a
minimum 5 years documented experience.
D. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: 1. Proof of a minimum of five years’ experience with related thin masonry installations. 2. At least one supervisory journeyman who shall be present at all times during execution of work, who
shall be thoroughly familiar with design requirement, type of materials being installed, reference standards and other requirements, and who shall direct all work performed at jobsite.
E. THIN BRICK TEST REPORTS: Submit test reports substantiating compliance with requirements: Sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 67. 1. Testing and reports shall be completed by an independent laboratory.
a. Test reports for each type of thin brick shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.
b. Thin Brick Test reports shall indicate: 1) 2-hour cold water absorption 2) 5-hour boil absorption 3) Saturation coefficient 4) Initial rate of absorption 5) Efflorescence
F. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit individual drawings to be approved by architect for special shaped thin brick units.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in dry location in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store all materials off the ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or other materials likely to cause
staining or other defects.
C. Protect materials from contamination, dampness, freezing, or overheating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Store different types of materials separately.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of material manufacturers for
environmental conditions before, during, and after installation. B. PROTECTION OF WORK:
1. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by material manufacturers for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits.
SA1509A ARCHITECTURAL THIN BRICK 04 2100 - 3
2. STAIN PREVENTION: a. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry. b. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such masonry. c. Protect all sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. d. Protect the wall from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground
and over wall surface. e. Turn scaffold boards closest to the wall on edge when work is not in progress to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt onto masonry.
C. COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2. Do not build on frozen substrates. 3. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. 4. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
D. HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS:
1. Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 2. Protect mortar from uneven and excessive evaporation.
a. The face of the installed thin brick may be dampened with water prior mortar installation to reduce the absorption of moisture from the mortar joint and increase bond.
b. Veneer may be fogged with water to allow the mortar enough time to set. Apply only enough moisture to consistently dampen the wall without allowing water to run down the face.
PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. DEFECTIVE UNITS: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain
chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not install units where such defects will be exposed in the completed work.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: Endicott Clay Products Company located at 57120 707th Rd,
Endicott, NE 68350 Tel: (402) 729-3315, or approved equal. Thin Brick is available from Paragon Supply, (315) 475-5515.
2.03 CLAY MASONRY UNITS A. GENERAL: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for applications where flats (stretcher units) cannot accommodate special conditions, including corners, movement joints, and bond beams. Mitered units shall not be used at standard corners.
2. Provide special shapes for applications requiring thin brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
3. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
B. Thin Brick shall be as noted on drawings. 1. THIN BRICK: ASTM C 1088, Grade Exterior
a. Type TBX, Extruded b. Size (height, length – actual dimensions listed)
1) Modular Size: 2-1/4" (57.2 mm) high, 7-5/8" (193.7 mm) long c. Thickness: ¾”
2.04 MORTAR A. MORTAR FOR ALL MASONRY (THIN BRICK, CAST STONE, MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY):
1. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry under the guidelines provided in BIA Technical Notes #8 Series; Type S. Use a mechanical batch mixer.
B. MORTAR MATERIALS:
1. MASONARY CEMENT: ASTM C 91, Type N a. Natural-color mortar: Premixed cement; color additives not necessary. 2. PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C 150, Type 1; natural color
a. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali b. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S c. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144
3. WATER: Clean and potable 4. WATER REPELLENT ADMIXTURE: Dry-block system of integral water-repellent admixtures for block
and mortar, as manufactured by Grace Construction Products (877-423-6491 or www.dryblock.com), or approved equal. Add to mortar mixes as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Cold Weather Additives (including accelerators) shall not be used in mortar mix.
2.05 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer’s standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout
stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
a. 202 New Masonry Detergent b. 202V Vana-Stop® c. Other as recommended by masonry unit and mortar manufacturer.
2.06 RELATED MATERIALS A. EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
1. METAL FLASHING: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed and where indicated, complying with Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal facias, Flashing and Trim. a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016" (0.40 mm) thick (minimum). b. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz./sq. ft. (4.9-kg/sq. m)
weight or 0.0216"(0.55 mm) thick or ASTM B 370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12-oz./sq. ft. (3.7-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0162" (0.41 mm) thick.
c. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2" (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
2. FLEXIBLE FLASHING: a. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040" (1.02 mm).
b. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer’s standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.
B. MASONRY VENEER SUPPORT MATERIALS 1. Panel: 26-gauge, galvanized grade 33, stucco-embossed, textured steel with angled ties to provide
support for thin masonry veneer: Glen-Gery Corporation Elite Thin Tech Panel or approved equal. 2. Support Ties: 3/8” 3. Fasteners: self-tapping pan-head screws with corrosion resistance provided by Tri-Layered Ceramic
Coating with a minimum protection of 1,000 hours per ASTM B117. Screws shall be a minimum of #12 x 4” long (to penetrate wood studs a minimum of 1”).
4. Adhesive for Thin Brick: high-strength mastic exceeding ASTM D3498 and ASTM C577 requirements and a shear value greater then 50 PSI.
C. EXPANSION JOINTS 1. Compressible Filler: pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1
formulated from neoprene. 2. Backer Rod: Non-gassing polyethylene or flexible polyurethane foam rod 25% wider than width of joint
to be filled.
D. WEATHER BARRIERS: Provide material as designated in DIVISION 7.
E. STARTER ANGLES: 26 GA Type 304 stainless steel, 10’ lengths, profile per drawings.
F. WEEPHOLES/VENTS: Gen-Gery Thin Tech Air Vent, 3/8” x ½” x 48”, or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates and foundations as well as rough-in and built-in construction have been
properly prepared. 1. Walls must be structurally sound, and the substrate system designed with a wall deflection not greater
than L/360. B. Verify substrate including, concrete, masonry or framing as well as sheathings, water resistant barriers are
properly installed.
C. If substrate, foundations or flashings are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect and General contractor of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. All surfaces must be free of water, snow, dirt, mud, oil and other
foreign materials prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the
substrate under the project conditions. C. Trim or flash in place per manufacturer’s details and/or BIA Technical Note 7A on flashing of Brick Walls.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install Thin Brick in accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions.
B. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for
accurate location of openings, movement joints, returns, and offsets. 1. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners and jambs. 2. Ensure unfinished or cut faces are not exposed to view upon completion.
C. Select and arrange exposed masonry units to produce a uniform blend of color and texture.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
D. Lay masonry in running bond pattern unless otherwise indicated on drawings or general notes.
E. Comply with tolerances in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
SA1509A ARCHITECTURAL THIN BRICK 04 2100 - 6
3.04 CLEANING A. IN-PROGRESS CLEANING: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove adhesive as
well as mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B. FINAL CLEANING: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Cut out all defective mortar joints and holes in exposed masonry and provide new mortar. 2. Clean preselected sample wall area with specified cleaning solution as per manufacturer’s
recommendations. Do not proceed with cleaning until approved by Architect. 3. Clean thin brick in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 4. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 5. All cleaning practices and product used shall be in accordance with cleaning products manufacturer’s
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 04 2100
SA1509A STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-1
SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members, and struts
B. Miscellaneous steel angles, plates, channels, pipe, etc for bearing plates, loose lintels, roof openings, etc.
C. Bearing plates
D. Grouting under bearing plates 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING: Support framing for small openings in deck.
B. SECTON 05 2000 – STEEL JOISTS
C. SECTION 05 5000 – METAL FABRICATIONS: Lintels, miscellaneous steel. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005
B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc.; 2005
C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004
D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005
E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007
F. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2007
G. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002
H. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005
I. ASTM A 242/A 242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004
J. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2007b
K. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength; 2007a
L. ASTM A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2008a
M. ASTM A 490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for
Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 2004
SA1509A STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-2
N. ASTM A 514/A 514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2005
O. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a
P. ASTM A 563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007
Q. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2006a R. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink);
2007a
S. ASTM F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2007a
T. ASTM F 1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a
U. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007
V. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006 and Errata
W. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004)
X. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004)
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS:
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.
2. Connections 3. Indicate cambers and loads 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
C. MANUFACTURER'S MILL CERTIFICATE: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. WELDERS CERTIFICATES: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the
previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."
B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
architecturally exposed structural steel.
C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years of documented experience.
D. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years of documented experience.
E. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in New York.
SA1509A STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles, Plates, and Channels: ASTM A 36/A 36M
B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M
C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black
D. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 325
E. Headed Anchor Rods: F1554
F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded
G. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107 Grade B capable of
developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. Provide multi-purpose construction grout manufactured by Symons (847-298-3200 or www.symons.com), or approved equal.
H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricators standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricators standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible
B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors
C. Develop required camber for members 2.03 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 2.
B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in
contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly
proceed. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges".
B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Schopfer Architects LLP.
E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact
with concrete.
F. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for non-shrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.
3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Special Inspector will perform field quality control tests, as specified in SECTION 01 4000 and
01 4100.
B. Provide free access to steel work at the project site and cooperate with the Special Inspector.
END OF SECTION 05 1200
SA1509A STEEL JOISTS 05 2000-1
SECTION 05 2000 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Work supplied and installed: a. Open web steel joists b. Bridging c. Masonry anchor bars d. Shop painting e. Field touch-up painting
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1. YIELD STRENGTH: a. CHORDS: 50,000 psi b. WEBS: 36,000 psi or 50,000 psi
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit six (6) of the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SECTION 01 3400 –
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. SHOP DRAWINGS:
a. ERECTION PLAN AND DETAIL DRAWINGS INCLUDING: 1) All steel joist members. 2) Anchoring details. 3) All standard and special details. 4) Details and locations of all special connections. 5) Field welding details and locations.
b. Revise erection drawings and detail drawings as necessary for approval. c. Review of shop drawings does not relieve the fabricator of responsibility for proper fit or
detail design of connections, or for supplying all necessary material. 2. ERECTION PROCEDURE: Descriptive data to illustrate the structural erection procedure. 3. FIELD WELDING PROCEDURE AND EQUIPMENT:
a. AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure" Welder's Certificate. 4. CERTIFICATES OF CONFORMANCE:
a. Reports on tensile properties. b. Conformance reports on base studs in accordance with AWS Building Code Article 434. c. Filler metals for welding d. Shop paint primer
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
1. See SECTION 01 4000 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for applicable standards/abbreviations.
B. STANDARDS:
1. Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, specified or apply. a. SJI - "Standard Specifications" b. AISC -"Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings"
SA1509A STEEL JOISTS 05 2000-2
c. AWS - "Code for Arc and Gas Welding In Building Construction" d. ASTM
C. FABRICATOR/INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS:
1. SJI Member manufacturing joist series specified. 2. NON-MEMBERS: Submit SJI Certification in writing stating proposed joists meet this specification
and SJI standards. a. Design b. Material c. Manufacturing
D. WELDER QUALIFICATIONS:
1. COMPLY WITH: a. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" b. D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel" c. D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum"
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY:
1. Unload all members with a hoist. 2. Dumping of members from truck prohibited.
B. STORAGE: 1. Store members in a manner to prevent direct contact with the ground, prevent injury from
deflection and to avoid accumulations of dirt or other foreign matter. 2. Protect members from rust or corrosion. 3. Replace damaged members at no cost to Owner.
C. HANDLING: 1. Perform sorting and piling at site with care to prevent bending of members or abrasion of shop
paint and as directed by the Architect and Contractor's project superintendent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST:
1. "K" Series, as shown with top chord extensions, bottom chord extensions, and outriggers as shown.
2. Standard welded trusses. 3. SIZES AND SPACING: As shown on contract drawings. 4. SIZES: Based on loading table of the Steel Joist Institute, latest edition. 5. TRUSSES: Conform to the Steel Joist Institute specifications and to this section and project
requirements. 6. Provide special top chord extensions as indicated on Drawings. 7. CEILING EXTENSION BARS:
a. At all contact ceiling areas. b. Provide extension supported to outer end by a vertical member to top chord of joists.
8. BRIDGING: Horizontal and "x" bridging of sizes, materials and shapes per SJI requirements. Bridging shown on plans are general guide only.
9. SHOP PAINT: a. One complete coat, "shop standard" rust inhibitive primer.
SA1509A STEEL JOISTS 05 2000-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Install steel joist, bridging, bearing plates, anchors and other incidental items shown on the drawings or
required. B. Comply with SJI Specifications. C. BEARING:
1. MINIMUM BEARING LENGTH: a. ON STEEL: 4" b. ON MASONRY AND CONCRETE: 6" c. Connect each joist bearing on structural steel with two (2) 1/4" fillet welds 2 inches long d. Provide bearing plates and anchors as shown on the drawings at each end bearing on
masonry and concrete.
D. BRIDGING: 1. Continuous rows of horizontal or "x" bridging. 2. Comply with SJI Specifications. 3. Rigidly anchor to steel or masonry at each end. 4. Field weld or bolt bridging to each joist.
E. BRIDGING AND BOTTOM CHORD EXTENSIONS: 1. Anchor to masonry walls as detailed or according to approved alternate methods. (In essence,
the anchoring of each lower chord extension to a metal member which is either embedded in masonry or must be drilled and secured by use of "Red Head" anchors as detailed)
F. FIELD PAINTING:
1. Spot and touch-up connections, bolts, welds and holidays to provide complete shop coat. 2. Use same paint as shop coat.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ERECTION TOLERANCES:
1. Heating and air conditioning ducts may be run in the joist spaces. 2. Use care in the spacing and positioning of joists so that location does not vary more than 1/4"
from approved shop drawings. 3. Line up all openings in diagonal chords for the entire group of joists of the same span.
3.03 CLEANING A. REMOVE FROM ADJACENT SURFACES: Soil, stain and extraneous materials, caused by steel joist
work. B. Remove foreign matter from the clean exposed steel joist surfaces to a neat and uniform appearance.
END OF SECTION 05 2000
SA1509A STEEL DECKING 05 3100-1
SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof deck B. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005
B. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished; 2007
C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007
D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006 and Errata
E. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2007
F. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition
G. SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2007
H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic" and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004)
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, cellular
raceways and outlet box locations, pertinent details, and accessories.
C. PRODUCT DATA: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.
D. WELDERS CERTIFICATES: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in New York.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 10 years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
SA1509A STEEL DECKING 05 3100-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL DECK A. ROOF DECK: Composite type, fluted steel sheet:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M 2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: Per drawings 3. Nominal Height: 1 1/2 inch 4. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened 5. End Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened or welded 6. Type: Wide rib (Type B) 7. Sheet Widths: 36" (typical)
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. WELDING MATERIALS: AWS D1.1
B. FASTENERS: Galvanized hardened steel, self-tapping screws
C. WELD WASHERS: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick
D. TOUCH-UP PRIMER FOR GALVANIZED SURFACES: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations
of authorities having jurisdiction 2.03 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES A. SHEET METAL DECK ACCESSORIES: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates,
20-gauge thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level.
B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing
C. On steel supports provide minimum 1 1/2 inch bearing
D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches on center
maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods specified. 1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers
E. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum
F. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3
G. At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide steel angle reinforcement in accordance with
Detail 6/5-203. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.
H. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle
flashings to close openings.
I. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.
END OF SECTION 05 3100
SA1509A COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000-1
SECTION 05 4000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Work supplied and installed: a. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING:
b. Deck framing. c. Fastening systems required to complete work of this section
B. PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIES UNDER THIS SECTION:
1. Blanket and Fire Stop Insulation: Supplied under Section 07 2100 – THERMAL INSULATION. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Refer to structural drawings and general notes. B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
1. Design system components per AISA reference. Provide for movement of components due to thermal variations without damage, failure, or excessive stress on components.
2. Compute structural properties per AISI- Specifications for the design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
3. Design exterior wall system for environmental loads as outlined in the ASCE 7 latest edition to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
4. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.
5. Maximum Allowable Deflection: a. Gypsum Board: L/360 of span under total design loads.
6. Horizontal Assemblies: a. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L/360 of span under total design loads.
C. DEFLECTION LIMITS: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater
than the following: 1. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of wall height. 2. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for GWB ceiling below; 1/240 of the
span for ACT ceiling below. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SECTION 01 3400 –
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. CERTIFICATION:
a. Submit complete structural calculations indicating compliance with the Design Criteria stated above and applicable Codes and Standards.
SA1509A COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000-2
b. Affidavit from manufacturer certifying that light metal framing materials and finish product delivered to the job meet in all respects the specified requirements.
c. For trusses: Detailed drawings signed and sealed by a NYS licensed professional engineer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
1. See SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for applicable standards/abbreviations.
B. STANDARDS:
1. Meet latest available information and recommendations of applicable standards listed except where superseded by these contract documents: a. Governing Codes b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) c. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) d. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members e. ASTM A 446, Grade D
C. QUALIFICATIONS:
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
2. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code – Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. FRAMING: STUDS AND ACCESSORIES
1. Type, size, gauge, and spacing shown on the drawings. a. THICKNESS:
2. Form from corrosion-resistant steel 3. STEEL STRAPPING:
a. MATERIAL: Galvanized steel b. WEB/WIDTH: 2"
4. "C" STUD CLIP: Bostwick 250 C 16 5. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING: 16 gauge cold rolled channels or as required by design 6. FINISH: Galvanized complying with ASTM A 525, G60 coating 7. FLOOR AND CEILING RUNNING TRACK:
a. Channel type b. MATERIAL & GAUGE: Same as light metal framing
B. FRAMING: JOISTS AND ACCESSORIES
1. Marino-Ware “JOISTRITE” steel joists (or as manufactured by Vulcraft, Quincy Joist Company, or other meeting compliance requirements)
2. Same type, size, gauge, and spacing shown on the drawings. 3. Joists to be provided with manufacturer’s standard punched enlarged service holes with stiffened
flanges 4. Galvanized: ASTM A924 5. THICKNESS:
a. 18 gauge: 0.0451” thick, minimum b. 16 gauge: 0.0538” thick, minimum c. 14 gauge: 0.0677” thick, minimum
SA1509A COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000-3
C. VERTICAL DEFLECTION CLIPS:
1. Manufacture’s standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. Refer to structural Drawings for anticipated deflection of primary structural elements.
D. SINGLE DEFLECTION TRACK (SLOTTED SLIP TRACK): 1. Manufacture’s single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of
web depth to contain studs E. FRAMING CONNECTORS
1. Framing Connectors: Manufacturer's Standard Connectors, steel-framing accessories fabricated from steel sheet, ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
2. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated as follows: a. Web Stiffeners (JS) b. Solid Blocking (JB) c. Utility Angles (UA) d. Joist Hangers/Bride Hangers (HJCT/BH) e. Gusset Plates (GP) f. Rigid Clips (RCC) g. BridgeRite Clips (BR) h. Breakaway Clips (BA) i. SIMPSON Strong-Tie Connectors (Steel-to-Steel)
F. ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
1. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123/A123M
2. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E488. Refer to Structural Drawings.
3. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190. Refer to structural Drawings.
4. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drills screws. Refer to structural Drawings. a. Marino/WARE FrameRITE fasteners.
5. Welding Electrodes. Comply with AWS standards. G. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
1. Galvanizing repair Paint: SSPC-paint 20 or DOD-P-21035. 2. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix
at radio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Refer to structural Drawings.
3. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. Refer to Structural Drawings.
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. H. CONNECTIONS:
1. SCREWS: a. Type S-12 pan head b. Type S-12 low-profile head c. Self drilling and self tapping, cadmium plated for all exterior uses, of the size required for
loadings. 2. WELDS: Conform with AWS D1.3-80 utilizing E60xx or E70xx electrodes.
SA1509A COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000-4
3. POWDER DRIVEN SHOTS: a. Size and spacing as required to properly anchor the framing members. b. Use charge as appropriate for actual use.
4. CRIMPING AND POP-RIVETING: Use only with the approval of the Architect/Engineer. 5. WIRE TYING: Not permitted.
I. TOLERANCES:
1. PLUMB, LEVEL AND TRUE TO LINE: 1/8" in 10'-0" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: STUD FRAMING A. RUNNER TRACK:
1. SILL RUNNER TRACK: Accurately align and position to meet layout requirements. 2. HEAD RUNNER TRACK:
a. Carefully lay out and align structural runner channel which affixes to structural member at head.
b. Fasten with power-assisted anchors minimum of 16" o.c. B. STUDS:
1. Position snugly and vertically plumbed and aligned in runner tracks, no greater than 16" o.c. 2. Securely fasten each stud to runners with screws.
a. 2 at head b. 2 at sill c. One screw in each flange
3. Where noted on details, install vertical slide clips at top. 4. Weld clips to structural steel framing and do not fasten to stud. 5. Allow stud to expand and contract vertically without losing structural integrity.
C. WINDOW AND DOOR FRAMING:
1. JAMBS: Double stud or stud and runner reinforced and fastened together and insulated prior to installation. Install clips for headers and sills.
2. HEADERS: Engineer to carry superimposed loadings at all openings and securely fastened to jambs.
D. CORNERS AND INTERSECTING WALLS:
1. Must be properly connected to provide anchoring, stiffness and to provide fastening for finished materials.
E. SPLICES:
1. In runner tracks will be allowed except at lintels. 2. Proper reinforced and fastened splices may be welded or screwed. 3. No wiring of connections will be allowed.
F. Paint field abrasions and welds in field. G. HORIZONTAL BRACING: Where shown or required. Engineer and install to meet design criteria. H. DIAGONAL STEEL STRAPPING:
1. Securely fasten to structure and incline between 45 degrees and 60 degrees where indicated on the drawings, or required by design requirements.
2. Screw to each stud with one each 3/8" or 1/2" screw. I. ERECTION TOLERANCES:
1. STEP IN FACE AND JOG ALIGNMENT BETWEEN PANELS: 1/16" maximum. J. Weld connections between members shall be welded and welded area touched up as specified.
SA1509A COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000-5
K. Weld stud and girt components to surrounding structural steel members. L. Provide all clip angles, spacers, rods, angles, etc. to securely fasten studs and girts to structural steel. M. Framed wall openings shall include headers and supporting studs as shown on the plans. N. Handle and lift prefabricated panels and individual members in a manner as to not cause distortion in any
member. O. Securely anchor track to the supporting structure. P. ABUTTING PIECES OF TRACK AT TRACK BUTT JOINTS:
1. Anchor to a common structural element 2. Butt-welded 3. Or splice together
Q. Weld field connections, unless specifically authorized in writing by Architect. R. Attach support angles, by welds to each stud of sufficient strength to safely support loads imposed on
angles. S. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed. 3.02 ISOLATION A. Coat panels in contact with concrete or brick masonry with a heavy trowel coat of mastic to isolate metal
from masonry/concrete. 3.03 TOUCH UP A. Weld areas, abrasions or areas where the galvanized coating is damaged. B. Molten zinc or a zinc-rich paint. 3.04 FLASHING AND SEALANT A. Build-in flashings and sealant, supplied by others, where materials are detailed to be covered by
members of this section. 1. See SECTION 07 9000 - JOINT SEALERS
3.05 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all scraps, packaging, etc., as the result of this work, from the construction site. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 4000
SA1509A METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-1
SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Work supplied and installed: a. Miscellaneous steel angles and channels b. Shop painting and field touch-up c. Fasteners required to complete work of this section
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including DIVISION 0 & DIVISION 1 SPECIFICATION
SECTIONS, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SECTION 01 3400:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. SHOP DRAWINGS:
a. Fabrication details b. Erection drawings c. Plans, elevations and sections as required d. Anchorage, and miscellaneous accessories
2. SAMPLES: As requested 3. CERTIFICATES: Welder certificates
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4100 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations
B. STANDARD: Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, specified or apply 1. AISC:
a) "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings b) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" c) "Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel"
2. American Welding Society - AWS, "Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" 3. American National Standards Institute - ANSI 4. Each case, the current revision of the specification or code is referenced. 5. AST 6. WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION: NAAMM Architectural Metal Handbook
C. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar
to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.
D. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by same firm that fabricated them unless indicated otherwise.
E. WELDER QUALIFICATIONS: 1. COMPLY WITH:
a. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" b. D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel" c. D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum"
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
SA1509A METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-2
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY:
1. Unload all members with a hoist 2. Dumping of members from truck prohibited
B. SORTING AND PILING: Take care to prevent bending of members or abrasion of shop paint.
C. STORING:
1. Store members in a manner to prevent direct contact with the ground, prevent injury from deflection and to avoid accumulation of dirt or other foreign matter.
2. Protect members from rust and corrosion 3. Replace damaged members at no cost to Owner
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES:
1. ASTM A 36 and A 53 2. No second hand material allowed
B. STEEL TUBING:
1. HOT-FORMED SEAMLESS: ASTM A 501 2. COLD-FORMED: ASTM A 500, GRADE A
C. STEEL SHEET: ASTM A 375 D. WELDING RODS:
1. For manual shielded arc welding 2. Conform to E70 series of ASTM A 233 3. Suitable to the positions and conditions of intended use 4. AWS Code D1.0
E. High-strength bolts, ASTM A325, for all structural steel connections.
F. COMMON MACHINE BOLTS: ASTM A 307, Grade A for all anchor bolts and miscellaneous.
G. SHOP PAINT FOR MISCELLANEOUS STEEL: Tnemec 10-09 Gray Metal Rust Inhibitive Coating, or
approved equal
H. FIELD-PAINT FOR "TOUCH-UP": 1. On scraped and rusted steel surfaces 2. Field welds and bolted connections 3. Same as shop paint
I. ARCHITECTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS: ASTM A 283, grade optional.
J. FASTENINGS:
1. Bolts 2. Nuts 3. Screws 4. Clips 5. Washers 6. Any other fastenings necessary for proper erection of items specified herein. 7. EXPOSED SCREWS: Spanner-head, counter-sunk (unless noted otherwise). 8. FOR FERROUS METAL:
a. EXTERIOR: Stainless steel or galvanized b. INTERIOR: Match adjacent material
SA1509A METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-3
K. ZINC COATING: 1. STEEL SHAPES, PLATES, BARS AND STRIPS:
a. Hot dip galvanizing b. Comply with ASTM A 525, G 90
2. ASSEMBLED STEEL ITEMS: a. Hot dip galvanized b. Comply with ASTM A 525, G 90
3. All lintels and overhead doorframes shall be hot dipped galvanized. 2.03 FABRICATION A. GENERAL:
1. FORM METAL FABRICATIONS FROM: a. Materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated. b. Not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.
2. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on reviewed shop drawings. 3. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges. 4. Tightly fit and neatly finish joints smooth and even. 5. Construct all work in a thorough and workman like manner, by mechanics skilled in their trade. 6. WORK BUILT INTO MASONRY:
a. Of required shape for anchorage. b. By use of expansion shields and other approved methods for certain items.
7. EXPOSED JOINTS IN METAL: a. Assemble as strong and rigid as the adjoining sections. b. WELDED JOINTS: WELD ENTIRE LENGTH OF SPLICE: Grind smooth and blend with
adjoining members unnoticed. 8. Cut, drill, and tap or punch work for the attachment of other work, where required. 9. FIELD CONNECTIONS: Bolt or weld with angles or other structural shapes. 10. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32", unless otherwise indicated. 11. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work. 12. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. 13. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible. 14. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated. If fasteners are not indicated, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. 15. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 16. WELDS: Grind shop and field welds smooth. 17. SHOP ASSEMBLY:
a. Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
b. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 18. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items. 19. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate. 20. Do not substitute shapes unless approved by Architect.
B. CLEANING:
1. CONTACT SURFACES: Free of dirt, oil, loose scale, burns, pits, and other defects that would prevent solid seating of the parts.
C. SHOP PAINT:
1. Apply one heavy coat of shop paint, as recommended by paint manufacturer. 2. Use no thinner or admixtures, except as noted. 3. PAINT: Shop coat at piece marks. 4. DO NOT paint surfaces to be field welded. 5. DO NOT paint surfaces to be encased in concrete.
SA1509A METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect adjacent surfaces and conditions for features affecting the work. B. Verify dimensions. C. Proceeding with the work shall signify acceptance of site conditions affecting the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. ERECTION:
1. Keep steel true and plumb. 2. Erect temporary bracing to prevent distortion or damage to the work.
B. CONNECTIONS:
1. Follow all details approved on shop drawings by installing and tightening all bolts shown. 2. Weld as shown.
C. FIELD BURNING OF HOLES IN MEMBERS IS PROHIBITED D. Correct holes by drilling and reaming only E. DRIFT PINS: Bring assembled members into close contact, use drift pins only for bringing members into
position, not to enlarge or distort holes. F. WELDING: By certified welders only 3.03 FIELD PAINTING A. Spot and touch-up connections, bolts, welds and holidays to provide complete shop coat.
B. Use same paint as shop coat. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES:
1. Measurements 2. Neat and proper fit of work of this Section 3. Adjustment to field conditions
3.05 CLEANING A. Remove from adjacent surfaces, soil, stain, and extraneous materials, caused by work.
B. Remove foreign matter from and clean exposed steel surfaces to a neat and uniform appearance. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide protection to prevent damage to the finished work.
B. Replace damaged elements.
C. After installation, and after danger of subsequent damage has passed, remove all protective coverings
from all exposed surfaces, and clean those surfaces of all soil and discoloration, ready for acceptance.
END OF SECTION 05 5000
SA1509A ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-1
SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid blocking for doors, windows, and roof openings B. Preservative treated wood materials
C. Fire-retardant-treated wood materials D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports F. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
2005 B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008 C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2003 D. AWPA C9 - Plywood -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers'
Association; 2003 E. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber -- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-
Preservers' Association; 2003 F. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers'
Association; 2002 G. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers'
Association; 2007 H. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 2005 I. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions, and
fire-retardant-treated wood..
SA1509A ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-2
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.
2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB) B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19 D. Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring (1 x 2 through 2 x 12), etc.:
1. Species: Spruce-Pine-Fir 2. Grade: No. 2 or better
2.03 ACCESSORIES AND PLYWOOD A. Plywood shall be of the thicknesses indicated on the drawings. CDX plywood is acceptable for roof and
wall sheathing. B. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for
wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer’s stamp by indicating
compliance with specified requirements 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-
accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.
B. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Manufacturers: a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. www.frtw.com c. Osmose, Inc: www.osmose.com
2. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may
become wet. C. Preservative Treatment:
1. Manufacturers: a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com b. Chemical Specialties, Inc: www.treatedwood.com c. Osmose, Inc: www.osmose.com
2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with concrete or masonry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after
installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. All interior lumber, blocking, nailers, and supports shall be fire-treated. B. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty
items, and trim.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item
can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Grab bars 2. Toilet accessories 3. Wall-mounted door stops 4. Adjustable shelving 5. Cabinets and countertops 6. Wood trim
3.04 PRESSURE-TREATED WOOD A. All roof-related carpentry (framing, blocking, nailers, sleepers, etc.) shall receive preservative
treatment. All wood members (framing, blocking, nailers, sleepers, etc.) in contact with concrete or masonry shall receive preservative treatment.
B. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing
assembly installation. 3.05 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory-applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,
complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.06 CLEANING A. WASTE DISPOSAL:
1. Comply with applicable regulations 2. Do not burn scrap on project site 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or "waste-to-energy" facilities.
B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION 06 1000
SA1509A FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-1
SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Work supplied and installed: a. Plastic laminate-faced cabinetry b. Miscellaneous wood trim c. Solid surface material d. Adjustable shelving
2. Products installed but not supplied under this contract: a. FASTENERS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE WORK OF THIS SECTION: Supplied under
SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY b. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: Supplied under SECTION 08 1113 - STEEL FRAMES c. WOOD DOORS: Supplied under SECTION 08 1416 – WOOD DOORS d. HARDWARE: Supplied under SECTION 08 7100 - HARDWARE e. TOILET ACCESSORIES: Supplied under SECTION 10 2813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
B. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Submit the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SECTION 01 3400 –
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. SHOP DRAWINGS:
a. Plastic laminate faced cabinetry b. Wood trim c. Solid surface cabinetry d. Related Hardware
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E84-09 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):
K. DOOR INSTALLATION: SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames". 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Do not deliver materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage,
soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. B. Store materials above the floor to allow air to circulate around material.
1. Support properly to avoid warpage and twisting 2. Keep covered
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. CONDITIONING: Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and relative humidity
conditions have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. 1.06 WARRANTY A. CASEWORK: Provide three (3) year manufacturer's guarantee from date of substantial completion in
addition to Contractor's guarantee described in GENERAL CONDITIONS.
B. SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL: Provide manufacturer's standard 10-year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply products from the following:
1. PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CABINETRY: a. Wood Mode, Brookhaven II, Vista Series b. Approved equal
B. PLASTIC LAMINATE:
1. Wilson-Art 2. Nevamar 3. Formica 4. Or approved equal
C. SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL: 1. Busch Industries Corian
a. PAINTED WOODWORK: Clear Red Birch or Poplar, unless noted otherwise. b. TRANSPARENT WOODWORK: Select Red Oak, unless noted otherwise.
B. PLASTIC LAMINATE-FACED CABINETRY:
1. PLASTIC LAMINATE-FACED: a. As manufactured by Wilson Art, Nevamar, and Formica. b. COLOR: See Drawings.
2. COUNTERTOPS, BACKSPLASHES, AND SIDE SPLASHES: a. CORE MATERIAL: Particle board. b. FINISH MATERIAL: Solid surface material, 1/2" thick.
C. PARTICLE BOARD: Sierra Pine Limited AMedite II MDF@, or approved equal.
D. PLYWOOD:
1. Comply with Douglas Fir Plywood Association and Western Softwood Manufacturing specifications as required for various usage areas.
2. GRADE: CD 3 EXPOSURE DURABILITY CLASSIFICATION: Interior 4. THICKNESS: As shown 5. SPECIES CLASSIFICATION: Group 1 or 2
E. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS: MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS SUCH AS SCREWS BOLTS, ETC.:
Supplied and installed by this Section. F. PLASTIC LAMINATE:
1. 1/16" thick high pressure thermoseal melamine resin-impregnated overlay paper laminated to melamine resin-impregnated pattern paper over layers of phenolic resin-impregnated kraft paper.
2. COLOR AND/OR TEXTURE: To be selected from manufacturer's complete range. 3. HORIZONTAL MEMBERS: Piecing allowed only on lengths more than 8'-0".
G. SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL:
1. Cast, filled, polyester, not coated. Meeting relevant sections of ANSI 2124 and ANSI/NEMA LD3-1995 specifications
2. 1/2" thick having edge details as shown on drawings, unless noted otherwise. 3. Corian, or approved equal
H. ADJUSTABLE SHELVING: 1. SHELF THICKNESS: a. ¾” thick, minimum. b. Provide 5 shelves high where adjustable shelving is noted. 2. At adjustable shelving provide:
a. Knape & Vogt (K & V) #87 WH72 super duty standards. Locate within 6” of shelf ends and 36” O.C. maximum. Locate bottom of standards at 12” AFF with top at 84” AFF
b. K & V 187LL WH12 for 12” deep shelves; K & V 187LL WH18 for 18” deep shelves; and K & V 187LL WH24 for 24” deep shelves. Provide 1 bracket per standard per shelf.
2.03 FABRICATION A. General:
SA1509A FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-4
1. Except as otherwise specified, use AWI Custom Grade for architectural woodwork and interior millwork.
2. Finish woodwork shall be free from pitch pockets. 3. Except where special profiles are shown, trim shall be standard stock molding and members of
the same species. 4. Plywood shall be not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch), unless otherwise shown or specified. 5. Fabricate members less than 4 m (14 feet) in length from one piece of lumber, back channeled
and molded a shown. 6. Interior trim and items of millwork to be painted may be fabricated from jointed, built-up, or
laminated members, unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified. 7. Plastic Laminate Work:
a. Factory glued to either a plywood or a particle board core, thickness as shown or specified.
b. Cover exposed edges with plastic laminate, except where aluminum, stainless steel, or plastic molded edge strips are shown or specified. Use plastic molded edge strips on 19 mm (3/4-inch) molded thick or thinner core material.
c. Provide plastic backing sheet on underside of countertops, vanity tops, thru-wall counter and sills including back splashes and end splashes of countertops.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.
B. BACKPRIME LUMBER:
1. For painted finish exposed on the exterior 2. Where indicated, to moisture and high relative humidities on the interior. 3. Comply with requirements of SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING for primers and their application.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:
1. Install all items of millwork 2. Set finishing nails, used on exposed faces, to receive putty. 3. Install trim in single lengths; where long runs use minimum lengths of 8'-0". 4. Scribe, miter and join accurately and neatly to detail. 5. CASEWORK:
a. Set straight, true, plumb, and level using shims as necessary. b. Fasten to walls as recommended by the manufacturer for the casework. c. Install countertops to base cabinets as recommended by the manufacturer. d. Install countertops in a continuous straight and level line with adjacent tops meeting at
horizontal joint in the same plane. e. Remove all labels f. Clean all surfaces, inside and out g. Remove all casework debris, packing boxes, packing materials, tools, etc., from the
project. 7. STEEL FRAMES:
a. GENERAL: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's data and as herein specified.
b. PLACING FRAMES: 1) Comply with provisions of SDI-105 unless otherwise indicated. 2) Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry, and drywall partitions,
place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
3) For frames in existing walls, countersink exposed anchors are acceptable. After anchors are installed, contractor shall fill recesses in frame at anchors with "bond"; grind smooth, and flush with frame so that anchor locations are
SA1509A FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-5
completely concealed. 4) Set frames accurately in position. 5) Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. 6) After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders
leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 7) IN MASONRY CONSTRUCTION: Locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and
strike levels.
8) AT IN-PLACE CONCRETE OR MASONRY CONSTRUCTION: Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
9) FIRE-RATED FRAMES: Comply with NFPA Standard No. 80. 10) IN METAL STUD PARTITIONS:
a) Install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. b) IN OPEN STEEL STUD PARTITIONS: Place studs in wall anchor
notches and wire tie. c) IN CLOSED STEEL STUD PARTITIONS: Attach wall anchors to studs
with tapping screws. 8. DOORS:
a. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS b. FITTING CLEARANCES FOR NON-RATED DOORS:
1. Jambs and heads: 1/8". 2. Each leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors: 1/16". 3. From bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering: 1/8". 4. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, from bottom of door to top of threshold:
1/4" c. FITTING CLEARANCES FOR FIRE-RATED DOORS: Comply with NFPA 80.
9. DOOR HARDWARE: a. Mount units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 1) Except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 2) Except as may be otherwise directed by Architect.
b. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. c. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces, which
are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work.
d. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. e. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. f. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and
operation. g. Drill and countersink units, which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. h. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. i. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant. j. Workstation (countertop) support brackets:
1) Follow manufacturers instructions 2) Exposed workstation brackets: Secure to studs or to 6" x 16 ga strapping. 3) Concealed workstation brackets: Secure to double studs at each bracket.
10. WOOD TRIM: a. Back cut flat members of trim units to prevent warping. b. Ship material in lengths to minimize jointing and waste. c. Match existing as required as indicated or shown.
11. PLYWOOD AND PARTICLE BOARD EDGING: a. Machine glue and dress veneering stock or plastic laminate to all plywood and/or
particleboard exposed edges. b. Edging installed by hand and clamped not permitted unless specifically approved by
Architect. 12. SOLID SURFACE MATERIALS:
SA1509A FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-6
a. Install components plumb and level, scribed to adjacent finishes in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation data.
b. Make field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Rout, sand and finish to provide inconspicuous joints in finished work.
c. Adhere undermount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer's recommended adhesive and mounting hardware.
d. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere to countertops using color-matched silicone sealants.
e. Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair or replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction.
f. Ease all exposed edges. g. Finishing: Provide a semi-glass finish on all exposed surfaces.
1) Load the sander with a 100-micron abrasive disk. 2) Sand the entire top to a uniform finish. Be sure to overlap sanding strokes by at
least ½ the pad diameter and cover the entire surface. Care must be taken not to concentrate too heavily over the seam area, as this may develop a different look in this area (particularly with particled colors).
3) When this is finished, wipe the top and inspect for leftover scratches and uniform finish.
4) Re-sand the top as in Step 2 with a 60-micron disk and repeat the cleanup procedure. Inspect top once again.
5) Re-sand with a 30-micron disk. 6) Wipe top clean with a damp cloth. 7) Buff entire top with a gray Scotch-Brite® pad until uniform semigloss appearance
is achieved. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. WORKMANSHIP:
1. GENERAL: a. Carefully fit joints. b. Finish adjoining surfaces in the same plane flush. c. FINISHED WORK: Free from tool marks and open joints. d. MOLDINGS:
1) As long as practicable 2) Do not splice a run of trim 10' or less.
e. Do not piece jamb, casing, cornice, railing, stile, or similar member except as required by the design of the conditions of installation.
f. MATERIAL OF ASSEMBLED WORK REQUIRING FITTING IN PLACE: Of sufficient oversize to permit such fittings being properly done.
g. ASSEMBLED WORK: Securely fasten together. h. Plug and stop screws in exposed surfaces.
2. FINISH TRIM: a. Assemble all joints at the mill. b. Butt joints not dowelled, shall be glued joints. c. In mill assembled work, wherever possible, screw members together from the back with
screws. 3. QUALITY GRADE: AWI Premium grade and milled to details, clean cut, and of exact dimension.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT A. Repair damaged and defective work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.
B. Where not possible to repair properly, replace millwork.
C. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. D. STEEL FRAMES:
1. PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
SA1509A FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-7
2. PROTECTION REMOVAL: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from pre-finished doors.
3. FINAL ADJUSTMENTS: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel frames undamaged and in completed and proper operating condition.
E. DOORS:
1. OPERATION: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. 2. FINISHED DOORS: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
F. HARDWARE:
1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit.
2. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
3.05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Maintain conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of
acceptance.
B. Keep the wood from accepting any moisture from the structure or inclement weather.
C. DO NOT BRING MILLWORK INTO WET OR DRYING PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING.
D. Coordinate staining and/or priming of joints and assemblies with SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING.
END OF SECTION 06 2000
SA1509A BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100-1
SECTION 07 2100 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. PRODUCTS SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION: a. Closed cell spray polyurethane foam insulation b. RIGID INSULATION (Foundation walls – above and below grade)
2. PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION: a. FIRE STOP INSULATION: Installed under SECTION 09 2200. b. ACOUSTIC INSULATION: Installed under SECTION 09 2200 c. Mechanical and adhesive fasteners required to complete work of this section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. SECTION 06 1000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY B. SECTION 07 5310 - TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM C. SECTION 09 2216 - METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2007
B. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006
C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008
D. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005
E. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750ºC; 2004
F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006
G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and DIVISION 01
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including R-values (aged values for plastic insulations), densities, compression strengths, fir performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings and similar properties.
SA1509A BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100-2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. FIRE TEST RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those
whose fire-test-response characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation in original labeled bundles. B. GENERAL PROTECTION: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or
covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation.
C. PROTECTION FOR PLASTIC INSULATION: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulation materials to project site ahead
of installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
work. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which insulation work is to be
performed and notify the Architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. WEATHER CONDITIONS: Proceed with work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Do not apply insulation to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D. Coordinate this work with all trades and protect it after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply rigid insulation and batt insulation products from the
following: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. 2. United States Gypsum 3. DOW Chemical U.S.A. 4. Celotex Corporation 5. Johns Manville
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply spray foam insulation products from the following: 1. Commercial Thermal Solutions, Inc. 2. Approved equal
SA1509A BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100-3
2.02 MATERIALS A. BLANKET INSULATION:
1. SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET: a. USG "Thermafiber" creased SAFB secured attenuation blanket b. THICKNESS: 3" c. WIDTH: As required by stud spacing d. LENGTH: 48" e. Unfaced f. Meet Federal Specification HH-1-521.F, Type 1
2. FIRE-STOPPING INSULATION: a. USG "Thermafiber" Safing Insulation b. Minimum 3" thick with density of 3.5 pcf c. UL R-10905 Label d. Locations and thicknesses shown on drawings e. Provide impaling clips to hold in place
B. RIGID INSULATION:
1. FOUNDATION WALLS ABOVE AND BELOW GRADE: a. MATERIAL: Extruded polystyrene board b. DENSITY: High c. SURFACE: Smooth extended skin d. EDGES: Tongue and groove or shiplap e. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH: 40 psi per below grade. f. MAXIMUM WATER ABSORPTION: .3% per ASTM C 272 g. WATER VAPOR PERMEABILITY: .06 perm. inch per ASTM E 96 h. TYPICAL FIVE YEAR EDGED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY: K FACTOR: .20 BTU
in./hr./sq. ft./F. at 75F. per ASTM C 518 i. THICKNESS: 1 ½” (R-7.5), 2” (R-10), & 3” (R-15), as noted in the drawings. j. PRODUCTS:
1) Styrofoam by Dow Chemical 2) Formular by Owens Corning 3) Amofoam by Tenneco
2. SPRAY FOAM INSULATION a. Styrofoam brand spray polyurethane foam (CM series) as by Dow or approved equal b. Two-component spray applied polyurethane foam c. Closed cell, 2 pcf. water vapor and air barrier d. Water vapor permeability, ASTM E96,: 2.2 perm-inch e. R-value per inch: 6.1 f. Surface burning characteristics, ASTM E84: Class A g. Minimum 20kW/m² Heat Flux, & less flammable than Covestro “ECOBAY CC” or BASF
“Walltite”. h. Thicknesses as shown on drawings (3” in exterior stud walls, unless noted otherwise) i. Chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) free.
3. ADHESIVE: (For Foundation Insulation) a. Styrofoam Brand Mastic #11, distributed by Dow Chemical b. For rigid and semi-rigid insulation c. Rubber-based over absorbent substrate d. Compatible with materials to which applied e. Fire retardant f. For insulation on block walls or standard of insulation manufacturer for this type of
installation C. FASTENERS: To cold rolled metal framing, metal studs, and metal furring
1. Large head self-tapping screws 2. Stainless steel or cadmium plated 3. Per recommendations of insulation manufacturer
SA1509A BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100-4
E. TAPE: Duct type fiber reinforced 2" wide adhesive tape, maximum permeability 0.1 perm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for conditions of installation in each case. 2. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. 3. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions.
B. LOOSE AND FIRE STOP INSULATION: 1. Install fire-stop insulation at wall and floor slab intersection and where indicated. 2. Size and trim for tight friction fit without bunching and bulging. 3. Fill all spaces between double studs, at doorjambs, and other cavities.
C. BLANKET INSULATION:
1. THERMAL BLANKET: Fill all voids in stud walls. 2. SOUND ATTENUATING BLANKET:
a. Install after gypsum board is applied to one side of studs and before board is applied to other side of studs.
b. Insert the 16" wide blanket in the stud cavity, by bowing the blanket slightly. c. After inserting, make a vertical cut in the blanket (around 1" deep) on a centerline
between the studs. d. Slit the blanket with a sharp utility or hook-bill knife to ease the pressure of the blanket
against the gypsum baseboard when it is installed e. Butt ends of blankets together and fill all voids.
D. SPRAY FOAM INSULATION:
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for tank usage and application methods. 2. Clean grease, oil, and dirt from product to which insulation is to be adhered. 3. Apply foam to thickness indicated 4. Refer to drawings for application locations 5. Change nozzle tips frequently 6. Fill all voids
E. RIGID INSULATION (FOUNDATION WALLS):
1. Install per manufacturer's instructions 2. Seal all joints between boards with weathermate flashing to form a water-resistive barrier. 3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for flashing of all opening/penetrations.
3.02 CLEANING A. Remove adhesive splatters and smears from adjoining surfaces. B. Remove all debris from the site leaving work areas in clean condition. C. Repair or replace any damaged or improperly installed material and leave all work in a condition suitable
for the installation of finished materials. D. Remove all cartons, trash, and debris created by the work of this section to jobsite location designated for
rubbish disposal.
END OF SECTION 07 2100
SA1509A EXTERIOR ACRYLIC COATING 07 2420-1
SECTION 07 2420 – EXTERIOR ACRYLIC COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work and materials of this section are based upon TUFF II as manufactured by Styro Industries, Inc.,
applied to exposed exterior rigid insulation. Between grade and the bottom of the insulated barrier wall panels.
1.02 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect the Manufacturer's product data
describing the products, which will be used on the project B. Samples: The Contractor shall submit to the owner/architect two (2) samples of the acrylic coating to be
used on the project. Samples shall be of sufficient size to accurately represent the color and texture being utilized on the project.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications
1. System Manufacturer: Shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in manufacture of exterior acrylic coatings.
2. Installer: Shall be experienced and competent in the installation exterior acrylic coating. Additionally, the installer shall be approved by the manufacturer.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with labels intact.
Questionable materials shall not be used. B. Minimum storage temperature shall be 40°F; maximum storage temperature shall be 100°F. C. Protect all products from weather and direct sunlight. D. Keep container closed and stored indoors. E. Use gloves and safety glasses when handing this product. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is
provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are completely dry. B. Application of wet materials shall be at a minimum ambient temperature of 40°F and rising. These
temperatures shall be maintained for a minimum of 24 hours thereafter, until completely dry. C. Surfaces to receive acrylic coating shall dry. DO NOT apply to moist or damp surfaces. DO NOT apply in
direct sunlight. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Installation of the acrylic coating shall be coordinated with other construction trades
SA1509A EXTERIOR ACRYLIC COATING 07 2420-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The exterior acrylic coating and all accessories shall be:
1. TUFF II, by Styro Industries, Inc. 2. Or approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Coating: TUFF II B. Mesh: Sticky Mesh HD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of the acrylic coating, the Contractor shall verify that the substrate:
1. Is a type approved by the acrylic coating manufacturer 2. Is sound, connections are tight, and there are no surface voids, projections, or other conditions
that may interfere with the acrylic coating installation. 3. The Installer shall notify the Contractor of all discrepancies.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection
1. The acrylic coating materials shall be protected by permanent or temporary means from weather and other damage prior to, during, and following application until dry.
2. Protect adjoining work and property during acrylic coating installation. 3. The substrate shall be prepared as to be free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt, form-
release agents, efflorescence, paint, wax, water repellants, moisture, frost, and any other condition that may inhibit adhesion.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. The acrylic coating shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Application Instructions, and
recommendations..
B. Stir acrylic coating thoroughly. C. Gently wire brush the foam insulation to roughen up the surface, remove UV oxidation, and open up the
insulation pores. D. Apply sticky mesh HD to all insulation to receive the acrylic coating. Overlap sections of mesh 2”. E. Apply a 1/16” thick skim coat of TUFF II to the mesh so that the mesh pattern is barely visible, using a
trowel or drywall blade. Allow at least 2 hours to dry (until it can take light thumb pressure). F. Apply a 1/16” thick texture coat with a trowel or drywall blade. G. Allow 24 hours for the acrylic coating to fully cure. DO NOT backfill against acrylic coating for at least 48
hours. 3.04 CLEANING A. All excess acrylic coating materials shall be removed from the job site by the Installer.
SA1509A EXTERIOR ACRYLIC COATING 07 2420-3
B. All surrounding areas, where the acrylic coating has been applied, shall be left free of debris and foreign substances resulting from the Installer's work.
3.05 PROTECTION A. The acrylic coating shall be protected from weather and other damage until fully cured.
END OF SECTION 07 2420
SA1509A METAL SOFFIT PANELS 07 4213 - 1
SECTION 07 4213 - METAL SOFFIT PANELS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concealed fastener metal soffit panels 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. SECTION 07 4263 – FABRICATED WALL PANEL ASSEMBLIES B. SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL, FASCIAS, FLASHING, AND TRIM. C. SECTION 07 9005 - JOINT SEALERS. 1.03 REFERENCES
A. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (AAMA):
1. AAMA 501.1 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure.
2. AAMA 620 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Aluminum Substrates.
3. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
B. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
C. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM):
1. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. ASTM A 755/A 755M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products.
3. ASTM B 209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. ASTM C 754 - Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw
Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 5. ASTM C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 6. ASTM C 1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and
Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 7. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction.
D. SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA):
1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MANUFACTURER/SOURCE: Provide metal soffit panel and panel accessories from a single
manufacturer. B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: Approved manufacturer with minimum 10 years-
experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications. C. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: Experienced Installer with minimum of 5 years-experience with
successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope.
SA1509A METAL SOFFIT PANELS 07 4213 - 2
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See SECTION 01 3400 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer’s data sheets, for specified products. 1. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements, including load span
tables tested for side joint disengagement under negative loads per ASTM E 72
C. INSTALLATION DETAILS: Showing soffit panels and all related trim
D. SAMPLES FOR VERIFICATION: Provide 12-inch (300 mm) section of panel(s) showing finishes. Provide 12-inch (300 mm) long pieces of trim pieces and other exposed components.
E. QUALIFICATION INFORMATION: For Manufacturer and Installer.
F. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: Submit sample warranty.
1.06 WARRANTY A. SPECIAL MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY: On manufacturer’s standard form, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal soffit panel assemblies that fail in materials and workmanship within 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. SPECIAL PANEL FINISH WARRANTY: On manufacturer’s standard form, in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace metal soffit panels that evidence deterioration of finish within the following periods from the date of substantial completion: 1. Warranty Period: 20 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: CENTRIA, IW Series Metal Soffit Panels. Provide basis of design product, or
comparable product approved by Architect prior to bid. 1. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Moon Township, PA 15108-2944 Tel: (800)759-7474,
A. Metal Soffit Panel Accessories, General: Provide complete metal soffit panel assembly incorporating trims, inside and outside corners, and miscellaneous flashings. Provide manufacturer's factory-formed shims, flashings, gaskets, lap strips, closure strips, and caps for a complete installation.
Fabricate accessories in accordance with SMACNA Manual. B. FORMED ACCESSORIES AND TRIM: Match material, thickness, and color of metal soffit panels. C. SEALANTS: Type recommended by metal soffit panel manufacturer for application, meeting
D. FASTENERS: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply corrosion-resistant fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means factory-applied coating.
2.04 SECONDARY METAL SUBGIRT FRAMING A. MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING COMPONENTS, GENERAL: Cold-formed metallic-coated steel
2.05 METAL SOFFIT PANEL FINISH A. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish System. B. Coating for exterior shall be ASTM compliment Graffiti Resistant System by Valspar or PPG
Duranar GR 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.8 mil primer with 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF
fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621. a. Basis of Design: CENTRIA Duragard.
C. COLOR:
1. Architect to select from “Duragard” Standard range of color PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine metal soffit panel substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other
conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal wall panels.
B. SOFFIT SUBSTRATE: Confirm that wall substrate is within tolerances acceptable to metal wall panel system manufacturer. 1. Maximum substrate and framing deviations from flat plane acceptable:
a. 1/4-inch in 20 feet vertically or horizontally. b. 1/2-inch across building elevation. c. 1/8-inch in 5 feet.
C. FRAMING: Inspect framing that will support metal soffit panels to determine if support components
are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal soffit panels.
D. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with metal soffit
panel system installation.
3.02 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL: Install metal soffit panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install metal soffit panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Anchor metal soffit panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement
B. Attach panels to metal framing using recommended clips, screws, fasteners, sealants, and
adhesives indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. FASTENERS FOR STEEL SOFFIT PANELS: Stainless-steel for exterior locations and
locations exposed to moisture. 2. Fasten metal soffit panels to supports with fasteners and spacing recommended by
manufacturer. 3. DISSIMILAR MATERIALS: Where elements of metal wall panel system will come into
contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.
SA1509A METAL SOFFIT PANELS 07 4213 - 4
C. JOINT SEALERS: Install joint sealants where indicated on approved shop drawings.
3.03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL: Install metal soffit panel accessories and trims with positive anchorage to building and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install related flashings and sheet metal trim per requirements of SECTION 07 62 00 -
SHEET METAL FASCIAS, FLASHINGS AND TRIM. 2. Install components required for a complete metal soffit panel assembly, including trim,
copings, corners, lap strips, flashings, sealants, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 3. Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 4. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on approved shop drawings. 5. Set units true to line and level as indicated.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal soffit panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired by finish touch-up or minor repair.
A. Barrier Wall system of Steel faced, QuadCore insulated metal wall panels used as an insulated barrier wall.
B. Cladding Panels fabricated from: 1. Rivet-less Concealed Fastener Aluminum Composite Material (ACM) 2. Mechanically Attached Grooved Thin Brick Façade System
C. Accessories i ncluding Karrier R ails, Light G auge Metal F raming, C ladding R ails, fasteners, f lashings, and perimeter trim.
D. RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1. SECTION 05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
a. Supporting S teel: Minimum G auge R equirement of 16 for a ll structural s upports r equired for installation of panels. Support members shall be installed within the following tolerances: 1) Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 5 feet in any direction along plane of framing. 2) Plus o r minus 1/4 inch cumulative in 20 feet in a ny direction along p lane of
framing. 3) Plus or minus 1/2 inch from framing plane on any elevation. 4) Plumb or level within 1/8 inch at a ll changes of transverse for pre-formed corner panel
applications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
1. AAMA 501.1: Standard Test Method for Metal Curtain Walls for water penetration using Dynamic Pres-sure.
2. AAMA 501.2: Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Cur-tain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems.
3. AAMA 508-05: Voluntary Test Method and Specification for Pressure Equalized Rain Screen Wall Clad-ding Systems
4. AAMA 2605: Coating test utilizing 70% reagent grade Nitric Acid vapor for an exposure time of 30 minutes
B. ASTM International
1. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
2. ASTM A755: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Pre-painted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products
3. ASTM A792: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 percent Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot–Dip Process
4. ASTM A924: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
5. ASMT B117 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 6. ASTM C216: Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) 7. ASTM C270: Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 8. ASTM C273: Standard Test Method for Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials. 9. ASTM C518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 10. ASTM C920: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 11. ASTM C1088: Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made From Clay or Shale. 12. ASTM D1621: Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
13. ASTM D1622: Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics 14. ASTM D1623: Standard Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plas-
tics 15. ASTM D1929: Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics 16. ASTM D2126: Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Ag-
ing. 17. ASTM D6226: Standard Test Method for Open Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 18. ASTM D822 Practice for Operating Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) for Testing
Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products 19. ASTM D1308 Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes 20. ASTM D1735Method for Water Fog Testing of Organic Coatings. 21 .ASTM D1929Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics 22. ASTM D635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a
Horizontal Position 23. ASTM D1781 Climbing Drum Peel Test for Adhesives 24. ASTM D3363 Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test 25. ASTM D2794Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) 26. ASTM D3359Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test 27. ASTM D2247Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity 28. ASTM E72: Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction 29. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 30. ASTM E283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Cur-
tain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen 31. ASTM E330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 32. ASTM E331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference C. FM Global (FM)
1. Approval Standard 4880; Class 1 Fire Rating of Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Panels, Interior Finish Materials or Coatings, and Exterior Wall Systems.
2. Approval Standard 4881; Class 1 Exterior Wall Systems.
D. International Building Code (IBC) E. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)
1. NFPA 259: Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. 2. NFPA 268: Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitability of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant
Heat Source. 3. NFPA 285: Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-
F. UL Canada (ULC)Approvals: 1. CAN/ULC-S101: Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2. CAN/ULC-S102: Standard Method of Test for Surface Building Characteristics of Building Materials and
Assemblies 3. CAN/ULC-S127: Standard Corner Wall Method of Test for Flammability Characteristics of Non-Melting
Building Materials 4. CAN/ULC-S134: Fire Test of Exterior Wall Assemblies
G. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 1. ISO 14025: Environmental Labels and Declarations
H. ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION
1. AA-C22-A41: Anodized - Clear Coatings. 2. AA-C22-A42: Anodized - Integral Color Coatings
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-installation meeting: Conduct a pre-installation meeting at the job site attended by Owner, Architect, Manu-
facturer’s Technical Representative, Panel Installer, and Contractors of related trades. Coordinate structural sup-port requirements in relation to barrier wall panel assembly, installation, coordination of flashing for both barrier wall panel and exterior finish material, treatment of fenestration, and other requirements specific to the project.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to SECTION 01 3400 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each type of product. C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings and panel analysis showing:
1. Profile 2. Gauge of both exterior and interior sheet of barrier wall panel. 3. Location, layout and dimensions of barrier wall panel. 4. Location and type of fasteners 5. Shape and method of attachment of all trim 6. Locations and type of sealants 7. Installation sequence 8. Coordination Drawings: Provide elevation drawings and building sections which show panels in relation-
ship to required locations for structural support as well as exterior wall finish material. Include panel de-tails, details showing attachment to structural support, and details showing flashing and trim that continue through to exterior finish material.
9. Other details as may be required for a weathertight installation
D. Assembly Analysis: Provide wall panel assembly calculations to verify panels will withstand the design wind loads indicated without detrimental effects or deflection exceeding L/180.
E. Samples: Provide nominal 3 x 5 inch of each color indicated. Provide panel width by 8 inches long minimum. F. Quality Assurance Submittals
1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with re-quirements.
2. Manufacturer Erection Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions including proper material storage, material handling, installation sequence, panel location(s), and attachment methods, details and required trim and accessories.
G. Mock-up 1. Building consisting of complete cladding system, including but not limited to metal furring, panels, se-
curement devices, sealants, and mouldings for approval. Cladding finish and mouldings to be of finish and color as designated by the Architect. Location of mock-up to be as directed by Architect. Size to be four panels minimum in a 2 over 2 configuration. Alternate pattern can be requested by Architect.
2. Modify mock-up as necessary for Architect approval. Mock-up may remain in place as part of completed work. Mock-up to represent standard for completed work
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the production of metal wall panels. Manufacturer shall demonstrate past experience with examples of projects of similar type and exposure.
2. Manufacturer to be registered with a Program Operator with a Certified, Environmental Product Declara-tion, in conformance with ISO 14025, for Insulated Metal Panels.
B. Installer Qualifications: Authorized by the manufacturer and the work shall be supervised by a person having a minimum of five (5) years experience installing insulated wall panels on similar type and size projects and installa-tion of ACM MCM systems.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. B. Deliver panel materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging with identi-
fication labels intact. C. Store wall panel materials on dry, level, firm, and clean surface. Stack no more than two bundles high. Elevate
one end of bundle to allow moisture run-off, cover and ventilate to allow air to circulate and moisture to escape. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Limited Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace items that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. The items covered by the warranty include structural performance including bond integrity, deflection and buckling. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion, or 2 years and 3 months from the
date of shipment from manufacturer’s plant, whichever occurs first. 2. The aluminum composite material manufacturer shall warrant for a period of 30 years against Max 5 fade
based on ASTM D2244 and Max 8 chalk based on ASTM D4212 and delamination of the paint finish. 3. The aluminum composite material manufacturer shall warrant for a period of 10 years that the material will
be free from defects including delamination 4. Brick Masonry 50-year Limited Guaranty
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Benchmark by Kingspan EVO ACM Architectural Panel Engineered Façade system:
1. Benchmark by Kingspan; a division of Kingspan Insulated Panels, Inc. ; 720 Marion Road, Columbus, Ohio 43207; 1-877-638-3266 (Toll Free) or 614-444-0110; (www.kingspanpanels.us), or approved equal.
B. Substitution Limitations:
1. Submit written request for approval of substitutions to the Architect a minimum of 10 days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Include the following information: a. Name of the materials and description of the proposed substitute. b. Detailed Drawings, cut sheets, performance and test data. c. List of projects similar scope and photographs of existing installations. d. Test reports indicating compliance with the performance criteria. e. Other information necessary for evaluation. f. Engineering submittals with calculations
2. After evaluation by Architect, approval will be issued via addendum. No verbal approval will be given. 3. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 – General
Requirements.
2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design Criteria:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings Deflection criteria shall be L/180
B. Performance Criteria - Insulated Barrier Wall Panel: 1. Structural Test: Structural performance shall be verifiable by witnessed structural testing for simulated
wind loads in accordance with ASTM E72 and E330. 2. Fatigue Test: There shall be no evidence of metal/insulation interface delamination when the panel is
tested by simulated wind loads (positive and negative loads), when applied for two million alternate cycles of L/180 deflection.
3. Freeze / Heat Cycling Test: Panels shall exhibit no delamination, surface blisters, permanent bowing or deformation when subjected to cyclic temperature extremes of minus 20 deg. F to plus 180 deg. F tem-peratures for twenty one, eight-hour cycles.
4. Water Penetration: There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration through the panel joints at a pres-sure differential of 20 psf, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331.
5. Dynamic Water Penetration: There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration through the panel assem-bly at a pressure difference of 12 psf, when tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1.
6. Air Infiltration: Air infiltration through the panel shall not exceed 0.001 cfm/sf at 20 psf air pressure differ-ential when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
7. Humidity Test: Panels shall exhibit no delamination or metal interface corrosion when subjected to plus 140 deg. F temperature and 100 percent relative humidity for a total of 1200 hours (50 days).
8. Autoclave Test: Panels shall exhibit no delamination or shrinkage/melting of the foam core from the metal skins after being subjected in an autoclave to a pressure of 2 psig (13.8kPa) at a temperature of plus 218 deg. F (plus 103 deg. C) for a period of 2 1/2 hours.
9. Panel Fire Tests: a. Fire Endurance Test – 10 minutes: Panels remained in place without joint stitch fastening per
CAN/ULC-S101. b. Fire Endurance Test – 15 minutes: Panels remained in place with joint stitch fastening per
CAN/ULC-S101. 10. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Tests on exposed Insulating Core:
a. Flame Spread: Less than 25. b. Smoke Developed: Less than 250. c. Tests performed in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102 and ASTM E84.
11. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Steel-faced panels with polyisocyanurate (ISO) core shall fully com-ply with Chapter 26 of International Building Code regarding the use of Foam Plastic. a. FM 4880: Class I rated per FM Global, panels are approved for use without a thermal barrier and
do not create a requirement for automatic sprinkler protection. b. NFPA 259 Potential Heat Content; established for foam core. c. NFPA 268 Ignitability Using Radiant Heat Source; successfully passed acceptance criteria. d. NFPA 285 Intermediate Scale Multi-story Fire Evaluation; successfully passed acceptance crite-
ria. UL 263 Fire Resistive Rating; classified as a component of a fire-rated wall assembly for 1-hour and 2-
hour rating Design No. U053 (rated assemblies include appropriate layers of fire-rated Type X Gypsum board).
f. ASTM D1929 Minimum Flash and Self Ignition; established for foam core. g. S101, S102, S127, S134 UL Canada fire test standards; successfully passed.
12. Windborne Debris: a. Met requirements for high velocity hurricane zone with large missile impact when tested in ac-
cordance with FM Standard 4881. 13. Insulating Core: Polyisocyanurate (ISO) core, ASTM C591 Type IV, CFC and HCFC free, compliant with
Montreal Protocol and Clean Air Act, with the following minimum physical properties: a. Core is 90 percent closed cell when tested in accordance with ASTM D6226 b. Core shall provide a nominal R-value of 8.0 per inch thickness when tested in accordance with
ASTM C518 at a mean temperature of 75 deg. F. c. Foam has a density of 2.2 to 2.8 pounds per cubic foot when tested in accordance with ASTM
D1622 d. Compressive Stress:
1) Parallel to Rise: 42 psi 2) Perpendicular to Rise: 24 psi 3) Tested in accordance to ASTM D1621
e. Shear Stress: 17.5 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C273 f. Tensile Stress: 25 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1623 g. Oven Aging at 200 degrees F:
1) 1 day: plus 1 percent volume change 2) 7 days: plus 3 percent volume change 3) Tested according to ASTM D2126
h. Low Temperature Aging at minus 20 degrees F: 1) 1 day: 0 percent volume change 2) 7 days: 0 percent volume change 3) Tested according to ASTM D2126
2.03 INSULATED BARRIER WALL PANELS (IBWP) A. Panel Description:
1. Basis of Design: Benchmark Engineered Façade System Including Karrier Panel and Rail™ .
2. Panel thickness: 3 inches thick. 3. Panel width: 24 inches 4. Panel Lengths: Minimum 8 feet, maximum 52 feet. 5. Panel Attachment: Shall consist of fasteners and attachment clip completely concealed within the panel
side joint. 6. Horizontal Panel Joint Reveals: 3/8 inch. 7. Vertical Joint Treatment (for horizontal panels): Fill joints with Spray Foam per manufacturer’s instruc-
tions. 8. Vertical Panel Joint Reveals: 3/8 inch. 9. Exterior and Interior Face of Panel:
a. Material: 1) Steel coil material shall be in accordance with ASTM A755: AZ50 Galvalume®/ Zincal-
ume® (55 percent aluminum, 45 percent zinc) in accordance with ASTM A792 or Grade 33, G90 galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A653 and A924.
2) Gauge: 26 gauge. b. Profile: Shadowline. c. Exterior and interior panel texture: Non-directional stucco embossed. d. Paint Finish:
1) Finish System: Modified polyester, dry film thickness of 1.0 mil including primer. 2) Color: Imperial White
B. Insulated Barrier Wall Panel Accessories: 1. Fasteners:
a. Self drilling fasteners shall be cadmium plated steel with neoprene washer, as recommended by manufacturer.
b. Material: Hex-head type with steel and neoprene washer and 12 gauge stainless steel clip sup-plied by the manufacturer.
c. Size: As recommended by manufacturer. 2. Karrier Rails: Manufacturer’s standard, ASTM A653 cold-formed Grade 50, G90 hot-dip galvanized Kar-
rier Rails. 3. Perimeter Trim: Fabricated perimeter trim shall be same gauge, material and coating color as exterior
face of insulated barrier wall panel. 4. Self-adhered membrane: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-
density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
C. Spray Foam: Two-part urethane foam as recommended by manufacturer.
2.04 Engineered Façade CLADDING PANELS ACM A. Aluminum Composite Material (ACM): 4MM FR 0.157
1. Bond Integrity a. When tested for bond integrity, in accordance with ASTM D1781 (simulating resistance to panel
delamination), there shall be no adhesive failure of the bond a) between the core and the skin nor b) cohesive failure of the core itself below the following values:
b. Peel Strength: 1) Greater than 100 N-mm/mm (22.5 in-lb/in) as manufactured 2) Greater than 100 N-mm/mm (22.5 in-lb/in) after 21 days soaking in water at 70°F
2. Fire Performance: a. ASTM E 84: Flame Spread = "Passed Class A", Smoke Developed = "Passed Class A" b. NFPA 285: Passed
3. Finish: a. Coil coated KYNAR® 500 or HYLAR® 5000 based Polyvinylidene Fluoride (70% PVDF) tested in
accordance with AAMA 2605. Coraflon, Megaflon, Lumiflon or any version of FEVE resin paint systems will not be allowed.
b. Color: Standard color as selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard color palette. c. Coating Thickness:
1) Colors:1.0 mil (±0.2 mil). 2) Clear: 0.50 mil (± 0.05 mil).
1) ASTM D-3363; HB minimum using Eagle Turquoise Pencil. f. Impact: g. Test method: ASTM D-2794; Gardner Variable Impact Tester with 5/8" mandrel. h. Coating shall withstand reverse impact of 1.5"/pounds per mil substrate thickness. i. Coating shall adhere tightly to metal when subjected to #600 Scotch Tape pick-off test. Slight mi-
nute cracking permissible. No removal of film to substrate. 4. Adhesion:
a. Test Method: ASTM D-3359. b. Coating shall not pick off when subjected to an 11" x 11" x 1/16" grid and taped with #600 Scotch
Tape. 5. Humidity Resistance
a. Test Method: ASTM D-2247. b. No formation of blisters when subject to condensing water fog at 100% relative humidity and
100°F for 4000 hours. 6. Salt Spray Resistance:
a. Test Method: ASTM B-117; Expose coating system to 4000 hours, using 5% NaCl solution. b. Corrosion creepage from scribe line: 1/16" max. c. Minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field.
7. Weather Exposure 8. Outdoor:
a. Ten-year exposure at 45° angle facing south Florida exposure. b. Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as calculated in accordance with ASTM D-2244. c. Maximum chalk rating of 8 in accordance with ASTM D-4214. d. No checking, crazing, adhesion loss.
9. Chemical Resistance: a. ASTM D-1308 utilizing 10% Muriatic Acid for an exposure time of 15 minutes. No loss of film ad-
hesion or visual change when viewed by the unaided eye. b. ASTM D-1308 utilizing 20% Sulfuric Acid for an exposure time of 18 hours. No loss of film adhe-
sion or visual change when viewed by the unaided eye. c. AAMA 2605 utilizing 70% reagent grade Nitric Acid vapor for an exposure time of 30 minutes.
Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as calculated in accordance with ASTM D-2244.
B. PANEL FABRICATION 1. COMPOSITION:
a. Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of extruded thermoplastic material formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. The core material shall be free of voids and/or air spaces and not contain foamed insulation material. Products lam-inated sheet by sheet in a batch process or honeycomb type panels using glues or adhesives be-tween materials shall not be acceptable.
2. ALUMINUM FACE SHEETS: a. Thickness:0.50mm (0.0197") (nominal) Alloy: AA3000 Series (Painted material) b. Thickness: 0.50mm (0.0197") (nominal) Alloy: AA5000 Series (Painted material)
3. PANEL WEIGHT: a. 4mm (0.157"): 1.47 lbs./ft²
4. TOLERANCES a. Panel Bow: Maximum 0.8% of any 1828mm (72”) panel dimension. b. Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but shall be kept to an ab-
solute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions when possible. c. Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from warp and buckle. d. Maximum deviation from panel flatness shall be 1/8" in 5'0" on panel in any direction for assem-
bled units. (Non-accumulative - No Oil Canning) 5. SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
a. Plans, elevations, details, characteristics, and other requirements indicated are based upon standards by one manufacturer. It is intended that other manufacturers, receiving prior approval, may be ac-ceptable, provided their details and characteristics comply with size and profile requirements, and material/performance standards.
b. System must not generally have any visible fasteners, telegraphing or fastening on the panel faces or any other compromise of a neat and flat appearance.
c.System shall comply with the applicable provisions of the "Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Storefront, and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual" by AAMA and ANSI/AAMA 302.9 requirements for alumi-num windows.
d. Fabricate panel system to dimension, size, and profile indicated on the drawings based on a design temperature of 70°F.
e. Fabricate panel system so that no restraints can be placed on the panel, which might result in compres-sive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall be such that the panels remain flat regardless of temperature change and at all times remain air and water tight.
f.The finish side of the panel shall have a removable plastic film applied prior to fabrication, which shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping, and erection to protect the surface from dam-age.
6. SYSTEM TYPE: a. A Progressive System using sliding male-female clip components, which are held to the panels
perimeter extrusion, without the use of rivets or screws. This design must enable a single panel to be independently removed and re-installed
b. Any ACM or MCM panel system not meeting the standards & requirements (1.07.1.1; 1.07.1.2), or any panel system utilizing a track or grid layout, or one that involves a “picture frame style” post-painted extrusion incorporating a face panel, or one that utilizes adhesives in place of me-chanical fasteners in the panel design, are NOT considered as equal or comparable in design or performance.
c. No field sealant required in joints unless specifically noted on drawings. d. Panel Stiffeners as required per engineering review.
7. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE a. Composite panels shall be capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures
based on the following test standards of ASTM E330-14 required by the Architect and/or the local building code. 1) Wind Load
a) Wind Load: Maximum Pressure achieved = 13,325 Pa¹ (278 lbs/ft²); b) (equivalent to 330 mph / 531 km/h based on Ensewiler formula) c) Specified Design Load: 3,591 Pa (75.0 lbs/ft²) d) Positive Loading Net Deflection: (+3,591 Pa; 75.0 lbs/ft²) = 0.204 inches (5.2mm) e) Negative Loading Net Deflection: (-3,591 Pa; -75.0 lbs/ft²) = 0.258 inches
(6.6mm) b. Panels shall be designed to withstand the Design Wind Load based upon the local building code,
but in no case less than 20 pounds per square foot (psf) and 30 psf on parapet and corner panels. Wind load testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E330 to obtain the following results.
c. Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the secured perimeter-framing members shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4", whichever is less.
d. Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not exceed L/60 of the full span.
e. Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16". f. At 1-1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing members shall not exceed L/100
of span length and components shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At connection points of framing members to anchors, permanent set shall not exceed 1/16".
8. Air/Water System Test a. If system tests are not available, mock-ups shall be constructed and tests performed under the di-
rection of an independent third party laboratory, which show compliance to the following minimum standards:
b. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/ lbs/ft² (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested ac-cording to ASTM E 283-04 at the following test-pressure difference: 1) Infiltration:
a) 75 Pa @ 1.57 lbs/ft² : 0.05 L/s m² (0.01 CFM/ft²) b) 300 Pa @ 6.24 lbs/ft² : 0.05 L/s m² (0.01 CFM/ft²)
c. Water Penetration under Static Air Pressure: No uncontrolled water penetration when tested ac-cording to ASTM E 331-02 at the following test-pressure difference over a period of 15 continu-ous minutes: 1) Test-Pressure Differential: Maximum Pressure achieved = 20 lbs/ft² @ 957 Pa
d. Thermal Movements: Panel system has been designed to accommodate vertical and horizontal thermal movement of components, preventing buckling, opening of joints and other detrimental effects when subjected to seasonal temperature cycles. Systems that incorporate enlarged holes or loose fitting attachments to accommodate for thermal fluctuations, are NOT considered as equal or comparable in design or performance. 1) Temperature Change (Range): [120 deg F 67 deg C , ambient; 180 deg F 100 deg C ,
material surfaces ]. e. Fire Performance:
1) NFPA 285 Standard Fire Test Method For Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components
1) Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.0296 inch (0.7518 mm 2) Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm)
b. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall at-tachment flange of 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.4547 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
1. Stretcher and soldier units 7-5/8 inches long by 2-1/4 inches wide by l inch thick 2. 90 degree exterior corner units, left handed and right handed, 1 inch thick with legs 7-5/8 and 3-
5/8 inches. B. Color:
1. Thin Brick 1: Gen Gary Heartland Series “Wyendot”; sand texture. 2. Thin Brick 2: Glen Gary Engobe Series “Aspen White (S804)”; smooth texture.
C. STEEL HOLDING RAILS (RAILS)
1. Polymer coated, 0.27 inch nominal, G-90 galvanized, cold roll formed, Commercial CS Type B, Non-chemical treated, Minimum Spangle, Smooth Steel, pre-punched shapes of 12 feet length.
D. ANCHORS 1. RSS supplied self-tapping polymer coated metal screws 1 inch to 1-1/2 inch as required by RSS
Installation Instructions.]
2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920 as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. B. Butyl Sealants: Butyl, non-skinning/curing type as recommended by manufacturer. C. Butyl Tape: As recommended by manufacturer. D. Cladding Panel Accessories: E. Fasteners (concealed/exposed/non-corrosive): Fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not ex-
pose fasteners except where unavoidable and then match finish of adjoining metal. F. Mortar:
1. Manufacturer: Benchmark by Kingspan. a. Type N Mortar Cement, with polymer additives. ASTM C 91 b. Product: Type N polymer modified mortar.[Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides
and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. ]
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Provide field measurements to manufacturer as required to achieve proper fit of the preformed wall panel enve-
lope. Measurements shall be provided in a timely manner so that there is no impact to construction or manufactur-ing schedule.
B. Supporting Steel: All structural supports required for installation of panels shall be by others. Support members
shall be installed within the following tolerances: 1. Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 5 feet in any direction along plane of framing. 2. Plus or minus 1/4 inch cumulative in 20 feet in any direction along plane of framing. 3. Plus or minus 1/2 inch from framing plane on any elevation. 4. Plumb or level within 1/8 inch at all changes of transverse for pre-formed corner panel applications. 5. Verify that bearing support has been provided behind vertical joints of horizontal panel systems and hori-
zontal joints of vertical panel systems. Width of support shall be as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Examine individual panels upon removing from the bundle; notify manufacturer of panel defects. Do not install defective panels.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.
B. Install panels plumb, level, and true-to-line to dimensions and layout indicated on approved shop drawings. C. Attachment system shall allow for the free and noiseless vertical and horizontal thermal movement due to expan-
sion and contraction for a material temperature range of -20°F to +180°F. Buckling of panels, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement will not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly, and erection procedure shall account for the ambient temperature at the time of the respective operation.
D. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in a manner which would damage the finish, de-
crease strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return component parts which require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new parts.
E. Separate dissimilar metals and use gasketed fasteners where needed to eliminate the possibility of corrosive or
electrolytic action between metals. F. Cut panels prior to installing, where indicated on shop drawings, using a power circular saw with fine tooth carbide
tip blade per manufacturer’s instructions. Personnel should wear respiratory and eye protection devices. 1. Outside corners shall be field mitered, inside corners shall be butt jointed, and provide perimeter trim per
manufacturers approved shop drawings and standard details.
G. Butyl Weather Barrier Sealant: 1. Apply non-skinning butyl sealant as shown on shop drawings and manufacturer’s installation instructions
as necessary to .establish the vapor barrier for the panels. 2. Use non-skinning butyl tube sealant only for tight metal-to-metal contact. 3. Do not use non-skinning butyl tube sealant to bridge gaps.
H. Karrier Rail Attachment:
1. Attachment at panel joint: Place panel fasteners through pre-punched holes in Karrier Rails. Fasteners are concealed within the joint of the panel. Set fastener in Butyl Sealant. Secure Karrier Rail to structural supports.
2. Secure opposite side of Karrier Rail, using manufacturer recommended expansion anchors, to barrier wall panel surface.
3. Space fasteners as recommended by manufacturer or otherwise indicated on the approved shop draw-ings.
4. Alter Karrier Rails as required to accommodate panel accessories per approved shop drawings and man-ufacturer’s standard details.
I. Install perimeter trim for insulated barrier wall panels, where indicated and where trim will be concealed by finish materials.
J. Sealant installation for exposed joints 1. Clean and prime surfaces to receive exterior exposed sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s
recommendations. 2. Follow sealant manufacturer’s recommendations for joint width-to-depth ratio, application temperature
range, size and type of backer rod, and compatibility of materials for adhesion. 3. Direct contact between butyl and silicone sealants shall not be permitted.
K. Apply spray foam to joints ¼ inch or larger where recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 TRIM INSTALLATION A. Place trim and trim fasteners only as indicated per details on the approved shop drawings.
B. Field drill weep holes where appropriate in horizontal trim; minimum 1/4 inch diameter at 24 inches on center. C. Place a continuous strip of butyl tube sealant between the inside back face of closure trims and interior panel fac-
es for proper vapor seal. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing shall be performed on Barrier Wall Panel prior to the installation of the finish wall materials. B. Testing Agency: Owner shall engage an independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to the architect to
perform field tests and inspections and to prepare reports of findings. C. Field Water Test: After completing portion of barrier wall panel assembly including accessories, test a 2-bay area
selected by the architect for water penetration in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective film immediately after installation.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace metal panels and trim that have been damaged. C. After metal wall panel and cladding installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and
sealant. D. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of the panel installation. After installation,
panel repair and replacement shall become the responsibility of the General Contractor. E. Repair panels with minor damage. F. Remove masking (if used) as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in place after panel in-
stallation on an elevation, shall become the responsibility of the General Contractor. G. Any additional protection, after installation, shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. H. Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants. I. Remove excess mortar in accordance with installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 4263
SA1509A TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5310-1
SECTION 07 5310 - TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The project consists of:
1. Providing Carlisle's Sure-Weld (TPO) Adhered Roofing System (or approved equal) and related materials onto the existing deck area as outlined below.
B. Provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the
Carlisle Sure-Weld .060” thick white reinforced TPO (Thermoplastic Polyolefin) reinforced membrane Adhered Roofing System including flashings, wood blocking, insulation, vapor retarder, metal fascia, walkway pads, underlayment board, and overlayment board as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's most current specifications and details. Provide owner with a 20 year full system NDL warranty, in conjunction with Carlisle polyisocyanurate insulation and Carlisle 1/2" gypsum based moisture resistant Underlayment and Overlayment Board, fully adhered to the insulation.
C. The contractor shall be fully knowledgeable of all requirements of the contract documents and shall make
themselves aware of all job site conditions that will affect their work. D. The contractor shall confirm all given information and advise the Architect, prior to bid, of any conflicts that will
affect their cost proposal.
E. Coordinate closely with the subcontractors 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General provisions of contract, including DIVISION 0 AND DIVISION 1 specification sections,
apply to work in this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete product data, shop drawings, and color samples of face sheets and finishes in accordance
with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Prior to starting work, the roofing contractor must submit the following:
1. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction and identification of materials. 2. A sample of the manufacturer's Membrane System Warranty. 3. Submit a letter of certification from the manufacturer which certifies the roofing contractor is
authorized to install the manufacturer's roofing system and lists foremen who have received training from the manufacturer along with the dates training was received.
4. Certification from the membrane manufacturer indicating the membrane thickness over the reinforcing scrim (top ply membrane thickness) is nominal .015” (15 mil).
5. Certification of the manufacturer's warranty reserve. 6. A letter from the membrane manufacturer stating; “The Roofing System Manufacturer is the primary
manufacturer of the membrane and the membrane bonding adhesive.” C. Upon completion of the installed work, submit copies of the manufacturer's final inspection to the specifier
prior to the issuance of the manufacturer's warranty. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or wrappings with the
manufacturer's name, brand name and installation instructions intact and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit work to continue without interruption.
SA1509A TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5310-2
B. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for proper material storage. a. Store Sure-Weld membrane in the original undisturbed plastic wrap in a cool, shaded area. Sure-
Weld membrane that has been exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days must be prepared with Sure-Seal Weathered Membrane Cleaner prior to hot air welding.
b. Store curable materials (adhesives and sealants) between 60°F and 80°F in dry areas protected from water and direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60°F minimum temperature before using.
c. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life.
C. Insulation must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with waterproof materials. D. Any materials, which are found to be damaged, shall be removed and replaced at the applicator's expense. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed roof sections. Care should
be exercised to provide protection for the interior of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed sections of the membrane system.
B. Do not disrupt activities in the building. C. Coordinate schedule closely with owner. 1.06 JOB SITE PROTECTION A. The roofing contractor shall adequately protect the building, paved areas, service drives, curbs, lawn, shrubs,
trees, etc. from damage while performing the required work. Provide canvas, boards and sheet metal (properly secured) as necessary for protection and remove protection material at completion. The contractor shall repair or be responsible for costs to repair all property damaged during the roofing application.
B. The contractor shall take precautions to prevent the spread of dust and debris, particularly where such
material may sift into the building, the site, the street, or adjacent properties. The roofing contractor shall provide labor and materials to construct, maintain and remove necessary, temporary enclosures to prevent dust or debris in the construction area(s) from entering adjacent areas.
C. Do not overload any portion of the building, by either use of or placement of equipment, storage of debris, or
storage of materials. D. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers. E. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during the roofing application. Remove debris at the
completion of each day's work and clean drains, if required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is in progress. Install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night and screen drain.
F. Store moisture susceptible materials above ground and protect with waterproof coverings. G. Remove all traces of piled bulk material and return the job site to its original condition upon completion of the
work. 1.07 SAFETY The contractor shall be responsible for all means and methods as they relate to safety and shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal requirements that are safety related. Safety shall be the responsibility of the contractor. All related personnel shall be instructed daily to be mindful of the full time requirement to maintain a safe environment for the facility's occupants including staff, visitors, customers and the occurrence of the general public on or near the site.
SA1509A TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5310-3
1.08 WORKMANSHIP A. Applicators installing new roof, flashing and related work shall be factory trained and approved by the
manufacturer they are representing. B. All work shall be of highest quality and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications
and to the building owner's satisfaction. C. There shall be a supervisor on the job site at all times while work is in progress. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Roofing System Manufacturer must be the primary manufacturer of the membrane and the
membrane bonding adhesive to ensure compatibility. Secondary “marketers” of roofing systems will not be acceptable. Evidence of this requirement and a separate warranty fund shall be submitted with the bid. Any roofing system other than the specified roofing system must be submitted for approval a minimum of 14 days prior to the stated bid date. The membrane manufacturer must have a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacture of TPO roofing membranes.
B. The membrane roofing system must achieve a UL Class A and FM 1A-75 rating. C. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the roofing contractor must strictly comply with the
manufacturer's current specifications and details. D. The roofing system must be installed by an applicator authorized and trained by the manufacturer in
compliance with shop drawings as approved by the manufacturer. The roofing applicator shall be thoroughly experienced and upon request be able to provide evidence of having at least five years successful experience installing TPO roofing systems.
E. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of work who are skilled in
the application techniques of the materials specified including operation of hot air welding equipment and power supply. Provide at least one thoroughly trained and an experienced superintendent on the job at all times roofing work is in progress.
F. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop drawings without the prior
written approval of the specifier. Any deviation from the manufacturer's installation procedures must be supported by a written certification on the manufacturer's letterhead and presented for the specifier's consideration.
G. Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be made by a non-sales
technical representative of the membrane manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective work will be required before the warranty will be issued. Notify the building owner seventy-two (72) hours prior to the manufacturer's final inspection.
1.10 JOB CONDITIONS, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS Refer to Carlisle's Sure-Weld Adhered Roofing System specification, Part II - Application, for General Job Site Considerations. A. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be on location at all times during the transportation, storage and
application of materials. B. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away from low spots and out of
drain sumps. All field splices should be shingled to prevent bucking of water. C. When loading materials onto the roof, the Carlisle Authorized Roofing Applicator must comply with the
requirements of the building owner to prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the building structure.
SA1509A TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5310-4
D. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with the manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
E. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When necessary, new roof
sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for possible damage. F. Provide protection, such as 3/4-inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to traffic during construction.
Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and splinters. G. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free
of projections or contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil and grease.
H. New roofing shall be complete and weather tight at the end of the workday. I. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with the roofing
membrane. Contaminated membranes shall be replaced. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 20 year Warranty covering both labor and material with no dollar limitation. The
maximum wind speed coverage shall be peak gusts of 72 mph measured at 10 meters above ground level. Certification is required with submittals indicating the manufacturer has reviewed and agreed to such wind coverage.
B. Pro-rated System Warranties shall not be accepted. C. Evidence of the manufacturer's warranty reserve shall be included as part of the project submittals for the
specifier's approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All components of the specified roofing system shall be products of Carlisle SynTec Incorporated or accepted
by Carlisle SynTec Incorporated as compatible, or approved equal. B. All products (including insulation, fasteners, fastening plates and edgings) must be supplied by or approved
by the roofing system manufacturer. 2.02 MEMBRANE Sure-Weld .060” thick white reinforced TPO (Thermoplastic Polyolefin) membrane, or approved equal, as needed to complete the roofing system. Membrane thickness over the reinforcing scrim (top-ply thickness) shall be nominal .024” thick (24 mil). 2.03 INSULATION, UNDERLAYMENT BOARD, & OVERLAYMENT BOARD A. Underlayment Board (on metal deck) shall be 1/2” Carlisle Dens-Deck Prime, Carlisle Securock, or approved
equal. B. First layer of insulation: Flat Insulation, which shall be approximately 3.1 inch thick polyisocyanurate with a
minimum R-value of R-18.0 per ASTM C 1289, (LTTR). C. Second Layer of Insulation: Flat insulation, which shall be approximately 3.1 inch thick Polyisocyanurate with
a minimum R-value of 18.0 per ASTM C 1289 (LTTR). D. Crickets: Tapered (1/4"/foot slope) polyisocyanurate insulation as required for drainage around rooftop
equipment.
SA1509A TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5310-5
E. Crickets shall be as noted on the drawings. F. All Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be Carlisle HP-H Polyiso, a rigid roof insulation panel consisting of a
closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core laminated to fiber-reinforced facers per ASTM 1289-05a, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, 20PSI minimum, or approved equal.
G. Overlayment board shall be 1/2” Carlisle Dens-Deck Prime, Carlisle Securock, or approved equal.” 2.04 VAPOR BARRIER A. Carlisle CCW-725TR vapor retarder, a 40 mil composite consisting of 35 mils of self-adhering rubberized
asphalt laminated to a 5 mil skid-resistant polyethylene film. 2.05 ADHESIVES AND CLEANERS All products shall be furnished by Carlisle and specifically formulated for the intended purpose. A. Membrane Bonding Adhesive: Sure-Weld Bonding Adhesive Bonding adhesive shall be low VOC bonding
adhesive to meet LEED requirements. (Membrane Bonding Adhesive must be manufactured by the Primary membrane manufacturer to ensure compatibility).
B. Insulation and overlayment board adhesive: Sure-Seal FAST 100-LV Adhesive (Insulation adhesive must be
V.O.C. free) Insulation adhesive must have a nominal free-rise core density of 2.2 pound per cubic foot, and be a 2 part low rise foam adhesive with 100% adhesion. (Ribbon method adhesives are acceptable; however beads are to be installed at a maximum of 6 inches on center in the field and the perimeter, and 4 inches on center in the corners for the top of insulation and overlayment board).
C. Edge Sealant: Cut Edge Sealant D. Sealer: Water Cut-Off Mastic and CCW-102C Sealant E. Cleaning Solvent: Sure-Seal Weathered Membrane Cleaner 2.06 FRAMING, BLOCKING, NAILERS, & PLYWOOD A. Framing, blocking, and nailers shall be pressure-treated wood
B. Pressure treatment shall be “Preserve Plus” alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ) insect and decay protection
treatment, containing no arsenic or chromium, as manufactured by Chemical Specialties, Inc. Phone: 800-421-8661 or 704-522-0825; E-mail: [email protected]; Web: www.treatedwood.com, or approved equal.
C. Pressure treatment shall comply with AWPA Standard U1 (Category UC2, UC3A, UC3B, UC4A, UC4B), T1. D. Retention rate of pressure treatment shall be 0.25-0.40 pcf. E. Coat cut ends of pressure treated wood with field-applied end coat prior to installation. F. Use only hot-dipped galvanized steel screws to secure blocking and nailers. Screws shall be long enough to
provide a minimum of 1 1/2” penetration into substrate. G. Plywood & Sheathing shall be CDX. Plywood thickness shall be 1/2" unless noted otherwise. 2.07 FASTENERS AND PLATES To be used for additional membrane securement: A. HP Fasteners: A threaded, black epoxy electro-deposition coated fastener used with steel and wood.
B. HP Hammer Screw: an expansion anchor with stainless steel drive pin used for fastening the Carlisle Termination Bar or Seam Fastening Plates to concrete, brick, or block walls.
C. Seam Fastening Plates: a 2 inch diameter metal plate used for additional membrane securement. 2.08 METAL EDGING AND FASCIAS: All metal edging and fascias shall be Factory Mutual Approved and shall
be certified by the metal edge manufacturer to comply with ANSI/SPRI Standard ES-1-98. All metal edging and terminations shall be part of the roofing system, shall be covered by the roofing warranty, and shall be approved by the roofing manufacturer for use with this roofing system. All metal edging shall have pre-formed and prefinished corners.
A. FASCIA:
1. Fascia shall be SecurEdge 400 Spring-Tight Coping, or approved equal. Fascia shall be a snap-on system consisting of a (minimum) 18 gauge galvanized metal segmented front and rear cleats and a (minimum) .040” aluminum fascia, preformed and prefinished, with splice plates and a Kynar 500 finish. Fascia shall be approximately 12” high, with 1 or 2 horizontal ribs as necessary to avoid “oilcanning” and other distortion. Color shall match the ACM panels (see drawings for exterior finishes).
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with the manufacturer's published instructions for the installation of the membrane roofing system
including proper substrate preparation, job site considerations and weather restrictions. B. Position sheets to accommodate contours of the roof deck and shingle splices to avoid bucking water. 3.02 VAPOR RETARDER APPLICATION A. Surfaces to receive Carlisle 725 TR Air and Vapor Retarder must be clean and dry. Apply the vapor barrier
directly to the underlayment board in accordance with current manufacturer’s specifications. Prime all surfaces to receive the vapor retarder with CCW-702 Primer. Apply primer with a long nap roller at the applicable coverage rate noted above. At 75°F allow primer to dry 1 hour minimum. Primer has a satisfactory cure when it will not transfer when touched. Prime only areas to be waterproofed the same day. Reprime if area becomes dirty. Apply Carlisle 725TR Air and Vapor Retarder from low to high point, in a shingle fashion, so that laps will shed water. Overlap all edges at lease 2 1/2 inches. End laps shall be staggered. Place membrane carefully so as to avoid wrinkles and fishmouths. Immediately after installation, roll with a 100-150 pound weighted steel roller.
3.03 INSULATION, UNDERLAYMENT BOARD, & OVERLAYMENT BOARD INSTALLATION A. Adhesively attach the underlayment board using the same method as the insulation (See “B”, below).
B. Secure all insulation, staggering all joints, to the Vapor Retarder with the FAST 100-LV Adhesive in
accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and application procedures for a full spray application. Insulation adhesive must have a nominal free-rise core density of 2.2 pound per cubic foot, and be a 2 part low rise foam adhesive with 100% adhesion. (Ribbon method adhesives are acceptable; however beads are to be installed at a maximum of 6 inches on center in the field and the perimeter, and 4 inches on center in the corners). Install subsequent layers of insulation using the same method.
C. Adhesively attach the overlayment board using the same method as the insulation (See “B”, above). 3.04 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT A. Position Sure-Weld membrane over the acceptable substrate. Fold membrane sheet back lengthwise (onto
itself) so half the underside of the membrane is exposed.
SA1509A TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5310-7
B. Apply Sure-Weld Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions, to the exposed underside of the membrane and the corresponding substrate area. Do not apply Bonding Adhesive along the splice edge of the membrane to be hot air welded over the adjoining sheet. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch. 1. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. Brush down the bonded
section of the membrane sheet immediately after rolling the membrane into the adhesive with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.
2. Fold back the unbonded half of the sheet lengthwise and repeat the bonding procedures. C. Position adjoining sheets to allow a minimum overlap of 2 inches. D. Hot air weld the Sure-Weld membrane sheets using the Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine or Hot Air Hand
Welder in accordance with the manufacturer's hot air welding procedures. E. Pull the membrane back along the welded splice so the entire underside of the membrane is exposed once
the Hot Air Weld has been completed. F. Apply Sure-Weld Bonding Adhesive to the exposed underside of the membrane sheet and the substrate. G. Allow adhesive to dry until tacky and roll the membrane into the substrate and brush down the bonded section
with a bristle broom following the procedure noted above. H. Continue to install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges a minimum of 2 inches
and complete the bonding procedures as stated previously. 3.05 MEMBRANE SPLICING/HOT AIR WELDING PROCEDURES A. Hot air weld the Sure-Weld membrane using an Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine or Hot Air Hand Welder in
accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. At all splice intersections, roll the seam with a silicone roller to ensure a continuous hot air welded seam. Note: All splice intersections shall be overlaid with Sure-Weld non-reinforced flashing.
B. Probe all seams once the hot air welds have thoroughly cooled (approximately 30 minutes). C. Repair all seam deficiencies the same day they are discovered. D. Apply Cut Edge Sealant on all cut edges of reinforced membrane (where the scrim reinforcement is exposed)
after seam probing is complete. Cut Edge Sealant is not required on vertical splices. 3.06 FLASHING A. Flashing of parapets, curbs, expansion joints and other parts of the roof must be performed using Sure-Weld
reinforced membrane. Sure-Weld non-reinforced membrane can be used for flashing pipe penetrations, Sealant Pockets, and scuppers, as well as inside and outside corners, when the use of pre-molded accessories is not feasible. All curbs and penetrations are to be installed with pre-fabricated membrane flashings.
B. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing including metal
edging/coping and roof drain applications. 3.07 WALKWAYS A. Hot air weld walkway pads to the membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. B. Use "weathered membrane cleaner" to prepare TPO membrane to accept walkway pads. C. Cut walkway material into 5' lengths and position pads with a 1" gap between pads (to allow for drainage).
Cut and position pads to provide a minimum 4" wide gap at any field splices.
SA1509A TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5310-8
3.08 DAILY SEAL A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not achieved by the end of the
workday, a daily seal must be performed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration. B. Complete an acceptable membrane seal in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 3.09 CLEAN UP
A. Perform daily clean up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner.
B. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to
review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking.
END OF SECTION 07 5310
SA1509A SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND COURNTERFLASHING 07 6200-1
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, and all accessories.
B. Reglets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: WOOD NAILERS.
B. SECTION 07 5310 - TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING: ROOFING SYSTEM.
C. SECTION 07 9005 - JOINT SEALERS. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 1998.
B. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002.
C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.
D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
E. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.
F. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
G. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007.
H. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction; 2003.
I. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007.
J. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. SAMPLES: Submit three samples 3x3 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard
details, except as otherwise indicated.
SA1509A SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND COURNTERFLASHING 07 6200-2
B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years of documented experience.
1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets
to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. PRE-FINISHED GALVANIZED STEEL: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02
inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;
multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled. B. ALUMINUM: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; anodized finish of color as selected.
1. Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Class I clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.
C. COPPER: ASTM B370, cold rolled 16 oz/sq ft thick; natural finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. FASTENERS: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B. PRIMER: Zinc chromate type.
C. PROTECTIVE BACKING PAINT: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D. SEALANT: Type B specified in Section 07 9005 – JOINT SEALERS.
E. PLASTIC CEMENT: ASTM D 4586, Type I.
F. REGLETS: Recessed type, clear anodized aluminum; face and ends covered with plastic tape; RC-3
manufactured by MM Systems Corp, or approved equal.
G. SOLDER: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Apply finishes
in the shop, after forming.
B. For fascias, provide continuous hold-down cleats, fabricated of 20 gauge galvanized type sheet metal.
C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
SA1509A SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND COURNTERFLASHING 07 6200-3
F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip.
H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place,
and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Install reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15
mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces
with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant Type B. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and roof membrane. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate
to profiles. E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing
solution and rinse with water. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, for field inspection requirements.
B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified
requirements. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. THROUGH-WALL & BASE FLASHING IN MASONRY: Copper Covered Paper: Fabricated of
electro-deposit pure copper sheets ASTM B 370, bonded with special asphalt compound to both sides of creped, reinforced building paper, UU-B-790, Type I, style 5, or to a three ply sheet of asphalt impregnated creped paper grooves running along the width of sheet. Copper sheet shall be 5oz/SF minimum.
B. COUNTERFLASHINGS AT ROOFING TERMINATIONS (over roofing base flashings): MM Systems Corp. RC-3, or approved equal.
END OF SECTION 07 6200
SA1509A FIRESTOPPING 07 8400-1
SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems.
B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies,
whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 22: Firestopping of Plumbing work
B. Division 23: Firestopping of HVAC work
C. Division 26, 27, & 28: Firestopping of electrical an communications work 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2008a
B. ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2006
C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition
D. FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2001
E. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition
F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov
G. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and
firestopping test or design number.
C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
E. Installer qualifications (per Paragraph 1.05, below). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when
tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey)
will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-es.org will
be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. 2. Must have a current UL-qualified firestop contractor certificate.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and
after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating of 1 hour and that meets all other specified requirements.
2. Fire Ratings: See 2.02, below
2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content
than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible
silicone sealant; conforming to the following: 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent 2. Color: Red 3. Top-of-Wall Firestopping (Minimum 1-hour fire-rated):
a. Hilti, Inc.: Product “CFS-SP WB Firestop “Joint Spray”. Joint system shall be UL System No. CJ-D-0004 or Approved equal.
b. Comparable products: Foam A/D Fire Protection Systems, Inc., 3M Fire Protection products, or approved equal. Joint system shall be comparable to UL System No. CJ-D-0004.
4. Thru-Penetration Firestopping of Walls (Minimum 1-hour fire rated): a. Hilti, Inc.: Product “FS-One Max Intumescent sealant”. Thru-penetration system shall be
one of the following UL System numbers: 1) W-L-1205 2) W-L-3046 3) W-L-7151 4) W-L-7250 5) W-L-8079
b. Comparable products from A/D Fire Protection Systems, Inc., 3M Fire Protection Products, or approved equal. Thru-penetration systems shall be comparable to the UL systems listed in 4a, above.
C. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer forming
airtight bond to opening; conforming to the following: 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc: Product [Mineral Wool]: www.us.hilti.com b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: Product Mineral Wool: www.adfire.com c. 3M Fire Protection Products: Product FireMaster Mastic: www.3m.com/firestop
1. Durability and longevity: Permanent installation that accommodates changes in cabling. 2. Manufacturer: Hilti, Inc; Product: Speed Sleeve CP653, 2" and 4" diameter,
re-penetration cable management device for cabling through floors and walls. 3. Comparable products from A/D Fire Protection Systems, Inc., 3M Fire Protection
Products, or approved equal. E. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested
assembly design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely
affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Install labeling required by code. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION 07 8400
SA1509A JOINT SEALERS 07 9005-1
SECTION 07 9005 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including DIVISION 0 and other DIVISION 1
Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section Includes:
1. Sealants and joint backing 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 07 4263 - FABRICATED WALL PANEL ASSEMBLIES
B. SECTION 07 6200 – SHEET METAL FLASHINGs AND COUNTERFLASHINGS C. SECTION 07 4213 - METAL SOFFIT PANELS: Sealants required in conjunction with metal siding. D.. SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FASCIAS, FLASHINGS, AND TRIM: Sealants required in
conjunction with sheet metal work. E. SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING: Glazing sealants and accessories. F.. SECTION 09 3000 - TILING: Sealant used as tile grout. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005 B. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002 C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005 D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a E. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2007 F. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam
(Closed-Cell); 2005 G. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. PRODUCT DATA: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. SAMPLES: Submit three samples, illustrating sealant colors for selection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See SECTION 01 7040 - WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal,
exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. SEALANTS AND PRIMERS - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. TYPE A - GENERAL PURPOSE EXTERIOR SEALANT: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class
25, Uses M, G, and A; multi- component. 1. COLOR: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. PRODUCT: NP2 manufactured by Sonneborn, or approved equal. 3. APPLICATIONS: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry b. Joints between concrete, masonry, and other materials c. Joints between metal frames and other materials d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated
C. TYPE B - EXTERIOR METAL LAP JOINT SEALANT: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning,
noncuring. 1. PRODUCT: Sonolastic 150 with VLM Technology manufactured by Sonneborn. 2. APPLICATIONS: Use for:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. D. TYPE C - GENERAL PURPOSE INTERIOR SEALANT: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. COLOR: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. PRODUCT: Sonolac manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. APPLICATIONS: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
E. TYPE D - TILE SEALANT: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew
resistant. 1. PRODUCT: Omniplus manufactured by Sonneborn. 2. APPLICATIONS: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.
SA1509A JOINT SEALERS 07 9005-3
c. Vertical joints between ceramic tile surfaces at "inside" corners. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. PRIMER: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. JOINT CLEANER: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials. C. JOINT BACKING: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30
to 50 percent larger than joint width; Sonolastic Closed Cell Backer Rod manufactured by Sonneborn. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and
material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and
surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION 07 9005
SA1509A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-1
SECTION 08 1113 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Products supplied but not installed under this section: a. Steel doors b. Steel frames c. Shop priming d. U.L. label as required
2. Information included but described elsewhere a. SECTION 08 1416 - WOOD DOORS b. SECTION 08 7100 - HARDWARE c. Installed under SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY
1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SECTION 01 3400 –
a. LABEL DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES: Certify that construction conforms with design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
3. DOOR, FRAME & HARDWARE SCHEDULE: See SECTION 08 7100 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4200 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations B. STANDARDS: Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent
requirements are shown, specified or apply. 1. STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE: "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Door and Frames"
(SDI-100). 2. AWS 3. Commercial Standard CS 242 4. Steel Door Institute SDI-106 5. COLD ROLLED STEEL: ASTM A 366, ASTM A 568, ASTM A 569, ASTM A 568
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply products from the following:
1. Steelcraft 2. Amweld 3. Approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS A. STEEL FRAMES:
1. Steel 2. SIZES, DESIGNS AND SHAPES: As shown on drawings 3. Provide welded units in all masonry and exterior walls or fabricated for knock down unit type
SA1509A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-2
construction with reinforced joints at corners in other partitions as approved by the Architect 4. Cold-rolled, or hot-rolled, pickled and oiled, steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces 5. GAUGES: 16-gauge, unless noted otherwise 6. Provide concealed metal reinforcement for hardware as required:
a. GAUGES: In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of hardware and the thickness and width of doors to be hung in the frame
b. Comply with Commercial Standard CS 242-62 7. WORKMANSHIP AND DESIGN:
a. FINISHED WORK: Strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects b. Fabricate molded members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in true
alignment and fastenings concealed where practicable 8. CORNER JOINTS:
a. WELDED TYPE FRAMES: Miter and continuously arc-weld for full depth and width of frame and trim.
b. CONTACT EDGES: Close tight c. WELDS ON EXPOSED SURFACES: Dress smooth and flush d. KNOCK-DOWN FRAMES: Concealed tabs on hinge and strike jambs that join with
header with an interlocked neat miter corner acting as reinforcing and securely fastened. 9. PROVISIONS FOR HARDWARE:
a. Prepare frames at the factory for the installation of hardware. b. Mortise reinforces, drill, and tap frames to templates to receive all mortised hardware. c. Provide frames to receive surface-applied hardware with reinforcing plates only. d. Provide cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. e. Punch doorframes to receive rubber or vinyl door silencers. f. Provide three (3) silencers on lock side of single doors and one (1) silencer for each leaf
in heads of double doorframes. g. Set out and adjust strikes to provide clearances for silencers.
10. WALL ANCHORS: a. Provide metal anchors of shapes and sizes required for the adjoining type of wall
construction. b. Fabricate jamb anchors on jambs near the top and bottom of each frame and at
intermediate points not over 24" apart. c. MINIMUM NUMBER REQUIRED AT EACH JAMB:
1) MASONRY PARTITIONS: 3 anchors 2) STUD PARTITIONS: 4 anchors 3) FRAMES TO BE ANCHORED TO PREVIOUSLY PLACED CONCRETE,
MASONRY, OR STRUCTURAL STEEL: a) Suitable design b) As shown
e. Weld securely inside each frame. 11. FLOOR ANCHORS:
a. Steel, 14-gauge minimum b. Weld to bottom of each jamb member for anchoring frame to floor construction. c. Drill clips for 3/8" diameter anchor bolts; 2 holes minimum each clip.
12. STIFFENERS: Frames for installation in masonry wall openings more than 4'-0" in width: a. Angle or channel stiffener b. Factory weld into the head c. 12-gauge steel minimum d. Not longer than the opening width e. Do not use as lintels or load bearing members
13. DOOR STOPS: MINIMUM DEPTH: 5/8" 14. When shipping limitations so dictate, fabricate frames for large openings in sections designed for
splicing in the field by others. 15. FRAMES FOR MULTIPLE OR SPECIAL OPENINGS:
a. MULLION AND/OR RAIL MEMBERS: 1) Closed tubular shapes
SA1509A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-3
2) No visible seams or joints 3) Securely weld and finish smooth all joints between faces of abutting members
16. DUST COVER BOXES: a. Mortar guards b. 26-gauge minimum c. At all hardware mortises at masonry partitions
17. Frames manufactured from a stock program are acceptable providing all requirements of this Section are met, including gauges, labeling, finish and proper preparation for the finish hardware.
B. HOLLOW METAL DOORS:
1. MATERIALS: a. Commercial quality b. Level, cold rolled steel c. Conform to ASTM Designation A 366 d. Free of scale, pitting or other surface defects e. FACE SHEETS FOR DOORS UP TO 36" WIDE: 18-gauge minimum f. FACE SHEETS FOR DOORS OVER 36" WIDE: 16-gauge minimum
2. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION: a. TYPE: Flush b. Fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on their faces or
vertical edges c. MINIMUM DOOR THICKNESS: 1 3/4" d. Conform to ANSI SDI-100-85 e. Strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage or buckle f. CORNER BENDS: True and straight and of minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. g. FACE SHEETS:
1) Run stiffeners full height of door 2) Reinforced 3) Sound deadened where shown 4) All exterior doors to be insulated with a polystyrene or mineral core completely
filling inside of door and laminated to inside face of both panels to provide a minimum R value of 7.
h. DOOR FACES: Join at vertical edges by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door.
I. Grind and fill all welds and dress smooth to make invisible and provide smooth flush surface.
j. TOP AND BOTTOM EDGES: 1) Close with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 gauge. 2) Extend full width of door and spot weld to both faces.
k. EDGE PROFILES: Provide on both vertical edges of doors as follows: 1) SINGLE-ACTING SWING DOORS: Bevel 1/8" in 2".
l. HARDWARE REINFORCEMENTS: 1) Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap at the factory for fully templated hardware only. 2) Comply with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the
hardware contractor. 3) Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, fabricate with reinforcing
plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be done by others. 4) MINIMUM GAUGES FOR HARDWARE REINFORCING PLATES:
a) HINGE AND PIVOT REINFORCEMENTS: 7-gauge x 1 1/4" x 10" minimum.
b) 12-GAUGE FOR ALL OTHER m. CLEARANCES:
1) ALL DOORS EXCEPT FIRE DOORS: a) JAMBS AND HEADS: 1/8" b) PAIR DOOR MEETING RAILS: 1/8" c) OVER FINISH FLOOR MATERIALS:
- WITH NO THRESHOLD: 3/8" maximum - WITH THRESHOLD: 7/8" maximum - WITHOUT CARPET: 3/4"
SA1509A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-4
- WITH 1/2" THICK CARPET OR MORE: 1/4" 2) FIRE RATED DOORS: a) As required by authority having jurisdiction 3) EXTERIOR DOORS: All exterior doors shall be insulated and have a minimum
R-value of 7.
C. EXPOSED FASTENERS: Countersunk flat Phillips head screws and bolts D. GLASS MOLDINGS AND STOPS: (Where specified or scheduled)
1. This Contractor to coordinate glazing by others in accordance with glass opening sizes shown on approved shop drawings.
2. FIXED MOLDINGS: Securely weld to door on security side. 3. LOOSE STOPS:
a. 20-gauge (minimum) steel, butt corner joints. b. Secure to the framed opening by cadmium or zinc-coated countersunk screws.
4. Snap-on attachments will not be permitted E. FINISH:
1. After fabrication, doors to be filled and sanded free of all tool marks and surface imperfections. All faces and vertical edges to be smooth level and free of irregularities.
2. Chemically treat to insure maximum paint adhesion. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING A. PRIMED FINISH:
1. Apply a primer coat to all ferrous metal surfaces furnished under this section: Benjamin Moore Ironclad Latex Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel (#363), or approved equal.
2. FINISHED SURFACES: Smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. See SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY.
END OF SECTION 08 1113
SA1509A WOOD DOORS 08 1416-1
SECTION 08 1416 - WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY
B. SECTION 08 1113 - STEEL DOORS & FRAMES
C. SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE
D. SECTION 08 8000 – GLASS AND GLAZING 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork
Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0
B. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2006
C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition
D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007
E. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2008
F. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition
G. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2008
H. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998
I. WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association; 2004 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION 01 3400 - SUBMITTIAL PROCEDURDS - Administrative Requirements for submittal
procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
C. Specimen warranty
D. Complete and integrated door, frame, and hardware schedule (see SECTION 08 7100 - HARDWARE)
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
F. Warranty, executed Owner's name
SA1509A WOOD DOORS 08 1416-2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas;
or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 WARRANTY A. See SECTION 01 7040 - WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES for additional warranty requirements.
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective
materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International
Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals when door is open.
3. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish for all wood doors 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as
indicated above.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through bolting.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Select red oak, plain sliced, book veneer match, running
assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer
2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Louvers: Model 600 A1, as manufactured by Air Louvers, Inc. (323-726-8814 or
www.airlouvers.com) 1. Material and Finish: Roll formed steel; pre-painted finish to color as selected by architect. 2. Louver Blade: Inverted V blade, sight proof
B. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style
tamper proof screws. 2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails:
1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 2. Provide solid blocking for other through bolted hardware.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware
requirements and dimensions.
D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.
E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated SECTION 1700. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard:
1. Finish as indicated on drawings. B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware
E. Coordinate installation of glazing
F. Install door louvers plumb and level 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances
B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement
B. Adjust closers for full closure of doors 3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION 08 1416
SA1509A ACCESS DOORS 08 3100-1
SECTION 08 3100 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Section specifies access doors or panels. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Lock Cylinders: SECTION 08 7100 - HARDWARE. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3400 - SUBMITTALPROCEDURES.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Access doors, each type, showing construction, location and installation details.
C. MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE AND DATA: Access doors, each type. 1.04 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-99 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip A1008-03 Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy
C. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3-98 Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80-99 Fire Doors and Windows E. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): AMP 500 Series Metal Finishes
Manual F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Resistance Directory PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate components to be straight, square, flat and in same plane where required.
1. Slightly round exposed edges and without burrs, snags and sharp edges. 2. Exposed welds continuous and ground smooth. 3. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.3.
B. Number of locks and non-continuous hinges as required to maintain alignment of panel with frame. For
fire rated doors, use hinges and locks as required by fire test. C. Provide anchors or make provisions in frame for anchoring to adjacent construction. Provide size,
number, and location of anchors on four sides to secure access door in opening. For fire rated doors, provide anchors as required by fire test.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS, FIRE RATED: A. Shall meet requirements for "B" label 1 1/2 hours with maximum temperature rise of 120°C (250°F).
SA1509A ACCESS DOORS 08 3100-2
B. Comply with NFPA 80 and have Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other nationally recognized laboratory label for Class B opening.
C. DOOR PANEL: Form of 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick steel sheet, insulated sandwich type construction. D. FRAME: Form of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick steel sheet of depth and configuration to suit material and
type of construction where installed. Provide frame flange at perimeter where installed in concrete masonry or gypsum board openings. 1. Weld exposed joints in flange and grind smooth. 2. Provide frame flange at perimeter where installed in concrete masonry or gypsum board.
E. AUTOMATIC CLOSING DEVICE: Provide automatic closing device for door. F. HINGE: Continuous steel hinge with stainless steel pin. G. LOCK:
1. Self-latching, with provision for fitting flush a standard screw-in type lock cylinder. Lock cylinder specified in SECTION 08 7100 - HARDWARE.
2. Provide latch release device operable from inside of door. Mortise case in door. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS, FLUSH PANEL: A. DOOR PANEL:
1. Form of 1.9 mm (0.0747 inch) thick steel sheet. 2. Reinforce to maintain flat surface.
B. FRAME:
1. Form of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick steel sheet of depth and configuration to suit material and type of construction where installed.
2. Provide surface mounted units having frame flange at perimeter where installed in concrete, masonry, or gypsum board construction.
3. Weld exposed joints in flange and grind smooth. C. HINGE:
1. Concealed spring hinge to allow panel to open 175°. 2. Provide removable hinge pin to allow removal of panel from frame.
D. LOCK: Include provision for fitting flush a standard screw-in type lock cylinder (SEE SECTION 08 7100 -
HARDWARE). 2.04 FINISH: A. Provide in accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series on exposed surfaces. B. Steel Surfaces: Baked-on prime coat over a protective phosphate coating. 2.06 SIZE: A. Minimum 600 mm (24 inches) square door unless otherwise shown or required to suit opening in
suspension system of ceiling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION: A. Provide access panels or doors wherever any valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and other control items
of mechanical, electrical and conveyor work are concealed in wall or partition, or are above ceiling of gypsum board or plaster.
SA1509A ACCESS DOORS 08 3100-3
B. Use fire rated doors in fire rated partitions and ceilings. C. Use flush panels in partitions and gypsum board or plaster ceilings, except lay-in acoustical panel ceilings
or upward access acoustical tile ceilings. D. Include a total of 4 fire-rated access doors, and 4 non-rated access doors. Locations shall be as directed
by Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Install access doors in openings to have sides vertical in wall installations, and parallel to ceiling
suspension grid or sidewalls when installed in ceiling. B. Set frames so that edge of frames without flanges will finish flush with surrounding finish surfaces. C. Set frames with flanges to overlap opening and so that face will be uniformly spaced from the finish
surface. 3.03 ANCHORAGE: A. Secure frames to adjacent construction using anchors attached to frames or by use of bolts or screws
through the frame members. B. Type, size, and number of anchoring device suitable for the material surrounding the opening, maintain
alignment, and resist displacement during normal use of access door. C. Anchors for fire rated access doors shall meet requirements of applicable fire test. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT: A. Adjust hardware so that door panel will open freely. B. Adjust door when closed so door panel is centered in the frame.
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and CONTRACT CONDITIONS as listed
in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section consists of pre-engineered neutron / radiation shielding sliding doors
with framing where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. Work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install the following:
a. Neutron / radiation shielding sliding doors complete with internal reinforcing. b. Linear motion system and support framing. c. Programmable door operators. d. Emergency hand crank. e. Safety edge sensing system. f. Battery backup system. g. Presence detection system. h. Optional accessories
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Openings for doors into concrete, placing concrete
slabs and walls.
B. Section 09 9100 - PAINTING: Field-applied primer and finish coatings. C. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL: Conduit and power wiring for door operators, controls, and switches.
1.04 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in
this Section. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A156.10-2005 – Power Operated
Pedestrian Doors. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel b. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. c. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural,
and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.
d. ASTM B29 - Standard Specification for Refined Lead. 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): ISO 9001:2008. 4. National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP):
a. NCRP Report No. 144 – Radiation Protection for Particle Accelerator Facilities. b. NCRP Report No. 147 – Structural Shielding for Medical X-Ray Imaging
c. NCRP Report No. 148 – Radiation Protection in Veterinary Medicine. d. NCRP Report No. 151 – Structural Shielding Design and Evaluation for
Megavoltage X- and Gamma Ray Radiotherapy Facilities. 5. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standard 325 – Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate,
Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. 6. U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
a. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1025 – Lead. b. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. c. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.62 – Lead. d. CAL-OSHA Title 8 Sec 1532.1, Sec 5198, and Sec 5216
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 3400 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished as part of the work of this Section. Additionally, furnish the following detailed information: a. Product data sheets with power requirements for all door operator and safety
components. 2. Certification: Manufacturer's written certification stating that doors, and all related items to
be furnished hereunder, meet or exceed the shielding performance requirements required by Physicist of Record’s report(s).
3. Manufacturer’s instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions and diagrams for components installed under other trades.
4. Warranty: Provide sample copies of manufacturers' actual warranties for all materials to be furnished under this Section, clearly defining all terms, conditions, and time periods for the coverage thereof.
5. Shop drawings: Large-scale design details of door construction, including elevations and sections indicating all materials, gages, reinforcing, and anchorage. a. Provide door elevations indicate seaming of optional applied veneer facing and
substrate, or plastic laminated facing when facing materials are required as work of this Section.
6. Welders’ certificates as specified under Article entitled “QUALITY ASSURANCE”, when requested.
B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 7000 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT . 1. Manufacturer’s ISO 9001:2008 field quality control reports of field inspections, including
manufacturer’s final punch list. 2. Manufacturer’s warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation for compliance
with shielding requirements based on Physicist of Record report(s). 3. Operation and Maintenance Data, including information on operating hardware,
lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain neutron / radiation shielding sliding door, frame, and related hardware products furnished under this Section from a single ISO 9001:2008 certified manufacturer.
B. Professionally designed and engineered. C. Welders’ Certificates: Utilize only qualified welders employed on the Work. Submit verification
that welders are AWS D1.1 and D1.4 qualified within the previous 12 months.
D. Installers: 1. Installers, foreman, and job supervisors for the work of this section shall be trained by,
and approved by, product manufacturer. Foreman and job supervisors shall be certified by manufacturer to have not less than 5 years experience in the installation of neutron / radiation protective doors.
2. All construction workers, foreman, and jobs supervisors for the work of this section shall have a minimum certification of 10 hours of OSHA training in occupational safety and health.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. General Contractor shall, prior to commencing the Work of this Section, conduct a pre-installation conference. Comply with requirements of Section 01 3400 - COORDINATION. Coordinate time of meeting to occur prior to installation of work under the related sections named below. 1. Required attendees: Architect, General Contractor’s Project Superintendent, Neutron /
Radiation Shielding Sliding Door Manufacturer’s Representative (as available by telephone conference call or webcast), and representatives of other related trades as directed by the Architect or Contractor, and representatives for installers of related work specified under the following Sections: a. Section 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. b. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL.
2. Agenda: a. Scheduling of concrete work and review of tolerance requirements. b. Review of staging, material storage locations, and temporary protection during
storage. c. Review of installation schedule and access requirements. d. Coordination of work by other trades. e. Installation procedures for door controls and ancillary equipment. f. Protection of completed Work. g. Establish working environmental (exposure, temperature, and humidity)
conditions to which Architect and Contractor must agree. h. Discuss process for Owner’s and manufacturer’s inspection and acceptance of
completed Work of this Section.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. General Contractor is responsible to coordinate schedule of neutron / radiation shielding sliding doors, provide sufficient sized access route to location of installation and to prevent delay of installation due to physical impediments. Any work involving the demolition and reconstruction of partitions, walls, floors, roofing, windows, or doors to place and install the work of this Section is the responsibility of the General Contractor.
B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective related trades responsible for field
installed electrical and auxiliary components and for setting of frames in concrete.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver items to the site until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect.
B. General Contractor is responsible to store materials under cover and in a manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
C. Inspect doors upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the refinished
items are equal in respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. General Contractor is responsible to take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work.
A. Submit the following warranties under provisions of Section 01 7000 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT: 1. If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or Designated
portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the contract documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. The period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after substantial completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the work. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives his or her right to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Specified Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on “Neutron / Radiation Shielding Bi-Parting Slide Door” as manufactured by NELCO, 2 Burlington Woods Dr, Suite 300, Burlington, MA 01803, www.nelcoworldwide.com (telephone 800-635-2613).
B. Alternative products (substitutions): Contractor must furnish appropriate and complete product data, proof of ISO 9001:2008 certification, worker OSHA certifications, and sample warranty with bid for the Architect to consider the substitutions as “equal” to the manufacturer, product specified and quality assurance requirements. Further additional information may be requested by the Architect for determination that the proposed product substitution is fully equal to the specified products. There is no guarantee that proposed substitutions will be approved, and the Contractor is hereby directed not to order any materials until said approval(s) are received in writing. 1. Requesting substitutions is at the Contractor’s own risk, with regard to uncompensated
delays of the Project. Time is required for sufficient review and for additional requests of information. Delays of work which result from substitution reviews and resubmissions are not grounds for additional time or cost change orders, and will not be considered by the Owner.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel: ASTM A 36/A36M Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. Lead sheet / brick: conforming to ASTM B-29, defect free. Uniform thickness(es) as required by Physicist of Record report(s).
C. Borated polyethylene: High-density polyethylene consisting of polyethylene and 5 percent boric
oxide in green color as required by Physicist of Record report(s).
D. Rigid Polyethylene Sheet: HDPE (Rigid High-Density Polyethylene) as required by Physicist of Record report(s).
E. Concrete as required by Physicist of Record report(s). F. Standard Door Finish is a graphic applied vinyl in 1 of 6 standard designs custom designs are
A. Structural Steel Supports: Structural steel complying with ASTM A36 for beams and rectangular tubing complying with ASTM A500. Engineer structural support system based upon the length, width, thickness, and weight of the door. 1. Maximum allowable deflection of overhead support beam under full loading: .015 inch
over length of beam. B. Linear Motion System: Block type linear motion system, upper side mounted dual rail system with
a minimum of four slide units (blocks). The blocks shall be mounted below a manufactured spacer plate which will allow for limited vertical height adjustment. Rails shall be mounted a main support beam and bolted with M-10 cap bolts as required. 1. Accuracy Class: High. 2. Lubrication: Pre-packed, high quality, lithium soap based grease containing extreme
pressure additives.
C. Door Operators: Electric, automatic door operator, with power opening and power closing features including one press wall switch and one Einstein™ Door Control Center. Four kill switches as necessary for use with power cutoff when radiation machines are in use shall also be provided. Operators shall conform to the following criteria: 1. General: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, self contained, surface mounted electro-
mechanical device mounted to the transom bar and shall include all required controls. a. Supply Voltage: 115 Volt AC, 50/60 Hertz, single phase. Provide in-line circuit
breakers, surge protection, line filters and EMI ferrites. b. Enclosure Type and Rating: NEMA 1 vented enclosure / control box.
2. Door Operator Performance Criteria (for doors weighing up to 30,000 pounds). a. Peak Operating Force (maximum): 700 pounds [3115kg]. b. Continuous Operating Force (maximum): 500 pound [2225kg]. c. Travel (maximum in one direction): 60 inches [152.4cm]. d. Rated Linear Speed (Maximum): 4.5 inches per second [11.43 cm/sec]. e. Rated Door Weight (Maximum): 30,000 pounds [13,620 kg]. f. Minimum Rated Cycles (openings and closings): 500,000. g. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model: Brookfield Industries, Inc., Thomaston, CT.,
Model “NB-4125”. 3. Function: Doors shall be activated on each side by a press wall switch. Operator to
function as a manual door closer in the event of any power loss. Manual operation is provided by disconnecting the operator from the door by operation of emergency hand crank.
4. Operation: The door is automatically opened or closed by pushing either the Einstein™ Door Control Center on the exterior of the vault or the two button switch located on the interior wall. a. Sequence of Operations on (Interior wall switch only has the open and stop
functions): 1) OPEN: When button is pushed, door will travel to the full open position.
The open button will override both the partial open and close buttons. When the open button is pushed, there will be a one-second delay before the door begins to open.
2) CLOSE: When button is pushed, door will travel to the full close position. The close button will not override any other buttons. The door must stop before it can close.
3) STOP: When button is pushed, door will stop from any current position along its path of travel.
4) PARTIAL OPEN: When button is pushed, door will travel to the preset partial open position and stop. Button will over-ride close and has a one second delay before opening.
D. Switches: Furnished and installed by door manufacturer, with field connections provided under Division 26 – ELECTRICAL.
E. Presence Detection System: Active infrared presence sensor providing two infrared curtains (one on each side of door) that shall detect stationary humans or objects within the sensing pattern. 1. General characteristics:
a. Infrared curtains, comprised of 2 rows of 24 focused infrared spots, shall have angle adjustment capability, and shall be capable of reaching within 2 inches (51 mm) of the face of the sliding door.
b. Sensor shall have a narrow or wide sensing pattern as determined by a user-selectable lens. Pattern size adjustments made by field masking a lens shall not be acceptable.
c. Sensor shall provide a 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) wide (wide lens) pattern when mounted at 7 feet (2.13 m), and a 3 feet 3 inches (1 m) wide pattern when using the narrow lens.
d. Sensor shall have a minimum self-adaptation time of 30 seconds that enables the sensor to learn permanently changed environments.
e. Sensor shall be configured in “fail-safe” mode to prevent door closure in event of device failure.
F. Infrared Light Curtain: Two sets of sensors will provide a curtain of light across the front and backside of the door opening that will detect any object passing through the opening from either side. 1. General characteristics:
a. Sensor shall be configured in “fail-safe” mode to prevent door closure in event of device failure.
b. Sensor shall be FCSA and CSA approved. c. Sensor shall be maintenance free. d. The sensor shall comply with ANSI !17.1/A17.5
G. Emergency Power Supply: Provide battery backup system for operator to allow for the emergency
opening of the door during loss of power supply. In an emergency situation the OPEN button shall operate in a "dead man" mode, requiring the OPEN button to be continuously pressed to operate the door. 1. Battery Backup: Two 12 VDC, 7.0 Ah battery with float chargers and test switch shall be
assembled in a grounded and vented NEMA 1 control box. 2. Location selected by customer.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. General: Refer to Drawings for location of doors. Comply with door sizes, thickness(es), and
details indicated on reviewed and approved shop drawings.
B. Construction: Full flush type, component thickness as indicated on Drawings and as specified in Physicist of Record’s report(s). 1. Doors shall be fabricated from perimeter frames of flat steel bar or plate complying with
ASTM A36. 2. Door faces: 3/8 inch thick steel plate complying with ASTM A36. 3. Stiles: 3/4 inch thick flat steel bar or plate. 4. Rails: 1 inch thick flat steel bar or plate. 5. Door Edges: Leading edges of each leaf will be constructed in a sine wave interlocking
fashion designed to maintain shielding integrity. 6. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard lead sheet / brick, borated polyethylene, and
concrete core.
C. Fabrication 1. Fabricate exposed faces of door panels, concealed stiffeners, and reinforcement from
either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel (at manufacturer's option). 2. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. 3. Doors shall be all welded construction, grind all welds smooth, and provide shop applied
A. Maximum variation for doors: Maximum diagonal distortion 1/4 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Provide temporary painted finish for corrosion protection during delivery, storage, and handling.
Sand surfaces of doors and related exposed steel components. Clean surfaces and apply one rolled, or spray coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer to all exposed to view surfaces.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and in compliance with these
specifications and applicable codes.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. During the operation of work of this Section, protect existing work against damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair all existing materials which are damaged by Work of this Section, to match original profiles and finishes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Doors, operators, switches, and related safety equipment shall be installed by the
manufacturer’s trained installers as indicated on the approved shop drawings. 1. Door speeds: Custom set by the manufacturer.
a. 6 - 10 seconds to fully open. b. 4 - 6 seconds to 24” partial open.
2. Electrical components and switches shall be connected to the electrical distribution system under Division 26 - ELECTRICAL.
3. Removal of temporary finish, preparation for painting and field painting shall be performed under Section 09 9100 - PAINTING.
3.04 INSTALLED TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from plumb or level: 1/4 inch [6 mm]. B. Maximum offset from true dimensional alignment (offset of jamb walls being parallel and aligned
with each other): 1/4 inch [6 mm].
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND ADJUSTING
A. Field inspection will be performed under the provisions of Section 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL. 1. An authorized representative of Door Manufacturer shall inspect installation and certify
that operating and safety hardware, and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified.
B. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door. 1. Ensure proper operation or function of every unit. 2. Replace faulty items or components which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and
smoothly as intended for the application made.
C. Physicist testing will be performed under separate contract with Owner.
A. Neutron / radiation shielding sliding doors must be operated by trained personal only. Manufacturer shall furnish Owner with prerecorded training demonstration on DVD disc, which will include a demonstration on door safety features and emergency operation. Additional manufacturer’s training assistance, if required, shall be made available by webcast or telephone conference call.
3.07 CLEANING A. General: Cleanup work area under provisions of Section 01 7010 – CLEANING UP
REQUIREMENTS 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools, equipment
and all rubbish and debris from the work area.
B. Daily clean work areas by disposing of debris, scraps, and lead. Vacuum floor surfaces with HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air filter) vacuum in compliance with OSHA Standard 1926.62.
C. After completion of the work of this Section, remove rubbish, tools and equipment, and clean all wall, partition, and floor areas free from deposits of lead, and other materials installed under this Section. Vacuum surfaces with HEPA vacuum in compliance with OSHA Standard 1926.62.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. General Contractor is responsible to protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 5200 –
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK.
END OF SECTION 08 3450
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 1
SECTION 08 4229 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of automatic entrances: 1. Exterior and interior, single slide and bi-parting, sliding automatic entrances, heavy duty.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 9005 – “JOINT SEALERS” for caulking to the extent not specified in this section.
2. Section 08 4200 - "ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES " for entrances furnished and installed separately.
3. Section 08 7100 - " HARDWARE" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 4. Section 08 8000 – “ GLASS & GLAZING” for materials and installation requirements of
glazing for automatic entrances. 5. Division 26 for electrical connections provided separately, including conduit and wiring,
for power to sliding automatic entrances.
1.03 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this
specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 325 – Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and
Systems.
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10: Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.5: Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
E. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM):
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. 2. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code.
G. International Code Council (ICC):
1. IBC: International Building Code
H. Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA), 1999:
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 2
I. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems
J. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
K. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA 701 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door.
B. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing, as appropriate. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding loads and thermal
movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F (Minus 34 deg C) to 130 deg F (54 deg C).
C. Opening-Force Requirements for Egress Doors: Force shall be adjustable; but, not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set swinging egress door panel(s) in motion.
D. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent door from closing.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work.
C. Color Samples for selection of factory-applied color finishes. D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Owner’s Manual. 2. Warranties.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative, with certificate issued by
AAADM, who is trained for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a manufacturing facility certified under ISO 9001.
C. Manufacturer shall have in place a national service dispatch center providing 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, emergency call back service.
D. Certifications: Automatic sliding door systems shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2. NFPA 101.
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 3
3. UL 325 listed. 4. IBC 2009 and 2012. 5. BOCA.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a
single manufacturer.
F. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
H. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: General Contractor shall verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Mounting Surfaces: General Contractor shall verify all surfaces to be plumb, straight and secure; substrates to be of proper dimension and material.
C. Other trades: General Contractor shall advise of any inadequate conditions or equipment. 1.09 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing automatic entrances to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Automatic Entrances shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion.
B. During the warranty period the Owner shall engage a factory-trained technician to perform service and affect repairs. A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form shall be submitted to the Owner.
C. During the warranty period all warranty work, including but not limited to emergency service, shall be performed during normal working hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
A. Manufacturer: Stanley Access Technologies; Dura-Guard™ 2000 Series sliding automatic entrances.
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 4
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Headers, stiles, rails, and frames: 6063-T6. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
B. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Performed under Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".
2.03 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors,
sidelights, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Sliding Automatic Entrances: 1. Single Slide Entrances:
a. Configuration: One sliding leaf and one full sidelight. b. Traffic Pattern: Two-way. c. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf only. d. Mounting: Between jambs.
2. Bi-Parting Entrances: a. Configuration: Two sliding leaves and two full sidelights. b. Traffic Pattern: Two-way. c. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only. d. Mounting: Between jambs.
2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum reinforced as required to
support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1 3/4 inch by 4 1/2 inch . 2. Concealed Fastening: Framing shall incorporate a concealed fastening pocket, and
continuous flush insert cover, extending full length of each framing member.
B. Stile and Rail Doors and Sidelights: Manufacturer's standard 1 ¾ inch (45 mm) thick glazed doors with extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. All corners, including intersections of stiles and rails or stiles and muntin bars, shall be welded secure. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-security aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3 ½ inch (95 mm) nominal width. 3. Bottom Rail Design: Minimum 10 inch (254 mm) nominal height.
C. Glazing: Furnished under Division 8 Section Glazing. All Glazing furnished under separate section shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) tempered for interior doors; 1 inch (25 mm) insulated, hermetically sealed for exterior doors.
D. Headers: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance door units to conceal door operators, carrier assemblies, and roller tracks. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting up to 220 lb (100 kg) per panel, up to four panels, over
spans up to 14 feet (4.3 m) without intermediate supports.
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 5
E. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment of at least 1/8 inch (3 mm); consisting of urethane with precision steel lubricated ball-bearing wheels, operating on a continuous roller track. Support panels from carrier assembly by load wheels and anti-riser wheels with factory adjusted cantilever and pivot assembly. Minimum two ball-bearing load wheels and two anti-rise rollers for each active leaf. Minimum load wheel diameter shall be 2 1/2 inch (64 mm); minimum anti-rise roller diameter shall be 2 inch (51 mm).
F. Thresholds: Manufacturer's standard thresholds as indicated below: 1. Continuous standard tapered extrusion square by bevel, with bevel to exterior.
(Door 100A) 2. Continuous standard tapered extrusion square by bevel, with bevel to interior.
(Door 100B). 3. Continuous standard square extrusion, for recessed installation. (Doors 113A &
128A) 4. All thresholds to conform to details and requirements for code compliance.
G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-
bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
H. Signage: Provide signage in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10.
2.05 DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
B. Electromechanical Operators: Two (2) self-contained overhead units, 1/4 horsepower minimum,
permanent-magnet DC motors with gear reduction drives, microprocessor controller; and encoder. 1. Operation: Power opening and power closing. 2. Operation: Power opening and power closing. 3. Features:
a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustable open check and close check speeds. c. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. d. Obstruction recycle. e. On/Off switch to control electric power to operator. f. Energy conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. g. Closed loop speed control with active braking and acceleration. h. Adjustable obstruction recycle time delay. i. Self-adjusting stop position. j. Self-adjusting closing compression force. k. Onboard sensor power supply. l. Onboard sensor monitoring. m. Optional Switch to open/Switch to close operation. n. Fire alarm interface, configurable to safely open or close the entrance on signal
from fire alarm system. 4. Mounting: Concealed. 5. Drive System: Synchronous belt type.
C. Electrical service to door operators shall be provided under Division 26 Electrical. Minimum
service to be 120 VAC, 5 amps.
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 6
2.06 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A Electrical Control System: Electrical control system shall include a microprocessor controller and
a high-resolution position encoder. The encoder shall monitor revolutions of the operator shaft and send signals to microprocessor controller to define door position and speed. 1. The high-resolution encoder shall have a resolution of not less than 1024 counts per
revolution. Systems utilizing external magnets and magnetic switches are not acceptable. 2. Electrical control system shall include a 24 VDC auxiliary output rated at 1 amp. 3. A single controller shall be capable of controlling up to 2 operators per entrance system.
B. Performance Data: The microprocessor shall collect, and store performance data as follows:
1. Counter: A non-resettable counter to track operating cycles. 2. Event Reporting: Unit shall include non-volatile event and error recording including
number of occurrences of events and errors, and cycle count of most recent events and errors.
3. LED Display: Display presenting the current operating state of the controller.
C. Controller Protection: The microprocessor controller shall incorporate the following features to ensure trouble free operation: 1. Automatic Reset Upon Power Up. 2. Main Fuse Protection. 3. Electronic Surge Protection. 4. Internal Power Supply Protection. 5. Resetable sensor supply fuse protection. 6. Motor Protection, over-current protection.
D. Soft Start/Stop: A “soft-start” “soft-stop” motor driving circuit shall be provided for smooth normal
opening and recycling. E. Obstruction Recycle: Provide system to recycle the sliding panels when an obstruction is
encountered during the closing cycle. If an obstruction is detected, the system shall search for that object on the next closing cycle by reducing door closing speed prior to the previously encountered obstruction location, and will continue to close in check speed until doors are fully closed, at which time the doors will reset to normal speed. If obstruction is encountered again, the door will come to a full stop. The doors shall remain stopped until obstruction is removed and operate signal is given, resetting the door to normal operation.
F. Programmable Controller: Microprocessor controller shall be field programmable.
1. The following parameters may be adjusted: a. Operating speeds and forces as required to meet specified ANSI/BHMA
standard. b. Adjustable and variable features specified. c. Reduced opening position.
2. Manual programming shall be available through local interface which has a two-digit display with a selection control including three push buttons.
2.07 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Combined Activation and Safety Sensors: Combined activation and safety sensors shall, in a single housing, detect motion and presence in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Motion shall be detected using K-band microwave technology, presence by active infrared reflection technology. 1. Mounting Height: Up to 11.5 feet (3.5 m) above finish floor 2. Temperature Range: Between -31°F and 131°F (-35°C to 55°C) in all environmental
conditions 3. Relays: Form C, 50V at 0.3A for both activation and safety. Hold time of less than 0.5
seconds.
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 7
4. Detection Pattern: When detection is made in the activation zone, and the entrance opens, the safety zone shall extend through the threshold on each side; creating an X-pattern. When activation and safety zones are cleared and the entrance closes the sensor will ignore the X-pattern safety zones.
5. Combined motion and presence sensors shall be equal to or better than X-Zone Sensor by Optex.
B. Photoelectric Beams: In addition to the threshold sensor include a minimum of two (2) doorway holding beams. Photoelectric beams shall be pulsed infrared type, including sender receiver assemblies for recessed mounting.
C. Presence Sensor Monitoring: Sliding automatic entrances control system shall include a means to verify the functionality of all active presence sensors in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. A detected fault shall cause automatic operation to cease until the fault is corrected.
2.08 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated.
B. Emergency Breakaway Feature: Provide release hardware that allows panel(s) to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any position in sliding mode. Maximum force to open panel shall be 50 lbf (222 N) according to ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of panel operator while in breakaway mode. 1. Emergency breakaway feature shall include at least one adjustable detent device
mounted, in the top of each sliding breakaway panel, and in the top and bottom of each non-sliding breakaway panel, to control panel breakaway force.
2. Wind Resistant Damper: Provide factory installed concealed gas dampers in sliding or non-sliding breakaway panel to protect door panels from wind damage. Dampers shall be designed to slow panel movement after breakout.
C. Control Switch: Provide manufacturer’s standard rotary switch mounted on the interior jamb to
allow for full control of the automatic entrance door. Controls to include, but are not limited to: 1. One-way traffic 2. Reduced Opening 3. Open/Closed/Automatic
D. Power Switch: Sliding automatic entrances shall be equipped with a two position On/Off rocker
switch to control power to the door.
E. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components complying with AAMA 701; made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
F. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard adjustable nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom.
G. Locking:
1. Door 100B shall be non-locking. 2. Doors 100A, 113A & 128A shall have access control locking with recessed panic devices
and electromagnetic locks which are wired to the access control system and the fire alarm system.
2.09 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricates automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes,
and thickness indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 8
2. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies.
1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard mechanical or welded joints. Provide sub-frames and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads.
2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.
3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce
hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.
D. Welding: Comply with AWS A5.10/A5.10M - Specification for Bare Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods.
E. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.
F. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated.
G. Hardware: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site.
2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designing finishes. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by Aluminum Association for designing finishes.
B. High-performance organic finish (AA-C12C42R1x), FLUOROPOLYMER 2- Coat System: 2-Coat
Thermocured System consisting of a Specially Formulated Inhibitive Primer and Fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70% Polyvinylidene Fluoride Resin by weight; comply with AAMA 2604 & 2605.
C. Color: Match aluminum windows. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support,
and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
SA1509A SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4229 - 9
B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to
location with anchorage for permanent support.
C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 26 Sections.
D. Glazing: Performed under Division 8 Section "Glazing" in accordance with sliding automatic entrance manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division7 Section "Joint Sealants".
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Services: Factory Trained Installer shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door
to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable ANSI standards.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for tight closure, and complying with requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.10.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section “Glazing”, for cleaning and maintaining glass.
END OF SECTION 08 4229
SA1509A HARDWARE 08 7100-1
SECTION 08 7100 - HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. B. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Products supplied but not installed under this section: a. Finish door hardware b. Master keying, grand master (include new cores and keying on all new locks) c. Templates d. Construction master keying e. Installed under SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1. SCHEDULED MATERIAL AND MANUFACTURER DESIGNATIONS: The numeric designation system in the schedule establishes acceptable design, size, weight, finish, function, or other quality of significance, which may be furnished by any manufacturer listed for that item under "Products".
2. HAND OF DOOR: a. The drawings show the swing or hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). b. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operations of the door swing as
shown. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section.
B. Submit the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SECTION 01 3400 –
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 1. DOOR, FRAME, AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
a. ORGANIZE BY "HARDWARE SETS": Use same "set" designations as specified. b. INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
1) Openings by door number 2) Locations 3) Door and frame sizes, materials, finishes, and construction details 4) Door and frame types 5) Door and frame details 6) Manufacturer's names 7) Catalog numbers 8) Keying information 9) Hardware Materials 10) Hardware finish(es) 11) All miscellaneous hardware items
2. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer's specifications for each manufacturer submitted C. Provide templates to each fabricator of doors and frames, as required for preparation to receive
hardware.
D. When requested by the Architect submit samples of specific hardware items requested, showing finish and function.
SA1509A HARDWARE 08 7100-2
E. Provide Owner with maintenance manual, adjustment instructions, and adjusting tool at time of substantial completion. (See Paragraph 1.06, below).
F. SUBSTITUTIONS:
1. Submit product data describing specified item(s) as well as proposed substitution. 2. ARCHITECT WILL NOT REVIEW PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION UNLESS SUBMITTED WITH
PRODUCT DATA FOR SPECIFIED ITEM(S). a. FAILURE TO SUBMIT COMPARATIVE SPECIFIED DATA WILL RESULT IN
REJECTION OF SUBMITTAL. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations.
B. STANDARDS: Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, specified or apply. 1. FIRE RATED OPENINGS: NFPA Standard Number 80 2. ANSI A156.1 thru A156.8, A156.12 thru A156.18 3. FS FF-H-106 4. FS FF-H-111 5. FS FF-H-116 6. FS FF-H-121 7. BHMA 8. HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY: ANSI A117.1
1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. PACKAGING AND MARKING OF HARDWARE:
1. Accomplish on a door-to-door, set-by-set basis 2. Sort and properly repackage 3. Mark with proper hardware set and door designations
B. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper location (shop or project)
for installation. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND ADJUSTING TOOLS:
1. At time of substantial completion 2. SUBMIT THE FOLLOWING:
a. All required wrenches and tools b. All installation literature c. Maintenance and adjustment information
3. LABEL BINDER: "Maintenance Manual for Finish Hardware" PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer's catalog numbers are used herein to establish the quality required.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be accepted subject to approval by the Architect. (See
SUBSTITUTIONS as described above in this section)
SA1509A HARDWARE 08 7100-3
2.02 MATERIALS A. FASTENERS:
1. Conform to published template standards 2. Provide Phillips, flat-head screws finished to match the hardware 3. Wherever possible utilized concealed fastening, except where no hardware is manufactured to
this requirement 4. ITEMS FOR APPLICATION TO METAL: Supply with machine screws 5. ITEMS FOR APPLICATION TO CONCRETE OR MASONRY: Supply with machine screw and
expansion shields 6. ITEMS FOR APPLICATION TO SOLID WOOD: Supply with wood screws 7. ITEMS OF APPLICATION TO WOOD DOORS WITH MINERAL CORE: Supply for through-
bolting application 8. EXPOSED FASTENINGS: Finish to match item fastened 9. METAL: Same as item fastened except:
a. METAL FOR ALUMINUM ITEMS: Brass or stainless steel
B. BUTT HINGES: 1. 1 1/2 pair per door except as indicated differently or required because of weight or application. 2. Non-removable, flat button with matching plugs 3. Heavy Weight, Concealed Bearings; Maintenance free 4. Lifetime Warranty 5. 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 full mortise, unless noted otherwise 4. MANUFACTURERS:
a. Typical: Stanley CB1901R b. Swing-Clear: Stanley CB268, or approved equal.
C. EXIT DEVICES:
1. Flat touch bar rim-type device, with strike 2. Yale 7100 & 7100F series, or approved equal
D. LOCKSETS, LATCHES, KNOBS AND BOLTS:
1. LOCKS-LATCH SETS: a. Equip with removable, interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts. Provide each lockset
with cylinders as specified in this section. b. Supply only temporary inserts for the construction period, remove and replace with final
locks when directed by the Owner's representative c. Comply with the Owner's representative instructions in master, and sub-mastering key
system d. Provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike
with a group of related locks 2. Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster
keys for each grandmaster system 3. Deliver keys to Owner's representative and obtain receipt for same 4. Provide one extra blank for each lock 5. MANUFACTURERS:
a. Best Access Systems b. Approved equal
6. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS: a. Best 93K Series, with interchangeable core. No substitutions. b. FUNCTIONS:
1. Wrought box strikes, with extended lip for latch bolts. 2. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts.
SA1509A HARDWARE 08 7100-4
F. DOOR CONTROL DEVICES: 1. OVERHEAD CLOSERS:
a. MANUFACTURERS: 1) Dorma 8900 Series (heavy duty, surface mounted closer) 2) Approved equal
b. SIZE: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for exposure condition c. Reinforce substrate as recommended d. Use parallel-arm closers, which are sized one size larger than for standard arm units e. Provide manufacturer's standard 25-year warranty.
2. STOPS OR BUMPERS: a. Provide grey rubber exposed resilient parts b. MANUFACTURERS:
1) Rockwood 2) Glynn Johnson 3) Ives 4) Stanley 5) Approved equal
c. FLOOR TYPE: GJ FB13 d. WALL TYPE: Rockwood 406 or 409
3. COORDINATORS: a. COR series by Glynn-Johnson, or approved equal. 4. SILENCERS:
a. 3 per single door frame, unless not permitted for fire rating b. COLOR: Gray c. Rockwood 608, or approved equal.
G. SMOKE/FIRE GASKETS
1. Compressible silicone 2. Antimicrobial. 3. PEMKO AM88 or approved equal 4. Provide at head and jambs of door/frame
H. CYLINDERS:
1. By lockset manufacturer, 6-pin cylinders, interchangeable core, figure 8 design. 2. ALL CYLINDERS: Key per Owner 3. FINISH: Match lockset 4. Provide at all locksets, exit devices, access doors, etc. 5. Provide keys as described under Paragraph 'D'
I. KICKPLATES/ARMORPLATES:
1. MANUFACTURERS: a. Ives 8400 Series b. Approved equal
2. .050" thick-brushed stainless steel 3. KICKPLATE SIZE: 10" x 2" less than door width 4. ARMORPLATE SIZE: 35" high x 2" less than door width
J. THRESHOLDS: 1. Extruded aluminum 2. SIZE AND CONFIGURATION: As shown on drawings 3. MANUFACTURERS:
a. Pemko 2005AV (unless noted otherwise) b. Zero c. National Guard d. Approved equal e. FINISH: Anodized aluminum; color to be selected
SA1509A HARDWARE 08 7100-5
K. WEATHERSTRIPPING: 1. Exterior doors:
a. Heads and jambs: 1) Continuous aluminum strip 2) Continuous flexible sponge silicone insert 3) Slotted holes for adjustment 4) Finish: clear anodized 5) Pemko 379CS
b. Door bottoms: 1) Aluminum with neoprene sweep
c. Door Top: 1) Pemko 3452APK
d. Weatherstrip: 1) Pemko 346C
L. FLUSH BOLTS
1. 1 Pair (top and bottom) Manual Bolts 2. Ives #262 or approved equal.
M. INTERLOCKING BATHROOM DOOR SYSTEM:
1. 4300 Communicating Bathroom by Dortronics Systems, Inc. or approved equal: a. (1) # 43211-CB Lock Controller and Power Supply b. (2) # 5276-GP9xE3 Emergency Release Push Button c. (2) # WR5276-HD29xLRGxCB Privacy Push Button Actuators d. (2) # 7201xL1R-HxCB Occupied LED Indicators e. (2) # 330xD Electric Strikes with Bold Monitor f. (2) # 1107xD Maglocks with Door Position Switch
2.03 FABRICATION A. Finish and base material designations are indicated in accordance with ANSI A156.18, or the nearest
traditional US Commercial finish.
B. BASE METALS: 1. Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated. 2. Use manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness. 3. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise
specified.
C. HARDWARE FINISHES: 1. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent
possible, and except as otherwise indicated. 2. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible. 3. Match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set for color and texture. 4. Provide quality of finish complying with manufacturer's standards.
a. In no case less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards
b. INCLUDE: 1) Thickness of plating (if any) 2) Composition 3) Hardness, etc.
5. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated.
6. TYPICAL FINISH: US26D - Brushed Chrome - verify with Owner 2.04 HARDWARE SETS – SEE DRAWINGS
SA1509A HARDWARE 08 7100-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. See SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY.
B. Furnish all hardware, auxiliary pieces and fasteners for a complete installation.
C. Furnish fasteners for THROUGH-BOLTING of all hardware on wood doors with mineral cores.
D. Provide for separation of dissimilar metals.
END OF SECTION 08 7100
SA1509A GLASS AND GLAZING 08 8000-1
SECTION 08 8000 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. Work supplied and installed: a. Clear Float Glass b. Clear Tempered Glass c. Fire-Rated Glass d. Insulating Glass f. Glazing & Accessories
B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1. WIND LOAD: 18 PSF in both directions or as specified in governing codes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4214: REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations. B. STANDARDS: Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent
requirements are shown, specified or apply. 1. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA).
a. "Glazing Manual" b. "Sealant Manual" c. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
2. PRIMARY GLASS: ASTM C 1036 3. INSULATION GLASS: ASTM E 774 4. INSULATION GLASS UNITS: ASTM E 6 P3 & P2, ASTM E546, and ASTM E576. 5. PRIMARY FLAT GLASS: Federal Specification FS DD-6-451D 6. TEMPERED, HEAT STRENGTHENED, CERAMIC-COATED SPANDREL GLASS: FS
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES.
B. Product Data: For each type of glass, submit manufacturer's data showing the salient characteristics of the glass and preassembled units (insulating glass).
C. Samples: Provide 12" x 23" samples of each type of glass.
SA1509A GLASS AND GLAZING 08 8000-2
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. PROTECTION: Protect all glass and glazing materials from damage due to carelessness and improper
setting during transportation, storage and installation. B. DELIVERY:
1. Deliver packaged materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers. 2. Do not remove labels from individual items until glazing materials have been installed and
approved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following:
1. GLASS PRODUCTS: a. Guardian Industries b. PPG Industries. c. Approved Equal.
2. GLAZING SEALANT: Tremco or approved equal. 3. GLAZING TAPE AND GASKETS: Tremco or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS A. SIZES:
1. Follow recommendations of manufacturer for edge clearances, tolerances. 2. THICKNESS: As shown or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by Glass Manufacturer
for application indicated. a. Provide thicknesses at exterior applications to withstand designated wind load in either
direction or as specified in governing codes. B. LABEL: Each and all lights of glass must bear manufacturer's label designating type and quality, or
affidavit that glass meets specification. C. GLASS TYPES:
G-1 CLEAR FLOAT: a. TYPE: I (Transparent, flat) b. CLASS: I (Clear) c. QUALITY: q3 (Glazing select) d. 1/4" thick, unless noted otherwise
a. CONDITION: A (uncoated). b. TYPE: I (transparent, flat). c. CLASS: I (clear). d. QUALITY: q3 (glazing select). e. Kind: FT (fully tempered). f. 1/4" thick, unless noted otherwise
G-3 FIRE-RATED GLASS (ALL GLASS IN FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES):
a. Pyrostop by Pilkington b. Complies with ASNI 297.1, CPSC 16, CFR1201, NFPA 251 & 252, UL 263, and ASTM
E119 and E152 c. Clear d. Thicknesses as required for stated fire rating.
1) Organically sealed panes enclosing hermetically sealed dehydrated air space 2) Space between glass planes: ½”, filled with Argon gas. 3) SEALING SYSTEM: Manufacturer's standard 4) SPACER MATERIAL: Manufacturer's standard 5) DESICCANT: Manufacturer's standard 6) CORNER CONSTRUCTION: Manufacturer's standard 7) EXTERIOR PANE: Tinted float (see Item 9, below)
a) COATING: - Durable, neutral-colored low-emissivity metallic - Second surface (interior face)
8) INTERIOR PANE: Tinted float (see Item 9, below) 9) Units shall be Guardian Glass SNX 62/27/Sunguard 15 20 #4, or approved equal a) Visual light transmission: 60% b) UV Transmission : 6% c) U-Value (winter night): 0.20 d) SHGC: 0.26
G-5 LOW EMISSIVITY – COATED TEMPERED INSULATED GLASS (Glass in exterior doors and sidelights): a. Same as G-4, except both panes are tempered.
D. GLAZING SEALANTS, TAPES AND ACCESSORIES:
1. GENERAL: a. COMPATIBILITY: Proven compatibility with adjacent materials making contact with
glazing materials including but not limited to: 1) Glass products. 2) Glazing channel substrates. 3) Insulation unit seals.
b. SUITABILITY: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1) Performance characteristics suitable for application indicated and conditions at
the time of installation. c. COLORS: To be selected by Architect.
2. SEALANT: a. FEDERAL SPECIFICATION: FS TT-S-0027E. b. DESCRIPTION: Two-part polysulfide. c. TYPE: M. d. GRADE: NS. e. GLASS: 25. f. USES: NT, M, G, A and, as applicable to use indicated, 0.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:
1. Follow recommendations and printed instruction of manufacturers of glass, sash, and glazing compounds.
2. Do not apply glazing compounds at temperatures below 40°F. 3. Design material and installation to resist a wind load of 20 psi at ground level without appreciable
deflection. 4. Set shims as recommended by glass and shim manufacturer. 5. Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required. 6. Install tempered glass in addition to above, to withstand normal impact loads expected for place
of use, without failure, including breakage of glass, failure of the sealants or gaskets to remain water-air-tight.
7. Provide correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established according to field-measured dimensions following glass manufacturer glass-bite recommendations.
SA1509A GLASS AND GLAZING 08 8000-4
B. GLAZING: 1. Trim glass accurately and true within proper clearances according to applicable standards. 2. Install all necessary clips, neoprene spacers, setting blocks and accessories required for proper
setting of glass. 3. Locate setting blocks in sill rabbet located 1/4 glass width in from each corner or as
recommended by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of sealant acceptable for heel bead use.
4. CUT AND APPLY TAPE: a. Locate joints in tape so as not to correspond with joints in sash. b. Adjust tape thickness to compensate for offset conditions. c. Pressure unite all joints and seal with sealant. d. Set tape parallel to sash at height to provide a slight bulge above sash or recessed 1/4"
where cap bead is required. 5. APPLY HEEL BEAD:
a. Provide 3/16" minimum bite and positive bond to sash. b. Provide full perimeter of sash.
6. Tempered glass is required in all doors and sidelights. 7. SPACERS:
a. Provide inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing.
b. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
8. EDGE BLOCKING: Provide in compliance with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
9. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece match others as nearly as possible.
10. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. 11. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 12. TOOLING:
a. Exposed surfaces of sealants. b. Provide substantial "wash" away from glass.
13. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
14. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement.
15. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and installs gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners.
16. Seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 17. Prevent exudation of sealant or compound, by forming voids, or installing filler rods in channel at
the heel of jambs and head. a. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. b. Install according to manufacturer's printed recommendations.
18. Do not leave voids in sill channels, unless required by the manufacturer's recommendations. 19. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and
glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated.
C. CURING: Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
SA1509A GLASS AND GLAZING 08 8000-5
3.02 CLEANING A. Maintain glass in reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not be damaged by
corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash-off) to deterioration of glazing materials and other work. B. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation,
and eliminate stains and discoloration. D. When directed, or just before the project is turned over to the Owner, remove stains, excess glazing
compound, protective tape and other foreign material from both surfaces of glass installed under this Contract, and wash and polish glass on both sides.
E. Final cleaning includes exterior and interior glass including mirrors and the surfaces of doors, window,
and walls adjacent thereto.
END OF SECTION 08 8000
SA1509A GYPSUM BOARD 09 2116-1
SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. B. SUPPLY AND INSTALL:
1. Gypsum board a. Type X b. Type X mold and moisture resistant
2. Trim 3. Accessories 4. Fasteners required to complete work of this section 5. Joint compound
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. See SECTION 07 2100 for building insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied or installed under this section. C. PRODUCT DATA:
1. MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION OF: a. Gypsum board products b. Adhesives c. Accessories
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. See SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
B. STANDARDS:
1. Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, are specified, or apply. a. FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS:
1) ASTM E119 2) UL Fire Resistance Design Manual 3) SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS: ASTM E84
b. ANSI A97.1" Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Wallboard" c. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: ASTM C840 d. GYPSUM BOARD: ASTM C36, C630, & C1396 e. JOINT TAPE: ASTM C475 f. JOINT COMPOUND: ASTM C475 g. GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY: GYPSUM ASSOCIATION GA-505, ASTM C11 h. STEEL DRILL SCREWS: ASTM 1002 i. ACCESSORIES: ASTM 1047 j. SPOT GROUT: ASTM C475
C. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES:
1. Do not exceed 1/8" in 8'-0" variation from plumb or level in any exposed line or surface. 2. Do not exceed 1/16" variation between abutting edges or ends.
SA1509A GYPSUM BOARD 09 2116-2
3. Shim as required 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products and materials in original unopened packages and bundles with manufacturer's labels
attached.
B. Handle materials with care to prevent damage to ends, edges and surfaces.
C. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads, trim, track and studs.
D. Protect gypsum board and metal products and materials from moisture and direct sunlight. 1. Store indoors and off floor 2. Store gypsum board in several locations to avoid overloading floor system 3. Remove broken, damaged and unlabeled products and materials from project site immediately 4. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature of 55°F. minimum in building
1. For minimum period of 24 hours prior to start of installation 2. During and after installation
B. Provide proper regulated ventilation for adhesive and joint treatment application. 1.07 WARRANTY A. During the period of the warranty, patch and refinish defective drywall work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of Georgia-Pacific and U.S. Gypsum are used for quality and configuration.
B. Equivalent of National Gypsum, Gold Bond, U. S. Gypsum, or Domtar Gypsum Co. are acceptable. 2.02 MATERIAL A. GYPSUM BOARD:
1. Tapered edge 2. TYPE:
a. TYPE X: 5/8” USG “Sheetrock” fire-code cord gypsum panels, or approved equal, for use in all areas except bathrooms, environmental services rooms, and within 4’ of sinks and lavatories.
b. Mold & Moisture Resistant, TYPE X: USG “Sheetrock” Brand Tough Gypsum Panels, Type X, or approved equal, for use in bathrooms (for walls not receiving ceramic tile), environmental services rooms, and within 4’ of sinks and lavatories. 1) THICKNESS: 5/8", unless noted otherwise 2) Complies with ASTM C1396 and C630 3) Non-combustible Gypsum Core per ASTM E136 4) Average Water Absorption less than 5% by weight per ASTM C473 5) Panel Score of 10 per ASTM D3273
B. GYPSUM BOARD FASTENERS:
1. SCREWS: a. U.S.G. Self-drilling, self-tapping, drywall screw b. TYPES:
1) GYPSUM BOARD TO SHEET METAL: Type S
SA1509A GYPSUM BOARD 09 2116-3
2) GYPSUM BOARD TO GYPSUM BOARD: Type G 3) GYPSUM BOARD TO WOOD: Type W
c. LENGTH: As recommended by gypsum board manufacturer d. Bugle head e. Corrosion resistant
C. ACCESSORIES:
1. METAL CORNERBEAD: Dur-A-Bead #103, 1 1/4" x 1 1/3" 2. METAL EDGE TRIM: Galvanized 200A or 200B
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and inspect all surfaces and supports to which gypsum board is to be applied.
B. Remedy all conditions, which will jeopardize satisfactory finish prior to installation of gypsum board.
C. Commencement of work under this section constitutes acceptance of responsibility for correction of any
defects in the finish work due to faulty sub-surface conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous units fastened to building structure not more
than 24" o.c. and to ceiling runners. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:
1. Use gypsum board of maximum lengths to minimize end joints 2. END JOINTS: Stagger and locate as far as possible from center of partitions and ceilings 3. Do not locate end joints on opposite sides of partition on same stud 4. Do not align joints at openings with edges of openings 5. Neatly fit ends and edges; butt without forcing 6. FASTENERS SPACING: As recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. 7. MINIMUM TEMPERATURE IN SPACE: 50°F
a. PREFERABLE MINIMUM: 70°F 8. Protect gypsum board from wetting 9. Butt all gypsum board joints loosely together
a. Do not place butt ends against tapered edge b. Maximum allowable gap at end joints: 1/4"
10. Mix and use all adhesive and joint finishing compounds in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions a. Mix only enough at one time to be used up during recommended pot life of compound
11. Do not install vertical joints within 8" of external corners of windows, doors or other such openings B. SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION:
1. CEILINGS: Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angle to framing. 2. PARTITIONS OR WALL FURRING: Apply gypsum board with long dimension horizontally. 3. Attach to metal framing and furring with screws driven with positive clutch electric screwdriver. 4. Apply ends and edges of gypsum board over framing members, except for treated joints at right
angles to framing members. C. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES:
1. CORNER BEADS:
SA1509A GYPSUM BOARD 09 2116-4
a. Install at external corners, both vertical and horizontal. b. Fasten 9" on center on both flanges along entire length.
2. EDGE BEADS: a. Install where gypsum board terminates against masonry or other dissimilar material. b. Fasten 12" on center along entire length.
3. CONTROL JOINTS FORMED BY INSTALLING TWO EDGE BEADS BACK TO BACK: a. SPACING: 1/8" apart
b. Securely attach c. Support positively
D. JOINT TREATMENT:
1. Treat field joints, fasteners, corners and trim, applied and finished in strict accordance with printed instruction of manufacturer of gypsum board, using not less than 3 coats.
2. Fill, tape and finish field joints and internal corners. 3. Fill and finish fastener heads and metal trim. 4. Feather out finish onto panel and sand smooth.
a. Flush with face of gypsum board. b. Free from ridges, high spots and depressions.
E. FINISH:
1. Leave surface perfectly smooth and clean to accept finishes by others. 2. JOINTS AND SCREWS: Completely concealed. 3. If necessary, re-sand joints and screw finish and add additional coats as directed.
F. MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Consider as part of this specification as if written herein. 2. Where these specifications vary from the manufacturers, the manufacturer's specifications shall
remain in force. 3.04 PATCHING AND CLEANING A. Patch defects and install additional fasteners where required.
1. WHERE FACE PAPER IS PUNCTURED: a. Drive new fastener approximately 1 1/2" from defective fastener. b. Remove defective fastener.
2. Fill damaged surfaces with joint compound. 3. Repair ridging as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. 4. Fill cracks with joint compound and finish smooth and flush.
B. Clean surfaces of compound, adhesive and all foreign material, leave ready for finishing.
C. Clean up and remove protective material from project when no longer required.
D. Leave work clean; remove all rubbish resulting from gypsum board operations.
END OF SECTION 09 2116
SA1509A METAL SUPPORT SYSTEM 09 2216-1
SECTION 09 2216 - METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B. SUPPLY AND INSTALL: 1. METAL FRAMING - Non-load bearing framing 2. Scaffolding 3. Fasteners required to complete work of this section 4. Metal furring channels (wall mounted) 5. Tying wire
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations.
B. STANDARDS: Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, specified, or apply. 1. FRAMING: ASTM A 446 2. HOT DIP GALVANIZING: ASTM A 525 G 60 3. SCREWS: ASTM C 1002, ASTM C 954 4. INSTALLATION: ASTM 754
C. TOLERANCES: Deflection of complete ceiling suspension system including hangers and fastening
devices supporting ceiling, light fixtures and ceiling grilles, maximum 1/360 of the span. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on all materials to be provided under this section. B. Comply with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply products from the following:
1. U.S. Gypsum Company 2. Approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS A. METAL STUDS:
1. Screw type. Non-load bearing steel channel studs 2. SIZES: As indicated 3. Roll form from galvanized steel sheet, minimum 20-gauge (0.0329" minimum thickness) 4. FLANGES: Minimum 1 5/8" wide, knurled or ribbed 5. WEBS: Provide with openings for pipe and conduit 6. FLOOR AND CEILING RUNNING TRACK: Channel type, galvanized 20 ga. steel
B. CHANNELS - FOR USE WITH SUSPENSION SYSTEM AND FOR WALLS:
1. Cold rolled steel with factory applied rust resistant paint or galvanized. 2. Use only galvanized at soffit construction.
SA1509A METAL SUPPORT SYSTEM 09 2216-2
3. Roll form from 16 gauge steel sheet. 4. MINIMUM WEIGHT PER 1,000 LINEAL FEET:
a. 3/4" channels 300 pounds b. 1 1/2" channels 500 pounds c. 2" channels 590 pounds
C. FURRING CHANNELS - HAT SHAPED FOR USE WITH SUSPENSION SYSTEM:
1. Roll form from galvanized steel sheet. 2. GAUGE: 20-gauge minimum (0.0329" minimum thickness) 3. DEPTH: 7/8" 4. FACE: Knurled or ribbed
1. As recommended by manufacturer, for securing various components. 2. MINIMUM ENGAGEMENT OF SCREW: 1/4" of threads showing on inside.
F. CLIPS: As recommended by manufacturer, for use of components
G. TIE WIRE: 16-gauge (minimum) galvanized, annealed wire
H. METAL STRAPPING: 6" high x 16 gauge sheet steel
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. ALL CUTS: Clean and square without bent edges.
B. Brace all construction as necessary to provide stable, non-deforming, and minimum deflecting
construction.
C. Provide framing and backing to receive fasteners required to support fixtures and equipment secured to wall.
D. Do not install rusted material. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. METAL STUDS, FURRING, STRAPPING, AND ACCESSORIES:
1. Align metal track, at floor and ceiling or overhead structure, accurately to partition layout. a. Align floor and ceiling tracks. b. Fasten to floor with concrete stud nail or power driven fasteners at maximum 24" o.c. c. Fasten to structure overhead either directly or with diagonal bracing.
2. Install studs vertically in top and bottom track: a. SPACING: Maximum 16" o.c. b. Full height 1-piece studs, plumb and align. c. Fasten studs to top and bottom track with screw attachments both sides of studs. d. Brace studs with horizontal steel channel stiffeners on inside of partition spaced
maximum 4'-6" vertically, secured with wire ties or screws.
SA1509A METAL SUPPORT SYSTEM 09 2216-3
e. STUDS ABUTTING UNDERSIDE OF STEEL FRAMING, STEEL DECKING, MISCELLANEOUS STEEL OR OTHER RIGID CONSTRUCTION SUBJECT TO DEFLECTION: Cut studs short at top and fasten to lower track of the double nesting track assembly.
3. FRAMING AROUND DOORS AND OTHER OPENINGS: a. JAMBS: Box type consisting of 2 studs full height of partition:
1) Attach to frame with clips spaced maximum 3'-0" o.c. or as detailed. 2) Secure all connections and at top and floor with screws.
b. HEAD FRAME: 1) Form of runner track with mitered head spliced to jambs. 2) Secure to jambs with 2 screws both sides.
c. JACK STUDS: 1) SPACING: Maximum 16" o.c. over opening. 2) Form head frame to top of partition. 3) Secure with screws both sides of studs.
d. REINFORCE JACK STUDS WITH STEEL CHANNEL HORIZONTAL STIFFENER: 1) Locate not more than 6" above head frame. 2) Extend 2 stud spaces beyond jambs on each side. 3) Securely attach to each jack stud and full height stud with wire ties or screws.
4. Form corners and intersections of partitions with 3 studs. a. Place studs forming internal corners 2" from point of partition intersection.
5. Provide headers above and below framed wall openings with jack studs above and below openings maximum 16" o.c. a. Attach with screws both sides at top and bottom of studs.
6. Provide 3 rows of metal strapping run horizontally along studs at each monitor location; coordinate exact locations with Owner. Secure each strapping to each stud with 2 screws.
7. Provide vertical vinyl “V’ expansion joints in any straight wall exceeding 20’ in length; located at 20’ o.c. (max.).
B. SUSPENDED CEILINGS:
1. HANGERS: a. Securely attach to construction above by approved method to insure development of full
hanger strength. b. SPACING: Maximum 3'-0" o.c. in direction of main runner c. Locate hanger within 6" of ends of main runner channels. d. Attach lower end of wire to main runner channels by saddle tie to develop full hanger
strength and prevent twisting and turning of runners. e. Twist wire 3 times around itself.
2. MAIN RUNNER CHANNELS: a. SIZE: 1 1/2" channels. b. SPACING: Maximum 4'-0" o.c. (maximum 2'-0" o.c. for fire rated construction) c. Install main runner channels within 6" of parallel walls. d. Provide 1" clearance between ends of runners and abutting walls and partitions. e. Install straight, true to line, level and at proper elevation. f. SPLICES IN CHANNELS:
1) Nest and overlap 12" minimum. 2) Tie near each end of splice with double loop of 16-gauge tie wire.
3. FURRING CHANNELS (cross furring): a. SPACING: 16" o.c. (maximum). b. Wire tie cross furring to main runner channels with saddle tie of wire specified or with
approved clips. c. Provide cross furring channel within 6" of parallel walls. d. Provide 1" clearance between ends of cross furring channels and abutting walls and
partitions.
SA1509A METAL SUPPORT SYSTEM 09 2216-4
e. SPLICES IN CROSS FURRING CHANNELS: 1) Hat shaped channels. 2) Nest and lap 8" minimum. 3) Wire tie near each end of splice with double loop of 16-gauge tie wire. 4) Make splices in ceiling furring directly under main runner channels.
4. In no case let main runner channels or cross-furring channels into or come in contact with masonry, concrete, columns, beams, walls or partitions.
END OF SECTION 09 2216
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-1
SECTION 09 3000 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit the following in accordance with the SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1. SAMPLES: a. Sample panels of each type and color of tile and grout proposed for use. b. SIZE: 12" x 12". c. Expansion joint back up and sealant.
2. CERTIFICATION: Master Grade Certificate signed by both tile manufacturer and subcontractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations.
B. STANDARDS: 1. Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent
requirements are shown, specified, or apply.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A10.20-1988 Safety Requirements for Ceramic Tile, Terrazzo, and Marble Works
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C627-93(R1999) Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson-
Type Floor Tester C954-00 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board on Metal Plaster
Base to Steel Studs from 0.033 in (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in (2.84 mm) in thickness
C979-99 Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete C1002-01 Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Panel Products C1027-99 Determining “Visible Abrasion Resistance on Glazed Ceramic Tile” C1028-96 Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other
Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull Meter Method
Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA): 2001 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation A108.1-1999 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland Cement Mortar A108.4-1999 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable
Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-2
A108.5-1999 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
A108.6-1999 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy
A108.10-1999 Installation of Grout in Tilework A108.11-1999 Interior Installations of Cementitious Backer Units A118.1-1999 Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar A118.3-1999 Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy
and Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive A118.4-1999 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar A118.6-1999 Ceramic Tile Grouts A118.9-1999 Cementitious Backer Units A118.10-1999 Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic
Tile and Dimension Stone Installation A136.1-1999 Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile A137.1-1988 Ceramic Tile
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with grade seals unbroken and
labels intact. B. Keep tile cartons dry. C. Store properly; cover at all times to prevent staining or damage from weather and construction
operations. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Maintain temperature at 50°F. minimum during tilework and for 7 days after completion. 2. Minimum temperature maintained as recommended by manufacturer for bonding and grouting
materials and as per TCA requirements. 3. Protect adjoining surfaces before tile work is started. 4. Protect tile work during installation. 5. NO TRAFFIC ALLOWED ON FLOOR TILE: Protect with plywood or boards.
1.06 MAINTENANCE A. EXTRA MATERIALS: Provide Owner with 2% of each tile used in clear marked carton for emergency
use. Extra materials shall be full, unused tiles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CERAMIC TILE:
1. See drawings for tile sizes, colors, and manufacturers. 2. Provide all necessary trim shapes (bullnose at outside corners, cove bases, special inside and
outside corners, and bullnose at transitions to thinner tiles or different materials). 3. Comply with ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade.
2.02 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS (tile backer board) A. Use in toilet rooms and all other walls to receive ceramic tile, behind all wall and base tile.
B. ANSI A118.9 minimum 11 mm (7/16") thick.
C. Use cementitious backer units in maximum available lengths.
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-3
D. Backer unit meet or exceed the following additional physical properties:
Property Test Method Value Water absorption ASTM C948 Less than 20% by weight
2.03 JOINT MATERIALS FOR CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS A. Reinforcing Tape: Vinyl coated woven glass fiber mesh tape, open weave, 50 mm (2") wide. Tape with
pressure sensitive adhesive backing will not be permitted.
B. Tape Embedding Material: Latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.
C. Joint material, including reinforcing tape, and tape embedding material, shall be as specifically recommended by the backer unit manufacturer.
2.04 FASTENERS A. Screws for Cementitious Backer Units.
1. Standard screws for gypsum board are not acceptable. 2. Minimum 11 mm (7/16") diameter head, corrosion resistant coated, with washers. 3. ASTM C954 for steel 1 mm (0.033") thick.
B. Washers: Galvanized steel, 13 mm (1/2") minimum diameter. 2.05 SETTING MATERIALS AND WATERPROOFING FOR CERAMIC TILE A. (ELASTOMERIC) WATERPROOF MEMBRANE:
1. Two-part, liquid applied, waterproof membrane consisting of a liquid rubber and reinforcing fabric 2. SERVICE RATING: Extra-heavy per ASTM C627-87 3. Designed to bond with existing concrete and latex thin-set mortar (per ANSI A118.4) 4. Double-ply reinforcing fabric at corners (wall-to-wall, floor-to-wall) and drain 5. HYDROSTATIC RESISTANCE: 120 psi (min.) per ASTM D751 (modified) 6. WATER PERMEANCE: Excellent (e) per Fed. Spec. TT-C-00555 (modified) 7. WATER VAPOR PERMEANCE: 2.88 perms (max.) per ASTM E 96-80 (inverted water method) 8. ELONGATION: 20 B 30% per ASTM D751-89; 17.1 9. BREAKING STRENGTH: 2400 psi (min.) per ASTM D751-89; 16.1 10. NOMINAL THICKNESS: .020" (0.51 mm) per LIL 1013-92 11. No volatile compounds 12. Laticrete 9235 waterproof membrane, or approved equal
B. SETTING MATERIALS:
1. Up to 5/8" thick 2. Service rating: extra heavy 3. Compressive strength: 5000 psi (min.) per ANSI A 118.4 4. Hardness: 50 - 60 (min.) per ASTM D 2240, D-scale, 72 hours 5. Shear bond strength: 500 psi (min.) per ANSI A 118.4 6. Laticrete 4237 latex thin-set mortar admix with Laticrete 211 Crete filler powder, or approved
equal C. Capable of being applied in layers up to 50 mm (two inches) thick, being brought to a feather edge, and
being trowelled to a smooth finish D. Ready for use in 48 hours after application 2.06 GROUTING MATERIALS A. COLORING PIGMENTS:
1. Pure mineral pigments, limeproof and non-fading, complying with ASTM c979. 2. Coloring pigments shall be added to the grout by the manufacturer.
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-4
3. Job colored grout is not acceptable. 4. Use is required in commercial portland cement grout, dry-set grout, and latex-portland cement
grout. B. PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT:
1. ANSI A118.6 2. Use one part white portland cement to one part white sand passing a number 30 screen. 3. Color additive not permitted
C. COMMERCIAL PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT: ANSI A118.6 color as indicated.
D. DRY-SET GROUT: ANSI A118.6 color as indicated.
E. LATEX-PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT: ANSI A118.6 color as indicated.
1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and narrower. 2. Sanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and wider.
2.07 PATCHING AND LEVELING COMPOUND A. Portland cement base, polymer-modified, self-leveling compound, manufactured specifically for
resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable. B. Have not less than the following physical properties:
1. Compressive strength - 25 mpa (3500 psi) per ASTM C109/C109M. 2. Flexural strength - 7 MPA (1000 psi) per ASTM C348 (28 day value).
C. Capable of being applied in layers up to 36 mm (1 1/2 inches) thick without fillers and up to 100 mm (four
inches) thick with fillers, being brought to a feather edge, and being trowelled to a smooth finish. D. Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for application and substrate condition. E. Ready for use in 48 hours after application. 2.08 MARBLE A. Soundness Classification in accordance with MIA Design Manual III Groups B. Thresholds:
1. Group A, minimum abrasive hardness (Ha) of 10.0 per ASTM C241. 2. Honed finish on exposed faces. 3. 1/2" Thick x 5 7/8" x full width of door opening 4. Bevel edges of threshold 1" horizontal to 1/4" vertical
5. One piece full width of door opening. Notch thresholds to match profile of door jambs
2.09 WATER A. Clean, potable and free from salts and other injurious elements to mortar and grout materials. 2.10 CLEANING COMPOUNDS A. Specifically designed for cleaning masonry and concrete and which will not prevent bond of subsequent
tile setting materials including patching and leveling compounds and elastomeric waterproofing membrane and coat.
B. Materials containing acid or caustic material not acceptable.
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-5
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. TILE CLEANER:
1. Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer 2. For application indicated 3. AS RECOMMENDED BY:
National Tile Promotion Federation 112 North Alfred Street Alexandria, VA 22134
or
Ceramic Tile Institute 700 N. Virgil Ave. Los Angeles, CA 90029
B. GROUT SEALER: 1. Miracle Sealants Company, 511 Impregnator Sealer 2. Or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature of work areas at not less than 16°C (60°F), without interruption, for not less
than 24 hours before installation and not less than three days after installation.
B. Maintain higher temperatures for a longer period of time where required by manufacturer's recommendation and ANSI Specifications for installation.
C. Do not install tile when the temperature is above 38°C (100°F)
D. Do not install materials when the temperature of the substrate is below 16°C (60°F)
E. Do not allow temperature to fall below 10°C (50°F) after fourth day of completion of tile work 3.02 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE A. Variation in plane of sub-floor, including concrete fills leveling compounds and mortar beds:
1. Not more than 1 in 500 (1/4" in 10') from required elevation where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used.
2. Not more than 1 in 1000 (1/8" in 10') where dry-set Portland cement, and latex-Portland cement mortar setting beds and chemical-resistant bond coats are used.
B. Variation in Plane of Wall Surfaces:
1. Not more than 1 in 400 (1/4" in 8') from required plane where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used.
2. Not more than 1 in 800 (1/8" in 8') where dry-set or latex-Portland cement mortar or organic adhesive setting materials is used.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Floors and Walls:
1. Prepare surface by grinding, chipping, self-contained power blast cleaning, or other suitable mechanical methods to completely expose uncontaminated concrete surfaces with elevations as noted in the drawings. Do not expose steel reinforcing.
2. Clean and level concrete slabs to receive new setting bed and waterproof membrane.
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-6
3. Steam cleaning or the use of acids and solvents for cleaning will not be permitted. B. Patching and Leveling:
1. Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required plane with patching and
leveling compound. a. Thickness of compound as required to bring finish tile system to elevation shown. b. Float finish except finish smooth for elastomeric waterproofing.
3. Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry wall surfaces that are out of required plane.
4. Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.
5. After floor mat frame is installed, provide level screed for floor mat. Coordinate closely with floor mat manufacturer to provide proper depth of recess.
C. Mix and install Latex Thin-Set mortar in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Mortar Fills For Slope To Drain:
1. Install mortar fill in toilet rooms as indicated on drawings. Slope to drains not less than 1 in 200 (1/16" per foot)
2. Screed for slope to drain and float finish. 3. Cure mortar fill for not less than seven days. Do not use curing compounds or coatings. 4. Mix and install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.04 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS A. Remove polyethylene wrapping from cementitious backer units and separate to allow for air circulation.
Allow moisture content of backer units to dry down to a maximum of 35 percent before applying joint treatment and tile.
B. Install in accordance with ANSI A108.11 except as specified otherwise.
C. Install units horizontally or vertically to minimize joints with end joints over framing members. Units with rounded edges; face rounded edge away from studs to form a V joint for joint treatment.
D. Secure cementitious backer units to each framing member with screws spaced not more than 200 mm (8") on center and not closer than 13 mm (1/2") from the edge of the backer unit or as recommended by backer unit manufacturer. Install screws so that the screw heads are flush with the surface of the backer unit.
E. Where backer unit joins shower pans or waterproofing, lap backer unit over turned up waterproof system.
Install fasteners only through top one-inch of turned up waterproof systems.
F. Do not install joint treatment for seven days after installation of cementitious backer unit.
G. Joint Treatment: 1. Fill horizontal and vertical joints and corners with latex-Portland cement mortar. Apply fiberglass
tape over joints and corners and embed with same mortar. 2. Leave 6 mm (1/4") space for sealant at lips of tubs, sinks, or other plumbing receptors.
3.05 MARBLE A. Secure thresholds and stools in position with minimum of two stainless steel dowels. B. Set in dry-set Portland cement mortar or latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat. C. Set threshold to finish 1/4" above ceramic tile floor unless shown otherwise, with bevel edge joint top flush
with adjacent floor similar to TCA detail TR611-02.
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-7
3.06 CERAMIC TILE - GENERAL A. Comply with ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic
Tile" applicable to methods of installation.
B. Comply with TCA Installation Guidelines
C. Installing Mortar Beds for Floors: 1. Install mortar bed to not damage cleavage or waterproof membrane; 32 mm (1 1/2") minimum
thickness. 2. Install floor mortar bed reinforcing centered in mortar fill. 3. Screed finish to level plane or slopes to drains where shown, float finish.
4. For thin set systems cure mortar bed not less than seven days. Do not use curing compounds or
coatings. 5. For tile set with Portland cement paste over plastic mortar bed coordinate to set tile before mortar
bed sets. D. Setting Beds or Bond Coats:
1. Where recessed or depressed floor slabs are filled with Portland cement mortar bed, set ceramic mosaic floor tile in either Portland cement paste over plastic mortar bed or latex-Portland cement mortar over cured mortar bed except as specified otherwise.
2. Set floor tile in latex-Portland cement mortar (acrylic type) over elastomeric waterproof membrane where noted in 3.03C.
3. Set wall tile installed over tile backer board in latex-Portland cement mortar. 4. Set trim shapes in same material specified for setting adjoining tile.
E. Workmanship:
1. Lay out tile work so that no tile less than one-half full size is used. Make all cuts on the outer edge of the field.
2. Set tile firmly in place with finish surfaces in true planes. Align tile flush with adjacent tile unless shown otherwise.
3. Form intersections and returns accurately. 4. Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface. 5. Cut edges of tile abutting penetrations, finish, or built-in items:
a. Fit tile closely around electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and fittings, so that plates, escutcheons, collars and flanges will overlap cut edge of tile.
b. Seal tile joints water tight as specified in Section 07 9005, JOINT SEALERS, around electrical outlets, piping fixtures and fittings before cover plates and escutcheons are set in place.
6. Completed work shall be free from hollow sounding areas and loose, cracked or defective tile. 7. Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned. 8. Floors:
a. Extend floor tile beneath casework and equipment, except those units mounted in wall recesses.
b. In areas where floor drains occur, slope to drains where shown. 9. Base:
a. Cover walls and partitions, including pilasters and furred areas, from floor to approximately 6" AFF.
10. Joints: a. Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width unless shown
otherwise. Align joints of floor and base tile. b. Make joints 2 mm (1/16") wide for glazed wall tile and mosaic tile work.
3.07 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLED WITH PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR A. Mortar Mixes For Floor, Wall And Base Tile (including Showers): ANSI A108.1.
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-8
B. Installing Wall and Base Tile: ANSI A108.1, except as otherwise specified. C. Installing Floor Tile: ANSI A108.1, except as otherwise specified. Slope mortar beds to floor drain a
minimum of 1 in 100 (1/8" per foot). 3.08 THIN SET CERAMIC TILE INSTALLED WITH DRY-SET PORTLAND CEMENT AND LATEX-
PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR A. Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.5, except as otherwise specified.
B. Slope tile work to drains not less than 1 in 100 (1/8" per foot). 3.09 THIN SET CERAMIC TILE INSTALLED WITH ORGANIC ADHESIVE A. Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.4. 3.10 GROUTING A. Grout Type and Location:
1. Grout for unglazed mosaic floor and base tile: Portland cement grout, latex-Portland cement grout, dry-set grout, or commercial Portland cement grout.
B. Workmanship:
1. Install and cure grout in accordance with the applicable standard. 2. Portland Cement grout: ANSI A108.10 a. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A108.6 3. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.5 and in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions. 4. Dry-set grout: ANSI A108.5 5. After curing, apply grout sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.11 JOINT SEALERS A. Rake out joints for installation of sealant. Sealant is specified in SECTION, 07 9005, JOINT SEALERS. B. At expansion joints, rake out joint full depth of tile and setting bed and mortar bed. C. Rake out grout at joints between tile and at toe of base and where shown not less than 6 mm (1/4") deep. 3.12 CLEANING A. Thoroughly sponge and wash tile. Polish glazed surfaces with clean dry cloths.
B. Methods and materials used shall not damage or impair appearance of tile surfaces.
C. The use of acid or acid cleaners on glazed tile surfaces is prohibited.
D. Clean tile grouted with commercial Portland cement grout and tile set in elastomeric bond coat as
recommended by the manufacturer of the grout and bond coat. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Keep traffic off tile floor, until grout and setting material is firmly set and cured.
B. Where traffic occurs over tile floor, cover tile floor with not less than 6 mm (1/4") thick plywood, wood
particle board, or hardboard securely taped in place. Do not remove protective cover until time for final inspection. Clean tile of any tape, adhesive and stains.
END OF SECTION 09 3000
SA1509A TILE 09 3000-9
SA1509A ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 09 5100-1
SECTION 09 5100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B. SUPPLY AND INSTALL: 1. Suspended (exposed) grid system for acoustical ceiling 2. Acoustical lay-in ceiling tile
1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied or installed under this section.
C. SUBMIT SAMPLES: One (1) sample of each tile type and grid type specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STANDARDS:
1. Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, specified, or apply. a. SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS (All Materials):
1) FS SS-S-118: Class A a) FLAME SPREAD: 25 or less b) SMOKE DEVELOPED: 50 or less
b. SUSPENSION GRID SYSTEM: 1) ASTM C 635 2) STRUCTURAL CLASSIFICATION: Intermediate 3) STEEL: ASTM A 336 4) ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS: ASTM C 423
B. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS:
1. Minimum of three project installations of comparable extent as proposed project. 2. Approved by A.C.T. manufacturer for product installation.
C. TOLERANCES:
1. DEFLECTION: Maximum deflection 1/360 of the span for all suspension system components, hangers, and fastening devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grilles, and acoustical units.
2. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE OF FINISHED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM: Level within 1/8" in 12'.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. SPACE ENCLOSURE: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until:
1. Space is enclosed and weatherproof 2. Wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry 3. Work above ceilings is complete 4. Ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near
those indicated for final occupancy. B. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Maintain humidity of 65% - 75% in area where acoustical materials are to be installed. 2. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55°F. to 70°F.
SA1509A ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 09 5100-2
1.05 MAINTENANCE A. PROVIDE TO THE OWNER THE FOLLOWING EXTRA MATERIALS:
1. ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS: Supply quantity of full size units equal to 2% of amount installed.
2. EXPOSED SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS: Supply quantity of each exposed component equal to 2% of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply products from the following:
1. Armstrong, Inc. 2. Approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS A. EXPOSED T-GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM:
1. TYPE: Basic grid 2. SIZE: 2'-0" x 2'-0" and 2'-0" x 4'-0". (Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plan) 3. COMPONENTS:
a. MAIN BEAMS AND CROSS TEES: 1) WEB HEIGHT: 1 1/2" 2) BOTTOM FLANGE: 15/16" or 9/16". (See Drawings) 3) EXPOSED BOTTOM FLANGE: Continuous with unbroken roll formed cap the
length of the member 4) CAP: (Steel) finished
b. MAIN BEAMS: 1) Single thickness 2) Route 6" o.c. continuously along length of web to locate intersecting cross tees
c. CROSS TEES: 1) DESIGN: Double web bulb section 2) Removable without special tools 3) Reusable
d. MOLDINGS: 1) EXPOSED FLANGES: 15/16" or 9/16". (See drawings) 2) THICKNESS: 0.019" nominal steel (minimum)
e. ACCESSORIES: Specifically designed as integral part of grid system 4. FINISH:
a. ALL STEEL ROLL FORMED PARTS INCLUDING CAP FOR EXPOSED FLANGE: 1) Chemically cleanse 2) Electro galvanize 3) Protective-conversion-coated
b. SURFACES: Baked polyester c. COLOR: Standard white
5. RETENTION CLIPS: a. Plated to withstand corrosion b. Provide four (4) clips per panel c. Provide on all drive-thru canopy panels
6. HANGER WIRE: a. For use with Acoustical Suspension System b. GAUGE: 12 gauge minimum c. Galvanized d. Soft annealed e. Pre-straightened f. Mild steel
B. A.C.T. LAY-IN ACOUSTIC CEILING PANELS: See drawings for tile dimensions, design, and
manufacturers.
SA1509A ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 09 5100-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness,
irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.
B. Mark access provisions as to size and location before beginning installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:
1. Install acoustical units in patterns required by the drawings, and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
2. CUTTING AND FITTING: a. Cut acoustic materials accurately and fit around any columns, pipes, heating ducts,
registers, recessed lighting fixtures, pipes and other items piercing through ceiling area. b. Escutcheons, cover rings, etc. will be furnished by mechanical trades for pipes and
electrical fixtures. c. Center diffusers in tiles unless noted otherwise.
3. Exercise extreme caution in maintaining clean surface on the entire system. 4. Ensure that systems are level, keeping all joints flush. 5. Refer to mechanical and electrical drawings for layout and coordination.
B. SUSPENSION SYSTEMS:
1. DIRECT HUNG COMPONENTS: Properly level, suspend, and tie tightly with at least 3 turns of the hanger wire.
2. HANGER SPACING: a. 6" from ends maximum. b. 4' o.c. maximum between ends of main runners and carriers. c. Modify as required to support other work resting in or on ceiling.
3. Provide and install hangers for mechanical and electrical fixtures in ceiling including but not limited to: a. Supplementary wire hangers at all corners of grid supported air handling units and
electrical fixtures. Provide approved hanger method. C. SUSPENDED LAY-IN ACOUSTIC CEILING SYSTEM:
1. Install acoustic panels in exposed grid system. 2. Install standard angle trim metal at all intersections of ceilings with walls, columns, millwork and
openings. 3. Balance border areas in small rooms to avoid units of less than 1/2 unit width. 4. Run directional tile parallel to the short dimension of room unless noted otherwise. 5. Cut edges at perimeters of ceilings and at all intersections with walls, columns, millwork and
openings abutting tegular panels to match profile of factory-cut edges. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage.
C. Remove soil, stain, and extraneous materials, caused by work of this section, from acoustical work and
adjacent surfaces.
D. Remove and replace work, which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 5100
SA1509A RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513-1
SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B. Work includes vinyl cove base 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Color and texture: See Finish Schedule on the drawings
B. VCT Flooring: SECTION 09 6519 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
C. Rubber Flooring: SECTION 09 6520 – RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING D. Carpet: SECTION 09 6800 - CARPETING 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Description of each product 2. Base manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives 3. Application and installation instructions
C. Samples:
1. Base: 150 mm (6 inches) long, each type and color 1.04 DELIVERY A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the
manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture.
B. Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected.
1.05 STORAGE A. Store materials in weather tight and dry storage facility.
B. Protect material from damage by handling and construction operations before, during, and after
installation. 1.06 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): F1861-02 Resilient Wall Base
C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
RR-T-650E Treads, Metallic and Non-Metallic, Nonskid
SA1509A RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513-2
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide the following extra materials to the Owner, packaged with protective covering and identified with
appropriate labels: 1. 100 LF of each color and height of base.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Use only products by the same manufacturer and from the same production run. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. ASTM F1861, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick, 4" high, Type TP Rubber, Thermoplastics, Group 2-layered with
molded top. Style B-cove.
B. Base shall be provided in rolls to minimize joints (use of 4' long sections of base is not permitted).
C. Use only one type of base throughout. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Use products recommended by the material manufacturer for the conditions of use.
B. Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based adhesive with low VOC is preferred over solvent
based adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature of materials above 21°C (70°F), for 48 hours before installation.
B. Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs, between 21°C and 27°C (70°F and 80°F) for at least
48 hours, before, during, and after installation.
C. Do not install materials until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction is complete, dry, and cured.
3.02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The respective manufacturer's instructions for application and installation will be considered for use when
approved by the A/E.
B. Submit proposed installation deviation from this specification to the A/E indicating the differences in the method of installation.
C. The A/E reserves the right to have test portions of material installation removed to check for non-uniform adhesion and spotty adhesive coverage.
3.03 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces on which material is to be installed.
B. Fill cracks, pits, and dents with leveling compound. C. Level to 3 mm (1/8 inch) maximum variations.
SA1509A RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513-3
D. Do not use adhesive for leveling or filling.
E. Grind, sand, or cut away protrusions; grind high spots.
F. Clean substrate area of oil, grease, dust, paint, and deleterious substances.
G. Substrate area dry and cured. Perform manufacturer’s recommended bond and moisture test.
H. Preparation of existing installation: 1. Remove existing base including adhesive 2. Do not use solvents to remove adhesives 3. Prepare substrate as specified
3.04 BASE INSTALLATION A. Location:
1. Unless otherwise specified or shown, where base is scheduled, install base over toe space of base of casework, lockers, and where other equipment occurs.
2. Extend base scheduled for room into adjacent closet, alcoves, and around columns. B. Application:
1. Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots. 2. Set base with joints aligned and butted to touch for entire height. 3. Before starting installation, layout base material to provide the minimum number of joints with no
strip less than 600 mm (24 inches) length. a. Short pieces to save material will not be permitted. b. Locate joints at inside corners only.
C. Form corners and end stops as follows:
1. Score back of outside corner 2. Score face of inside corner and notch cove
D. Roll base for complete adhesion. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean all exposed surfaces of base and adjoining areas of adhesive spatter before it sets.
B. Keep traffic off resilient material for at least 72 hours after installation.
C. Clean and polish materials in the following order:
1. After two weeks, scrub resilient base with a minimum amount of water and a mild detergent. Leave surfaces clean and free of detergent residue. Polish resilient base to a gloss finish.
D. Where protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace damaged materials
and re-clean resilient materials. Damaged materials are defined as having cuts, gouges, scrapes or tears and not fully adhered.
END OF SECTION 09 6513
SA1509A RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519-1
SECTION 09 6519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the installation of solid vinyl tile flooring, vinyl composition tile flooring, and accessories, including the application of leveling compound to the entire floor area to receive tile flooring. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Colors: See material schedule on the drawings. Manufacturer's trade names and numbers listed here
and on the drawings are only to identify colors, finishes, textures, and patterns. Products of other manufacturers equivalent to colors, finishes, textures, and patterns of the manufacturers listed, that meet the requirements of the technical specifications, will be acceptable upon approval in writing of the Architect.
B. Locations: See Finish Schedule on the drawings.
C. Resilient Base: Section 09 6513, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 3400, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Description of each product. 2. Resilient material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, underlayment, primers and
polish. 3. Application and installation instructions.
C. Samples:
1. Tile: 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inches by 12 inches) for each type, pattern and color. 1.04 DELIVERY A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the
manufacture's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture,
B. Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected.
1.05 STORAGE A. Store materials in weathertight and dry storage facility.
B. Protection from damage from handling, water, and temperature. 1.06 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent references. The publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D4078-02 Water Emulsion Floor Finish E648-08 Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source E662-06 Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials E1155-96 (R 2008) Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness Numbers
SA1509A RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519-2
F510-93 (R 2004) Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient Floor Coverings Using an Abrader with a Grit Feed Method
IP #2 Installation Practice for Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) D. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
SS-T-312 Tile Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide the following extra materials to the Owner, packaged with protective packaging and identified with
appropriate labels: 1. 100 SF of each type and color of floor tile.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish product type, materials of the same production run and meeting following criteria.
B. Use adhesives, underlayment, primers and polish recommended by the floor resilient material
manufacturer.
C. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more, Class I, per ASTM E 648.
D. Smoke density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662. 2.02 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. ASTM F1066, Composition 1, Class 2 (through pattern), 300 mm (12 inches) square, 3 mm (1/8 inch)
thick.
B. Color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout thickness.
C. See drawings for color, size, pattern, and manufacturer. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials Green Seal (GS-36) for
commercial adhesives.
B. Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based is preferred over solvent based adhesives.
C. As recommended by the adhesive and tile manufacturer. 2.04 PRIMER (FOR CONCRETE SUBFLOORS) A. As recommended by the adhesive and tile manufacturer. 2.05 LEVELING COMPOUND (For Concrete Floors) A. Provide cementitious products with latex or polyvinyl acetate resins in the mix.
B. Determine the type of underlayment selected for use by the condition to be corrected.
C. As recommended by the adhesive and tile manufacturer.
SA1509A RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519-3
2.06 POLISH AND CLEANERS A. Cleaners RFCI CL-1.
B. Polish: ASTM D4078. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature of materials a minimum of 22°C (70°F), for 48 hours before installation.
B. Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs between 21°C and 27°C (70°F and 80°F), for at least
48 hours, before, during and after installation. C. Do not install flooring until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction in or near areas to
receive tile materials is complete, dry and cured. 3.02 SUBFLOOR PREPARATION A. Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710. At existing slabs, determine levelness by F-number
method in accordance with ASTM E1155. Overall value shall not exceed as follows: FF30/FL20
B. Correct conditions which will impair proper installation. C. Fill cracks, joints and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound:
1. Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes. 2. Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by spot grinding. 3. Apply leveling compound to the entire floor area. 4. Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks, and joints. 5. Sand the leveling compound as necessary to produce a flat and level surface for VCT.
D. Clean floor of oil, paint, dust, and deleterious substances: Leave floor dry and cured free or residue from
existing curing or cleaning agents.
E. Concrete Subfloor Testing: 1. Determine Adhesion and dryness of the floor by bond and moisture tests as recommended by
RFCI manual MRP.
F. Perform additional subfloor preparation to obtain satisfactory adherence of flooring if subfloor test patches allows easy removal of tile.
G. Prime the concrete subfloor if the primer will seal slab conditions that would inhibit bonding, or if priming is recommended by the tile or adhesive.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application and installation unless specified
otherwise.
B. Mix tile from at least two containers. An apparent line either of shades or pattern variance will not be accepted.
C. Tile Layout: 1. If layout is not shown on drawings, lay tile symmetrically about center of room or space with joints
aligned. 2. No tile shall be less than 150 mm (6 inches) and of equal width at walls. 3. Place tile pattern in the same direction; do not alternate tiles.
SA1509A RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519-4
D. Trim tiles to touch for the length of intersections at pipes and vertical projections, seal joints at pipes with waterproof cement.
E. Application: 1. Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.
a. Conform to RFC1-TM-6 for joint tightness and for corner intersection unless layout pattern shows random corner intersection.
b. More than 5 percent of the joints not touching will not be accepted. 2. Roll tile floor with a minimum 45 kg (100 pound) roller. No exceptions. 3. The A/E may have test tiles removed to check for non-uniform adhesion, spotty adhesive
coverage, and ease of removal. Install new tile for broken removed tile. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adhesive marks on exposed surfaces during the application of resilient materials before the
adhesive sets. Exposed adhesive is not acceptable.
B. Keep traffic off resilient material for a minimum 72 hours after installation.
C. Clean and polish materials in the following order: 1. For the first two weeks sweep and damp mop only. 2. After two weeks, scrub resilient materials with a minimum amount of water and a mild detergent.
Leave surface clean and free of detergent residue. 3. Apply 4 coats for polish to the floors in accordance with the polish manufacturer's instructions.
D. When construction traffic occurs over tile, cover resilient materials with reinforced kraft paper properly
secured and maintained until removal is directed by CM, At entrances and where wheeled vehicles or carts are used, cover tile with plywood, hardboard, or particle board over paper, secured and maintained until removal is directed by CM.
E. When protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace any damage tile, re-clean resilient materials, lightly re-apply polish and buff floors.
3.05 LOCATION A. Unless otherwise specified or shown, install tile flooring, on floor under areas where casework, laboratory
and pharmacy furniture and other equipment occurs, except where mounted in wall recesses.
B. Extend tile flooring for room into adjacent closets and alcoves.
END OF SECTION 09 6519
SA1509A RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING 09 6520-1
SECTION 09 6520 - RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract including Division 0 and Division 1 specification
sections, apply to this Section.
B. This section specifies the installation of rubber tile flooring, and accessories, including the application of leveling compound to the entire floor area to receive rubber tile flooring.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Colors: See Finish Schedule on the drawings.
B. Resilient Base: SECTION 09 6513, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3400, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Complete product data for each product. 2. Resilient material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, underlayment, and primers. 3. Application, installation, and maintenance instructions.
C. Samples:
1. Tile: 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inches by 12 inches) for each type and color. 1.04 DELIVERY A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the
manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture. Protect from damage.
B. Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected.
1.05 STORAGE A. Store materials in weathertight and dry storage facility.
B. Protect from damage from handling, water, and excessive temperature.
C. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity at service levels or 68° F (20° C), ± 5° F (3° C), and 50% RH ± 10% in
areas to receive resilient flooring. Specified temperature shall be maintained at least 48 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation.
1.07 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
SA1509A RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING 09 6520-2
a. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine
b. ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness c. ASTM D3389 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance (Rotary
Platform, Double-Head Abrader) d. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials e. ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source f. ASTM E662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated
by Solid Materials g. ASTM E2180 Standard Test Method for Determining the Activity of Incorporated
Antimicrobial Agent(s) in Polymeric or Hydrophobic Materials h. ASTM F150 Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and Static
Dissipative Resilient Flooring i. ASTM F511 Standard Test Method for Quality of Cut (Joint Tightness) of Resilient
Floor Tile j. ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring k. ASTM F970 Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit l. ASTM F1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile m. ASTM F1482 Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of Panel Type
Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring n. ASTM F1514 Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability of Resilient Flooring
by Color o. ASTM E1745 Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs p. ASTM F1859 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing q. ASTM F1860 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering With Backing r. ASTM F2055 Standard Test Method for Size and Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile by
Dial Gage Method s. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete
Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes t. ASTM F2420 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity on the Surface
of Concrete Floor Slabs Using Relative Humidity Probe Measurement and Insulated Hood
u. ASTM G21 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
2. European Norm (EN) a. EN 1815 Resilient and textile floor coverings. Assessment of static electrical
propensity. b. FTM 4046 101 Static Decay
3. Electro Static Discharge (ESD)
a. ESD S7.1 100 Resistive Characterization of Flooring Materials b. ESD STM 97.2 Floor Materials and Footwear - Voltage Measurement on a Person
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Energy Source b. NFPA 258 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Provide resilient flooring manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 10 years experience
with resilient flooring of types equivalent to those specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be approved by the floorcovering manufacturer for the requirements of the project or INSTALL (International Standards & Training Alliance) resilient certified for the requirements of the project.
SA1509A RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING 09 6520-3
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide the following extra materials to the Owner, packaged with protective packaging and identified with
appropriate labels: 1. 100 SF of each type and color of floor tile.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish product type, materials of the same production run and meeting following criteria. B. Use adhesives, leveling compound, primers, etc. recommended by the floorcovering manufacturer. 2.2 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING A. Product/Manufacturer: noraplan® Environcare™, Article 2463 as manufactured by nora systems, Inc.,
94 Glenn Street, Lawrence, MA 01843; telephone 800-332-NORA, or 978-689-0530; fax 978-975-0110, or approved equal.
B. Characteristics:
1. Material: Nora vulcanized rubber compound 913 with abundant natural fillers and environmentally compatible color pigments
2. Surface: Smooth 3. Color: As selected 4. Tile Size: 0.12 inches (3 mm) thickness, 24 inches by 24 inches (610 mm by
610 mm) 5. Back of Tile: Smooth, double-sanded back 6. Composition: Homogeneous rubber with a random scattered design 7. Limited Wear Warranty: 5 years 8. Hardness: ASTM D2240, Shore type A, required ≥ 85 9. Static Load: Per ASTM F970 Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit, residual
compression, when tested with 800 lbs, ≤ 0.005” 10. Quality of Cut: ASTM F511 ≤ 0.005” 11. Squareness: ASTM F2055 ≤ 0.010” 12. ISO 14001: Manufacturer shall be ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems
cycles, gram weight loss ≤ 0.4 15. Slip Resistance: Static coefficient of friction (James Test): ASTM D2047, ≥ 0.8 16. Bacteria Resistance: Products shall be resistant to bacteria, fungi, and micro-organism
activity, according to ASTM E2180 and ASTM G21 17. Halogen Free: Products shall contain no halogens 18. Sound Absorption: 10 dB per ISO 140-8 and 23 11C per ASTM E2179 19. Burn Resistance: Cigarette and solder burn resistance 20. Flammability: ASTM E648; NFPA 253; NBSIR 75 950, ≥ 0.45 watts per square
centimeter, Class 1 21. Smoke Density: ASTM E662, NFPA 258, NBS smoke density, < 450 22. Asbestos Free: Products shall contain no asbestos 23. Non Hazardous: Flooring shall be made without any chemicals that may be hazardous or
containing any teratogenic, mutagenic or any other ingredients known to be carcinogenic
SA1509A RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING 09 6520-4
24. Cleaning: Flooring surface shall have the ability to be cleaned and maintained without the use of any chemicals that may be hazardous or containing any teratogenic, mutagenic or any other ingredients known to be carcinogenic. Manufacturer shall make available a cleaning system that effectively cleans the flooring surface using water, cleaning pads and a suitable cleaning machine, without the use of factory and/or field-applied coatings.
25. Shine: Higher shine surfaces can be achieved by dry buffing without any artificial topical applied coatings
26. Static Generation: Less than 2000 volt @ 20% RH as per AATCC 134 27. Installation System: Use only nora pro install system products following the current nora
Installation Guide that may consist of part or all of the following steps depending upon the substrate conditions and requirements of the specific project.
Step 1 – nora membrane (see Installation Guide for requirements). Step 2 – nora primer (see Installation Guide for requirements). Step 3 – nora leveler (see Installation Guide for requirements). Step 4 – nora patch (see Installation Guide for requirements). Step 5 – nora adhesives, the flooring usage and substrate
conditions will determine the appropriate adhesive. Contact your nora representative for specific recommendations.
2.3 ADHESIVES A. Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials Green Seal (GS-36) for
commercial adhesive.
B. Use nora 485 or 685 water-based acrylic adhesive.
C. Adhesive shall be as recommended by the tile manufacturer. 2.4 PRIMER (FOR CONCRETE SUBFLOORS) A. Use nora primer, as recommended by the tile manufacturer. 2.5 LEVELING COMPOUND (For Concrete Floors) A. Use nora leveler, a cementitious product with latex resins.
B. Leveler shall be as recommended by the tile manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity levels of materials and the rooms where work occurs at 68°F ± 5°F
and 50% RH ± 10% for 48 hours before; during; and 72 hours after insulation.
B. Do not install flooring until work area is properly conditioned and secured, and new cementitious underlayment is properly cured.
3.2 SUBFLOOR PREPARATION A. Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710. At existing slabs, determine levelness by F-number
method in accordance with ASTM E1155. Overall value shall not exceed as follows: FF30/FL20
SA1509A RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING 09 6520-5
B. Correct conditions which will impair proper installation.
C. Fill cracks, joints and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound: 1. Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes. 2. Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by spot grinding. 3. Apply leveling compound to the entire floor area that will receive resilient flooring. 4. Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joints. 5. Sand the leveling compound as necessary to produce a flat and level surface for resilient flooring.
D. Clean floor of oil, paint, dust, and deleterious substances: Leave floor dry and cured free of residue from
existing curing or cleaning agents.
E. Concrete Subfloor Testing: 1. Determine Adhesion and dryness of the floor by bond and moisture tests as recommended by
RFCI manual MRP. 2. Perform testing in accordance with ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining
Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes, using a Wagner Rapid RH probes only. When tested at the correct service temperature and ambient humidity the maximum allowable shall be 85%RH.
3. Perform mat bond tests in each major area (minimum of 2). This shall consist of the proposed subfloor preparation, mitigation and leveling or smoothing products. A detailed method statement is available from nora systems, Inc., upon request. Examine after 72 hours to determine whether the bond of the system is very good to the substrate, if the preparation is sufficient, and to look for signs of moisture. Do not proceed with the installation until all the results of the bond test are acceptable.
F. Perform additional subfloor preparation to obtain satisfactory adherence of flooring if subfloor test patches
allows easy removal of tile.
G. Clean out and fill or repair any dormant saw cuts and cracks following the appropriate directions of the membrane, leveler or patch sections within the installation guide.
H. Apply nora® leveler following the Installation Guide. Floors shall be free of dust, solvents, paint, wax, varnish, oil, grease, asphalt, old adhesives, and other extraneous materials that may interfere with the bond. These shall be completely removed by mechanical means only. Dustless diamond grinding is the preferred method to remove contaminates and bond breakers as it also helps to level the concrete.
I. Prime the subfloor prior to using the leveler.
J. Provide written confirmation (and a workmanship warranty) that the area was primed correctly, the leveler had been mixed and applied correctly to the required smoothness and thickness required by the nora® Installation Guide.
K. Vacuum floors immediately prior to installing the flooring to remove all loose particles. If required, only
use water based sweeping compounds. Do not use any wax or oil based compounds that leave behind a residue that may interfere with the adhesive bond.
L. Areas of the flooring that are subject to direct sunlight through doors or windows shall be covered with
blinds, curtains, cardboard or similar for the time of the installation and 72 hours after the installation to allow the adhesive to cure.
3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application and installation unless specified
otherwise.
SA1509A RESILIENT RUBBER FLOORING 09 6520-6
B. Install resilient flooring, including but not limited to the following, in accordance with the nora® Installation Guide: 1. Do not mix manufacturing batches of a color within the same area. 2. Do not install resilient flooring over building expansion joints. 3. Do not install defective or damaged resilient flooring. 4. Layout resilient flooring to provide ~equal size at perimeter. Adjust layout as necessary to reduce
the amount of resilient flooring which is cut to less than half full width. 5. Lay resilient flooring with arrows in the same direction (excluding borders). 6. Install resilient flooring without voids at seams. Lay seams together without stress. 7. Cut/scribe resilient flooring neatly at perimeter and obstructions. 8. Extend resilient flooring into reveals, closets, and similar openings. 9. Remove excess adhesive immediately. 10. Install reducer strips at exposed edges.
C. Tile Layout:
1. If layout is not shown on drawings, lay tile symmetrically about center of room or space with joints aligned.
2. No tile shall be less than 150 mm (6 inches) and of equal width at walls. 3. Place tile pattern in the same direction; do not alternate tiles.
D. Trim tiles to touch for the length of intersections at pipes and vertical projections, seal joints at pipes with
waterproof cement.
E. Application: 1. Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.
a. Conform to RFC1-TM-6 for joint tightness and for corner intersection unless layout pattern shows random corner intersection.
b. More than 5 percent of the joints not touching will not be accepted. 2. Roll tile floor with a minimum 45 kg (100 pound) roller. No exceptions.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove adhesive on exposed surfaces during the application of resilient materials before the adhesive
sets. Exposed adhesive is not acceptable.
B. Keep traffic off resilient material for a minimum 72 hours after installation.
C. Clean tile as recommended by the manufacturer one week after installation.
D. When construction traffic occurs over tile, cover resilient materials with reinforced kraft paper properly secured and maintained until removal is directed by CM. At entrances and where wheeled vehicles or carts are used, cover tile with plywood, hardboard, or particle board over paper, secured and maintained until removal is directed by CM.
E. When protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace any damaged tile, and re-clean resilient materials.
END OF SECTION 09 6520
SA1509A CARPETING 09 6800 - 1
SECTION 09 6800 - CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B. Section specifies carpet, edge strips, adhesives, and other items required for complete installation. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Color and texture of carpet and edge strip: see Material Schedule in Drawings. Manufacturer's trade
names and numbers listed here and on the drawings are only to identify colors, finishes, textures, and patterns. Products of other manufacturers equivalent to colors, finishes, textures, and patterns of the manufacturers listed, that meet the requirements of the technical specifications, will be acceptable upon approval in writing of the Architect.
B. Resilient wall base: Section 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet installed by mechanics certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board. B. Certify and label the carpet that it has been tested and meets criteria of CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program
for indoor air quality. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s catalog data and printed documentation stating physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics for each type of carpet material and installation accessory.
2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for the carpet, including preparation of installation substrate, seaming techniques and recommended adhesives and tapes.
3. Manufacturer’s certificate verifying carpet containing recycled materials include percentage of recycled materials as specified.
C. Samples:
1. Carpet: "Production Quality" samples 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inches) of carpets, showing quality, pattern and color specified in the Material Schedule.
2. Floor Edge Strip (Molding): 150 mm (6 inches) long of each color and type specified. D. Shop Drawings: Installers layout plan showing seams and cuts for sheet carpet and carpet module. E. Maintenance Data: Carpet manufacturer’s maintenance instructions describing recommended type of
cleaning equipment and material, spotting and cleaning methods and cleaning cycles. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver carpet in manufacturer’s original wrappings and packages clearly labeled with manufacturer’s
name, brand, name, size, dye lot number and related information. B. Deliver adhesives in containers clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, brand name, number,
installation instructions, safety instructions and flash points.
SA1509A CARPETING 09 6800 - 2
C. Store in a clean, dry, well ventilated area, protected from damage and soiling. Maintain storage space at a temperature above 16°C (60°F) for 2 days prior to installation.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Areas in which carpeting is to be installed shall be maintained at a temperature above 16°C (60°F) for 2
days before installation, during installation and for 2 days after installation. A minimum temperature of 13°C (55°F) shall be maintained thereafter for the duration of the contract. Traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in carpeted area shall not be permitted for 24 hours after installation. Other work which would damage the carpet shall be completed prior to installation of carpet.
1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's lifetime commercial limited warranty. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Provide the owner with an amount of carpet equal to 10% of the total area installed.
B. 75% of this material shall be full tiles; 25% may be scrap tile (but each piece must be at least 1/2 of a tile). 1.09 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publication listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced
in text by basic designation only. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
ANSI/NSF 140-10 ......... Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard C. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC):
AATCC 16-04 ................ Colorfastness to Light AATCC 129-10 Colorfastness to Ozone in the Atmosphere under High Humidities AATCC 134-11 .............. Electric Static Propensity of Carpets AATCC 165-08 .............. Colorfastness to Crocking: Textile Floor Conerings-AATCC Crockmeter
Method D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM D1335-05 Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings ASTM D3278-96 (R2004) Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus ASTM D5116-10 Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products ASTM D5252-05 ........... Operation of the Hexapod Tumble Drum Tester ASTM D5417-05 ........... Operation of the Vettermann Drum Tester ASTM E648-10 .............. Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat
Energy Source E. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI):
CRI 104-11 .................... Installation of Commercial Carpet PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET A. Physical Characteristics:
1. Carpet free of visual blemishes, streaks, poorly dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots or stains and other physical and manufacturing defects.
2. Manufacturers standard construction commercial carpet: a. Modular Tile: 660 mm (24 inches) square tile.
3. Provide static control to permanently control static build upto less than 3.5 kV when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 21 degrees C (70 degrees F) in accordance with AATCC 134
SA1509A CARPETING 09 6800 - 3
4. Finished Pile Height: 0.121" 5. Total Thickness: 0.244" 6. Pile Fiber: Eco Solution q Nylon 7. Pile Type: Multi-level patterned loop; 100% solution-dyed. 8. Backing materials: Manufacturer’s unitary synthetic backing designed for glue-down installation. 9. Stitches per Inch: Minimum of 9.0. 10. Gauge: 1/12. 11. Tufted Weight: 17 oz. (minimum). 12. Protective Treatment: Manufacturer's standard soil protection treatment. 13. Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements:
a. Test Carpet in accordance with ASTM E 648. b. Class I: Not less than 0.45 watts per square centimeter. c. NBS Smoke: Less than 450.
14. Green Label Certification: g/p 9968 16. Cradle to Cradle Silver Certified
B. Shall meet platinum level of ANSI/NSF 140. C. Color, Texture, and Pattern: See Finish Schedule in the Drawings. 2.02 ADHESIVE A. Waterproof, resistant to cleaning solutions, steam and water, nonflammable, complies with air-quality
standards as specified. Adhesives flashpoint minimum 60 degrees C (140 degrees F), complies with ASTM D 3278; as recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
B. Seam Adhesives: Waterproof, non-flammable and non-staining. 2.03 EDGE STRIPS (MOLDING) A. Vinyl Edge Strip:
1. Beveled floor flange minimum 50 mm (2 inches) wide. 2. Beveled surface to finish flush with carpet for tight joint and other side to floor finish. 3. Color as specified in Material Schedule.
2.04 LEVELING COMPOUND (FOR CONCRETE FLOORS) A. Provide polymer modified leveling compound manufactured specifically for resurfacing and leveling wood
floors. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable. B. Determine the type of underlayment selected for use by condition to be corrected. C. Use only leveling compound recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Use primer as recommended by leveling compound manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces on which carpeting is to be installed. B. Clean floor of oil, waxy films, paint, dust and deleterious substances that prevent adhesion, leave floor dry
and cured, free of residue from curing or cleaning agents. C. Correct conditions which will impair proper installation, including trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions,
cracks or joints.
SA1509A CARPETING 09 6800 - 4
D. Fill cracks, joints depressions, and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound. 1. Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes. 2. Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by spot grinding. 3. Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joint lines.
E. Test new concrete subfloor prior to adhesive application for moisture and surface alkalinity per CRI 104
Section 6.3.1 or per ASTM E1907. 3.02 CARPET INSTALLATION A. Do not install carpet until work of other trades including painting is complete and dry. B. Install in accordance with CRI 104 direct glue down installation.
1. Relax carpet in accordance with Section 6.4. 2. Comply with indoor air quality recommendations noted in SECTION 6.5. 3. Maintain temperature in accordance with SECTION 15.3.
C. Secure carpet to subfloor of spaces with adhesive applied as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations for matching pattern and texture directions. E. Cut openings in carpet where required for installing equipment, pipes, outlets, and penetrations.
1. Use additional adhesive to secure carpets around pipes and other vertical projections. F. Carpet Modules:
1. Install per CRI 104, SECTION 13, Adhesive Application. 2. Lay carpet modules in a random pattern. 3. Install carpet modules so that cleaning methods and solutions do not cause dislocation of
modules. 4. Lay carpet modules uniformly to provide tight flush joints free from movement when subject to
traffic. 3.03 EDGE STRIPS INSTALLATION A. Install edge strips over exposed carpet edges adjacent to uncarpeted finish flooring. B. Anchor vinyl edge strip to floor with adhesive apply adhesive to edge strip and insert carpet into lip and
press lip down over carpet. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Remove waste, fasteners and other cuttings from carpet floors. B. Vacuum carpet and provide suitable protection. Do not use polyethylene film. C. Do not permit traffic on carpeted surfaces for at least 48 hours after installation. Protect the carpet in
accordance with CRI 104. D. Do not move furniture or equipment on unprotected carpeted surfaces. E. Just before final acceptance of work, remove protection and vacuum carpet clean.
END OF SECTION 09 6800
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-1
SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B. SUPPLY AND INSTALL: 1. Interior painting 2. Scaffolding and equipment
1.02 DEFINITIONS A. PAINT:
1. Coating systems materials 2. Primers 3. Emulsions 4. Enamels 5. Stains 6. Sealers 7. Fillers 8. Other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sand, prime, fill, stain, and paint or varnish all exposed surfaces which do not come to job in finished
state and as required by these specifications and finish schedule.
B. Back paint or prime all millwork.
C. Finish exposed woodwork and wood trim, on the interior of the building, including back painting of all wood trim.
D. Field paint exposed bare and covered pipes, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated, including all non-factory finished rooftop equipment.
E. Remove doors and apply finish to tops and bottoms.
F. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "Schedules", except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted.
G. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas.
H. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select from standard colors available for materials systems specified.
I. PAINTING NOT INCLUDED:
1. SHOP PRIMING: a. Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for:
1) Miscellaneous metal 2) Hollow metal work 3) Similar items 4) Fabricated components such as shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and
electrical equipment and accessories.
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-2
b. Unless noted otherwise. 2. PRE-FINISHED ITEMS: Factory finished or installer finished items when specified including:
a. Acoustical materials. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment including:
1) Light fixtures 2) Switch gear and distribution cabinets 3) Distribution cabinets
3. Concealed surfaces unless noted otherwise. 4. FINISHED METAL SURFACES:
a. Anodized aluminum b. Stainless steel c. Chromium plate d. Copper e. Bronze f. Similar finish materials g. Unless noted otherwise
5. OPERATING PARTS AND LABELS: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as: a. Valve and damper operators b. Linkages c. Sensing devices d. Motor and fan shafts e. CODE-REQUIRED LABELS SUCH AS:
1) Underwriters' Laboratories 2) Factory Mutual 3) Any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and installed under this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. See SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY CONTROL B. STANDARDS:
1. Comply with provisions of the current edition of following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, are specified, or apply. a. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1) WAX, GENERAL PURPOSE, SOLVENT TYPE: P-W-158E 2) ENAMEL, ALKYD, GLOSS (for Exterior and Interior Surfaces): TT-E-489G 3) ENAMEL, ODORLESS, ALKYD, INTERIOR, SEMI GLOSS, WHITE AND TINTS:
TT-E-509B(2) 4) ENAMEL, ALKYD, LUSTERLESS: TT-E-527C 5) ENAMEL, INTERIOR, UNDERCOAT, WHITE AND TINTS: TT-E-543A(1) 6) FILLER, WOOD, PASTE: TT-F-336E 7) PAINT, ACRYLIC EMULSION; EXTERIOR: TT-P-19C(2) 8) PRIMER COATING EXTERIOR (undercoat for Wood, Ready-Mixed, White and
Tints): TT-P-25E(2) 9) PAINT, LATEX BASE, INTERIOR, FLAT, WHITE AND TINTS: TT-P-29J(1) 10) PAINT, ALKYD, ODORLESS, INTERIOR, FLAT, WHITE AND TINTS: TT-P-30E 11) PAINT, ALKYD RESIN; EXTERIOR TRIM, DEEP COLORS: TT-P-37D 12) PAINT, POLYVINYL EMULSION, EXTERIOR: TT-P- 55B(2) 13) PAINT, OIL, ALKYD, READY-MIXED, MEDIUM SHADES: TT-P-81E 14) PRIMER COATING: ZINC DUST-ZINC OXIDE (for Galvanized Surfaces): TT-P-
641G(1)
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-3
15) PRIMER PAINT, ZINC CHROMATE, ALKYD TYPE: TT-P-645A. 16) PRIMER COATING, LATEX BASE, INTERIOR, WHITE (for gypsum board): TT-
P-650C(1) 17) PRIMER COATING, SYNTHETIC, RUST-INHIBITING, LACQUER RESISTING:
C. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named
are required.
D. Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for paint materials, except where other product identification is used.
E. PAINT MATERIALS: "First Line" or "Best Grade" products as regularly produced by approved paint manufacturer. 1. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be
acceptable. F. SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same
manufacturer as finish coats.
G. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Name or title of material 2. Federal Specification Number, if applicable 3. Manufacturer's stock number 4. Date of manufacture 5. Manufacturer's name 6. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents 7. Thinning instructions 8. Application instructions 9. Color name and number
B. STORAGE:
1. Store materials in a single area as directed 2. Keep areas clean 3. Remove waste and oily rags from building every night 4. Take all precautions to avoid danger of fire 5. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers 6. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue. 7. Protect from freezing where necessary 8. Keep storage area neat and orderly 9. Keep away from heat or open flame
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-4
C. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50°F. (10°C.) and 90°F. (32°C.), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
2. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45°F. (7°C.) and 95°F. (35°C.), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
3. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85% or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
4. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.
5. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.
6. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. 7. Do not apply finish under conditions, which are unsuitable for the production of good results.
B. PROTECTION AND SCAFFOLDING:
1. Supply, maintain and remove the following as required for the work of this section: a. Scaffolding. b. Ladders and planks. c. DROP CLOTHS FOR PROTECTION OF:
1) Floors 2) Pre-finished materials 3) Building fixtures existing or new, etc.
2. Protect and cover painted and finished surfaces subject to damage or defacement due to other work on building
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. PAINT COORDINATION:
1. Provide finish coats compatible with prime paints used. 2. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure
compatibility of total coatings systems for various substrates. 3. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials
proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats to be used. 4. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. 5. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with
substrates primed by others. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. To establish a standard of quality, products specified are those of Benjamin Moore & Company unless
noted otherwise.
B. Use of equal quality and type products having equivalent color selections by the following manufacturers will be accepted, subject to approval by Architect. 1. Benjamin Moore and Company (Moore) 2. Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W) 3. Pratt & Lambert (P&L)
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-5
C. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of the named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.
2.02 MATERIALS A. LINSEED OIL: Pure, well filtered and settled.
B. SHELLAC:
1. Bleached regular white shellac 2. Four pound cut 3. Orange shellac may be used for painting over knots, sap, and resinous woods, but is not to be
used elsewhere C. TURPENTINE: Pure gum spirits of turpentine
D. COLORS AND FINISHES:
1. Indicated in "Schedules" 2. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review
E. COLOR PIGMENTS: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be applied.
B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
Applicator.
C. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.
D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3.02 PREPARATION A. GENERAL:
1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.
2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. 3. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with
substrates primed by others. 4. If any hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, or similar
items not to be finish-painted have been put in place on surfaces to be painted, these items should be removed or provided with surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.
5. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. a. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. b. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall
onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. 6. SURFACES TO RECEIVE FINISH: Clean, dry and adequately protected from dampness.
B. SURFACES:
1. FERROUS METALS: a. Clean surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill
scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-6
b. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections of these specifications.
c. Clean and touch-up with same type of shop primer. 2. GALVANIZED SURFACES: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum
based solvent. 3. PAINTED WOOD SURFACES:
a. Sand to smooth and even surface, then dust off. b. After priming coat has dried, fill all nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects.
1) FILLER: Colored to match stain or paint. c. After priming coat has dried apply shellac primer, not over 2 lbs. cut, to all knots, pitch
and resinous sapwood. d. Back-prime all interior and exterior wood trim before installation.
4. STAINED WOOD SURFACES: a. Sand to smooth and even surface, dust off. b. Primer stain coat all surfaces. c. After priming coat has dried, fill all nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects.
1) FILLER: Colored to match stain. 5. GYPSUM BOARD:
a. Fill all minor irregularities with spackling compound and sand to smooth, level surface. b. Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper. c. JOINT AND FASTENER HOLE TREATMENT: Described under SECTION 09 2116.
6. FERROUS SURFACES: a. Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits. b. Remove rust, mill scale, and defective paint down to bare metal, using scraper,
sandpaper, or wire brush as necessary. c. Grind if necessary to remove shoulders at edge of sound paint to prevent flaws from
photographing through finish coats. d. Touch up all spots and damaged shop coats with specified rust inhibitive primer.
7. CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS: a. Cementitious surfaces of concrete block, cement plaster and composition-cement board. b. Remove all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to
remove glaze. c. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be painted by performing
appropriate tests. d. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish
paint, correct this condition before application of paint. e. Do not paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's printed directions. C. MATERIALS:
1. GENERAL: a. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. b. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue. c. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density, and stir as
required during application. d. Do not stir surface film into material. e. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3.03 APPLICATION A. GENERAL:
1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 2. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 3. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in "Schedules" of Contract
Documents. 4. Provide finish coats compatible with prime paints used. 5. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of
paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-7
a. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 7. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final
installation of equipment. 8. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular
black paint. 9. Paint back sides, of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise
indicated. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-painted,
unless otherwise indicated. 13. Apply a primer coat to all areas receiving wall protection, Koroseal wall protection, and vinyl
wallcovering. B. SCHEDULING PAINTING:
1. Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. 3. Do not re-coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS: Apply materials:
1. At not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate 2. To establish a total dry film thickness as indicated 3. If not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer
D. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK:
1. Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces
2. MECHANICAL ITEMS TO BE PAINTED (including, but not limited to): a. Exposed piping, pipe hangers, and supports b. Ductwork, insulation c. Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports d. Accessory items e. Grilles and registers
3. ELECTRICAL ITEMS TO BE PAINTED (including, but not limited to): a. Conduit, hangers, and fitting b. Switchgear
E. PRIME COATS:
1. Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others.
2. Re-coat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
F. STIPPLE ENAMEL FINISH:
1. Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. 2. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections. G. PIGMENTED (OPAQUE) FINISHES:
1. Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage.
2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections, will not be acceptable.
SA1509A PAINTING 09 9000-8
H. TRANSPARENT (CLEAR) FINISHES: 1. Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. 2. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail
holes, or other surface imperfections. 3. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
I. COMPLETED WORK:
1. Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. 2. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Request review of first finished room, space, or item of each color scheme required by Architect for color,
texture, and workmanship.
B. Use first acceptable room, space or item as project standard for each color scheme.
C. For spray application, paint surface not smaller than 100 sq. ft. as project standard. 3.05 CLEANING A. DURING PROGRESS OF WORK: Remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at
end of each work day.
B. UPON COMPLETION OF PAINTING WORK: 1. Clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. 2. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or
otherwise damage finished surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work.
B. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes.
D. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion
of painting operations.
E. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.07 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE A. GENERAL:
1. Paint systems are specified and identified herein by letter, number and work. 2. See drawings for areas and items to be painted. 3. Unless noted or specified otherwise, supply all materials in any one system from one
manufacturer. 4. Paint system scheduled or noted on drawings refer to complete corresponding paint system as
specified herein. 5. This specification shall serve as a guide to the Contractor and is meant to establish procedure,
quality and number of coats. All products listed are those of Benjamin Moore & Company. Equivalent products from other manufacturers are acceptable.
6. Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates as indicated below.
1) 1st Coat: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer V110 (199 g/L), LEED Credit. 2) 2nd Coat: Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel, HP29 (147 g/L),
MPI # 141, X-Green 141, 153, X-Green 153, LEED 2009, LEED V4. 3) 3rd Coat: Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel, HP29 (147 g/L),
MPI # 141, X-Green 141, 153, X-Green 153, LEED 2009, LEED V4. END OF SECTION 09 9000
SA1509A CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS 10 2123- 1
SECTION 10 2123 - CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this Section. B. This section specifies cubicle curtains and track (C.C.T.), including all necessary parts and accessories
for a complete and functional installation.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Steel shapes for suspending track assembly: SECTION 09 5100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS B. See Finish Schedule in the drawings for curtain fabric. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. Shop Drawings: Showing layout of tracks and method of anchorage
C. Complete Manufacturer's Literature and Data on all products
D. Sample of curtain fabric 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in original package marked to identify the contents, brand name, and the name of the
manufacturer or supplier. B. Store in original packaging in a dry, and protected, and climate controlled location. Store so as to not
bend or warp the tracks. C. Do not open packages until contents are needed for installation, unless verification inspection is required. 1.05 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B221-06: Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes B456-03: Electrodeposited Coatings for Copper plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus
Chromium C. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
AMP 500 Series Metal Finishes Manual D. NFPA 701 - Standard methods of fire tests for flame propagation of textiles and films.
SA1509A CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS 10 2123- 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CUBICLE CURTAIN TRACKS A. Surface mounted type :
1. Channel Tracks (Surface Mounted Type): Extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6, channel shaped, with smooth inside raceway for curtain carriers.
B. Curtain Carriers: Nylon or delrin carriers, with either nylon or delrin wheels on metal, delrin, or nylon
axles. Equip each carrier with either stainless steel, chromium plated brass or steel hooks with swivel, or nickel chromium plated brass or stainless steel bead chain and hook assembly, or delrin carriers may have moulded on delrin hooks. Hook for bead chain may be the same material and finish as the bead chain or may be chromium plated steel. Provide 2.2 carriers for every 300 mm (onefoot) of each section of each track length, plus one additional carrier.
C. End Stop Connectors, Ceiling Flanges and Other Accessories: Fabricate from the same material with the
same finish as the tracks or from nylon. D. Hangers and Fittings: Fabricate from the same material with the same finish as the tracks. Hangers may
be round or square for channel tracks and round for tubular tracks. Design fittings to be compatible with design of tracks and to safely transmit the track load to the hangers.
E. At end of each section of track, make provision for insertion and removal of carriers. Design to prevent
accidental removal of carrier. Any operating mechanism shall be removable with common tools. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Exposed Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Stainless steel or chromium/nickel plated brass.
B. Concealed Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Hot-dip galvanized (except in high moisture areas use stainless
steel).
C. Metal Clips: Anchor curtain tracks to exposed grid of lay-in acoustical tile ceilings, with concealed metal (butterfly) type or two piece snap locking type ceiling clip of high strength spring steel. When it is not possible to install the metal ceiling clip, the cubicle curtain track may be screwed to the ceiling grid.
2.03 CURTAIN FABRIC A. Cubicle curtains shall be constructed as follows:
1. Open mesh fabric extend from the track to 6'-6" AFF. Cubicle curtain fabric (see CC-1 on the Finish Schedule on the drawings) shall extend from the bottom of the open mesh fabric to 12" AFF.
2. Color of open mesh fabric shall be selected by Architect. 3. Each cubicle curtain shall consist of a number of 60" wide sections of curtain, each with side and
top snaps. Each cubicle curtain shall be wide enough to fill the full length of the track, plus minimum of 24".
B. Cubicle Curtain Fabric: Provide non-woven, 50% polyester, 50% Trevira CS Bioactive Polyester fabric,
modified with nano-molecular, anti-bacterial and water repellent technologies. Fabric shall be anti-bacterial and stain resistant.
C. Fabric Properties (Open Mesh and Shield Fabric):
1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide Fabrics that conform with NFPA 701, Fire Tests for Flame and Resistant Textiles and Films.
2. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide Fabrics that conform with (CAL19) California Administrative Code Title 19– Public Safety, Section 1237, Flame Resistance, Small Scale Test.
3. Anti-bacterial Properties: Provide fabrics that reduce bacterial growth when tested in accordance with ASTM-E2149.
4. Repellent Properties: Provide Fabrics that repel liquids when tested in accordance with AATCC-22, AATCC-118 and AATCC-193.
SA1509A CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS 10 2123- 3
2.04 FINISHES A. Aluminum: Chemically etched medium matte, with clear anodic coating, Class II Architectural, 0.4 mils
thick. B. Fabric: See Material Schedule on the drawings. 2.05 TRACK FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
B. Form tracks and bends of lengths that will produce the minimum number of joints. Make track sections up
to 4800 mm (16 feet) without joints. Form corner bend on a 300 mm (12 inch) radius.
C. Provide steel anchor plates, supports, and anchors for securing components to building construction.
D. Form flat surface without distortion.
E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Cubicle Curtains and Tracks: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
including the following: 1. Verify that ceilings are suitable for installation prior to installation. 2. Mechanically attach tracks using manufacturer’s recommended anchors and attachment devices. 3. Install accessories and curtains and test for proper operation. Replace damaged units.
B. Install tracks after finish painting and ceiling finishing operations are complete.
C. Install track level and plumb; securely anchor to the ceiling grid to form a rigid installation.
D. Anchor surface mounted curtain tracks directly to exposed grid of lay-in acoustical tile ceilings with
suitable fasteners, spaced approximately 600 mm (24") on center. Do not secure track to light fixtures, diffusers, or radiant ceiling panels.
E. Anchor surface mounted curtain tracks to gypsum board ceilings with a minimum of 3 mm (1/8") diameter fastenings or concealed clips spaced not more than 900 mm (3') on center.
F. Securely fasten end stop caps to prevent their being forced out by the striking weight of carriers.
G. Remove damaged or defective components and replace with new components or repair to the original condition.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE
A. Track shall be installed neat, rigid, plumb, level and true, and securely anchored to the overhead construction.
B. Carrier units shall operate smoothly and easily over the full range of travel.
END OF SECTION 10 2123
SA1509A WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600-1
SECTION 10 2600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and General Provision of the contract, including Division 0 and Division 1 specification sections,
apply to this Section. B. This section includes the following types of wall protection systems:
1. Wall protection, corner guards, chair rails, and handrails. C. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:
1. Blocking in walls for proper support and fastening of wall protection: SECTION 06 1000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY.
2. SECTION 09 2216, METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS. D. Colors shall be as shown in the Finish Schedule on the drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National codes (IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA and Life Safety)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 252 fire test; for door frame protection).
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL-10C positive pressure fire test)
E. California 01350 specification 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Product data and detailed specifications for each system component and installation accessory required,
including installation methods for each type of substrate.
C. Shop drawings showing locations, extent and installation details of door protection products.
D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following samples, as proposed for this work, for verification of color, texture, pattern and thickness:
1. 12" long samples of each product and model specified, including end caps and mounting hardware (where applicable).
E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of each component with requirements indicated.
F. Maintenance data for wall protection system components for inclusion in the operating and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has no less than 3 years experience in installation of door
protection products similar in complexity to those required for this project.
B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the production of specified products and a record of successful in-service performance.
SA1509A WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600-2
C. Code compliance: 1. Assemblies should conform to all applicable codes including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA, Life
Safety and CA 01350. 2. Door protection products should conform to all applicable codes including IBC, UBC, SBCCI,
BOC, Life Safety and CA 01350. D. Fire performance characteristics:
1. Provide engineered PETG wall protection system components with UL label indicating that they are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for Class 1 characteristics listed below: a. Flame spread: 25 or less b. Smoke developed: 450 or less
2. Provide engineered PETG door protection products with an Intertek/Warnock Hersey label indicating that they are identical to those tested in accordance with UL-10C Positive Pressure and NFPA 252.
E. Impact Strength: Provide door protection products that have been tested in accordance with the
applicable provisions of ASTM F476.
F. Chemical and stain resistance: Provide door protection products with chemical and stain resistance in accordance with ASTM D543.
G. Color Match: Provide door protection products that are color matched in accordance with the following: 1. Delta Ecmc of no greater than 1.0 using CIELab color space. (Specifier note: Construction
Specialties' colors are matched under cool white fluorescent lighting and computer controlled within manufacturing tolerances. Color may vary if alternate lighting sources are present.)
H. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall protection system manufactured by the
same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture and physical properties. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to show
manufacturer.
B. Store materials in original, undamaged packaging in a clean, dry place out of direct sunlight and exposure to the elements. A room temperature of 40-100ºF (4-38ºC) should be maintained.
C. Materials must be stored flat. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65-75ºF (18-24ºC) for at least 24 hours prior to
beginning the installation.
B. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before installation commences. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Interior surface protection products specified herein be manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc., or
approved equal.
SA1509A WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600-3
2.02 WALL PROTECTION A. Wall protection shall be Engineered PETG rigid sheet: High impact Acrovyn 4000 with nominal .040"
(1.02mm) thickness and supplied in 4' x 8' or 10' (1.22m x 2.44m or 3.05m) sheet sizes in standard Suede texture.
B. Fabrication
1. General: Fabricate wall protection to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and sizes.
C. Accessories
1. Acrovyn Wall Protection shall be furnished as a complete packaged system, containing all adhesive J-trims, H-trims, inside and outside corner trims, and color-matched caulks (to match Acrovyn). Adhesive shall be water based and non-hazardous. Water based primer is also available for purchase.
2.03 CORNER GUARDS A. Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be high impact Acrovyn 4000 with shadowgrain texture,
nominal .078" (1.98mm) thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per ASTM D543 standards as established by the manufacturer.
B. Fasteners: All fasteners to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum retainers. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the manufacturer.
C. Corner Guards to be Engineered PETG, as discussed in 2.04A. Surface mounted guards consisting of continuous retainer with snap-on Acrovyn 4000 cover. Color matched end caps to be provided for both partial and full height applications. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall construction. 1. Model SSM-20N 90° surface mounted corner guard with 2" (51mm) legs, ¼" radiused cover and
recycled PETG retainer. D. Fabrication
1. General: Fabricate corner guards to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes.
2.04 CHAIR RAILS A. Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be high impact Acrovyn 4000 with shadowgrain texture,
nominal .078" (1.98mm) thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per ASTM D543 standards as established by the manufacturer.
B. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum should be 6063-T6 alloy, nominal .062" (1.57mm) thick clips. Minimum strength and durability properties as specified in ASTM B221.
C. Fasteners: All fasteners to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum retainers. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the manufacturer.
D. Chair rails shall be Engineered PETG, as described in 2.05A. Surface mounted assembly shall consist of aluminum clips with snap-on Acrovyn 4000 cover and integral shock absorbing cushions. End caps shall be mechanically fastened with concealed fasteners. Color matched end caps and corners to be removable for ease of replacement. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall conditions. 1. Model SCR-48N 6" h (152.4mm) surface mounted chair rail. Rail to be mounted with 1-½"
(38.1mm) wide aluminum clips spaced 16" (406.4mm) on center. Clips to contain a continuous recycled PETG cushion for added shock absorption.
E. Fabrication
1. General: Fabricate chair rails to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes.
SA1509A WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600-4
2.05 HANDRAILS A. Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be high impact Acrovyn 4000 with shadowgrain texture,
nominal .078" (1.98mm) thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per ASTM D543 standards as established by the manufacturer.
B. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum should be 6063-T6 alloy, nominal .090" (2.29mm) thick retainer. Minimum strength and durability properties as specified in ASTM B221.
C. Fasteners: All fasteners to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum retainers. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the manufacturer.
D. Handrails shall be Engineered PETG as descrived in 2.07A. Surface mounted assembly shall consist of a continuous extruded aluminum retainer with snap-on Acrovyn 4000 cover and integral shock absorbing cushion where indicated. Color matched end caps and corners shall be attached to allow post installation adjustment. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall construction. 1. Model HRB-10CN 6 1/4" h (158.75mm) handrail/crash rail configuration with matching accent
strip. E. Fabrication
1. General: Fabricate handrails to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes.
2.06 COLORS A. See the Material Schedule on the drawings for colors of all wall and door protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify
conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles.
Perform additional preparation procedures as required by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using
approved adhesive and mounting hardware. Mount all items securely to walls, level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent sections.
B. Temperature at the time of installation must be between 65-75ºF (18-24ºC) and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation, to allow for proper adhesive set up.
C. Relative humidity shall not exceed 80%.
D. Do not expose Acrovyn materials to direct sunlight during or after installation. This will cause the surface temperature to rise, which in turn will cause bubbles and delamination.
E. Refer to the drawings for locations for wall and door protection. All door frames in the project area shall receive door frame protection.
SA1509A WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600-5
3.04 CLEANING A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean door protection products and accessories in
accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning method.
B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of work.
3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed
without leaving residue or permanent stains.
END OF SECTION 10 2600
SA1509A TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-1
SECTION 10 2813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 & Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B. ITEMS FURNISHED BY OWNER & INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR: 1. Toilet tissue holders 2. Soap dispensers 3. Paper Towel Dispensers 4. Hand sanitizer dispensers 5. Sharps containers 6. Blood pressure cuff holders
C. ITEMS FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR:
1. Mirrors 2. Grab bars
1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section.
B. Submit the following in accordance with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1. PRODUCT DATA: a. Installation instructions b. Product description c. Complete dimensioned drawings explaining ALL d. For each item specified
C. SUBSTITUTIONS:
1. Submit product data describing specified item(s) as well as proposed substitution. 2. ARCHITECT WILL NOT REVIEW PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION UNLESS SUBMITTED WITH
PRODUCT DATA FOR SPECIFIED ITEM(S). a. FAILURE TO SUBMIT COMPARATIVE SPECIFIED DATA WILL RESULT IN
REJECTION OF SUBMITTAL. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations.
B. STANDARDS: Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, specified or apply. 1. BRASS:
a) FLAT PRODUCTS: FS QQ-B-613 b) RODS, SHAPES, FORGINGS, FLAT PRODUCTS WITH FINISHED EDGES:
FS-QQ-B-626 2. SHEET STEEL: ASTM A 527, G60 3. GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET: ASTM A 366 4. CHROME PLATING: ASTM B 456 5. MIRROR GLASS: FS DD-G-451, FS-DD-M-411 6. GALVANIZED STEEL MOUNTING DEVICES: ASTM A 153 7. GRAB BARS: ANSI A117.1
SA1509A TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-2
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in original packages, containers, or vapor-proof sealed crates.
B. Protect during delivery to the site.
C. Receive each item with permanent labels for instant identification as follows:
1. Building project name and address 2. Manufacturer's name 3. Product 4. Brand name 5. Catalog number of product
D. Store items in dry area approximate order of use to avoid excessive re-handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply products from the following:
1. Bobrick 2. ASI 3. Approved equal
B. Model numbers listed are Bobrick products (unless noted otherwise) to establish quality only. 2.02 MATERIALS A. GENERAL:
1. STAINLESS STEEL: a. AISI, Type 302/304 b. FINISH: Polished No. 4 c. Unless otherwise indicated
2. BRASS: Cast or forged quality alloy 3. SHEET STEEL:
a. Cold rolled b. Commercial quality c. SURFACE PREPARATION AND METAL PRETREATMENT: As required or applied
finish. 4. CHROME PLATING:
a. Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on metal b. TYPE: SC 2
5. BAKED ENAMEL FINISH: a. Factory applied b. Gloss white c. Baked acrylic enamel coating, over compatible primer coats
6. MIRROR GLASS: a. TYPE 1 b. Quality 1 c. THICKNESS: 1/4" d. Silvercoating e. Copper protective coating f. Non-metallic paint coating
7. GALVANIZED STEEL: Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication
SA1509A TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-3
B. MIRRORS: 1. MODEL: B-290 series. 2. SIZE: 24” W x 36” H W 3. MATERIAL: 22 ga (min) stainless steel channel frame 4. BACK: Metal 5. METAL FINISH: Bright Polish 6. FASTENING: Concealed 7. CORNERS: Mitered 8. GLASS: See 2.02A
C. GRAB BARS (FIXED):
1. MODEL NUMBER: B-5806 series 2. Provide where shown on drawings 3. MATERIAL: Stainless steel 4. FINISH: Satin with peened gripping surface 5. DIAMETER: 1 1/4" o.d 6. THICKNESS: 18 gauge 7. MOUNTING: Concealed with snap-on flange 8. CONCEALED MOUNTING FLANGE: 1/8" thick 9. SNAP-ON FLANGE: 22-gauge stainless steel with satin finish 10. SIZES AND SHAPES: As shown or required
D. SWING-UP GRAB BAR
1. MODEL NUMBER: B-4998 2. Provide where indicated on the Drawings 3. Locate 15¾" from centerline of watercloset 4. MATERIAL: 18 gauge, 1¼" diameter, stainless steel grab bar; 3/16" stainless steel backplate. 5. OPERATION: Manual; when raised, counterweight prevents bar from falling from upright position
to horizontal position. 6. MOUNTING/SUPPORT: Mounting plate is secured to concealed structural channel with
screws/bolts. 7. Dimensions: Grab bars extend 29" from wall in horizontal position; 8¾" from wall in upright
position. 2.03 FABRICATION A. GENERAL:
1. Use unobtrusive stamped logo of manufacturer only, as approved by Architect, on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units.
2. Provide additional identification by means of either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate. a. Indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. b. On interior surface not exposed to view. c. Or on back surface.
3. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. 4. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. 5. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. 6. Unless noted otherwise. 7. Provide locks where indicated, with the same keying for each type of accessory unit in the
project, wherever possible. a. Furnish a minimum of 4 keys for each lock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect substrates to ensure that surfaces are in condition ready for application of toilet room
accessories.
SA1509A TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-4
3.02 PREPARATION A. SURFACES:
1. Dry and clean 2. Free from all foreign matter
B. Starting of application signifies acceptance of surface and surrounding conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install units plumb and level
B. Conform with manufacturer's printed specifications subject to Architect's approval
C. Firmly anchor units at heights and locations indicated 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation
B. Verify that mechanisms function smoothly
C. Replace damaged or defective items 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect all installed work from damage until acceptance of the building project.
B. Repair damaged work to meet approval of the Architect
END OF SECTION 10 2813
SA1509A FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4413-1
SECTION 10 4413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers recessed fire extinguishers and cabinets.
B. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including Division 0 and Division 1 specification
sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3400 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Fire extinguishers and cabinets including installation instruction and
rough opening required. 1.03 APPLICATION PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): D4802-02 Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINET A. Fire Extinguisher: Standard 10 # ABC Type, FM approved or UL-rated. B. Cabinet: Recessed type with flat trim of size and design shown. Larsen "Occult" series, or approved
equal. 2.02 CABINET FABRICATION A. Form body of cabinet from 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick sheet steel.
B. Rough Opening Size: Approximately 24½"H x 10"W x 6¼"D
C. Fabricate door and trim from 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick sheet steel with all face joints fully welded and
ground smooth. 1. Glaze doors with 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick ASTM D4802, clear acrylic sheet, Category B-1, Finish 1;
vision panel in door shall be approximately 3"W x 18"H. 2. Design doors to open 180 degrees. 3. Provide continuous hinge, satin aluminum pull handle, and adjustable roller catch. 4. Lettering: Vertical layout, red die-cut letters "Fire Extinguisher."
2.03 CABINET FINISH A. Finish interior of cabinet body with baked-on semigloss white enamel.
B. Finish door, frame with manufacturer's standard baked-on white finish coat.
SA1509A FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4413-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install fire extinguisher cabinets level and plumb in prepared openings and secure in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinet so that bottom of cabinet 24 inches above finished floor.
END OF SECTION 10 4413
SA1509A LOCKERS 10 5000-1
SECTION 10 5000 - LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. General Provisions of the contract, including DIVISION 0 & DIVISION 1 specification sections, apply to
this section B. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Work supplied and installed: a. Lockers
1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit the following in accordance with SECTION 01 3400 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1. PRODUCT DATA: a. Technical data and installation instructions for materials specified. b. LOCKERS:
1) Fastening and anchoring details for each type of installation 2) Metal gauges, fillers, locking details, etc. 3) Plan(s)
2. SHOP DRAWINGS: a. LOCKERS:
1) Fastening and anchoring details for each type of installation 2) Metal gauges, fillers, hardware details, etc. 3) Structural support
3. SAMPLES: a. Full range of color samples for each item
1) Include any exposed accessories and trim. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4214 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations. B. STANDARDS:
1. Comply with provisions of the current edition of the following, except where more stringent requirements are shown, specified or apply. a. METAL FINISHES: NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual".
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. GENERAL:
1. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers. 2. CLEARLY LABEL WITH:
a. Identification of manufacturer b. Brand name c. Quality or grade d. Fire hazard classification (if any) e. Lot number
3. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area 4. PROTECT FROM:
a. Weather b. Moisture c. Soiling
SA1509A LOCKERS 10 5000-2
d. Extreme temperatures e. Humidity
5. Lay flat 6. Block off ground to prevent sagging and warping. 7. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and
handling requirements. 1.05 COORDINATION A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Check actual conditions, sizes, and openings by accurate field measurements
before fabrication.
B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply products from the following:
1. LOCKERS: a. Republic Storage Systems b. Lyons Workspace Products c. Salsbury Industries d. Approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS A. LOCKERS:
1. DOUBLE-TIER LOCKERS: a. SIZE: 12" W. x 12" D. x 72” H (Two 12” x 12” x 36” H lockers, stacked) b. MATERIAL: Prime cold rolled steel c. BODY COMPONENTS:
1) Tops, bottoms, sides, backs, and shelves 2) THICKNESS: 16 gauge 3) TOPS, BOTTOMS, AND SHELVES:
a) Single flanges - three sides b) Double bend on front end of shelves
d. FASTENERS: Zinc or cadmium-plated e. DOOR FRAMES:
1) 16-gauge channel formation 2) Securely weld to form rigid, one-piece structure 3) VERTICAL MEMBERS: Fabricate with additional flange forming continuous door
strike. 4) RUBBER BUMPERS:
a) At continuous vertical frame at top and bottom b) To ensure quiet operation
f. DOORS: 1) One piece
a) 14-gauge b) With 7/8" bend at top and bottom
g. VENTILATION: 6" wide louvers at top and bottom of doors h. CLOSURE:
1) Door to be held closed by 16-gauge zinc or cadmium-plated friction catch. a) Mount finger pull in recessed pan.
2) LOCK: Locker to accept padlock by others. i. RECESSED LOCKER HANDLE:
1) Chrome-plated die-cast zinc 2) NOMINAL SIZE: 4 1/8" W. x 6 1/16" H. x 1 1/4" D. 3) Seat thru cutout in outer door
SA1509A LOCKERS 10 5000-3
4) Conceal by inner door panel 5) PERIMETER FLANGE:
a) SIZE: 3/8" minimum b) To eliminate sharp edges c) To provide clean appearance 6) MOUNTING: Rivets positioned to provide maximum security for vandal
resistance. j. HINGES:
1) TYPE: Five knuckle pin 2) LENGTH: 2" minimum 3) Securely weld to frame 4) Rivet to door with two fasteners minimum 5) QUANTITY:
a) DOORS UP TO 42": Two b) DOORS OVER 42”: Three
k. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT: 1) Shelf 2) (3) single-prong wall hooks
l. NUMBER PLATES: 1) Polished aluminum 2) SIZE: 3/8" H minimum 3) NUMBERS: Etched on black background 4) ATTACHMENT: Pop rivets 5) NUMBERING SEQUENCE: Coordinate with owner
m. HARDWARE: 1) MATERIAL: Zinc or cadmium-plated 2) ATTACHMENTS: 9" o.c. for secure, torsion-free construction
n. FINISH: 1) Prepare all parts for painting.
a) Five stage degreasing, cleaning and phosphorating treatment. 2) Electrostatically spray parts with high-grade enamel. 3) Cure by baking 20 minutes at 325 4) COLOR (Provide chart):
a) INTERIOR BODY PARTS: To be selected. b) EXPOSED BODY PARTS: To be selected from manufacturer's 100
premier colors. o. TOPS: Continuous and sloping. p. RECESS TRIM: As required for proper installation. q. BASES: Solid – built by Contractor. r. Provide all fillers, end panels, closures, fasteners and anchors necessary for a complete
and finished installation. s. MODEL: Quiet lockers by Republic Storage System, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect substrates and adjacent and surrounding conditions before installing products described under
this section.
B. Proceeding with installation will signify acceptance of conditions affecting the work of this section.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Take field measurements before fabricating where possible.
SA1509A LOCKERS 10 5000-4
B. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
C. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:
1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Install products plumb, level and true to line. 3. Install trim, hardware, grounds, clips and accessories necessary for a complete installation. 4. Use concealed anchorage wherever possible.
B. LOCKERS:
1. Anchor locker units to bases. 2. Anchor sides and backs to walls if adjacent. 3. Use tamper-proof fasteners. 4. Touch up finish of units whenever necessary until completion of project.
3.04 ADJUSTING A. GENERAL:
1. Verify that products have been properly installed. 2. Verify that operating units function properly. 3. Adjust as required. 4. Touch up damaged finish upon completion of installation.
3.05 CLEANING A. GENERAL:
1. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Avoid use of abrasive cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's personnel.
B. Deliver operation/maintenance manuals to Owner. 3.07 PROTECTION A. GENERAL:
1. Protect installed units against damage during construction period. 2. Ensure that products will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 3. Correct nonconforming, damaged units. 4. Replace units that cannot be field corrected.
END OF SECTION 10 5000
SA1509A ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 4813 - 1
SECTION 12 4813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
Part 1 General 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following types of entrance flooring systems:
1. Floor Grids & Frame Assemblies B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:
1. Grouting frames into recess; refer to SECTIONS 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2. Special requirements of various flooring types; refer to SECTION 09 3000 - CERAMIC TILE
3. Plumbing: Connection to floor drain; refer to DIVISION 22 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. The Aluminum Association C. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) D. The National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI)
E. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) F. Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute (C2C) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and DIVISION 1
SPECIFICATION SECTION 01 3400. B. Product data for each type of floor grid and frame specified, including manufacturer's
specifications and installation instructions. C. Shop drawings in sufficient detail showing layout of grid and frame specified including details
indicating construction relative to materials, direction of traffic, spline locations, profiles, anchors and accessories.
D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit an assembled section of floor grid and frame members
with selected tread insert showing each type of color for exposed floor grid, frame and accessories required.
E. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and maintaining floor grids.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical Radiant Flux, minimum 0.45
watts/m2.
SA1509A ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 4813 - 2
Slip resistance in accordance with ASTM D-2047-96, Coefficient of Friction, minimum 0.60 for accessible routes.
B. Standard rolling load performance is 400 lb./wheel with larger loading requirements as specified
(load applied to a solid 5” x 2” wide polyurethane wheel, 1000 passes without damage). C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor grids and frames from one source of a single
manufacturer.
D. Utilize superior structural aluminum alloys 6105-T5 & 6016-T6for rail components.
E. Utilize a manufacturer that is ISO 9001 & 14001 certified.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections and
assemblies as practical, in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to identify manufacturer.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Check actual openings for grids by accurate field measurements
before fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
B. RECESSED CONDITIONS: IMPORTANT: Coordination with DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
SPECIFICATIONS is required. For proper installation, the concrete recess must be flat and smooth throughout. If the recess is formed by a concrete contractor, the pour dimensions may require leveling grout to achieve the proper depth and a smooth finish. The final recess depth will match the specified product and must be field verified. For proper frame installation, the side walls of the concrete recess must also be straight and smooth. Inconsistencies with the recess and side walls must be remediated prior to product installation.
Part 2 Products 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Drawings and specifications are based on manufacturer's literature from Construction
Specialties, Inc. unless otherwise indicated. Other manufacturers must comply with the minimum levels of material and detailing indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum - ASTM B 221, alloy 6105-T5 for rail extrusions and 6061-T6 for key lock bars. B. Tread insert options - refer to SECTION 2.05. 2.03 FLOOR GRIDS A. MODEL AND DESCRIPTION - G1 Pedigrid- Cradle 2 Cradle Silver certified (carpet insert only).
Shall be extruded 6105-T5 aluminum alloy tread rails joined mechanically by extruded 6106-T6 aluminum alloy key lock bars. (welding or bolting shall not be permitted.) Rail finish to be mill (standard). Choose from anodized or heavy-duty powder coat finish.
2.04 GRID FRAMES A. LBDP - LEVEL BASE FRAME WITH DRAIN PAN shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with 1/2"
(12.7mm) exposed surface and a depth of 1-13/16" (46.0mm). These assemblies receive 1/4"
SA1509A ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 4813 - 3
(6.4mm) thick heavy gauge TPE support cushions 1" (25.4mm) long mounted to each continuous foot at 24"(0.61m) on center. These assemblies shall also include a 2" (50.8mm) I.P.S. PVC drain, stainless steel strainer and a 16-gauge aluminum pan provided by manufacturer. Frame color shall be supplied in mill (standard) or one of 9 optional colors as offered by manufacturer. Choose from anodized or heavy-duty powder coat finish. Note: Mill finish frames in contact with wet concrete to be primer coated.
2.05 TREAD INSERT A. HD – MONOTUFT HD™ CARPET shall meet CRI standard for good indoor air quality. Fibers
shall include a minimum of 100, 12 mil monofilament fibers per square inch. Available in one of 21 standard colors as offered by manufacturer. Each carpet fiber and monofilament shall be fusion-bonded to a rigid two-ply backing to prevent fraying and supplied in continuous splicefree lengths. Anti-static carpet fibers shall contain antimicrobial additive and be treated with Scotchgard® to reduce soiling. Carpet weight shall be 33-oz./yd².
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed
and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of irregular shaped grid
assemblies to ensure a proper installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Set grid at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action. C. Coordinate top of grid surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across to provide ample
clearance between door and grid. 3.04 CLEANING A. It is important to the life cycle of the entrance mat that a maintenance schedule be developed
which includes regular vacuuming and extraction that correctly matches the amount of traffic the mat incurs.
3.05 PROTECTION A. After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of
plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and project is near time of substantial completion.
B. Defer installation of floor grids until time of substantial completion of project.
END SECTION 12 4813
SA1509A WINDOW SHADES 12 4920-1
SECTION 12 4920 - WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. General Provisions of the contract, including DIVISION 0 & DIVISION 1 specification sections, apply to
this section B. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Work supplied and installed: a. WINDOW TREATMENT:
1) Shades 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete information on materials to be supplied and/or installed under this section. B. Submit the following in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SECTION 01 3400 –
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. PRODUCT DATA:
a. Technical data and installation instructions for materials specified. 1) Shades
2. Shop drawings 3. SAMPLES:
a. Full range of color samples for each item 1) Include any exposed accessories and trim.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: See SECTION 01 4000 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS for
applicable standards/abbreviations 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. GENERAL:
1. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers. 2. CLEARLY LABEL WITH:
a. Identification of manufacturer b. Brand name c. Quality or grade d. Fire hazard classification (if any) e. Lot number
3. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area 4. PROTECT FROM:
a. Weather b. Moisture c. Soiling d. Extreme temperatures e. Humidity
5. Lay flat 6. Block off ground to prevent sagging and warping 7. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and
handling requirements.
SA1509A WINDOW SHADES 12 4920-2
1.06 COORDINATION A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Check actual conditions, sizes, and openings by accurate field measurements
before fabrication. B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s 5-year warranty (labor and materials) for clutch operating mechanism: B. Provide manufacturer’s 1-year warranty for all other materials and labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, supply products from the following:
1. SHADES: a. Draper Shade and Screen Co. Inc. b. Charles W. Rice & Company, Inc. c. Approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS A. SHADES:
1. Manual flex shades by Draper. 2. OPERATION: Spring roller
a. Institutional quality b. SPRINGS: 1 1/4" diameter (minimum) heavy-duty
3. ROLLERS: a. MATERIAL: 6063-TS aluminum extruded tube b. SIZE: As recommended by manufacturer c. Capable of accommodating 6'-0" minimum fabric height
4. ROLLER BOX: a. COLOR: White enamel.
5. FABRIC: a. Series SW2600. b. COLOR: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range c. MATERIAL: Vinyl coated fiberglass yarn woven in a 2 x 2 basket weave d. WEIGHT: 15 oz. per square yard e. THICKNESS: .020" f. Flame-retardant g. WEAVE: 1% open
6. SLAT BAR: a. MATERIAL: 6063-T5 Aluminum custom extruded shape b. Wall thickness: .060"
7. MOUNTING BRACKETS: a. MATERIAL: 1018 Steel Stamping with zinc dichromate finish b. SIZE: As recommended by manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect substrates and adjacent and surrounding conditions before installing products described under
this section. B. Proceeding with installation will signify acceptance of conditions affecting the work of this section.
SA1509A WINDOW SHADES 12 4920-3
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Take field measurements before fabricating where possible. B. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of
anchorages which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. C. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL:
1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Install products plumb, level and true to line. 3. Install trim, hardware, grounds, clips and accessories necessary for a complete installation. 4. Use concealed anchorage wherever possible.
B. SHADES:
1. Position units, secure, and at proper height and location relative to adjoining window units and other related work.
2. Securely anchor units with clips, brackets, and anchorages suited to type of substrate. 3. Provide clearance between sash and shades to permit unencumbered operation of sash
hardware. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. GENERAL:
1. Verify that products have been properly installed. 2. Verify that operating units function properly. 3. Adjust as required. 4. Touch up damaged finish upon completion of installation.
3.05 CLEANING A. GENERAL:
1. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Avoid use of abrasive cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's personnel. B. Deliver operation/maintenance manuals to Owner. 3.07 PROTECTION A. GENERAL:
1. Protect installed units against damage during construction period. 2. Ensure that products will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 3. Correct nonconforming, damaged units. 4. Replace units that cannot be field corrected.
3.08 LOCATIONS A. Provide manual shades on all exterior windows & interior borrowed lights
END OF SECTION 12 4920
SA1509A WINDOW SHADES 12 4920-4
SA1509A SOUND INSOLATION 13 4800-1
SECTION 13 4800 - SOUND ISOLATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient Sound Isolation Clipstm (RSIC) Installed with drywall furring channels for support of gypsum
board for noise control (de-coupling) in walls and ceilings. B. Green Glue Damping Compound (GGDC) for isolating sound and vibration between layers of gypsum
board. C. Green Glue Noise-proofing Sealant (GGNS) for acoustically sealing cracks and joints in walls. D. Mass Loaded Vinyl (MLV) sound barrier installed on metal framing to reduce sound transmission through
walls. E. Firestop Putty Pads (FPP) installed around junction boxes to minimize sound transmission. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. SECTION 07 2100 - BUILDING INSULATION. B. SECTION 07 9005 - JOINT SEALERS. C. SECTION 08 7100 - HARDWARE. D. SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD. E. SECTION 09 2216 – METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. B. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. C. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-
Attached Gypsum Panel Products. D. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. F. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. G. ASTM D 573 - Standard Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration in an Air Oven. H. ASTM D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. I. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. J. UL Fire Resistance Directory. www.ul.com
K. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
L. ASTM E814 – Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Dead or Shear Load: Allowable Design Load of thirty six (36) pounds per each Resilient Sound Isolation
Cliptm (RSIC) B. Conform to UL Fire Resistance Directory design assemblies, where required. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with SECTION 01 3400 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
1. Resilient Sound Isolation Clipstm (RSIC) & Fasteners. 2. Green Glue Damping Compound. 3. Green Glue Noise-proofing Sealant. 4. Mass Loaded Vinyl. 5. Firestop Putty Pads.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT SOUND INSOLATION CLIPS (RSIC) A. Manufacturer: PAC International, Inc., Las Vegas, NV 89128. Toll Free (866) RSIC-100 (866) 774-2100.
Phone (503) 649-7700. Fax (503) 649-2710. Web Site www.pac- intl.com. E-Mail [email protected], or approved equal
B. Construction:
1. Rubber Isolator: a. Natural organic or man made rubber compounds. b. Molded to isolate ferrule from clip. c. Minimum of 12 micro-vibration controlling pedestals at point of contact with framing
member. d. Manufactured to ASTM D 2000, M2 AA 510 A13, which includes:
1) Hardness, ASTM D 2240, Shore A: 45. 2) Modulus 300 Percent, ASTM D 412, Die C: 5.3 MPa. 3) Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412, Die C: 11.2 MPa. 4) Elongation at Break, ASTM D 573: 454 percent.
2. Clip: Galvanized or aluminum-zinc coated steel, 18 gauge. 3. Ferrule: Zinc-electroplated steel. 4. Projection: 1-5/8 inches from supporting structure, including properly installed 7/8-inch drywall
B. Mechanical Fasteners: 1. Type: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws. Steel, ASTM C 1002. Galvanized coating, plated, or oil-
phosphate coated, ASTM B 633, as needed for required corrosion resistance. 2. Resilient Sound Isolation Cliptm Connections:
a. To Steel Framing Members (20 Gauge through 12 Gauge): Screws 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum length; #8 minimum shank; Type S (fine thread); self-drilling tip; bugle- , wafer-, or hex-head screws of equal or greater size. 1) Minimum Allowable Pullout and Shear: 108 pounds.
3. Drywall Furring Channel Lap Joint Connection, Steel to Steel: Framing screws, button head, 7/16 inch (11 mm) minimum length, #6 minimum shank, needle point, Phillips drive or greater, or double-wire tie with 18 gauge tie wire.
2.02 GREEN GLUE DAMPING COMPOUND (GGDC): A. Available from Acoustical Solutions, 2420 Grenoble Road, Richmond, VA 23294: Phone: (800) 782-5742;
Website: www.acousticalsolutions.com . B. 28 oz Tubes. C. Fire Rating: Class 1 per ASTM E84 D. Mold Resistant. E. Isolates sound and vibration when installed between 2 layers of gypsum board (GWB). 2.03 GREEN GLUE NOISE-PROOFING SEALANT (GGNS): A. Available from Acoustical Solutions, 2420 Grenoble Road, Richmond, VA 23294: Phone: (800) 782-5742;
Website: www.acousticalsolutions.com . B. 28 oz Tubes. C. An acoustical sealant used to seal joints and cracks in walls. 2.04 MASS LOADED VINYL (MLV): Audioseal Sound Barrier: A. Available from Acoustical Solutions, 2420 Grenoble Road, Richmond, VA 23294: Phone: (800) 782-5742;
Website: www.acousticalsolutions.com . B. Thickness: ¼” (2 pounds/SF). C. STC: 31 or greater. D. A sound barrier, applied to studs, which reduces airborne sound transmission through walls. 2.05 FIRESTOP PUTTY PADS (FPP): A. Available from Acoustical Solutions, 2420 Grenoble Road, Richmond, VA 23294: Phone: (800) 782-5742;
Website: www.acousticalsolutions.com . B. Sizes: 7 ¼” x 7 ¼” x 3/16” for single junction boxes; 9” x 9” x 3/16” for double junction boxes. C. Meets ASTM E814 requirement. D. STC: 62 or greater per AST ME 90. E. Flexible pads with a poly liner on both faces, used to provide an acoustical seal around electrical and
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive materials. Notify Architect if areas are not acceptable. Do not begin installation
until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Flanking Noise:
1. Review installation details to prevent structure-borne flanking noise. 2. Do not allow drywall furring channels or gypsum board to contact foreign materials, including
floors, ceilings, or wall framing members. B. Gypsum Board:
1. Install gypsum board in vertical or horizontal position with 1/8-inch (3-mm) to 1/4-inch (6- mm) gap around perimeter for acoustical sealant application.
2. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 as specified in Section 09 2116. 3.03 INSTALLATION - RSIC A. Install Resilient Sound Isolation Clipstm (RSIC) and drywall furring channels in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. B. Screw-attach Resilient Sound Isolation Clipstm (RSIC) to studs. C. Space Resilient Sound Isolation Cliptm (RSIC) at maximum of 24 inches (600 mm) by 24 inches on center
for walls. D. Splicing Drywall Furring Channels: lap 6” and securing with 2 screws.
E. Ensure the center metal ferrule of the Resilient Sound Isolation Cliptm (RSIC) is in firm contact with the
structural member 1. Locate splices between resilient sound isolation clips.
G. Locate first drywall furring channel parallel to floor and maximum of 3 inches (75 mm) above floor and 1
drywall furring channel maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling. 3.04 INSTALLATION – GGDC A. Install Green Glue Damping Compound (GGDC) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Ensure that the work area is well ventilated before starting application. C. Apply GGDC with a standard caulk gun. D. Cut the tip of the tub 1/8” to 3/8”. Apply to GWB. Covering approximately 80% of the board, in a random
pattern. Leave a 2-3” border around the edges of the GWB. Use 1-2 tubes of GGDC for each 4’ x 8’ sheet of GWB.
E. GGDC camp be applied (vertically) to the 1st layer of GWB which has already been secured to the studs;
it can also be applied (horizontally) to the 2nd layer of GWB prior to installation. F. Withn 15 minutes of applying GGDC, screw the 2nd layer of GWB through the first layer and into the
studs/furring channels (GGDC dries in 15 minutes).
SA1509A SOUND INSOLATION 13 4800-5
3.05 INSTALLATION – GGNS A. Install Green Glue Noise-proofing Sealant (GGNS) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Ensure that the work area is well ventilated before starting application. C. Apply GGNS with a standard caulk gun. D. Cut the tip of the tube to approximately ¼”. E. Apply GGNS to :
1. The perimeter of all acoustic walls (the joints between the GWB and the floor, the roof deck, and adjacent walls); be sure to maintain a 1/8” to ¼” joint at the perimeter of acoustic walls (Wall Type 3).
2. Joints between GWB and junction boxes, conduit, cable, or ductwork. 3. Joints between GWB and door frames. 4. Other locations as noted in the drawings.
F. Tool exposed joints smooth and concave. 3.06 INSTALLATION – MLV A. Install Mass Loaded Vinyl (MLV) sound barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Screw MLV to metal framing. Ensure that MLV is flat, without folds, tears, or overlaps. Provide framing
members to support all MLV edges. C. Install GWB over MLV, being careful not to tear or puncture MLV. 3.07 INSTALLATION – FPP A. Install Firestop Putty Pads (FPP) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install FPP after junction boxes are installed on studs but before GWB is installed. C. Remove poly liner from 1 side of the FPP. D. Wrap back, sides, top, and bottom of junction box with FPP. FPP shall overlap the front edges of the
junction box so that the FPP will be compressed and sealed airtight when the GWB is installed. E. Cut slits as necessary in the FPP to accommodate conduit/cables. F. Press FPP to surfaces of the junction box. Trim excess as necessary. Ensure that FPP is airtight and all
voids/joints/gaps are sealed. 3.08 CLEAN-UP A. Remove unwanted GGDC and GGNS from surfaces before they dry. B. Use Goof-Off or similar citrus-bases solvents to remove unwanted material
END OF SECTION 13 4800
SA1509A RADIATION SHIELDING 13 4900 - 1
SECTION 13 49 00 - RADIATION SHIELDING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and CONTRACT CONDITIONS as listed
in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section consists of the following shielding materials where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. Work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install the following:
a. Lead sheet and plate lead b. Lead bricks c. Borated Polyethylene d. High density concrete shielding e. Modular concrete shielding system
2. Daily and final cleaning of Work of this Section.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
B. Section 09 9100 - PAINTING: Field-applied prime and finish coatings.
C. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING: Supply and return air registers. D. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL: Electrical boxes and receptacles. E. Section 03 3000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Installation of anchors into concrete, placing
concrete slabs and walls. F. Section 08 3450 – NEUTRON / RADIATION SHIELDING BI-PARTING SLIDE DOORS 1.04 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in
this Section. 1. American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists – Industrial Ventilation
Manual. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. ASTM B 29 – Standard Specification for Refined Lead. b. ASTM E 90 – Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. c. ASTM E 119 – Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. d. ASTM A 109 - Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon (0.25 Maximum
Percent), Cold-Rolled. e. ASTM A 415 - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets,
Commercial. f. ASTM A 568 - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon and High Strength Low
Alloy Hot Rolled Strip, and Cold Rolled Sheet.
SA1509A RADIATION SHIELDING 13 4900 - 2
g. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
h. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
i. ASTM A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): ISO 9001:2008. 4. National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP):
a. NCRP Report No. 147 – Structural Shielding for Medical X-Ray Imaging Facilities.
5. U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1025 – Lead. b. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926 – Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. c. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.62 – Lead. d. CAL-OSHA Title 8 Sec 1532.1, Sec 5198, and Sec 5216
6. All applicable federal, state, and municipal codes, laws, and regulations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 3400 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Product data on all radiation shielding materials, performance data, physical
properties, and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. a. Include material characteristics, size limitations, and special application
requirements. 2. Certifications:
a. Manufacturer's written certification stating that the radiation shielding materials and all related items to be furnished hereunder, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section and are in compliance with Physicist of Record report(s), and that the applicator is qualified and approved to install the materials in accordance with manufacturer's product data.
b. Installer certifications for OSHA 29 CFR 1926. 3. Shop drawings: Manufacturer’s standard design details of critical intersections within
assemblies and complete installation details where the shielding materials will interface with work of other sections.
B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 7000 - CLOSEOUT.
1. Manufacturer’s ISO 9001:2008 field quality control reports of field inspections, including manufacturer’s final punch list.
2. Manufacturer’s warranties: Include coverage of installation for compliance with shielding requirements based on Physicist of Record report(s).
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards and existing materials, and existing methods of construction.
B. Installers: 1. Installers, foreman, and job supervisors for the Work of this Section shall be trained by,
and approved by, product manufacturer. Foreman and job supervisors shall be certified by manufacturer to have not less than 5 years experience in the installation of neutron / radiation shielding.
2. All construction workers, foreman, and job supervisors for the work of this section shall have a minimum certification of 10 hours of OSHA training in occupational safety and health.
SA1509A RADIATION SHIELDING 13 4900 - 3
1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver items to the site, until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. Do not deliver items to the site, until facility is enclosed, weather-tight, and an ambient temperature above 50 degrees Fahrenheit can be maintained by General Contractor.
B. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name identification of manufacturer or supplier.
C. General Contractor is responsible to store materials inside, under cover and in manner to keep
them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
D. Handle shielding materials so to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
E. Provide protection against contamination during handling, storage, and installation procedures. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing
work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Specified Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design, and function, desired drawings
and specifications have been based on “Radiation Shielding” as manufactured by NELCO, 800 West Cummings Park, Suite 3950, Woburn, MA 01801, www.nelco-usa.com (telephone 800-635-2613).
B. Alternative products (substitutions): Contractor must furnish appropriate and complete product data, proof of ISO 9001:2008 certification, worker OSHA certifications, environmental characteristics, and sample warranty with bid for the Architect to consider the substitutions as “equal” to the manufacturer, product specified and quality assurance requirements. Further additional information may be requested by the Architect for determination that the proposed product substitution is fully equal to the specified products. There is no guarantee that proposed substitutions will be approved, and the Contractor is hereby directed not to order any materials until said approval(s) are received in writing. 1. Requesting substitutions is at the Contractor’s own risk, with regard to uncompensated
delays of the Project. Time is required for sufficient review and for additional requests of information. Delays of work which result from substitution reviews and resubmissions are not grounds for additional time or cost change orders, and will not be considered by the Owner.
C. Lead sheet and lead plate 1. Lead sheet: Conforming to ASTM B 29 in uniform thickness(es) as required by Physicist
of Record report(s).
D. Lead brick 1. Conforming to ASTM B-29, NELCO product “N-Series Interlocking Lead Brick”, Solid cast
lead bricks with tongue and groove edges composed of 99.5 percent pure lead and 0.5 percent antimony, 4 inches [101.6mm] tall by 12 inches [304.8mm] wide by thickness required for shielding based on Physicist of Record report(s).
E. Borated polyethylene 1. High-density polyethylene consisting of polyethylene and 5 percent boric oxide in green
color as specified by Physicist of Record report(s).
F. High density concrete shielding 1. Provide high density “N-Loc” interlocking concrete masonry units equal to NELCO “High
Density Concrete Block” comprised of portland cement, sand, water, and manufacturer’s proprietary aggregate. a. Compressive strength: 2,800 pounds per square inch minimum. b. Size: 6 inches high by 6 inches wide by 12 inches deep. c. Provide in density as required by Physicist of Record report(s):
1) 145 pounds per cubic foot. 2) 240 pounds per cubic foot. 3) 288 pounds per cubic foot.
2. Mortar 1) Mortar: Site-mixed portland cement mortar complying with ASTM C 270
as specified herein. 2) Mortar materials:
a) Portland cement for masonry conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I, non-staining, without air entrainment.
b) Aggregates for mortar: Clean sand, washed uniformly well graded, conforming to ASTM C 144, except use aggregate with 100 percent passing a No. 16 sieve.
c) Microsilica: Dry densified amorphous silica powder complying with ASTM C 1240.
d) Provide as 5 percent of cementitious materials. e) Lime: Approved brand of plastic hydrated lime, conforming to
ASTM C 207, Type “S”. f) Water: Clean and fresh without contaminants.
3. Mixing mortars 1) General: Mix mortar and grout in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM C270. a) Control batching procedure to ensure proper proportions by
measuring materials by volume. Amount of mixing water and mortar consistency shall be controlled by mason.
b) Control batch sizes to allow for use within manufacturer’s recommended pot life.
c) Retempering will be permitted only within the first two hours of initial mix or shorter times as directed by manufacturers.
d) Discard all mortar and grout which exceeds the time limits allowed by the manufacturer Discard mortar that has partially set.
2) Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before mixing process.
G. Modular concrete shielding system 1. Provide high density interlocking concrete block modular shielding system equal to
NELCO “MegaShield™ Modular Concrete Block System” comprised of portland cement, sand, water, and manufacturer’s proprietary aggregate. a. Compressive strength: 4,000 pounds per square inch minimum. b. Size:
1) 2 feet high by 6 feet wide by 2 feet deep. 2) 2 feet high by 5 feet wide by 2 feet deep. 3) 2 feet high by 4 feet wide by 2 feet deep. 4) 2 feet high by 3 feet wide by 2 feet deep. 5) 2 feet high by 2 feet wide by 2 feet deep. 6) Other sizes available upon request
c. Provide in density as required by Physicist of Record report(s): 1) 145 pounds per cubic foot. 2) Other densities available upon request.
SA1509A RADIATION SHIELDING 13 4900 - 5
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Obtain radiation shielding materials and accessories from a single ISO 9001: 2008 certified manufacturer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that all items which are to be enclosed by Work of this Section have been permanently
installed, inspected, and approved. B. Inspect framing, ceiling framing, foundations, and other substrates; verify that they are in proper
condition to receive the work of this Section. C. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and in compliance with these
specifications and applicable codes. D. Inspect glazing receiving surfaces and ensure that they are dry and free from dust, or other
foreign materials before glazing. E. Check all openings, prior to glazing, to make certain that the opening is square, plumb and
secure in order that uniform face and edge clearances are maintained. F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION
A. During the operation of work of this Section, protect existing work against damage by the exercise
of reasonable care and precautions. Repair all existing materials which are damaged by Work of this Section, to match original profiles and finishes. Existing materials repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work to match existing.
B. Foundations: 1. Do not commence installation until foundations are clean, rough, and level. 2. Sandblast the foundation tops, if necessary, and remove all laitance and foreign material.
C. Installer specializing in applying the work of this Section with a minimum of 5 consecutive years
documented experience demonstrating previous successful work of the type specified herein. 3.03 INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Install all shielding material as dictated by approved shop drawings. Where built-in items
penetrate shielding provide additional shielding as required to maintain full continuity of barrier. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF RADIATION SHIELDING MATERIALS
A. High density concrete shielding
1. General: Interlocking high density concrete masonry vault system shall be installed by the manufacturer’s trained installers as indicated on the approved shop drawings.
B. Modular concrete shielding system 1. Interlocking high density modular vault system shall be installed by the manufacturer’s
trained installers according to the approved shop drawings.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and physicist testing to be performed under separate contract with Owner.
SA1509A RADIATION SHIELDING 13 4900 - 6
3.06 CLEANING
A. General: Clean work under provisions of Section 01 7100 - EXECUTION. 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools, equipment
and all rubbish and debris from the work area.
B. Daily clean work areas by disposing of debris, scraps, and lead. Vacuum floor surfaces with HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air filter) vacuum in compliance with OSHA Standard 1926.62.
C. After completion of the work of this Section, remove rubbish, tools and equipment, and clean all
wall, partition, and floor areas free from deposits of lead, and other materials installed under this Section. Vacuum surfaces with HEPA vacuum in compliance with OSHA Standard 1926.62.
3.07 PROTECTION
D. General Contractor is responsible to protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS AND 01 5200 – PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK..
END OF SECTION 13 4900
SA1509A SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517-1
SECTION 21 0517 – SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.
D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
SA1509A SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517-2
3. Connecting B olts a nd Nuts: C arbon s teel, w ith c orrosion-resistant c oating, o f le ngth required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.03 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space be tween s leeve and p iping or pi ping insulation; u se joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.
SA1509A SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517-3
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.03SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION 21 0517
SA1509A ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 0518 - 1
SECTION 21 0518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Escutcheons.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company. 2. Dearborn Brass. 3. Keeney Manufacturing Company (The).
2.02 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Stainless-Steel Type: With polished stainless-steel finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed and exposed-rivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners.
SA1509A ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 0518 - 2
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern. b. Bare Piping at Wall Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with
polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece
stainless steel with polished stainless-steel finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast
brass with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece
stamped steel or splitplate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chromeplated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stainless steel with polished stainless-steel finish.
h. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast brass with polished, chromeplated finish.
i. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
j. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.
k. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish.
l. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
m. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.
n. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish.
o. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping to Remain:
a. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
b. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
SA1509A ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 0518 - 3
c. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons.
END OF SECTION 21 0518
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 1
SECTION 21 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Two-piece ball valves with indicators. 2. Bronze butterfly valves with indicators. 3. Iron butterfly valves with indicators. 4. Check valves. 5. Bronze OS&Y gate valves. 6. Iron OS&Y, NRS gate valves. 7. Indicator posts. 8. Trim and drain valves.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
B. NRS: Nonrising stem.
C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
D. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. B. Use the
following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 2
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.
D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings listed below and shall bear UL mark:
B. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed below:
1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:
a. Indicator posts. b. Valves.
1) Gate valves. 2) Check valves.
a) Single check valves.
3) Miscellaneous valves.
C. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.
D. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
E. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.
G. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as required by system pressures.
H. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 TWO-PIECE BALL VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 3
1. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand. 2. NIBCO INC. 3. Victaulic Company. B. Description:
1. UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM Global standard for indicating valves (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body Design: Two piece. 4. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. 5. Port Size: Full or standard. 6. Seats: PTFE. 7. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel. 8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 9. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 10. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external. 11. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends. 12. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.
2.03 BRONZE BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. ALEUM USA. 2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company. B. Description:
1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.
2. Minimum: Pressure rating: 175 psig. 3. Body Material: Bronze. 4. Seat Material: EPDM. 5. Stem Material: Bronze or stainless steel. 6. Disc: Bronze with EPDM coating. 7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external. 9. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends. 10. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.
2.04 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. 3. NIBCO INC. B. Description:
1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 112.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron, with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating.
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 4
4. Seat Material: EPDM. 5. Stem: Stainless steel. 6. Disc: Ductile iron, nickel plated. 7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external. 9. Body Design: Lug or wafer.
2.05 CHECK VALVES
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. FEBCO; A WATTS Brand. 2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 3. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. 4. NIBCO INC. B. Description:
1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Type: Single swing check. 4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze. 5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless steel with elastomeric seal. 6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless steel. 8. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel. 9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.
2.06 BRONZE OS&Y GATE VALVES
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Milwaukee Valve Company. 2. NIBCO INC. 3. United Brass Works, Inc. B. Description:
1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and NRS-type gate valves).
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body and Bonnet Material: Bronze or brass. 4. Wedge: One-piece bronze or brass. 5. Wedge Seat: Bronze. 6. Stem: Bronze or brass. 7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. 8. Supervisory Switch: External. 9. End Connections: Threaded.
2.07 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hammond Valve. 2. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 5
3. NIBCO INC. B. Description:
1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and NRS-type gate valves).
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze[ with elastomeric coating. 5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze[ with elastomeric coating. 6. Stem: Brass or bronze. 7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. 8. Supervisory Switch: External. 9. End Connections: Flanged, Grooved.
2.08 NRS GATE VALVES
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. 2. Mueller Co. 3. NIBCO INC. B. Description:
1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and NRS-type gate valves).
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron with elastomeric coating. 5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating. 6. Stem: Brass or bronze. 7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. 8. Supervisory Switch: External. 9. End Connections: Flanged, Grooved.
2.09 TRIM AND DRAIN
VALVES A. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. b. Body Design: Two piece. c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. d. Port size: Full or standard. e. Seats: PTFE. f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 6
g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. h. Actuator: Hand lever. i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2-1/2: Threaded ends. j. End Connections for Valves NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends. B.
Angle Valves:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. b. Body Material: Brass or bronze. c. Ends: Threaded. d. Stem: Bronze. e. Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Hand wheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. C. Globe Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. NIBCO INC. b. United Brass Works, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig b. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. c. Ends: Threaded. d. Stem: Bronze. e. Disc Holder and Nut: Bronze. f. Disc Seat: Nitrile. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Hand wheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 7
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve installation requirements and applications:
1. Section 21 13 13 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinkler systems.
2. Section 21 13 16 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in dry-pipe, fire-suppression sprinkler systems.
3. Section 21 13 39 "Foam-Water Systems" for application of valves in AFFF piping.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to
allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Provide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or
above the pipe center.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 21 05 53 "Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules and signs on surfaces concealing valves; and the NFPA standard applying to the piping system in which valves are installed. Install permanent identification signs indicating the portion of system controlled by each valve.
G. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections.
END OF SECTION 21 0523
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0529-1
SECTION 21 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Fastener systems. 4. Equipment supports. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 50 00 " Metal Fabrications" for s tructural-steel shapes and plates for t rapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Section 21 05 16 " Expansion F ittings a nd L oops for Fire-Suppression P iping" for p ipe guides and anchors.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL
SUBMITTALS A. Welding
certificates.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to "2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX."
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0529-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for fire-suppression piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pi pes, i ncluding pi pe s tands, c apable of supporting c ombined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment s upports c apable o f s upporting c ombined ope rating weight o f s upported
equipment and connected systems and components. C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA
13.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 203.
2.02 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND
SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers
and Supports:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL listed, or FM approved for fire-suppression piping support.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot-dip galvanized. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
2.03 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.04 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0529-3
c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. B-line, an Eaton business. b. Hilti, Inc. c. MKT Fastening, LLC.
A. Description: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes.
2.06 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.
B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.
E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout, suitable for interior and exterior applications.
A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0529-4
3.02HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with installation requirements of approvals and listings. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field f abricate f rom A STM A 36/A36M ca rbon-steel sh apes s elected f or l oads b eing supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Install in accordance with approvals and listings.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install f asteners a ccording to ma nufacturer's written instructions. Install in accordance with approvals and listings.
E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
L. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0529-5
a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping O perating B elow A mbient A ir T emperature: Use th ermal h anger-shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by A SME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, T ype 39 pr otection s addles if i nsulation w ithout v apor b arrier i s indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: T hermal h anger-shield i nserts may b e us ed. I nclude s teel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: T hermal h anger-shield i nserts may b e us ed. I nclude s teel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.
3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.04 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0529-6
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.06 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with NFPA requirements for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications.
G. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, S teel C levis Hangers ( MSS T ype 1) : For s uspension o f noni nsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 i f l ittle or no insulation is required.
3. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
4. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0529-7
5. Extension H inged o r T wo-Bolt S plit P ipe C lamps (MSS T ype 12 ): F or suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
6. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Comply
with NFPA requirements.
K. Building Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 3. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
L. Saddles and Shields: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering P rotection S addles (MSS T ype 39) : T o f ill interior vo ids w ith insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
M. Comply with NFPA requirements for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 21 0529
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 - 1
SECTION 21 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed content for each label.
D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: Yellow. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 - 2
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: Yellow. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.02 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch
thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Red.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 - 3
2.03 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.
B. Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. D. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
E. Pipe-Label Colors:
1. Background Color: Safety Red. 2. Letter Color: White.
2.04 STENCILS
A. Stencils for Piping:
1. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
2. Stencil Material: Brass. 3. Stencil Paint: Safety Red, exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized
spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: White, exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can
form.
2.05 VALVE TAGS
A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, beaded chain or S-hook. 3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red. 4. Letter Color: White.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 - 4
2.06 WARNING TAGS
A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT
OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be installed.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
3.03 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.04 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Stenciled Pipe-Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,
mark each pipe at branch.
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 - 5
3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet areas
of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
3.05 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve-tag schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 1-1/2 inches round.
3.06 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A.Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
END OF SECTION 21 0553
SA1509A FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 21 1119-1
SECTION 21 1119 – FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flush-type fire-department connections.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01FLUSH-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet. 2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. GMR International Equipment Corporation. 4. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. 5. Potter Roemer LLC. 6. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.
B. Standard: UL 405.
C. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.
D. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
E. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
F. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and
threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or
clappers. G. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
H. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.
M. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR."
N. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide labeling on outside of building above fire department connection.
B. Install wall-type fire-department connections.
C. Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.
END OF SECTION 21 1119
SA1509A WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 1
SECTION 21 1313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. Section 23 0523 "General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping" for ball, butterfly, check, gate, post-indicator, and trim and drain valves.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175-psig maximum.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Domestic water piping. 2. Compressed air piping.
SA1509A WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 2
3. HVAC hydronic piping. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C. Design Data:
1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if
applicable.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field Test Reports:
1. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
2. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers of each type used, plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
SA1509A WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 3
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13.
B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
1. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
1) Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 2) Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 3) General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 4) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 5) Office
and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft.. b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft..
SA1509A WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 4
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.. d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.. e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise
indicated.
2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard-Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M or ASTM A795/A795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.
C. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
D. Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A865/A865M, threaded.
E. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or EPDM rubber gasket.
a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18 pressure fittings.
C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22 pressure fittings.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
F. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.04 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following: a. Anvil International.
b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded. B. Flow Detection and Test
Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Potter-Roemer Inc.
b. Victaulic Company. c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The)
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved.
C. Branch Line Testers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 4. Body Material: Brass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. 8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. b. Victaulic Company. c. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
E. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ALEUM USA. b. FlexHead Industries, Inc. c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling
grid. 4. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
2.06 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). 3. Victaulic Company. 4. Viking Corporation.
B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
C. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175-psig maximum.
D. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.
E. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250-psig minimum.
F. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and
for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
G. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated and white, as selected by the Architect.
H.
2.07 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Flow Indicators:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC. b. System Sensor. c. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and
auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. b. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC. c. System Sensor.
2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.08 PRESSURE GAGES
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. 2. AMETEK, Inc. 3. Ashcroft Inc. B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0- to 250-psig minimum.
E. Label: Include "WATER" label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC diffusers and equipment, and partition assemblies.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain
piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over
floor drain or to outside building. J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. In seismic-rated areas, refer to Section 21 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for FireSuppression Piping and Equipment."
L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each new sprinkler test connection. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing. M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 21 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 21 05 18 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."
3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for above ground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
SA1509A WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 11
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
J. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.
3.04 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
3.05 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
SA1509A WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 12
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.
3.09 PIPING SCHEDULE
A.Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Type L hard copper tube with plain ends; cast or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
brazed joints. B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 shall
be one of the following:
1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 2. Thinwall black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel
piping; grooved-endpipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
3.10 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Semi-Recessed pendent and Concealed pendent
sprinklers, as indicated. B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes
indicated.
1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate. 2. Semi-Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. 3. Upright Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in
unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
END OF SECTION 21 1313
SA1509A Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 22 0517 - 1
SECTION 22 0517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.
D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required
to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.03 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
SA1509A Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 22 0517 - 2
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches above finished floor level. 2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A.Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b.Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: a.Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
SA1509A Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 22 0517 - 3
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b.Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. b.Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade: a.Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC-pipe sleeves. b.Piping NPS 6 and Larger: PVC-pipe sleeves.
5. Interior Partitions: a.Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC-pipe sleeves. b.Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION 22 0517
SA1509A ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0518 - 1
SECTION 22 0518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
2.02 FLOOR PLATES
A.One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.Escutcheons for New Piping: a.Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b.Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d.Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e.Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
SA1509A ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0518 - 2
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chromeplated finish.
g.Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
h.Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
rough-brass finish.
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 22 0518
SA1509A Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 0519 - 1
SECTION 22 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.Plastic-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Case: Plastic; 6-inch nominal size. 3. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated. 4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 5. Tube Background: Nonreflective with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F. 6. Window: Glass or plastic. 7. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.
a.Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 8. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5
percent of scale range.
SA1509A Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 0519 - 2
2.02 THERMOWELLS
A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.
C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
H. Install thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.
I. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
J. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
SA1509A Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 0519 - 3
3.02 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following: 1. Plastic case, compact-style, liquid-in-glass type.
B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be the following: 1. Plastic case, compact-style, liquid-in-glass type.
3.03 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.
B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.
END OF SECTION 22 0519
SA1509A Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 0523.12 - 1
SECTION 22 0523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Brass ball valves.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve. 1.Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G for valve materials for potable-water service.
D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
G. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.
H. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves that
allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
2.02 BRASS BALL VALVES
A.Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim:
SA1509A Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 0523.12 - 2
1. Description: a.Standard: MSS SP-110. b.CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two piece. d.Body Material: Forged brass. e.Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g.Stem: Brass. h.Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.
B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end
option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
3.03 HIGH-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 TO 200 PSIG
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim.
3.04 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim.
END OF SECTION 22 0523.12
SA1509A Check Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 0523.14 - 1
SECTION 22 0523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1.Bronze swing check valves.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve. 1.Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G for valve materials for potable-water service.
D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.02 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125: 1. Description:
a.Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b.CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d.Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e.Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: Bronze.
SA1509A Check Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 0523.14 - 2
B. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc, Class 125: 1. Description:
a.Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b.CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d.Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e.Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: PTFE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a.NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. b.NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and
weight or spring; metalseat or resilient-seat check valves.
B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. End Connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged.
3.04 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves bronze or nonmetallic disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end connections.
END OF SECTION 22 0523.14
SA1509A Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 0523.15 - 1
SECTION 22 0523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze gate valves.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve. 1.Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G for valve materials for potable-water service.
D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
G. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.
H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
SA1509A Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 0523.15 - 2
2.02 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Bronze Gate Valves, NRS, Class 125: 1. Description:
a.Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b.CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d.Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e.Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g.Packing: Asbestos free. h.Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Use gate valves for shutoff service only.
B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.
3.04 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze gate valves, NRS, Class 125 with soldered or threaded ends.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron gate valves, NRS, Class 125 with flanged ends.
END OF SECTION 22 0523.15
SA1509A Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0529 - 1
SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. 6. Equipment supports.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
SA1509A Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0529 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support
bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.03 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.
B. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
2.04 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
SA1509A Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0529 - 3
2.05 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
2.06 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4
inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
SA1509A Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0529 - 4
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
M. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
SA1509A Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0529 - 5
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.03 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.05 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
SA1509A Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0529 - 6
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.
G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
SA1509A Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0529 - 7
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using
clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION 22 0529
SA1509A Identification For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 0553 - 1
SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Red. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
SA1509A Identification For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 0553 - 2
2.02 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
SA1509A Identification For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 0553 - 3
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black. b. Letter Color: White.
2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:
a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: White.
3. Oxygen Piping:
a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White.
END OF SECTION 22 0553
SA1509A Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 0719 - 1
SECTION 22 0719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Domestic hot-water piping. 2. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 3. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:
1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
SA1509A Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 0719 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 3. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL]: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2. 4. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
2.02 INSULATING CEMENTS
A.Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
2.03 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.
1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.04 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
SA1509A Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 0719 - 3
2.05 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs
from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
SA1509A Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 0719 - 4
3.03 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3.04 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less
SA1509A Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 0719 - 5
than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with
vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward
clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
SA1509A Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 0719 - 6
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent
straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-
glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.
3.07 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
END OF SECTION 22 0719
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping 22 1116 - 1
SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. Piping joining materials.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials,
and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. Comply with NSF
Standard 372 for low lead.
2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.
B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
E. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.03 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping 22 1116 - 2
1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
C. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: 1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
2.04 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and
asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping 22 1116 - 3
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements for pressurereducing valves in Section 22 11 19 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties." D. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.
F. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
J. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. K. Install
piping free of sags and bends.
L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
M. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
N. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping 22 1116 - 4
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.
E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.
3.04 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b.Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping 22 1116 - 5
E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in
Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Label pressure piping with
system operating pressure.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections:
a.Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
b.During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
d.Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Piping Tests: a.Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping 22 1116 - 6
b.Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
d.Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
e.Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.09 ADJUSTING
A.Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a.Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.
b.Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application
where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired
before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b.Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping 22 1116 - 7
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.
d.Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e.Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.
D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.
E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 and larger, shall be one of the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.
F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ASTM B 88, Type M; cast- or wrought-copper,
solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ASTM B 88, Type M; cast- or wrought-copper,
solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
H. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ASTM B 88, Type M; cast- or wrought-copper,
solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
END OF SECTION 22 1116
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 1119 - 1
SECTION 22 1119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
D. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Standard: ASSE 1013. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Pressure Loss: 12 psigmaximum, through middle third of flow range. 4. Size: As noted on drawing. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA
C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories:
a.Valves NPS 2and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b.Valves NPS 2-1/2nd Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1. Standard: ASSE 1015. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Loss: 5psigmaximum, through middle third of flow range. 4. Size: as indicated on drawings. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA
C550 or that is FDA approved steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2and larger.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories:
a.Valves NPS 2and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b.Valves NPS 2-1/2and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
2.05 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators: 1. Standard: ASSE 1003.
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 1119 - 3
2. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig. 3. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA
C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3. 4. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
2.06 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA
C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:
a.Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b.Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4. c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch.
A. Hose Bibbs: 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 13. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 14. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.08 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 3. Operation: Loose key. 4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1. 6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7. 7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 1119 - 4
8. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with ASME
B1.20.7. 10. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 11. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.
2.09 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap
with brass chain.
2.10 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water-Hammer Arresters: 1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 2. Type: Metal bellows. 3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: 1. Standard: ASSE 1018. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 3. Body: Bronze. 4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome
finished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting,
fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
SA1509A Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 1119 - 5
B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
C. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
D. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve and pump.
E. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
F. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
G. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, and
double-check, backflowprevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction
and the device's reference standard.
B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.
A. Coordination Drawings: Detail pumps and adjacent equipment, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for inline, domestic-water pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: UL 778
for motor-operated water pumps.
C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.
2.02 IN-LINE, CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Bell & Gossett
2. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 3. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc. C. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Capacity: 4.0. 2. Total Dynamic Head: 15 feet. 3. Inlet and Outlet Size: 1” NPS. 4. Pump Speed: 1725. 5. Pump Control: Aquastat and timer. 6. Motor Horsepower: 1/12 HP. 7. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: 120 V. b. Phase: Single phase. c. Hertz: 60 Hz. D. Pump Construction:
1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig. 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 220 deg F. 4. Casing: Stainless steel with threaded or companion-flange connections.
2.03 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 22 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2.04 CONTROLS
A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping. 2. Range: 50 to 125 deg F. 3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Transformer: Provide if required. 6. Power Requirement: 120 V ac. 7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F.
B. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Type: Programmable, seven-day clock with manual override on-off switch.
2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for wall mounting. 3. Operation of Pump: On or off. 4. Transformer: Provide if required. 5. Power Requirement: 120 V ac. 6. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Up to two on-off cycles each day for seven days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support pump weight.
D. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.
E. Install timers on wall near water heater.
F. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22
05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps. G. Perform
startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set thermostats and timers for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings.
3.02 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. 1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the
following pumps:
a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. b. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 22 11 16
"Domestic Water Piping."
D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for strainers specified in Section 22 11 19 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." Comply with requirements for valves specified in the following:
1. Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2. Section 22 05 23.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping." 3. Section 22 05 23.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping." 4. Install pressure gauge and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gauge and
snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where provided or install pressure-gauge connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gauges and snubbers specified in Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
3.03 CONTROL CONNECTIONS
A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.
B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices.
C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and time-delay relay.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment. E. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass
tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature set points. C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 22 1123.21
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 1 of 11
SECTION 22 1124 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Building is not less than 7” w.c. but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig where applicable.
C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Field quality-control reports. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 2 of 11
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,
adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. B.
Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. OmegaFlex, Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division. c. Titeflex. d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
3. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Coating: PE with flame retardant.
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
5. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainlesssteel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.
6. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. 7. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded
connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets. 8. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig. C. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 3 of 11
1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe.
2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel,
Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. Vent casing aboveground.
c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
4.Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.
b. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
C. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 4 of 11
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.
2.03 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.
2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked
on valve body. 7. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 5 of 11
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
E. PE Ball Valves: Comply with ASME B16.40.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Kerotest Manufacturing Corp. b. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. c. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2. Body: PE. 3. Ball: PE. 4. Stem: Acetal. 5. Seats and Seals: Nitrile. 6. Ends: Plain or fusible to match piping. 7. CWP Rating: 80 psig. 8. Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 140 deg F. 9. Operator: Nut or flat head for key operation. 10. Include plastic valve extension. 11. Include tamperproof locking feature for valves where indicated on Drawings.
F. Valve Boxes:
1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head,
and with stem of length required to operate valve.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 6 of 11
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.
B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve
port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
C.Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 7 of 11
2.06 DIELECTRIC UNIONS
A. Dielectric Unions:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco-Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2.07 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in
containment conduit. C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.
D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective
coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. E. Install fittings for
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 8 of 11
F. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 23 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
3.02 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.
M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 9 of 11
R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.
S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.
U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.04 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.
2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 10 of 11
E. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.
F. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gasfired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.07 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.
B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
SA1509A Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 1124 - 11 of 11
3.09 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.
B. Underground: PE Bronze plug valves.
3.10 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
SECTION 22 1316 – STORM, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.02HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe.
2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening
devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
2.04 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS (Sanitary and vent only)
A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.
C. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
2.05 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.
C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.06 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Transition Couplings:
1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.
b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear
ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
d. Sleeve Materials:
1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with
pipe materials being joined.
4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 3)
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer
shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and longsweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4and larger.
2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
N. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, leadfree flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.
D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.
E. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
3.04 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Transition Couplings:
1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 22 0529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a. 100 Feetand Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feetif Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feetor Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inchesof each fitting, and coupling.
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inchminimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 incheswith 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 incheswith 1/2-inchrod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 incheswith 5/8-inchrod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 incheswith 3/4-inchrod. 5. Spacing for 10-footlengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60
inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.
D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.
E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use Utube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.
3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and
D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and
E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and coupled
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets WC-A: Wall mounted, top spud, accessible.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as scheduled on drawing or by one of the following:
a. Kohler Co. b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. c. Sloan Valve Company.
2. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Style: Flushometer valve. e. Height: Standard. f. Rim Contour: Elongated. g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush. h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.
3. Flushometer Valve: As scheduled on drawing. 4. Toilet Seat: As scheduled on drawings. 5. Support: As scheduled on drawings. 6. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.
2.02 FLUSHOMETER VALVES
A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves :
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Delany Products. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Standard: ASSE 1037. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device. 5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components. 6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel. 8. Style: Exposed. 9. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush. 10. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1. 11. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.
2.03 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawing or products by one of the following:
a. American Standard. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Church Seats; Bemis Manufacturing Company. d. Kohler Co.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawing or products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M. 3. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and
arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Water-Closet Installation:
1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for
handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. B. Support Installation:
1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets.
2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal. 3. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting
assembly and waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate. C. Flushometer-Valve
Installation:
1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted
on open side of water closet. 4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. D. Install
toilet seats on water closets.
E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:
1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.
2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for
1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.
2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.
C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 4213.13
SA1509A COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 22 4216.13 - 1
SECTION 22 4216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Lavatories. 2. Faucets.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
A.Lavatory LAV-A: Vitreous china, wall mounted, with back.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on the drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. d. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. e. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. f. Kohler Co. g. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc. h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: For wall hanging. c. Nominal Size: 22by 18.125 inches.
d. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 8-inchcenters. e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. f. Color: White. g. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.
4. Faucet: as scheduled on the drawings. 5. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier. Include rectangular,
steel uprights. B. Lavatory LAV-B: Vitreous china, wall mounted, with back.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on the drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Standard America. b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. d. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. e. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. f. Kohler Co. g. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. h. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc. i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.
3. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: For wall hanging. c. Nominal Size: 20by 18 inches. d. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 8-inchcenters. e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. f. Color: White. g. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.
4. Faucet: as scheduled on the drawings. 5. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier. Include rectangular,
steel uprights.
2.02 SOLID-BRASS, MANUALLY OPERATED FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Lavatory Faucets : Manual-type, two-handle mixing, commercial, solid-brass valve.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Standard America. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Elkay Manufacturing Co. f. Grohe America, Inc. g. Just Manufacturing. h. Kohler Co. i. Moen Incorporated. j. Speakman Company. k. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. l. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.
3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.
D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.
B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.
C. Trap:
1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.
2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch-thick tubular brass wall bend; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.
3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch-thick stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.
B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.
C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
E. Seal joints between lavatories and counters and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 22 07 19 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
SA1509A COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 22 4216.13 - 5
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
A.Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SERVICE BASINS
A.Mop Service Basins MSB-A: molded stone, floor mounted.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. b. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. c. Florestone Products Co., Inc. d. Mustee, E. L., & Sons, Inc. e. Swan Corporation (The). f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products.
a. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.6. b. Material: Molded Stone. c. Nominal Size: 24 by 36 by 10 inches. d. Tiling Flange: Not required. e. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces. f. Color: Not applicable. g. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.
4. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall. 5. Faucet: as scheduled on drawings.
2.02 SINKS
A. Sinks SK-A: Stainless steel, counter mounted.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co b. Eagle Group; Foodservice Equipment Division. c. Elkay Manufacturing Co. d. Griffin Products, Inc. e. Just Manufacturing.
3. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4. b. Type: Drop in. c. Number of Compartments: One. d. Overall Dimensions: 25 inches by 21.25 inches. e. Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. f. Compartment:
1) Dimensions: 21 inches by 15.75 inches. 2) Drain: NPS 1-1/2tailpiece with stopper. 3) Drain Location: Centered in compartment.
4. Faucet.
a. As scheduled on drawings. b. Number Required: One. c. Mounting: On ledge.
5. Supply Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. b. Trap(s):
1) Size: NPS 1-1/2. 2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with
0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.
7. Mounting: On counter with sealant.
B. Sinks SK-B: Antimicrobial Copper, counter mounted.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co b. Eagle Group; Foodservice Equipment Division. c. Elkay Manufacturing Co. d. Griffin Products, Inc. e. Just Manufacturing.
3. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4. b. Type: Drop in. c. Number of Compartments: One. d. Overall Dimensions: 15 inches by 22 inches. e. Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. f. Compartment:
1) Dimensions: 11.5 inches by 16 inches. 2) Drain: NPS 1-1/2tailpiece with stopper. 3) Drain Location: Centered in compartment.
4. Faucet.
a. As scheduled on drawings. b. Number Required: One. c. Mounting: On ledge.
5. Supply Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching
1) Size: NPS 1-1/2. 2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with
0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.
7. Mounting: On counter with sealant.
C. Sinks SK-C: Antimicrobial Copper, counter mounted.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co b. Eagle Group; Foodservice Equipment Division. c. Elkay Manufacturing Co. d. Griffin Products, Inc. e. Just Manufacturing.
3. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4. b. Type: Drop in. c. Number of Compartments: One. d. Overall Dimensions: 16 inches by 13.5 inches. e. Metal Thickness: 18 gauge. f. Compartment:
1) Dimensions: 10 inches by 10 inches. 2) Drain: NPS 1-1/2tailpiece with stopper. 3) Drain Location: Centered in compartment.
4. Faucet.
a. Number Required: One. b. Mounting: On ledge.
5. Supply Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching
2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.
7. Mounting: On counter with sealant.
2.03 SERVICE SINKS
A. Service Sinks SK-D: Enameled, floor mounted.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Standard America. b. Commercial Enameling Company. c. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. d. Kohler Co. e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.
3. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2. b. Type: Service sink. c. Nominal Size: 26 5/8 inches by 21inches. d. Color: White. e. Mounting: NPS 3 P-trap, and floor flange. f. Rim Guard: On front and sides.
4. Faucet: as scheduled on drawings.
2.04 SINK FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Sink Faucets:Manual type, two-lever-handle mixing valve.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on draweings or comparable product by one of the following:
1) American Standard America. 2) Bradley Corporation. 3) Chicago Faucets. 4) Delta Faucet Company. 5) Elkay Manufacturing Co. 6) GROHE America, Inc. 7) Just Manufacturing. 8) Kohler Co. 9) Moen Incorporated. 10) Speakman Company. 11) T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 12) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2.05 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spoutoutlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. AM Conservation Group, Inc. 2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc. 3. NEOPERL, Inc.
D. Description: Chrome-plated brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow of faucet.
2.06 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.
D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.
B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.
C. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.
E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 22 05 23 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
G. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
H. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 22 07 19 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
SA1509A COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 4216.16 - 8
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality Control" Article.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ISEA Standard: Comply with ISEA Z358.1.
SA1509A EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4500 - 2
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372, for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
2.02 EYE WASH EQUIPMENT
A. Deck Mounted Eye Wash Units, EEW-A:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Guardian Equipment Co.
2. Capacity: Not less than 0.4 gpmfor at least 15 minutes. 3. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow regulator and stay-
open control valve. 4. Control-Valve Actuator: Swivel. 5. Spray-Head Assembly: Two o receptor-mounted spray heads. 6. Drain Piping:
a. Size: NPS 1-1/4minimum. b. Finish: Chrome-plated brass. c. Fittings: Receptor drain, P-trap, waste to wall, and wall
flange complying with ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
7. Drain Piping: Include galvanized-steel indirect connection to drainage system. 8. Mounting: Pedestal.
2.03 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT
A.Hot- and Cold-Water, Water-Tempering Equipment, <Insert drawing designation>:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Guardian Equipment Co.
2. Description: Factory-fabricated equipment with thermostatic mixing valve.
a. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Designed to provide 85 deg Ftepid, potable water at emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure to continue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, metal piping, and corrosion-resistant enclosure.
b. Supply Connections: For hot and cold water.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Certify performance of emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.
B. Install fixtures level and plumb.
C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.
D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures, to facilitate maintenance of the equipment. Use ball or gate valve if specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 22 05 23.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."
1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to group of plumbing fixtures that includes emergency equipment.
2. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to emergency equipment if prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to emergency equipment if piping and equipment connections are made of different metals. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
F. Install thermometers in supply and outlet piping connections to water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
G. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
B. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water, water-tempering equipment. Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures. Comply with requirements for hot- and cold-water piping specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
C. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for waste piping specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
D. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to sanitary waste or storm drainage piping.
SA1509A EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4500 - 4
E. Where installing piping adjacent to emergency plumbing fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance of fixtures.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on emergency plumbing fixtures and equipment and equipment signs on water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for identification materials specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Emergency plumbing fixtures and water-tempering equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.
B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.
END OF SECTION 22 4500
SA1509A PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 22 4716 - 1
SECTION 22 4716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filter Cartridges: Two of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
A. Pressure Water Coolers EWC-A: Wall hung.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as scheduled on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Elkay. b. Halsey Taylor. c. Haws Corporation. d. Oasis International.
3. Standards:
a. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372. b. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants,"
Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant unless otherwise indicated.
4. Cabinet: All stainless steel. 5. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck. 6. Control: Push button. 7. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece. 8. Supply: NPS 3/8with shutoff valve. 9. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4brass P-trap. 10. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead
reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate. 11. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled
condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat.
a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
12. Capacities and Characteristics:
a. Cooled Water: 8 gph. b. Ambient-Air Temperature: 90 deg F. c. Inlet-Water Temperature: 80 deg F. d. Cooled-Water Temperature: 50 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Set freestanding pressure water coolers on floor.
C. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.
D. Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach in-wall, bottle filling stations to mounting frames.
E. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they
SA1509A PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 22 4716 - 3
can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 22 05 23.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."
F. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.
G. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
H. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
C. Install ball or gate shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Install valve upstream from filter for water cooler. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 22 05 23.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."
D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B. Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.
3.05 CLEANING
A. After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.
D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 4716
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-1 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
SECTION 22 6113 - COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical compressed-air piping materials comply
with requirements in NFPA 99 for positive-pressure medical gas systems. C. Brazing certificates.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Medical Air Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.
C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2.
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-2 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.Medical air operating at 50 to 55 psig (345 to 380 kPa).
2.02 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical air piping materials.
B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type K and Type L, seamless, drawn temper, that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and in blue for Type L tube.
C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.
D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.
E. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel. F. Flexible Pipe
Connectors:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. d. Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc. e. Metraflex Company (The). f. Proco Products, Inc. g. Unaflex. h. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Co.
2. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
a. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) minimum. b. End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.
2.03 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-3 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
B. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.
2.04 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
B. Zone-Valve Box Assemblies: Box with medical gas valves, tube extensions, and gages.
1. Zone-Valve Boxes:
a. Steel Box with Stainless-Steel Cover:
1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a) BeaconMedaes. b) Tri-Tech Medical.
b. Description: Formed steel box with cover, anchors for recessed mounting, holes with grommets in box sides for tubing extension protection, and of size for single or multiple valves with pressure gages and in sizes required to permit manual operation of valves. Medical air and medical vacuum tubing, valves, and gages may be incorporated in zone valve boxes for medical gases.
1) Interior Finish: Factory-applied white enamel. 2) Cover Plate: stainless-steel with frangible or removable windows. 3) Valve-Box Windows: Clear or tinted transparent plastic with labeling that includes
rooms served, according to NFPA 99. C. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division. b. Amico Corporation. c. BeaconMedaes. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries. f. NIBCO INC. g. Ohio Medical Corporation. h. Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
2. Standard: MSS SP-110. 3. Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze. 4. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum. 5. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 7. Handle: Lever type with locking device. 8. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal. 9. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions and manufacturer-installed
ASTM B 819, coppertube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension. D. Check Valves:
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-4 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division. b. Amico Corporation. c. BeaconMedaes. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Ohio Medical Corporation. f. Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
2. Description: In-line pattern, bronze. 3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum. 4. Operation: Spring loaded. 5. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions. E. Safety Valves:
1. Bronze body. 2. ASME-construction, poppet, pressure-relief type. 3. Settings to match system requirements. F. Pressure Regulators:
1. Bronze body and trim. 2. Spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated, relieving type. 3. Manual pressure-setting adjustment. 4. Rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum inlet pressure. 5. Capable of controlling delivered air pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig (5.0 kPa for each 100-
kPa) inlet pressure.
2.05 MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division. 2. Amico Corporation. 3. BeaconMedaes. 4. Ohio Medical Corporation. 5. Oxequip Health Industries; a division of Allied Healthcare Products Inc. 6. Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
B. General Requirements for Medical Compressed-Air Service Connections:
1. Suitable for specific medical air pressure and service listed. 2. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates. 3. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or assembly
with cover plate. 4. Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.
C. Roughing-in Assembly:
1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping. 2. Brass-body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas flow when primary
valve is removed. 3. Double seals that will prevent air leakage. 4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 (DN 10) copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-5 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
1. Brass housing with primary check valve. 2. Double seals that will prevent air leakage. 3. Cover plate with gas-service label.
E. Quick-Coupler Pressure Service Connections:
1. Outlets for medical air with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services.
2. Constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment. 3. With positive-locking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.
2.06MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR PRESSURE CONTROL PANELS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel box and support brackets for recessed roughing-in with stainless-steel or anodized-aluminum cover plate with printed operating instructions.
2. Manifold assembly consisting of inlet supply valve, inlet supply pressure gage, line-pressure control regulator, outlet supply pressure gage, D.I.S.S. service connection, and piping outlet for remote service connection.
3. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 4. Line-Pressure Control Regulator: Self-relieving diaphragm type with precision manual adjustment. 5. Pressure Gages: 0 to 300 psig (0 to 2070 kPa). 6. Service Connection: CGA V-5, D.I.S.S. No. 1160, instrument air outlet. 7. Before final assembly, provide temporary dust shield and U-tube for testing. 8. Label cover plate "Air Pressure Control."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing are not available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following procedures: 1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease, and other
readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1. 2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of sodium
carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb (0.453 kg) of chemical to 3 gal. (11.3 L) of water.
a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning. b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-6 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of compressed-air piping.
C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install compressed-air piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
L. Install piping free of sags and bends.
M. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.
N. Install medical air piping to medical air service connections specified in this Section, to medical air service connections in equipment specified in Section 226313 "Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities," and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical air service.
O. Install compressed-air service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
P. Connect compressed-air piping to air compressors and to compressed-air outlets and equipment requiring compressed-air service.
Q. Install unions in copper compressed-air tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.
R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from compressed-air equipment and specialties.
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-7 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow from compressed-air equipment.
C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.
D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.
E. Install pressure regulators on compressed-air piping where reduced pressure is required.
3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
B. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.
C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.
D. Flanged Joints: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.
3.05COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE COMPONENT INSTALLATION
A.Install compressed-air pressure control panel in walls. Attach to substrate.
3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. B. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
1. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.
C. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment"
for trapeze hangers. D. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.
F. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) minimum rods.
G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1/4 (DN 8): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 (DN 10 and DN 15): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod. 3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 1 (DN 25): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 5. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-8 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
6. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 7. NPS 2 (DN 50): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 8. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 13 feet (4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 9. NPS 3 (DN 80): 14 feet (4.3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 10. NPS 3-1/2 (DN 90): 15 feet (4.6 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 11. NPS 4 (DN 100): 16 feet (4.9 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. H. Install supports for
vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying labels and devices for valves and specialties. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Install identifying labels and devices for medical compressed-air piping systems according to NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:
1. Medical Air: Black letters on yellow background.
3.08FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING IN HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of medical compressed-air piping in healthcare facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Medical Compressed-Air Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and certification of medical compressed-air piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of medical gas piping and medical vacuum piping systems.
2. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99 and ASSE
Standard #6010: a. Initial blowdown.
b. Initial pressure test. c. Cross-connection test. d. Piping purge test. e. Standing pressure test for positive-pressure medical compressed-air piping. f. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99, ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030:
a. Standing pressure test. b. Pressure-differential cross-connection test. c. Valve test. d. Master and area alarm tests. e. Piping purge test. f. Piping particulate test. g. Piping purity test. h. Final tie-in test. i. Operational pressure test. j. Medical air purity test. k. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.
SA1509A COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 22 6113-9 HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
4. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests.
C. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect tubing from damage.
B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.
C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation" Article.
3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.
B. Medical Air Piping except Instrument Air Piping Larger Than NPS 3 (DN 80) and Operating at More Than 185 psig (1275 kPa): Type L, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.
3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.
B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one coppertube extension.
END OF SECTION 22 6113
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-1
SECTION 22 6313 - GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Oxygen piping designated "medical oxygen."
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical gas piping materials comply with
requirements in NFPA 99 for positive-pressure medical gas systems. C. Brazing certificates.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For medical gas piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Medical Gas Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.
2. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the medical gas piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.
C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-2
Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.Medical oxygen operating at 50 to 55 psig (345 to 380 kPa).
2.02 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical gas piping materials.
B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type K and Type L, seamless, drawn temper that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service; or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and blue for Type L tube.
C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.
D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.
E. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.
B. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.
2.04 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
B. Zone-Valve Box Assemblies: Box with medical gas valves, tube extensions, and gages.
1. Zone-Valve Boxes:
a. Steel Box with Stainless-Steel Cover:
1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-3
b. Description: Formed steel box with cover, anchors for recessed mounting, holes with grommets in box sides for tubing extension protection, and of size for single or multiple valves with pressure gages and in sizes required to permit manual operation of valves. Medical air and medical vacuum tubing, valves, and gages may be incorporated in zone valve boxes for medical gases.
1) Interior Finish: Factory-applied white enamel. 2) Cover Plate: stainless steel with frangible or removable windows.
3) Valve-Box Windows: Clear or tinted transparent plastic with labeling that includes
rooms served, according to NFPA 99.
C. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division. b. Amico Corporation. c. BeaconMedaes. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries. f. Ohio Medical Corporation. g. Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
2. Standard: MSS SP-110. 3. Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze. 4. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum. 5. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 7. Handle: Lever type with locking device. 8. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal. 9. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.
D. Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division. b. Amico Corporation. c. BeaconMedaes. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Ohio Medical Corporation. f. Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-4
2.05 MEDICAL GAS SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. BeaconMedaes.
B. General Requirements for Medical Gas Service Connections: For specific medical gas pressure and suction service listed. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or assembly with cover plate. Furnish recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.
C. Roughing-in Assembly:
1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping.
2. Brass-body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas flow when primary valve is removed. Suction inlets to be without secondary valve.
3. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage. 4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 (DN 10) copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking and tube-
end dust cap.
D. Finishing Assembly:
1. Brass housing with primary check valve. 2. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage. 3. Cover plate with gas-service label.
E. Quick-Coupler Pressure Service Connections: Outlets for oxygen with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services, constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment, and with positivelocking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.
F. Cover Plates: One piece, stainless steel and permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing are not available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, perform the following procedures:
1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease, and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.
2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb (0.453 kg) of chemical to 3 gal. (11.3 L) of water.
a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning. b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-5
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of gas piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of medical gas piping.
C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.
K. Install medical gas piping to medical gas service connections specified in this Section, to medical gas service connections in equipment specified in this Section, and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical gas service.
L. Install medical gas service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
M. Connect gas piping to gas sources and to gas outlets and equipment requiring gas service.
N. Install unions in copper tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each specialty and piece of equipment.
O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to gas laboratory and healthcare equipment and specialties.
B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of gas flow from laboratory and healthcare gas supplies.
C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.
D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Arrange valves so largest valve is lowest. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-6
E. Install pressure regulators on gas piping where reduced pressure is required.
3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
B. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.
C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free, dry nitrogen during brazing.
3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
B. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
1. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.
C. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.
D. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.
F. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) minimum rods.
G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1/4 (DN 8): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 (DN 10 and DN 15): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod. 3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 1 (DN 25): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 5. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 6. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. H. Install supports for
vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying labels and devices for healthcare medical gas piping systems according to NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:
1.Oxygen: White letters on green background or green letters on white background.
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-7
3.07FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITY MEDICAL GAS
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.Tests and Inspections:
1. Medical Gas Piping Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and certification of medical gas piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of medical compressed-air piping and medical vacuum piping systems.
2. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99 and ASSE
Standard #6010:
a. Initial blow down.
b. Initial pressure test. c. Cross-connection test. d. Piping purge test. e. Standing pressure test for positive-pressure medical gas piping. f. Standing pressure test for vacuum systems. g. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99, ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030:
a. Standing pressure test. b. Pressure-differential cross-connection test. c. Valve test. d. Master and area alarm tests. e. Piping purge test. f. Piping particulate test. g. Piping purity test. h. Final tie-in test. i. Operational pressure test. j. Medical gas concentration test. k. Medical air purity test. l. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.
m. Verify medical gas supply sources.
4. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests.
B. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect tubing from damage.
SA1509A GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6313-8
B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.
C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation" Article.
3.09 PIPING SCHEDULE
A.Connect new tubing to existing tubing with memory-metal couplings.
3.2 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.
B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one coppertube extension.
END OF SECTION 22 6313
SA1509A MEDICAL GAS ALARMS 22 6400-1
SECTION 22 6400 - MEDICAL GAS ALARMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Master alarm panels. 2. Area alarm panels. 3. Local alarm panels. 4. Computer-interface cabinet.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each alarm panel, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.Operation and Maintenance Data: For alarm panels to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Qualify Installers for air, vacuum, and gas piping systems for healthcare facilities according to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the air, vacuum, and gas piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas
SA1509A MEDICAL GAS ALARMS 22 6400-2
Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel for air, vacuum, and gas piping systems for healthcare facilities according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allied Healthcare Products, Inc.; Chemetron Division. 2. Amico Corporation. 3. BeaconMedaes. 4. Ohio Medical Corporation. 5. Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain medical alarm systems and components from single manufacturer.
2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALARM PANELS
A. Description: Factory wired with audible and color-coded visible signals to indicate specified functions.
1. Mounting: Recessed installation. 2. Enclosures: Fabricated from minimum 0.047-inch- thick steel or minimum 0.05-inch- thick
aluminum, with knockouts for electrical and piping connections.
B. Components: Designed for continuous service and to operate on power supplied from 120-V ac power source to alarm panels and with connections for low-voltage wiring to remote sensing devices. Include step-down transformers if required.
C. Dew Point Monitors: Continuous line monitoring, having panel with gage or digital display, pipeline sensing element, electrical connections for alarm system, factory- or field-installed valved bypass, and visual and cancelable audio signal for dryer site and master alarm panels. Alarm signals when pressure dew point rises above 39 deg F at 55 psig.
D. Pressure Switches or Transducer Sensors: Continuous line monitoring with electrical connections for alarm system.
1. Low-Pressure Operating Range: 0 to 100 psig. 2. High-Pressure Operating Range: Up to 250 psig.
E. Vacuum Switches or Pressure Transducer Sensors: Continuous line monitoring with electrical connections for alarm system.
A.Master Alarm Panels: Separate trouble alarm signals and indicators for each system.
1. Standards: Comply with NFPA 99 and UL 544. 2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Include alarm signals when the following conditions exist:
a. Medical Air: Pressure drops below 40 psig or rises above 60 psig, backup air compressor is in operation, pressure drop across filter assembly increases more than 2 psig, dew point rises above 39 deg F at 55 psig, carbon-monoxide level rises above 10 ppm, and high water level is reached in receiver for liquid-ring, medical air compressor systems.
b. Medical Vacuum: Vacuum drops below 12 in. Hg and backup vacuum pump is in operation. c. Medical Oxygen: Liquid level is low, pressure downstream from main shutoff valve drops
below 40 psig or rises above 60 psig, changeover is made to reserve, reserve is in use, reserve level is low, and reserve pressure is low.
d. Medical Oxygen: Pressure downstream from main shutoff valve drops below 40 psig or rises above 60 psig and changeover is made to alternate bank.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ALARM-PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install alarm panels in locations required by and according to NFPA 99.
B. Install computer-interface cabinet with connection to alarm panels and facility computer.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 226113 "Compressed-Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities," Section 226213 "Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities," and Section 226313 "Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to alarm panels, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" and according to NFPA 99.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
SA1509A MEDICAL GAS ALARMS 22 6400-4
C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit
operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning panels and equipment.
D. Alarm panels will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.05 STARTUP SERVICE
A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A.Adjust initial alarm panel pressure and vacuum set points.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain alarm panels.
END OF SECTION 22 6400
SA1509A COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513-1
SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:
1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.03 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
SA1509A COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513-2
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T
Insert number.
2.04 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by
controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.
2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
2.05 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature
exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 23 0513
SA1509A SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0517-1
SECTION 23 0517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.
D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required
for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.
2.03 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
SA1509A SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0517-2
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch
annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth,
and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size.
Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION 23 0517
SA1509A ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0518-1
SECTION 23 0518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Escutcheons.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast- brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-
plated finish. g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 23 0518
SA1509A METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519-1
SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Trerice, H. O. Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. Winters Instruments - U.S. e. Or an approved equal.
2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.
SA1509A METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519-2
2.02 THERMOWELLS
A. Thermowells:
1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection.
B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
2.03 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Trerice, H. O. Co. b. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. e. Or an approved equal.
2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled and Sealed type(s); 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless
back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
2.04 GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge- dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.
C. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.
SA1509A METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519-3
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.
C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and
support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.
H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.
I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).
J. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
K. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.
L. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
N. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. O. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.
P. Install thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller. 3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.
Q. Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection. 2. Suction and discharge of each pump.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.
C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
SA1509A METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519-4
3.04 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be one of the following:
1. Liquid-filled and Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each chiller shall be one of the following:
1. Liquid-filled and sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems shall be one of the
following:
1. Liquid-filled and Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
3.05 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.
3.06 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
A. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water connection shall be the following:
1. Liquid-filled and Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.
B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:
1. Liquid-filled and Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.
3.07 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.
END OF SECTION 23 0519
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523-1
SECTION 23 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
1. Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:
1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
E. Valve-End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
2.02 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Hammond Valve.
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523-2
d. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.
2.03 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material.
Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
SA1509A GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523-3
3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and
balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or
CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in
valve schedules below. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in
valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve
schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
END OF SECTION 23 0523
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND QUIPMENT 23 0529-1
SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and
include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Equipment supports.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria,
including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND QUIPMENT 23 0529-2
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of
piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel
shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.03 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
B. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
2.04 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and
shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.05 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND QUIPMENT 23 0529-3
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports
for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel
according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated
loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be
transmitted to connected equipment. K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections
allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
L. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to
match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180
degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND QUIPMENT 23 0529-4
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.03 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of
shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces
match adjacent contours.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.05 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply
with ASTM A 780.
3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND QUIPMENT 23 0529-5
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service
applications.
F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environment applications.
G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS
1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up
to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36,
requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 6. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 7. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends
are required for riser clamps.
L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following
types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod
sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND QUIPMENT 23 0529-6
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following
types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to
allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in
concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 23 0529
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-1
SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing
distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation.
2.02 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing
flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover full] circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings,
pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate
unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-2
2.03 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: White.
C. Background Color: Blue.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up
to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings,
duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible
maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not
obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 15feet in areas of congested piping and
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-3
B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Hot Water Supply and Return Piping:
a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black.
3.04 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 3. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 25feet in each space where
ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
END OF SECTION 23 0553
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-1
SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Variable-air-volume systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step- by-step
procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
B. Certified TAB reports.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.
B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Engineer.
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage
class of connected ducts as specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired
or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with
functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.
L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
a. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. b. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. c. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-3
d. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. e. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. f. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. g. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is
provided. h. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.
a. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
a. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. b. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials.
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed- control
levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
E. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets.
F. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
G. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
H. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
I. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
J. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
K. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
L. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
M. Check for airflow blockages.
N. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
O. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
P. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts."
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-4
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable- air-
volume systems as follows:
1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow.
Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for
maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-
air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan-performance data.
3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the
sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when
pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not
exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the
pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-5
a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Engineer and comply with requirements in Section 23 21 23 "Hydronic Pumps."
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump
manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.
a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than
indicated flow. G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and
proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems'
pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-6
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum.
Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS BBB.
Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
A. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to
verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:
1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
B. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan
speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are
within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment
adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.
3.13 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.14 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article,
prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-7
3.15 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the
report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line
diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.
SA1509A TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-8
3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout
and to correct unusual conditions.
END OF SECTION 23 0593
SA1509A DUCT INSULATION 23 0713-1
SECTION 23 0713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according
to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C
553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
C. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type
IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
2.02 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to
surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.
C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
2.03 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.
2.04 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C
1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C
1136, Type II.
2.06 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 2. Color: White.
2.07 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C
1136.
1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C
1136.
1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the
length of ducts and fittings.
B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode,
soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by
insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of
attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with
adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple
laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
SA1509A DUCT INSULATION 23 0713-5
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches
beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
3.03 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant.
For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated
wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint
sealers.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on
sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover
exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
SA1509A DUCT INSULATION 23 0713-6
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with
steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install
insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of
same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on
sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover
exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops
shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove
and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.05 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam
and joint edge.
SA1509A DUCT INSULATION 23 0713-7
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in
reverse order of their installation.
3.07 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. See Insulation Schedule on M-601.
END OF SECTION 23 0713
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-1
SECTION 23 0719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Material test reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft
training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-2
and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.06 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for
tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials.
F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ. 2. 850 deg F. 3. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.02 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to
surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive. 1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as tested in accordance with
ASTM E84. 2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F. 3. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F. 4. Color: Black.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation
jacket lap seams and joints.
E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
2.03 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-3
B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements. 4. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film
thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F 3. Color: White.
2.04 SEALANTS
A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials,
jackets, and substrates.
B. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.05 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are
indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.
2.06 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno
weave, for pipe.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab. b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894. c. Or an approved equal.
2.07 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as
scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 2. Color: White 3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end
caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
D. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. d. Or an approved equal.
2. Factory cut and rolled to size. 3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 3-mil-thick, heat-
bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 6. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.
E. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M and with a flame-spread index of 10 and a smoke- developed index of 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at
0.01 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M and with a flame-spread index of 25 and a smoke- developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.08 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM
C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM
C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the
length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode,
soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by
insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of
attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with
adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe.
Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to
maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe
flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-8
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inchesbeyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates.
3.03 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant.
For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously
through walls and partitions.
C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint
sealers.
3.04 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and
vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as
adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor- barrier
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-9
mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining
pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at
least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe
insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe
segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in
insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in
insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-10
3.06 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe
insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe
segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints
with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a
thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.07 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated and for horizontal applications, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-11
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to
installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections, with one end overlapping the previously
installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.
5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
3.08 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as
specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's
recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
B. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
SA1509A HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-12
B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Refer to schedule on drawing M-601.
B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe
size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
END OF SECTION 23 0719
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-1
SECTION 23 0900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals, include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of system components required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
2.03 UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and
programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.
1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.
2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.
3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit.
4. LonWorks Compliance: Communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol using LonTalk protocol. 5. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 6. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F.
2.04 ALARM PANELS
A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch-thick, furniture-quality steel or
extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish. Provide common keying for all panels.
B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted on hinged cover.
1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds. 2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady. 3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady. 4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished. 5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company.
2.05 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor.
B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable
throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-3
C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer.
D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to
minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.
E. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct or reverse acting with mechanical
set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode.
1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig. 2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig. 3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent. 4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal of zero to supply pressure. 5. Gages: 2-1/2 inches in diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy, and range to match transmitter input or output
pressure.
2.06 TIME CLOCKS
A. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts.
2.07 ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.
B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or
where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are
larger than 10 sq. ft.. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.
C. RTDs and Transmitters:
1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or
where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are
larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.
D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
1. Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-4
2. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. 3. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 4. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting plate. 5. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure, suitable for operation at
outdoor temperatures of minus 40 to plus 170 deg F. 6. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.
E. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:
1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature
compensated.
a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.
2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig
operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum
150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and
differential. 5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20
mA.
F. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
G. Room sensor accessories include the following:
1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls. 2. Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
2.08 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg.
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of
8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.
D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with
suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.
E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.
F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output
requirements.
G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-5
2.09 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Duct Airflow Station: Combination of air straightener and multiport, self-averaging pitot tube station.
1. Casing: Galvanized-steel frame. 2. Flow Straightener: Aluminum honeycomb, 3/4-inch parallel cell, 3 inches deep. 3. Sensing Manifold: Copper manifold with bullet-nosed static pressure sensors positioned on equal area basis.
2.10 THERMOSTATS
A. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Programming based on weekday, Saturday, and Sunday. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor,
and fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following:
a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
B. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed
anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.
C. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.
1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. 2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.
D. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with
copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended to cover full width of duct
or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection
or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.
E. Fire-Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F above normal maximum operating temperature, and the following:
1. Reset: Manual.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-6
2. Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation.
2.11 HUMIDISTATS
A. Pneumatic Room Humidistats: Wall-mounting, proportioning type with adjustable throttling range, 20 to 90 percent operating
range, and cover matching room thermostat cover.
B. Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2 percent throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts.
C. Pneumatic Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Proportioning type with adjustable throttling range, 25 to 65 percent operating range,
in galvanized-steel duct box.
2.12 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-
return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf. 5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and
breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf. 6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.
1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase running
torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase running
torque by 2.0.
3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-
return actuators. 6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac. 7. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. 8. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 9. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 10. Run Time: 60 seconds.
2.13 CONTROL VALVES
A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-7
B. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed
ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable
seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.
a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and
bottom.
4. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:
a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above.
5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have
linear characteristics. 6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure
rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head.
7. Sizing: For pressure drop based on the following services:
a. Two Position: 20 percent of inlet pressure. b. Modulating 15-psig Steam: 80 percent of inlet steam pressure. c. Modulating: 50 percent of inlet steam pressure.
8. Flow Characteristics: Modified linear characteristics. 9. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure
rating of 150 percent of operating (inlet) pressure.
C. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have
linear characteristics.
D. Self-Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Thermostatic Operator: Liquid-filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial.
2.14 DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch-minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch-minimum thick,
extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch-thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch-diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with oil-impregnated sintered
bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-8
4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
B. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
C. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.
D. Install automatic dampers according to Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.
F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."
G. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties."
H. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts".
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field- assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove
and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.
4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID
actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-9
2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable
considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument. 6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that
meters are installed correctly. 7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained pressure regulators. 8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 10. Check electric-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either
parallel or opposed, has been provided. 11. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use
test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source.
5. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished
at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span. b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.
6. Pressure:
a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum.
7. Temperature:
a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-
resistance source. b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended
procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure,
so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed. 10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
SA1509A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-10
11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in
adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
HVAC instrumentation and controls.
END OF SECTION 23 0900
SA1509A HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113-1
SECTION 23 2113 – HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated:
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F
2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: [ASTM B 88, Type L].
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
2.03 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated
in "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes
spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
SA1509A HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113-2
2.04 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1,
silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.
2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material.
Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: [125 psig minimum at 180 deg F . c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, shall be any of the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40, Grade B, Type 96 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and
threaded joints.
B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, shall be any of the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40, Grade B, Type 96 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and
threaded joints.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
SA1509A HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113-3
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in
piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install valves according to Section 23 05 23 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
P. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
Q. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
R. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.
S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in
Section 23 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 23 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified
in Section 23 05 18 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."
3.03 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
SA1509A HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113-4
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet. 6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints
according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper- phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe
sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on
pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
3.06 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is
required.
SA1509A HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113-5
D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in Section
23 05 19 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
E. CHEMICAL TREATMENT
F. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
G. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary
restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against
test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage
by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure.
Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. Perform the following before operating the system:
1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or
bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified
values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 23 2113
SA1509A HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116-1
SECTION 23 2116 – HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following:
1. Hot Water Heating Piping 2. Chilled Water Piping
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing
A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air
separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVES
A. Globe, Check, and Ball Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 23 05 23 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."Section 15112 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Nexus Valve, Inc. g. Taco. h. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company.
2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket.
7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
C. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. c. Nexus Valve, Inc.
2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self-cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psigMaximum Operating Temperature 250 deg F
D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Nexus Valve, Inc. g. Taco. h. Tour & Andersson.
2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa). 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).3
2.02 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES
A. Manual Air Vents:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Nexus Valve, Inc. e. Taco, Inc.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:
a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Taco, Inc.
2. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated and supports installed and are labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
3. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.
4. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
C. Tangential-Type Air Separators:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump. d. Taco, Inc.
2. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature.
3. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into expansion tank. 4. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 5. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 6. Size: Match system flow capacity.
2.03 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel,40 -mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.
B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install
drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
3.02 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.
C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.
D. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial
fill to establish proper water level in tank.
1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings,
plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. E. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that tank is properly charged with
air to suit system Project requirements.
END OF SECTION 23 2116
SA1509A HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-1
SECTION 23 2123 – HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 4. PACO Pumps. 5. TACO Incorporated.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and
threaded companion-flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking
cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and EPT bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.
5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.
1. Angle pattern. 2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.
1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.02 3.2 ALIGNMENT
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.
B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.
C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.
B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
D. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
E. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.
F. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
SA1509A HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-3
G. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
H. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.04 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump
hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Hydronic pumps.
END OF SECTION 23 2123
SA1509A WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 23 2513-1
SECTION 23 2513 – WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following water treatment for closed-loop hydronic systems:
1. Manual chemical-feed equipment. 2. Chemicals.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling
power-limited circuits.
B. TSS: Total suspended solids are solid materials, including organic and inorganic, that are suspended in the water. These solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial wastes.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ampion Corp. 2. Anderson Chemical Company. 3. Aqua-Chem, Inc. 4. Barclay Water Management, Inc. 5. Boland. 6. Cascade Water Services, Inc. 7. Earthwise Environmental Inc. 8. General Electric Company; GE Water & Process Technologies. 9. H-O-H Water Technology, Inc. 10. Metro Group, Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div. 11. Nalco; an Ecolab company. 12. Watcon, Inc. 13. Water Services Inc.
SA1509A WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 23 2513-2
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Closed hydronic systems shall have the following water qualities:
1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5. 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 6. TSS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
2.03 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4
bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.
1. Capacity: 5 gal.. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.
2.04 CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system
components and connected equipment and that can attain water quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.
B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.
C. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors. D. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with
water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of hydronic
systems' startup procedures. 4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with
diagram of portion of piping tested.
SA1509A WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 23 2513-3
6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.
8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.
B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details exact operating procedures of equipment.
END OF SECTION 23 2513
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-1
SECTION 23 3113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other
work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other,
using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.
2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings.
B. Welding certificates.
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System
Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.02 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.03 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different
metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.04 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum
flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react
exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches . 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-4
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class,
positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
2.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with
zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1,
"Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of
building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in
Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct
accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
3.03 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-6
2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
3.04 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction
materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches
thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches
thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or
blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal
unit connections.
3.06 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-7
C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums),
scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray
eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment
rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply
antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
3.07 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.08 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
B. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Roof Top Units, and Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
C. Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Roof Top Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-8
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
D. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
E. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2,
"Rectangular Elbows."
a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90- degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
SA1509A METAL DUCTS 23 3113-9
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
F. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree
Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights,
loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control-damper installations. d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of
Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts;
compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
SA1509A AIRE DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300-
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for
lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.03 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 8. Pottorff. 9. Ruskin Company. 10. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1250 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange.
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, end pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch-thick aluminum sheet with sealed
edges.
G. Blade Action: Parallel.
H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.
L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Pottorff. g. Ruskin Company. h. Trox USA Inc. i. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:
a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal. 7. Bearings:
a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades
and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
2.05 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. 8. Nailor Industries Inc. 9. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 10. Pottorff. 11. Ruskin Company. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc. 13. Young Regulator Company.
1. Hat shaped. 2. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches. 2. Parallel-blade design. 3. Aluminum. 4. 0.0747-inch-thick dual skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed
against blade bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
E. Bearings:
1. Oil-impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and
bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2.06 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Description: Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.07 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. SEMCO Incorporated. 6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous- glass fill.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer
coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E. Vane Construction: Single wall.
2.08 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Elgen Manufacturing. 5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 6. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 7. McGill AirFlow LLC. 8. Nailor Industries Inc. 9. Pottorff. 10. Ventfabrics, Inc. 11. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks.
C. Pressure Relief Access Door:
1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 3.0- to 8.0-inch wg. 5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch-thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.09 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing.
4. Ventfabrics, Inc. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape.
2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and
fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where
dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. Control devices requiring inspection. 7. Elsewhere as indicated.
H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. I. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
J. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose
of access door.
K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
L. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or
strapped in place.
N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
END OF SECTION 23 3300
SA1509A HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423-1
SECTION 23 3423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted outside fan housing, factory wired
through an internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inchmesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan
stops. 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan
stops.
E. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inchwood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 18 inches. 3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation. 4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. 6. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.
F. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Refer to Mechanical Schedules
2.02 FAN MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors
specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to
operate in service factor range above 1.0.
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2.03 SOURCE QUALTITY CONTROL
A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory
tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
SA1509A HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423-3
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.02
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.03
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical
components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth
bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system. 5. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in
fully open position. 8. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and
record motor voltage and amperage. 9. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.04
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 2. After installing computer-room air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance
with requirements.
SA1509A HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423-4
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. After startup service and performance test and change filters.
3.05
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
C. Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION 23 3423
SA1509A AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3600-1
SECTION 23 3600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type.
B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 -
"Construction and System Start-Up."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company. 2. Carnes. 3. Daikin. 4. Environmental Technologies, Inc. 5. Krueger. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Price Industries. 8. Titus. 9. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. 10. Trox USA Inc.; a subsidiary of the TROX GROUP. 11. Tuttle & Bailey.
B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.
C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, wall.
1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch-thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C
1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Cover liner with nonporous foil. b. Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal.
2. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch-thick, polyurethane foam insulation complying with UL 181 erosion
requirements, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
3. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 4. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size. 5. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket. 6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
D. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and
thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to 140 deg F, shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks.
E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure. 2. Damper Position: Normally open.
F. Hydronic Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, and rated
for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve.
G. Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller and room sensor. Control
devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following features:
1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, spring return open. 2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller with electronic airflow transducer with
multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:
a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control
for HVAC."
3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.
H. Control Sequence:
1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg inlet static pressure. 2. System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.
2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with
zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
SA1509A AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3600-3
E. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct
materials.
F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.
1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil
type, and ARI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.
C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.
3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches
thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches
thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
B. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Section 23 21 13 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.
C. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts."
D. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct
Accessories."
SA1509A AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3600-4
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit
operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.06 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper
performance. 3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. 4. Verify that control connections are complete. 5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. 6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
air terminal units.
END OF SECTION 23 3600
SA1509A CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216-1
SECTION 23 5216 - CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for
generating hot water.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."
E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified with concrete. 1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Water-Jacketed Condensing Boilers:
a. Leakage and Materials: Eight years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
SA1509A CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDENSING BOILERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built
on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating service only.
C. Heat Exchanger: stainless steel.
D. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft.
E. Blower: Centrifugal fan, forced draft. Include prepurge and postpurge of the combustion chamber.
1. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
F. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.
G. Ignition: Electric-spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision.
H. Casing:
1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures. 2. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A. 3. Finish: Baked-Enamel protective finish. 4. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch-thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. 5. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. 6. Mounting base to secure boiler.
2.02 TRIM
A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.
C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.
D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch-diameter, combination water-pressure and -temperature gage.
Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range.
E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.
F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4hose-end gate valve.
G. Two low water cut offs manual reset.
SA1509A CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216-3
2.03 CONTROLS
A. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:
1. Control transformer. 2. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. 3. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control burner firing rate to reset
supply-water temperature inversely with outside-air temperature. At 0 deg F outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 160 deg F; at 50 deg F outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 130 deg F.
B. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation.
1. High Cutoff: Manual reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature. 2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be
manual-reset type. 3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler combustion-air inlet. 4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions.
2.04 ELECTRICAL POWER
A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in electrical Sections.
B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other
electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to boiler.
1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway. 4. Field power interface shall be to circuit breaker. 5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or circuit breaker. 6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.
2.05 VENTING KITS
A. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble, indoor plate, vent adapter,
condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant.
B. Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air coupling, and sealant.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.
B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping
and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for
piping and electrical connections.
SA1509A CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216-4
B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 BOILER INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting:
1. Install wall-hung boilers where indicated on Drawings using suitable hangers. Comply with manufacturer's mounting
instructions.
B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
C. Assemble and install boiler trim.
D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
E. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide
an isolation valve if required.
D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties."
E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a
reducer if required.
F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
H. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.
I. Boiler Venting:
1. Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake. 2. Connect full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Section 23 51 00 "Breechings, Chimneys, and
Stacks."
J. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
K. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
SA1509A CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216-5
3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and combustion.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature.
b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
D. Performance Tests: 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and equipment installations,
including connections, and to conduct performance testing. 2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field performance tests. Adjust,
modify, or replace equipment to comply. 3. Perform field performance tests to determine capacity and efficiency of boilers.
a. Test for full capacity. b. Test for boiler efficiency at low fire 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 percent of full capacity. Determine efficiency at each
test point.
4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated. 5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance. 6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat produced during tests if
building systems are not adequate. 7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates. 8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers.
END OF SECTION 23 5216
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-1
SECTION 23 7413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and
accessories:
1. Direct-expansion cooling. 2. Gas furnace. 3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section. 4. Integral, space temperature controls. 5. Roof curbs.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.
C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb
heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.
D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the
building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.
E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from
air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required
clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data.
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-2
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ARI Compliance:
1. Comply with ARI 203/110 and ARI 303/110 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 -
"Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial
Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date
of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date
of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AAON, Inc. 2. Carrier Corporation. 3. McQuay International. 4. Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc. 5. YORK International Corporation.
2.02 CASING
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow
removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-3
B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.
D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-resistant coating or faced
with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with
ASHRAE 62.1.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. 2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan. 3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Corrosion-resistant compound.
F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2.03 FANS
A. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, ECM motor resiliently
mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
B. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
C. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.
D. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
2.04 COILS
A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:
1. Copper-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.
2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. 3. Coil Split: Interlaced. 4. Condensate Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating formed with pitch and drain connections
complying with ASHRAE 62.1.
2.05 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Refer to schedule.
B. Compressor: Hermetic, reciprocating, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief.
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-4
C. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.
2.06 AIR FILTRATION
A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE
52.2.
1. Pleated: Minimum 90 percent arrestance, and MERV 7.
2.07 GAS FURNACE
A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.
1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.
B. Burners: Stainless steel.
1. Fuel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.
C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve with vertical extension.
E. Safety Controls:
1. Gas Control Valve: Modulating. 2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot
filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.
2.08 DAMPERS
A. Outdoor-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outdoor air, with motorized damper filter.
B. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.
1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position. 2. Relief-Air Damper: Motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.
2.09 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION
A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-
circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.
2.10 CONTROLS
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-5
B. DDC Controller:
1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. 2. Safety Control Operation:
a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts
for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. b. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than 130 deg Fenters unit. Provide additional
contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. c. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with operating sequence
described in Section 28 31 11 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 28 31 12 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."
d. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air temperature is less than 40 deg F.
e. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.
3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a minimum of two programmable periods per day.
4. Unoccupied Period:
a. Heating Setback: 5 deg F. b. Cooling Setback: 5 deg F. c. Override Operation: Two hours.
5. Supply Fan Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.
6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain
room temperature. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature. c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump.
7. Gas Furnace Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Modulate burner to maintain room temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.
8. Fixed Minimum Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Open to 25 percent. b. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.
9. Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Open to 10 percent fixed minimum intake, and maximum 100 percent of the fan capacity
to comply with ASHRAE Cycle II. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F Use outdoor-air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers. During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper. c. Outdoor-Airflow Monitor: Accuracy maximum plus or minus 5 percent within 15 and 100 percent of total
outdoor air. Monitor microprocessor shall adjust for temperature, and output shall range from 2- to 10-V dc.
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-6
10. Carbon Dioxide Sensor Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Reset minimum outdoor-air ratio down to minimum 10 percent to maintain maximum 1000-ppm concentration.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.
C. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System:
1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic code storage. 3. Provide BACnet compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the following:
a. Adjusting set points. b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. c. Inquiring data to include outdoor-air damper position, supply- and room-air temperature. d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations. e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. f. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation. g. Monitoring cooling load. h. Monitoring economizer cycles. i. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall
be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.
B. Low-ambient kit using variable-speed condenser fans for operation down to 35 deg F.
C. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.
D. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.
E. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.
2.12 ROOF CURBS
A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.
1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. b. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.
a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or
welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature- resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
B. Curb Height: 14 inches.
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.
B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to ARI Guideline B. Install RTUs on curbs
and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.
B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure
RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.
B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.
1. Gas Piping: Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts.
The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure. 5. Install normal-weight, 3000-psi, compressive strength (28-day) concrete mix inside roof curb, 4 inches thick.
Concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified with concrete.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit
operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-8
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.05 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:
1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for peak efficiency.
a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge. e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration. f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off.
Calculate useful heat to supply air.
21. Calibrate thermostats. 22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 23. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F above
return-air temperature:
a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.
26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume.
SA1509A PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 7413-9
c. Relief-air volume. d. Outdoor-air intake volume.
27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air intake.
28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:
a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. b. Low-temperature safety operation. c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. e. Relief-air fan operation. f. Smoke and firestat alarms.
29. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
RTUs.
END OF SECTION 23 7413
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-1
SECTION 26 0500 – BASIC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, tools, materials, accessories, parts, transportation, taxes, and related items, essential for installation of the work and necessary to make work, complete, and operational. Provide new equipment and material unless otherwise called for. References to codes, specifications and standards called for in the specification sections and on the drawings mean, the latest edition, amendment and revision of such referenced standard in effect on the date of these contract documents
1.2 LICENSING
A. The Contractor shall hold a license to perform the work as issued by the local jurisdiction.
B. Electrical contract work shall be performed by, or under, the direct supervision of a licensed electrician.
1.3 PERMITS
A. Apply for and obtain all required permits and inspections, pay all fees and charges including all service charges.
Provide certificate of approval from Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to request for final payment.
1.4 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. Provide work in compliance with the following:
1. Building Code of New York State.
2. Mechanical Code of New York State.
3. Plumbing Code of New York State.
4. Fuel Gas Code of New York State.
5. Fire Code of New York State.
6. Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State.
7. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations.
8. National Electrical Code (NEC).
9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
10. Local Codes and Ordinances.
11. Life Safety Codes, NFPA 101.
12. New York Board of Fire Underwriters.
13. Combustion Toxicity Amendment to the New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code.
1.5 GLOSSARY
ACI American Concrete Institute
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-2
AGA American Gas Association AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials AWSC American Welding Society Code AWWA American Water Works Association FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NYS/DEC New York State Department of Environmental Conservation SBI Steel Boiler Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration NYS/UFPBC New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code
1.6 DEFINITIONS
Acceptance Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor upon certification by Owner's Representative.
Approval/Approved Written permission to use a material or system.
As Called For Materials, equipment including the execution specified/shown in the contract
documents.
Code Requirement
s
Minimum requirements.
Concealed Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or below grade.
Design Equipment Refer to the article, Equipment Arrangements, and the article, Substitutions.
Design Make Refer to the article, Equipment Arrangements, and the article, Substitutions.
Exposed Work not identified as concealed.
Equal or Equivalent
Equally acceptable as determined by Owner's Representative.
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-3
Furnish Supply and deliver to installed location.
Furnished by Others
Receive delivery at job site or where called for and install
Inspection Visual observations by Owner's site Representative.
Install Mount and connect equipment and associated materials ready for use.
Labeled Refers to classification by a standards agency.
Make Refer to the article, Equipment Arrangements, and the article, Substitutions.
Manufacturers Refer to the article, Equipment Arrangements, and the article, Substitutions.
Or Approved Equal Approved equal or equivalent as determined by Owner's Representative.
Owner's Representati
ve
The Prime Professional.
Prime Professional Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with the Owner for professional services.
Provide Furnish, install, and connect ready for use.
Relocate Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to new locations, then clean,
test, and install ready for use.
Replace Remove and provide new item.
Review A general contractual conformance check of specified products.
Roughing Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation.
Satisfactory As specified in contract documents.
Site Representative Owner's Inspector or "Clerk of Works" at the work site.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS/PRODUCT DATA/SAMPLES
A. Refer to the Division 01 Sections, General Requirements.
1.8 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A. Contractor shall assume responsibility for construction safety at all times and provide, as part of contract, all trench or building shoring, scaffolding, shielding, dust/fume protection, mechanical/electrical protection, special grounding, safety railings, barriers, and other safety feature required to provide safe conditions for all workmen and site visitors.
1.9 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS
A. The contract documents are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design equipment", even though other
manufacturers' names are listed. If Contractor elects to use one of the listed manufacturers other than "design equipment", submit detailed drawings, indicating proposed installation of equipment. Show maintenance clearances,
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-4
service removal space required, and other pertinent revisions to the design arrangement. Make required changes in the work of other trades, at no increase in any contract. Provide larger motors, feeders, breakers, and equipment, additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation, and assume responsibility for proper location of roughing and connections by other trades. Remove and replace doorframes, access doors, walls, ceilings, or floors required to install other than "design equipment". If revised arrangement submittal is rejected, revise and resubmit specified "design equipment" item which conforms to contract documents.
1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If Contractor desires to bid on any other kind, type, brand, or manufacture of material or equipment than those named
in specifications, secure prior approval. To request such approval, Contractor shall submit complete information comparing (item-for-item) material or equipment offered with design material or equipment. Include sufficient information to permit quick and thorough comparison, and include performance curves on same basis, capacities, power requirements, controls, materials, metal gauges, finishes, dimensions, weights, etc., of major parts. If accepted, an addendum will be issued to this effect ahead of bid date. Unless such addendum is issued, substitution offered may not be used.
B. Refer to the Division 01 Sections, General Requirements.
1.11 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Portions of the building will be in use during construction operations. Maintain existing systems in operation within all
occupied rooms of building at all times. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" for temporary facilities for additional contract requirements. Schedules for various phases of contract work shall be coordinated with all
other trades and with Owner's Representative. Provide, as part of contract, temporary mechanical and electrical connections and relocations as required to accomplish the above. Obtain approval in writing as to date, time, and location
for shutdown of existing mechanical/electrical facilities or services.
1.12 ROUGHING
A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing.
B. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils,
motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work.
C. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication
and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans.
D. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain from Owner and other Contractors,
approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows:
1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location.
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-5
2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings.
If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative.
1.13 REMOVAL WORK
A. Where existing equipment removals are called for, submit complete list to Owner's Representative. All items that Owner
wishes to retain that do not contain asbestos or PCB or Mercury Material shall be delivered to location directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally disposed of. Removal and disposal of material containing asbestos, PCB's and/or mercury shall be in accordance with Federal, State and Local law requirements. Where equipment is called for to be relocated, contractor shall carefully remove, clean and recondition, then reinstall. Remove all abandoned piping, wiring, equipment, lighting, ductwork, tubing, supports, fixtures, etc. Visit each room, crawl spaces, and roofs to determine total Scope of Work. The disturbance or dislocation of asbestos-containing materials causes asbestos fibers to be released into the building's atmosphere, thereby creating a health hazard to workmen and building occupants. Consistent with Industrial Code Rule 56 and the content of recognized asbestos-control work, the Contractor shall apprise all of his workers, supervisory personnel, subcontractors, Owner and Consultants who will be at the job site of the seriousness of the hazard and of proper safeguards and work procedures which must be followed, as described in New York State Department of Labor Industrial Code Rule 56.
1.14 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in
accordance with NFPA 255.
2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label.
3. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. All Equipment shall be UL Listed and Bear the UL Label.
1.15 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Unless noted otherwise, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to device/equipment
8. Fire alarm manual stations 46 inches 9. Fire alarm notification device (height to bottom of device) 80 inches
10. Distribution panelboards (to top of backbox) 72 inches
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-6
11. Terminal cabinets, control cabinets (to top of backbox) 72 inches
12. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers 48 inches
1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Each trade shall include their required cutting and patching work unless shown as part of the General Construction Contract. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, for additional requirements. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying. Patch cut or abandoned holes left by removals of equipment or fixtures. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering, other finished surfaces. Patch openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.17 PAINTING
A. All painting shall consist of one (1) prime coat and two (2) finish coats of non-lead oil base paint, unless otherwise
indicated herein. Paint shall be comparable to Baltimore Paint Company. Provide Pittsburgh galvanized iron primer for all galvanized surfaces. All surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned before painting. Review system color coding prior to painting with the Owner's representative.
B. All items installed after finished painting is completed and any damaged factory finish paint on equipment furnished under
this contract must be touched up by the Contractor responsible for same.
C. Include painting for patchwork with color to match adjacent surfaces. Where color cannot be adequately matched, paint entire surface. Provide one (1) coat of primer and two (2) finish coats or as called for in the Specifications.
D. Refer to Division 09 - Finishes, for additional information.
1.18 CONCEALMENT
A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is
impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance.
1.19 CHASES
A. New Construction:
1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General
Construction Contract. Mechanical and Electrical Contracts shall provide all other openings required for their contract work.
2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all
openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work.
3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings.
4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location.
5. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor.
B. In Existing Buildings:
1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings.
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-7
2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller
diameter opening.
3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors.
4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated
assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings.
1.20 SUPPORTS
A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support contract
work. Supports shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For precast panels/planks and metal decks, support mechanical/electrical work as determined by manufacturer and Owner's Representative. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity.
B. Equipment, piping, conduit, raceway, etc. supports shall be installed to minimize the generation and transmission of
vibration.
1.21 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective Contract work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each Contract. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Contractor shall provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction Contract with a set of architectural plans with size and approximate locations of access panels shown.
1.22 CONCRETE BASES
A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and
securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring and after anchoring and leveling, fill equipment bases with grout.
1.23 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty
NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC.
B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required.
1.24 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Store Materials on dry base, at least 6 in. aboveground or floor. Store so as not to interfere with other work or obstruct
access to buildings or facilities. Provide waterproof/windproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Protect against theft or damage from any cause. Replace items stolen or damaged, at no cost to Owner.
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-8
1.25 FREEZING AND WATER DAMAGE
A. Take all necessary precautions with equipment, systems and building to prevent damage due to freezing and/or water damage. Repair or replace, at no change in contract, any such damage to equipment, systems, and building. Perform first seasons winterizing in presence of Owner's operating staff.
1.26 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS
A. Before final acceptance of the work, furnish necessary skilled labor to operate all systems by seasons. Instruct designated
person on proper operation, and care of systems/equipment. Repeat instructions, if necessary. Obtain written acknowledgement from person instructed prior to final payment. Contractor is fully responsible for system until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. List under clear plastic, operating, maintenance, and starting precautions procedures to be followed by Owner for operating systems and equipment.
1.27 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to the Division 01 Sections, General Requirements.
1.28 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to the Division 01 Sections, General Requirements.
1.29 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
A. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of substitution of
equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and accessories furnished, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the consultant's expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any monies owed to the Contractor.
B. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of Contractor's errors,
omissions or failure to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Consultant's expense in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any monies owed to the Contractor.
1.30 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall secure an accredited third party inspection firm to inspect all work performed under project contract.
Submit a written Inspection report prior to request for final payment. B. Upon completion of all punch list items, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the punch list back to the Engineer with each
items noted as completed or the current status of the item. Upon receipt, the Engineer will schedule a final inspection.
1.31 TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Refer to the Division 01 Sections, General Requirements.
1.32 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Refer to the Division 01 Sections, General Requirements.
1.33 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. Refer to the Division 01 Sections, General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions.
SA1509A BASIC ELECTIRCAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 26 0500-9
1.34 CLEANING
A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to keep clean all equipment and fixtures provided under this contract for the duration of
the project. Each trade shall keep the premises free from an accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his operations. The facilities require an environment of extreme cleanliness, and it is the Contractor's responsibility to adhere to the strict regulations regarding procedures on the existing premises. After all tests are made and installations completed satisfactorily:
1. Thoroughly clean entire installation, both exposed surfaces and interiors.
2. Remove all debris caused by work.
3. Remove tools, surplus, materials, when work is finally accepted.
1.35 SYSTEM START-UP AND TESTING
A. Work of any contract which includes system start-up, system cut-over or staff training shall not be done one week prior to
and one week after the commencement of school except upon written approval by the Owner.
B. Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor(s) effecting such system shall survey all building electrical systems and components, including fire alarm, intrusion, communications, clock and computer; make written notice to the Owner regarding existing damages, missing items and incomplete systems. Prior to the conclusion of this project, the Contractor shall verify with the Project Inspector that all building system has been returned to their original conditions.
1.36 VIDEO TAPING OF TRAINING SESSIONS
A. The contractor shall videotape all training sessions required by their discipline. Video to be transferred to DVD format and
two (2) copies submitted to the Owner. DVD to be individually marked with training session name, installing Contractor and date of training.
END OF SECTION 26 0500
SA1509A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519-1
SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2.
C. Manufacturer’s: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Southwire Inc. 2. General Cable 3. Alpha Wire Co. 4. Approved Equal.
D. Copper Conductors, size #10 and smaller: Comply with NEMA L/C To/ICEA 5-95-658.
E. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA L/C to/ICEA 5-95-658 for XHHW-2.
2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and
service indicated. 2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
SA1509A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519-2
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which
shall be extra flexible stranded.
3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
1. Type SER cable shall be an acceptable alternate. Verify with Engineer proposed locations if the alternate will be used.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway
1. Type MC Cable shall be an acceptable alternate for wiring from junction boxes to final device locations only. (Home-Runs to panelbards shall be single conductors in raceway).
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in
raceway.
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways
and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate
conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or
raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.
SA1509A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519-3
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare
conductor.
3.06 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.07 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of
assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
a. Conductors feeding process equipment.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 26 0519
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526-1
SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.02 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and
installation conditions. D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type wire terminals, and
long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 5/8 by 96 inches.
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.02 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main
bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
3.03 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure- sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons,
ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and
noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable andgrounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for taps to equipment grounding terminals.
3.04 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526-3
C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.
D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to
each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding
conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with
lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 12 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make
connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and
located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through
short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not
transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted
clamp.
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 26 0526
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529-1
SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this
Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to
MFMA-4. 3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of
raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging
plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529-2
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces
include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as
required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways
serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through
structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their
supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry
units.
SA1509A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529-3
3. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
4. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect
switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted- channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor
electrical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.04 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 26 0529
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-1
SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:
1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 3. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 4. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
5. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 6. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 7. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
B. Metal Fittings:
1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-2
2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 5. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: Setscrew or compression.
6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions
where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 7. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting
threaded joints.
C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit:
1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. 3. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 4. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. 5. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. 6. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D3485.
B. Nonmetallic Fittings:
1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 2. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.03 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 3R Type 4 unless otherwise indicated, and
sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.04 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5..
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-3
C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.
2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall
be listed for use in wet locations.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
E. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep and 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.
K. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
M. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with
manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked
for intended location and application.
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-4
2.06 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:
1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of fiberglass.
1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with
enclosure and handhole location. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation
in enclosure wall.
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A
qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO
10012 and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-
Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following:
a. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-
Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and
commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-5
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal
all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article
are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
C. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
D. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway
runs above water and steam piping. E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which
fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.
H. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.
I. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or
perpendicular to building lines.
J. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
K. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.
L. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-6
M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of
raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.
O. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install
bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
Q. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn
more.
R. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
S. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut
straight and perpendicular to the length.
T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
U. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
V. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal
and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. 5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
W. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
X. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30
deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per
deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's
written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-7
Y. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
Z. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to
ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
AA. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
BB. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. CC.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
DD. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
EE. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. FF.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
GG. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving
conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches
of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building
foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6
inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to
minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
SA1509A RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-8
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch
above finished grade.
D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line below grade.
E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install 0sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section
26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.06 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 26 0533
SA1509A UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWATS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543-1
SECTION 26 0543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 2. Handholes and boxes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
A. Comply with ANSI C2.
2.02 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with
NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
2.03 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-80 and Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the duct.
B. Duct Accessories:
1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers. 2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches in size, manufactured from 6000-psi red concrete and
labeled "ELECTRIC."
2.04 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: Comply with SCTE 77. Comply with tier requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.
1. Color: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with
enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 6. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and
pulling-in irons.
B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers made of fiberglass.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
SA1509A UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWATS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543-2
b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION
A. Ducts for Electrical Cables More than 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
D. Underground Ducts Crossing Driveways and Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.
3.02 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic- operated, compaction equipment.
B. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include
necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" and Section 32 93 00 "Plants."
C. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to the "Cutting and
Patching" Article in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."
3.03 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.
B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to drain in both directions.
C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.
D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.
E. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct banks are installed parallel to underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct bank will not be subject to environmental temperatures above 40 deg?C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated to rise above 40 deg?C, and anywhere the duct bank crosses above an underground steam line, install insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.
F. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10
inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.
1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.
2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line direct- buried duct banks with calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch.
3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
SA1509A UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWATS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543-3
G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use
sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.
I. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf-test nylon cord in empty ducts.
J. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
2. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.
3. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature. 4. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than
four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
5. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts.
6. Elbows: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches
of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
7. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
8. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.
9. Concrete Cover: Install a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover at top and bottom, and a minimum of 2 inches on each side of duct bank.
10. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in- Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.
K. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Comply with requirements in Section 31
20 00 "Earth Moving" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature. 3. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than four spacers per 20
feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers.
4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade unless otherwise indicated. 5. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line. 6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and 6 inches between power and signal
ducts.
SA1509A UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWATS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543-4
7. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches
of concrete. b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60
inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
8. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving
ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.
a. Place minimum 3 inches of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand to a minimum of 6 inches above top
level of duct bank.
L. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried ducts and duct banks, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional planks 12 inches apart, horizontally.
M. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape
parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4
sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below frost line.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation
and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.
F. Field cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure
with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
SA1509A UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWATS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543-5
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.
2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 6-inch-long mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
END OF SECTION 26 0543
SA1509A SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWATS AND CABLING 26 0544-1
SECTION 26 0544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls,
horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches,
thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16
inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required
for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.
2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
SA1509A SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWATS AND CABLING 26 0544-2
2.04 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.05 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire
rated. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a
flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal
is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during
erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install
sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied
in coordination with roofing work.
SA1509A SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWATS AND CABLING 26 0544-3
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange
to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 26 0544
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553-1
SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall
comply with UL 969.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
2.02 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and
matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
2.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553-2
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and
matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
2.04 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.05 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and
other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE,
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,.
C. Tag: Type I:
1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Thickness: 4 mils. 3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft.. 4. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf, and 2500 psi.
2.06 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on
front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE
POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
2.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system
applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with
operation and maintenance of equipment.
B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and
substrate.
E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly
above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trenchexceeds 16 inches overall.
G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and
handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded
service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches
from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
B. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
C. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by
system and circuit designation.
SA1509A IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553-4
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
D. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control
wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
E. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts.
Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited
to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.
G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical
fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
END OF SECTION 26 0553
SA1509A LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923-
SECTION 26 0923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy and switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.
B. Refer to occupancy sensor / control schedule on plans for additional information.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. Invensys Controls. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application. 2. Contact Configuration: SPST. 3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 480-V ac. 4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule. 5. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week. 6. Programs: 4 channels; each channel is individually programmable with eight on-off set points on a 24-hour
schedule. 7. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected
channels. 8. Astronomic Time: All channels. 9. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 10. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
2.02 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. 8. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 9. Watt Stopper.
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application. 2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when
unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from
the power pack. 4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1
hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 5. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.
C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot-high ceiling.
D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a
horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted
on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when
mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted
on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot-high ceiling
in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.
E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents
a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
2.03 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc.
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 12. Watt Stopper.
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application. 2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.
2.04 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total Lighting Control. 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament,
inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. 3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type specified for the
enclosure.
2.05 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Field coordinate occupancy sensor placement with other trades. Avoid locating occupancy sensors near HVAC sources of airflow. Verify that PIR occupancy sensors can “see” entire space requiring coverage without any blind spots.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance
in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than- normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's
operations.
D. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.
E. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size
is 1/2 inch.
F. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 26 0923
SA1509A PANELBOARDS 26 2416-1
SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary
components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in
panelboards.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
B. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage
suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
SA1509A PANELBOARDS 26 2416-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.
C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from
incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as
incoming lugs or main device.
E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future
installation of devices.
G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.
H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-
in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.04 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared x t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID
for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
C. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
D. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
E. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in
the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
G. Comply with NECA 1.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval
before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification.
Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with
new units and retest.
SA1509A PANELBOARDS 26 2416-5
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 26 2416
SA1509A WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-1
SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hospital-grade, Tamper-resistant GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. Hospital-grade, Tamper-resistant receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 3. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 4. Occupancy sensors. 5. Wall-box dimmers. 6. Wall plates. 7. Floor service fittings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
D. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
E. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction
manuals that include labeling conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 99.
C. RoHS compliant.
SA1509A WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-2
D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
E. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:
1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
F. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White or as selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated
or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
G. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
H. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.
2.02 HOSPITAL-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Hospital-Grade, Single Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd and FS W-C-596. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article. 5. .
B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd and FS W-C-596. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article.
C. Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-
grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Single-piece, rivet less, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Non-feed through. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 supplement sd, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article.
D. Hospital-Grade, Tamper-Resistant Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the line voltage receptacle. 2. Line Voltage Receptacles: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding, NEMA Configuration 5-20R. 3. USB Receptacles: Dual, USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum). 4. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 1310, and FS W-C-596. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article. 6. .
SA1509A WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-3
2.03 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A
A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
B. Antimicrobial, Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Description: Contact surfaces treated with a coating that kills 99.9 percent of certain common bacteria within two hours when regularly and properly cleaned.
2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
C. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
D. Antimicrobial, Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Description: Contact surfaces treated with a coating that kills 99.9 percent of certain common bacteria within two hours when regularly and properly cleaned.
2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
E. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall Switch Sensor Light Switch, Dual Technology:
1. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using dual (ultrasonic and passive infrared) technology.
2. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 3. Rated 960 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting,
and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac. 4. Adjustable time delay of 30 minutes. 5. Able to be locked to Automatic or Manual-On mode, see schedule.
B. Wall Sensor Light Switch, Passive Infrared:
1. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination, lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting- control unit using passive infrared technology.
2. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 3. Rated 960 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting,
and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac. 4. Adjustable time delay of 30 minutes. 5. Able to be locked to Manual-On mode.
2.05 DIMMERS
A. Wall-Box Dimmers:
1. Description: Modular, full-wave, solid-state dimmer switch with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency
and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 2. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 1472. 4. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming;
capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
SA1509A WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-4
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.
B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and
damp locations.
C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
D. Antimicrobial Cover Plates:
1. Contact surfaces treated with a coating that kills 99.9 percent of certain common bacteria within two hours when
regularly and properly cleaned. 2. Tarnish resistant.
2.07 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Flush-Type Floor Service Fittings:
1. Description: Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used, with cover flush with
finished floor. 2. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. 3. Service Plate and Cover: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum with satin finish. 4. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid
wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
SA1509A WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-5
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building
finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise,
two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for
device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in
yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. 2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard
device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device, listing
conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing
with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
SA1509A WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-6
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of
measurement.
D. Tests for Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections,
inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
E. Test straight-blade hospital-grade outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention
force shall be not less than 4 oz..
F. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 26 2726
SA1509A FUSES 26 2813-1
SECTION 26 2813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.
2.02 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical
Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.
SA1509A ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816-2
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum
neutral conductors. 3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.02 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum
neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.03 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip
element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK- 5.
E. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
SA1509A ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816-3
2.04 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving
parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and
that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 26 2816
SA1509A INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-1
SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. Section 26 09 23 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric
relays, occupancy sensors, and multi-pole lighting relays and contactors. 2. Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
C. LED: Light Omitting Diode.
D. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including remote devices if provided.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
a. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.
5. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life.
SA1509A INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-2
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: If requested by engineer, provide samples for each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. In addition to light fixture housing and lens, each sample shall include the following:
1. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 2. Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system.
D. Installation instructions.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation and maintenance
manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
F. LED Compliance: LED components, lamps, drivers and fixtures shall comply with: PCC 47 CFR Part 15; UL 8750; ANSI/NEMA Standards C78.377, NEMA SSL-1, C82.77, IESNA Standards TM-16-05, RP-16, LM-79, LM-80 and TM-21.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings
or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
SA1509A INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-3
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery- powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 7 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty
shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. 2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.
B. Warranty for LED luminaires: Provide a five year manufacturer’s warranty on LED luminaires including full replacement of any failed components and $50 labor allowance for each luminaire. Warranty shall be from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. LED Fixtures: LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL as shown on the drawings, and as specified.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and
designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
F. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.
G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and drivers. Labels shall be located where they
will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Driver type and manufacturer. c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
SA1509A INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-4
2.03 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack.
a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of
nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal
voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep- discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.
5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of (15) minutes when power is restored after an outage. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency
operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.05 LED LIGHT FIXTURES
A. General
1. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant. 2. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated.
a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load. b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20 degrees C (-4 F). c. Input Voltage: 120 – 277V (+/- 10%) at 60 Hz. d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e. Power Factor: > 0.95. f. Total Harmonic distortion: < 20%. g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.
SA1509A INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-5
3. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Comply with IES LM 79 and LM 80 requirements. b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 4000 K unless otherwise specified in light fixture schedule. c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. d. Light output lumens as indicated in light fixture schedule.
B. Installation of LED modules (with power supplies) shall adhere to all applicable electrical and safety standards. Assembly
must not damage or destroy conduction paths on circuit board.
C. LED module must be protected from unbalanced voltage drop, and/or overload. Correct electrical polarity shall be clearly identified.
D. Install system according to the manufacturer’s heat sinking parameters.
E. For applications involving exposure to humidity and dust, the module shall be protected by a fixture or housing with a
suitable protective lens. The module shall be protected against condensation water by treatment with an appropriate circuit board conformal coating. The conformal coating should have the following features:
1. Optical transparency. 2. UV resistance. 3. Thermal expansion properties matching those of the module (15-30 x 10-6cm/cm/K). 4. Low permeability of steam for all climate conditions. 5. Resistance against corrosive environments.
F. The LED Module shall be operated with an electronically stabilized power supply offering protection against short circuits,
overload and overheating.
G. LED Down lights: 1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.
H. LED Troffers:
1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from below the ceiling. 2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturers.
2.06 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and
nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
SA1509A INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures:
1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install
and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.
1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that
are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel,
and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have
breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of
fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.
E. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.03 ADJUSTING & COMMISSION
A. Refer to requirements as indicated on drawing E-001
END OF SECTION 26 5100
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0526-1
SECTION 27 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure, including the following:
1. Ground rods. 2. Ground and roof rings. 3. BCT, TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors.
B. Qualification Data: For installation supervisor, and field inspector.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Result of the ground-resistance test, measured at the point of BCT connection. b. Result of the bonding-resistance test at each TGB and its nearest grounding electrode.
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0526-2
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.
2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a registered communications distribution designer to perform the on-site inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.02 CONDUCTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG and not longer than 12 inches (300 mm). If jumper is a wire, it shall have a crimped
grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two crimps. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.
2. Not smaller than No. 10 AWG and not longer than 12 inches (300 mm). If jumper is a wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with one hole and standard barrel for one crimp. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one- or two-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.
E. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils (14.2 sq. mm), 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches
(41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
2.03 CONNECTORS
A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B.
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0526-3
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.
1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.
D. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type, mechanical connector; with a long
barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch (15.8- or 25.4-mm) centers for a two-bolt connection to the busbar.
E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.04 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 3. Panduit Corp.
B. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.
1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch ((100-mm)) clearance to access the rear of the busbar.
Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel. 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards,
impulse tested at 5000 V. C. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6.3 by 50 mm) in cross section, length as
indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.
1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch ((50-mm) clearance to access the rear of the
busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.) 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards,
impulse tested at 5000 V.
D. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with J-STD-607-A. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.
1. Cabinet-Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the
cabinet. 2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch (483- or 584-mm) equipment racks.
Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0526-4
3. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 or 36 inches ((1827 or 914 mm) long, with)stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.
2.05 LABELING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Brother International Corporation. 2. HellermannTyton. 3. Panduit Corp.
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.
B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance, and the grounding
electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No.
6 AWG. 2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than
No. 6 AWG.
B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0526-5
C. Conductor Support:
1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches ((900 mm).)
D. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:
1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.
2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch (900-mm) intervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch (21-mm) PVC conduit until conduit enters a
telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated.
a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond the conductor to the
conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.
3.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. The BCT between the TMGB and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than No. 1/0 AWG.
3.05 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm)
A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in that room, using equipment
grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.
B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.
C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.
D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.
E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone conductor. If more than one
TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot (1 sq. mm/linear meter) of conductor length, up to a maximum size of No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.
F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications
bonding and grounding system. Install vertically-mounted rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.
G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the room or space, bond
each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.
H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the panelboard.
SA1509A GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0526-6
I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and spaces. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables.
J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power
connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.
1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the
TMGB. 2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TGB. 3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point: "WARNING!
TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!"
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a
calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester, taking two-point bonding
measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation.
a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding electrode. The maximum
acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms.
3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent.
a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system electronics operating,
measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify Architect promptly and include
recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.
C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
F. LAN: Local area network.
G. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications
outlet/connectors.
H. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.
I. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
J. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.
1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:
a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset
identification system of the software. 3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:
a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.
4. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship
between the installed components.
C. Samples: If requested by Engineer, provide samples for workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical features.
1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Forqualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B. Source quality-control reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.
3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
1.2 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.
1. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal
cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 2. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m), and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications
outlet/connectors to the station equipment.
C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
D. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.03 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2.04 UTP CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Belden Inc. 2. CommScope, Inc. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.
B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70
for the following types:
a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.
2.05 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25
percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent
termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.
G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end. Coordinate length
requirements with Owner IT Representative. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch
cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
2.08 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS
A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in multigang faceplate.
1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP and coaxial work area cords.
a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
3. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
4. Refer to contract drawings for additional information.
2.09 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.
B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
C. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.
D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING METHODS
A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible
ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures:
1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.
4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets,
terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more
than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii
than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii,
but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
D. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
F. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable
from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power
conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical
equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A
minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
3.03 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50- mm)
clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Administration Class: 2. Coordinate with Owner’s IT Representative. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and
labels.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration,
including optional identification requirements of this standard.
D. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m).
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
E. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but
still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and
labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between
conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a
tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
5. UTP Performance Tests:
a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-
568-B.2:
1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew.
6. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Section 274133 "Master Antenna Television System." 7. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and
workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.
b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.
B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
END OF SECTION 27 1500
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-1
SECTION 27 5223 - NURSE CALL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes visual/tone nurse-call system.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment cabinets and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Cabling Diagrams: Single-line block diagrams showing cabling interconnection of all components for this specific equipment. Include cable type for each interconnection.
3. Station Installation Details: For built-in equipment, dimensioned and to scale.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For nurse-call equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: All colors for corridor dome lights and zone lights equal to 20 percent of amount installed. 2. Printed Circuit Boards: Each kind, equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit. 3. System program backup software.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-2
B. Compatibility: System shall be capable of integration with any brand of phone system (wired or wireless), staff locating system, CCTV, and fire-alarm system.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled according to UL 1069 as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Special warranty for batteries applies to materials only, on a prorated basis for specified period.
1. Warranty Period: Include the following warranty periods, from date of Substantial Completion:
a. Nickel-Cadmium Batteries, Lithium Batteries, and Wet-Cell Batteries:
1) Full Warranty: Five years. 2) Pro Rata: 15 years.
1.09 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.
B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade
computer equipment if necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 NURSE-CALL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Station Zones: Able to program 256 station zones for each master station in the network with eight priority levels and addressable visual and audible annunciation of audible devices such as smoke detectors and door contacts.
B. System shall provide integrated and centralized "Code Blue" and "Staff Emergency" calls.
and cable conductor quantities adequate to increase the number of stations in the future by 25 percent above those indicated without adding internal or external components or main trunk cable conductors.
D. Resistance to Electrostatic Discharge: System, components, and cabling, and the selection, arrangement, and connection
of materials and circuits, shall be protected against damage or diminished performance when subjected to electrostatic discharges of up to 25,000 V in an environment with a relative humidity of 20 percent or less.
E. Equipment: Microprocessor, electronic, modular.
F. Master Nurse-Call Station: Programmed via a PC.
G. Wall-Mounted Component Connection Method: Components connect to system wiring in back boxes with factory- wired plug connectors.
H. Telephone Interface: Permit use of wired and wireless telephones to execute nurse-call master station functions.
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-3
I. Third-Party Pager Interface: Programmable to send tone, numeric, and alphanumeric message to pocket pagers or personal
digital assistants and to use industry standard-protocol, RS-485 interface.
2.02 VISUAL/TONE NURSE-CALL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Patient Station Call: Lights a steady call-placed lamp on the station, steady lamps in the zone light and corridor dome light associated with the patient's room, and steady lamps at the central annunciator and other system display devices and displays message on master and staff/duty stations. At the same time, it sounds a programmed tone at intervals, at the respective annunciator and master and staff/duty stations. Legends at the central annunciator and master station identify the calling station.
2. Pull-Cord-Call Station Call: Flashes a call-placed lamp on the station and distinctive-color lamps in the zone light and corridor dome light and at the central annunciator and staff/duty stations. At the same time, it sounds a programmed tone at intervals, at the central annunciator and master and staff/duty stations. A legend at the master station identifies the calling station, priority as programmed, and bed identification.
3. Emergency-Call Station Call: Produces the same responses as pull-cord-call station calls except rapidly flashing red emergency digital display and tone repetition rates are more frequent, tone frequency is higher, and lamps in the zone light and corridor dome light are a different color. Indicator lamps may be extinguished and the system reset only at the calling station. Displays message on pocket pagers, sounds programmed tone on phones, and displays message on display equipped phones.
4. System Reset: Operating reset button at the originating station cancels signals associated with the call. Illuminates a green digital display on the patient station and log presence on the master station.
5. Cord-Set Removal: Initiates a patient station call when the cord set is removed from the jack in the patient station faceplate. Displays location and "cord removed" message on master station, pocket pagers, and display equipped phones. Inserting a cord-set plug or a dummy plug into the jack and operating the station reset button resets the call.
6. Patient Control Unit: Controls entertainment volume and channel selection. Nurse button on the unit initiates a patient station call. Integral speaker reproduces entertainment sound.
7. Emergency Bath Station Call: Illuminates the digital display on the emergency bath station; rapidly flashes white dome lamp; displays location, priority, and bath on master station; and sounds programmed tone on master station display equipped phones and pocket pagers.
8. Staff/Duty Station Operation: Operation shall be identified to patient station except the message staff shall display on all devices when the staff call button is activated.
9. Privacy Key Activation: When privacy key is activated on patient station, the system shall disconnect the patient station microphone and slowly flash yellow privacy digital display on the patient station. Displays "privacy" on master station when selecting this room/bed.
C. Central Annunciator:
1. Lamp type. 2. Lamp Legends: Machine lettered and legible from a distance of at least 48 inches when a call is present. Legend
shall identify initiating station and priority of call. 3. Power-on Indicator: Digital, or push-to-test switch. 4. Audible Signal: Electronic tone.
D. Central Equipment Cabinet:
1. Lockable metal. 2. Houses power supplies, controls, terminal strips, and other components.
3. Power-on indicator lamp. 4. Battery Backup Unit: Sealed nickel-cadmium, wet-cell battery supplies power through an automatic switch when
normal power fails, for a period of not less than six minutes at rated output. System shall lose no unanswered calls or calls in progress during the transfer operation.
a. Automatic retransfer to normal power, after a 15-minute time delay. b. Two-rate battery charger with an automatic trickle rate and a recharge rate.
E. Single-Patient Station: Call-placed lamp, reset push button, and polarized receptacle matching cord-set plug; mounted in a
single faceplate.
F. Ambulatory-Patient Station: Call push-button switch, call-placed lamp, and reset push button; mounted in a single faceplate.
G. Staff/Duty Stations: A minimum of two call lamps, one for routine calls and one for emergency calls; and an audible tone signal device.
2.03 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Emergency-Call Station: Locking-type push button, labeled "Push to Call Help"; reset trigger to release push button and cancel call; and call-placed lamp, mounted in a single faceplate.
B. Emergency-Bath Station:
1. Consists of a sliding, chemical-resistant, ABS red fascia marked with the word "URGENT" in bold letters. 2. Capable of being activated with nylon pull cord or by sliding the face of the unit downwards. 3. Activation of the station shall illuminate a reassurance digital display on the face of the unit in addition to notifying
the master station. 4. Water resistant and able to withstand routine cleaning and chemical disinfectants. 5. Uses magnetic reed switch technology for reliability and corrosion resistance. 6. Mounts on a single-gang electrical box wire to the respective patient station or input controller.
C. Code Blue Station:
1. Consists of a sliding, chemical-resistant, ABS blue fascia marked with the word "CODE" in bold letters. 2. Capable of being activated with nylon pull cord or by sliding the face of the unit downwards. 3. Activation of the station shall illuminate a reassurance digital display on the face of the unit in addition to notifying
the master station. 4. Water resistant and able to withstand routine cleaning and chemical disinfectants. 5. Uses magnetic reed switch technology for reliability and corrosion resistance. 6. Mounts on a single-gang electrical box wire to the respective patient station or input controller.
D. Staff, Emergency Station:
1. Consists of a sliding, chemical-resistant, ABS red fascia marked with the word "EMERGENCY" in bold letters. 2. Capable of being activated with nylon pull cord or by sliding the face of the unit downwards. 3. Activation of the station shall illuminate a reassurance digital display on the face of the unit in addition to notifying
the master station. 4. Mounts on a single-gang electrical box wire to the input controller.
E. Pull-Cord-Call Station:
1. Pull-Down Switch: Lever-locking type, labeled "Pull Down to Call Help." 2. Reset trigger. 3. Call-placed lamp. 4. Water-resistant construction.
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-5
F. Call-Button Plug:
1. Designed to plug into patient station cord-set receptacle. 2. Button switches call circuit. 3. Two plugs for every 10 patient beds.
G. Dummy Plugs:
1. Designed to plug into patient station cord-set receptacle when call-button plug or patient cord set is not used. 2. Three plugs for every 10 patient beds.
H. Indicator Lamps: Digital type with rated life of 20 years unless otherwise indicated.
I. Station Faceplates:
1. Stainless steel, a minimum of 0.0375 inch thick. 2. Finish: Brushed. 3. Machine-engraved labeling identifies indicator lamps and controls.
J. Corridor Dome Lights and Zone Lights:
1. Three-lamp signal lights. 2. Lamps: LED. Front replaceable without tools, low voltage with rated life of 7500 hours. Barriers are such that only
one color is displayed at a time. 3. Lenses: Heat-resistant, shatterproof, translucent polymer that will not deform, discolor, or craze when exposed to
hospital cleaning agents. 4. Filters: Two per unit, amber and red.
K. Cable:
1. Conductors: Jacketed single and multiple, twisted-pair copper cables. 2. Sizes and Types: As recommended by equipment manufacturer. 3. Cable for Use in Plenums: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
L. Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications
Systems." 2.04 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
A. Telephone System Interface:
1. Permits use of wired and/or wireless telephones to execute nurse-call master station. 2. Two-way communication with patient and staff stations. 3. Two-way communication with the master nurse station. 4. "All Call," group call, and staff call paging. 5. Capable of being programmed to forward calls destined for a master nurse station to any connected telephone. 6. Telephones connected to the telephone interface shall have the same call tone ring patterns as those generated at
the master nurse station. 7. Telephones having a display shall indicate the call type, priority code, and the calling station number of incoming
calls. 8. Telephones shall be capable of initiating a service request for a particular patient station, logging calls on the master
station's reminder list, and activating door lock mechanisms associated with a call station. 9. Capable of routine setup and configuration changes using the keypads on display telephone and/or the master
station.
B. Display Telephones:
1. Digital telephones for use as mini-master nurse-call stations. 2. Digital display shall indicate the call type, priority code, and calling station number of incoming calls.
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-6
3. Ring patterns shall be identical to those generated at the master station. 4. Capable of two-way communication with patient and staff stations and the master station, and other telephones
interfaced with the system. 5. Capable of placing or answering outside calls when interfaced with the facility telephone system. 6. Capable of "All Call," group call, and staff call paging and of initiating service requests, logging calls to the reminder
list, and activating optional door controls.
C. Statistical Software:
1. Includes a data statistical software package that stores, sorts, and analyzes activities occurring on the nurse- call system network.
2. Windows based and operated on a PC that is connected to the nurse-call system network. 3. Stores events on the PC's hard disk. Accumulation of these stored events shall make up the database that is used
to generate reports and statistics. 4. Events stored by the software shall include date, day of week, time, ward, priority, and room number. 5. Capable of assigning a patient name to bed number. 6. Stored events shall include, but not be limited to, calls placed, call priority, calls cancelled at the nurse station, calls
cancelled at the point of origin, regenerated calls, calls answered, calls sent to pager interface, staff presence registration, staff presence cancellation, service request, service cancellation, and system and network error messages.
D. Data Analysis Software:
1. Capable of analyzing the stored information and generating computed analysis. 2. Analysis of the database can be conducted by specifying one, many, or all of the following parameters of the
database: date, day of week, time, wards, priority, and room number. 3. Analysis shall include, but not be limited to, total number of calls placed, average call response time (from call
placed to call cancellation), total number of presence registrations, average presence time in a room, total number of service requests, average response time (from audio answer to call cancellation), and average ring time (from call placed to audio answer).
E. Statistical Software Package:
1. Capable of displaying multiple calls/events on a PC monitor or on a RS-485 data-bus-driven digital display panel. 2. Calls from patient or staff stations and associated devices shall be displayed by priority. Display shall be
customizable as follows:
a. Choice of color by type of call. b. Choice of display size (character size). c. Choice of priority levels, type of events, points of origin. d. Identification of facility. e. Identification of ward. f. Identification of patient with specific patient information.
2.05 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Audio Cables:
1. Conductors: Jacketed, twisted-pair and twisted-multipair, untinned solid copper. Sizes as recommended by system manufacturer, but no smaller than No. 22 AWG.
2. Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick. 3. Shielding: For speaker/microphone leads and elsewhere where recommended by manufacturer; No. 34
AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or equivalent foil. 4. Minimum Shielding Coverage on Conductors: 60 percent. 5. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
B. Data Cable and Hardware: Category 6 balanced twisted-pair cabling and hardware. Comply with requirements in Section 27
15 13 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-7
C. Power Conductors and Cables: Copper, solid, No. 20 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low- Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
D. Grounding Conductors and Cables: Copper, stranded, No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method:
1. Install cables in raceways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used.
a. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. b. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
2. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
a. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.
B. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket. C. Do not bend cables, while handling or installing, to radii smaller than as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions.
1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway. 2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not damage conductor or insulation. 3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire or cable grips, that will not damage
media or raceway.
E. Install exposed raceways and cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
F. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
G. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker/microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power-wiring runs. Run in separate raceways or, if exposed or in same enclosure, provide 12-inch minimum separation between conductors to speaker/microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other conductors.
H. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and
outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Install terminal cabinets where there are splices, taps, or terminations for eight or more conductors.
I. Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide
matching networks if required.
J. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 53 "Identification for Communications Systems" for cable administration, cable schedule, and cable and wire identification.
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-8
K. Equipment Identification:
1. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 53 "Identification for Communications Systems" for equipment labels
and signs and labeling installation requirements. 2. Label stations, controls, and indications using approved consistent nomenclature.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other signal impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding except at
connection to main building ground bus.
C. Grounding Provisions: Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems."
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Schedule tests a minimum of seven days in advance. 2. Report: Submit a written record of test results. 3. Operational Test: Perform an operational system test and demonstrate proper operations, adjustment, and
sensitivity of each station. Perform tests that include originating station-to-station and "All Call" messages and pages at each nurse-call station. Verify proper routing, volume levels, and freedom from noise and distortion. Test each available message path from each station on the system. Meet the following criteria:
a. Speaker Output: 90 dB plus or minus 3 dB, 300 to 3000 Hz, reference level threshold of audibility 0 dB at
0.02 mPa of sound pressure. b. Gain from patient's bedside station to nurse station, with distortion less than 65 dB (plus or minus 3 dB, 300
to 3000 Hz). c. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Hum and noise level at least 45 dB below full output.
4. Test Procedure:
a. Frequency Response: Determine frequency response of two transmission paths by transmitting and
recording audio tones. b. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of the complete system at normal gain settings
using the following procedure: Disconnect a speaker/microphone and replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Measure the ratio of signal to noise and repeat the test for four speaker microphones.
c. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed signals at frequencies of 300, 400, 1000, and 3000 Hz into each nurse-call equipment amplifier, and measure the distortion in the amplifier output.
C. Retesting: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's
expense. Verify, by the system test, that the total system meets these Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Report results in writing.
D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
SA1509A NURSE CALL SYSTEMS 27 5223-9
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and controls to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other-than-normal operating hours for this purpose.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Train Owner's maintenance personnel and caregiver staff to adjust, operate, and maintain nurse-call equipment.
END OF SECTION 27 5223
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-1
SECTION 28 0513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. UTP cabling. 2. RS-232 cabling. 3. RS-485 cabling. 4. Low-voltage control cabling. 5. Control-circuit conductors. 6. Fire alarm wire and cable. 7. Identification products.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).
F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B. Source quality-control reports.
C. Field quality-control reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-2
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
2.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.03 UTP CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 2. Belden Inc. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-3
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or MPP, complying with NFPA 262.
2.04 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring. 4. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 5. Panduit Corp.
B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.
C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25
percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway. B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.
C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83.
2.08 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-4
2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire.
B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.
C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.
1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2- hour rating.
D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.
copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
2.09 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. HellermannTyton North America. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp.
B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-5
3.02 WIRING METHOD
B. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.
1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.
2. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.
D. Wiring within Enclosures:
1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to
terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug
connectors.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
C. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated
outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6
inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii,
but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware
and interconnection equipment.
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-6
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
F. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data
communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power
conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical
equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in
grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48
inches. 6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.
3.04 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a
dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.
C. Wiring Method:
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is[ not] permitted. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as
signaling line circuits.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-7
E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for
alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each
other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.
H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install
number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.05 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.
B. Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 281300 "Access Control" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 284619 "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and Control Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System (For Elementary School), Section
283112 “Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System for (High School & Middle School) Section 283113 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System (For Bus Garage)" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
3.07 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.08 GROUNDING
A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
3.09 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SA1509A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0513-8
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling
terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a
tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
4. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Section 274133 "Master Antenna Television System."
C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1
in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.
D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 28 0513
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-1
SECTION 28 4621 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Remote annunciator. 7. Addressable interface device. 8. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.
1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in
NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.
4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet
all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when
air-handling system is operating. 11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate
location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and
remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-2
12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed
above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and
installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with
NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances. 3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample warranty.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according
to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. d. Riser diagram. e. Record copy of site-specific software. f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in
NFPA 72, and include the following:
1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each annunciator unit.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-3
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall function as a complete and operable system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.
B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation.
C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.
D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
2.02 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors. 6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 7. Fire standpipe system. 8. Dry system pressure flow switch.
B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 7. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 8. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-4
9. Activate elevator power shunt trip. 10. Record events in the system memory.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. 3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 4. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, or remote annunciator. 4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:
1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when
subjected to the seismic forces specified. 2.04 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. Basis of design: SIMPLEX – or equal from Notifier, Edwards or Siemens. All system components shall be from one single
supplier.
B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864.
2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.
3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.
C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and
addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-5
D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:
1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B. 2. Pathway Survivability: Level 0.
E. Notification-Appliance Circuit:
1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be a 520-Hz square wave
with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow.
3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.
F. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment,
display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory.
G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a
remote alarm station.
H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.
I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.
2.05 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38.
1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.06 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire- alarm
control unit. 3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that
connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal
operation. 5. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at
fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition.
a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg Fper minute.
b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 155 deg F.
c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-6
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location
within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the
following for each detector:
a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
C. Ionization Smoke Detector:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location
within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the
following for each detector:
a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location
within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the
following for each detector:
a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for
smoke detection in HVAC system ducts. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and
installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.07 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS
A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell. 3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts. 4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or internal faults. 5. Comply with UL 2075. 6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-7
7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system. 8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.
2.08 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature or a rate of rise.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire- alarm
control unit.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire- alarm
control unit. 2.09 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated,
equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.
B. Chimes: Vibrating type.
C. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille.
Comply with UL 464.
D. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inchhigh letters on the lens.
1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 4. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red or white as selected by architect.
2.10 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire- alarm
control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-8
2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. General:
1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.
B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with
normally open contacts.
C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall
1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring.
D. Control Module:
1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.
2.12 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632.
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone lines and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply. 5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure.
E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."
B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or
connections.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 27 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for
Communications Systems."
D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inchesabove the finished floor.
1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 27 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Communications Systems."
E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:
1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inchesof the exit doorway. 2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and above floor level. All devices shall be
mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: Comply with NFPA 72.
G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 incheslong shall be supported at both ends.
H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and
valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inchesbelow the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush- mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.
Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
3.02 PATHWAYS
A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.
1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inchesabove the floor shall be installed in EMT.
B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.
C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-10
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface
device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Magnetically held-open doors. 3. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 6. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 7. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 8. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 27 05 53 "Identification for Communications Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.
B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter.
b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the
test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the
"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
SA1509A ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 28 4621-11
B. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and
appliances.
C. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
F. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.07 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Comply with UL 864.
B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
END OF SECTION 28 4621
SA1509A SITE PREPARATION 31 1000-1
SECTION 31 1000 - SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including DIVISION 0 and DIVISION 1 Specifications
Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of site preparation is shown on the drawings. B. Site preparation work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Site investigation 2. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling on site (See Section 32 9219) 3. Site clearing and removals 4. Temporary construction fences and gates 5. Clean up
C. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services required to accomplish related work in accordance with
the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. SECTION 31 2000 - SITE EARTHWORK B. SECTION 32 9200 - PLANTING C. SECTION 32 9219 - SEEDED LAWNS 1.04 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Visit site before bidding and inform self of site conditions affecting work. No allowance will be made in the
work of this contract for failing to determine site conditions. B. Verify locations and protect utilities and structures, whether or not shown on the drawings: Existing utilities
and structures shown on the drawings are for the Contractor's convenience and locations are not guaranteed.
C. Verify survey information given on drawings. Notify the Architect of any and all discrepancies prior to
commencing work. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of survey information.
D. Locate and protect from disturbance existing survey monuments, pins, marker and benchmarks whether
or not shown on drawings. When any disturbance or damage occurs, notify Architect in writing within 24 hours. Describe nature of disturbance or damage and date first occurred. Provide copies to applicable government and municipal agencies. Pay costs for restoring monument to satisfaction of said agencies, at no additional expense to the Owner.
E. Examine drawings and specifications for the entire project. Become familiar with the scope and sequencing
of work required. Coordinate and cooperate with other Contractors and trades working in and adjacent to the project.
F. Examine site work prepared prior to this contract. Commencement of work will be construed as complete
acceptance of preparatory work by others.
SA1509A SITE PREPARATION 31 1000-2
G. Obtain and pay for permits required by authorities. Perform the work in compliance with applicable standards, codes, and requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Safety is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. I. Burning on site and use of explosives are not permitted. J. Responsibility for existing utilities:
1. Contact Underground Facilities Protection Organization (UFPO) at least two (2) full working days, and not more than ten (10) working days, before digging begins or as required by latest state law. Locate by hand excavation and provide protection from damage to existing utilities to remain in the area. (Tel. 1-800-962-7962)
2. Existing utilities encountered within excavated areas shall be supported, blocked and/or braced in a manner approved by the Owner of the utility. Leave supports in place to the extent required by the Owner of the utility.
3. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities be encountered, notify the Architect immediately for directions as to procedure. Walk the site with the Owner's Representative and to discuss approximate locations of reputed utilities not shown on the survey.
4. Do not break utility connections without providing temporary services as acceptable to the Owner. 5. Repair and pay for damages to existing utilities as directed by utility owner at no additional cost to
the Owner. 6. Cap ends of utilities to be abandoned or removed in accordance with regulatory agencies and as
directed by the Architect. K. Provide protections and conduct operations to prevent injury and damage to persons, work of other
Contractors, existing items to remain, structures, pavements, and adjacent properties. L. Restore work damaged by this Contractor inside and outside the contract limits to the condition existing
prior to the start of work, unless otherwise directed, to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
M. Vehicular and pedestrian traffic control:
1. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic during construction activities. 2. Provide alternate routes and traffic control around closed and obstructed traffic ways as required
by governing regulations. 3. Provide temporary fencing, flagpersons, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights to protect
the public and cause the least interruption of work. N. Field Measurements: Take necessary field horizontal and vertical measurements required in order to
perform the work. Assume complete responsibility for accuracy of such requirements. O. Removal of snow, debris and clean up:
1. Control air pollution caused by dust and dirt; comply with governing regulations. Water to control dust when necessary. Provide water sprinkling materials, equipment, and labor to prevent the nuisance of dust to the surrounding areas.
2. Legally dispose of removed and demolished items, including trash and debris, off the Owner's property, at a licensed disposal facility having adequate capacity to accept the project's waste.
3. Burning of combustible materials on the site is not permitted. 4. During the contract and at intervals as directed by the Architect, clear the site of extraneous
materials, rubbish, and debris. Leave the site in a clean, safe, neat, well-draining condition. 5. Soil and Snow Removal: Sweep roads, access ways, paved areas, and parking areas where soil,
mud and debris have dropped or tracked from construction and delivery vehicles. Remove snow and ice from roads, access ways, paved areas and parking areas utilized for construction purposes.
SA1509A SITE PREPARATION 31 1000-3
P. Construction Review - General: Site visits will be made by the Architect to observe construction conformance to drawings and specifications. The occasional site visits by the Architect shall not be construed as supervision of construction or make him responsible for the safety programs and precautions, including but not limited to the safe access, visit, use, work travel, or occupancy of any person. Site visits shall not make the Architect responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or his Sub-contractors:
Q. Site Complexity: The existing site will be intensively developed. Because of the construction and resulting
graphic complexity, it is impractical to show every detail. However, the general design intent is clearly shown and shall be applied to individual conditions not specifically shown as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide material certificate showing content/mechanical analysis for granular backfill. B. Provide photographic documentation. Photographically document existing features which, may be affected
by the construction, inside and outside the contract limit line. Existing features include, but are not limited to: structures, pavements, curbs, utilities, lawns and vegetation, especially individual trees which are over six (6") inches in diameter and noted to remain on the drawings. Also, particular attention shall be paid to the construction access, stockpile and haul road areas. Distribute a copy of the photographic documentation (color prints or high quality video cassette tape) to the Owner and Architect prior to construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL FILL A. Structural fill shall be run of crusher limestone; free of clay, organics, debris, and deleterious – materials;
and conforming to NYSDOT subbase course (2” minus) or approved equal. Existing on-site soil can be used as structural fill as long as proper moisture content is maintained.
B. The subbase course directly below concrete grade beams, slabs-on-grade, concrete sidewalks, and asphalt
pavement shall be structural fill. Structural fill shall also be used to fill any overexcavations and as necessary to obtain the specified finish floor elevation or site grades.
2.02 GENERAL FILL A. General fill shall be any soil material, which is free of topsoil, asphalt, organics, debris, and other deleterious
materials. B. General fill may be used for backfill in lawn/planting areas only. It cannot be used below footings
slab-on-grade, concrete sidewalks, and asphalt pavement. C. Material shall be within 2% of optimum moisture content for maximum compaction. 2.03 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC:
Mirafi 500X, as manufactured by Tencate Geosynthetics North America, or approved equal. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Shall include, but not be limited to; temporary fences, planks, lights, barricades, coverings and other
temporary protections.
SA1509A SITE PREPARATION 31 1000-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING ON SITE A. Strip full depth of existing topsoil from areas to be regraded, paved, or otherwise built upon. Topsoil shall
be well drained, homogeneous texture soil of uniform grade, without the admixture of subsoil material. Topsoil shall be free of dense material, hardpan, and stone over %" inch in diameter, and other objectionable foreign material including, but not limited to, glass, nails, screws, toxins, hazardous wastes and chemicals (such as atrizene and muriatic acid) that may be injurious to humans, animals and plant materials.
B. Minimum quantity of topsoil shall be as needed to provide two (2') and four (4") inches settled depth on
lawn areas. Verify quality and quantity. C. When amount of available topsoil meeting above requirements exceeds what is required for the proposed
lawn areas, lower the lawn subgrade and place additional topsoil in a uniform depth. Maintain finish grades as shown on the drawings. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Stockpile on site where shown on the drawings or as directed by the Architect. Do not mix topsoil
stockpiles with other materials. Do not remove topsoil from site without written permission by the Owner. 3.02 SITE CLEARING AND REMOVALS A. Items and materials noted to be removed shall become the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise
noted. Obtain Owner's approval prior to removal off site or for relocation of salvaged material on site. Remove material off site and legally dispose it. Backfill voids with structural fill, placed in eight (8") inch layers compacted to maximum 95% of density.
B. Remove physical elements above and below grade as shown or which interfere with proposed
construction. Physical elements include but are not limited to: trees, root systems, shrubs, vines, grass, vegetation, pavements, walks, curbs, gutters, foundations, previous construction materials, glass, headwalls, flared end sections, catch basins, manholes, inlets, drywells, septic tanks, unused utilities, pipes, cisterns, walls, rocks, and other debris.
C. Trees, shrubs, and roots shall be completely removed to a depth of 18" below grade and disposed of
legally off site. D. Maintain existing utilities and protect from damage during demolition and construction operations. Do not
interrupt existing utilities; provide temporary services when required, as acceptable to the Architect. 3.04 CLEAN UP A. During the contract and at intervals as directed by the Architect and as site preparation is completed, clear
the site of extraneous materials, rubbish, and debris. Leave the site in a clean, safe, well draining, neat condition.
END OF SECTION 31 1000
SA1509-A SITE EARTHWORK 31 2000-1
SECTION 31 2000 - SITE EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of the Contract, including DIVISION 0 AND DIVISION 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of earthwork and site grading is shown on the drawings. B. Site earthwork includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Horizontal and vertical layout including grade stakes 2. Grading and excavation 3. Compacted backfill and fill as indicated 4. Disposal of excavated material off site 5. Coordinating with Special Inspector for soil testing and inspection services
C. Provide materials, labor, equipment, and services required to accomplish related work in accordance with
the drawings and specifications. D. The contractor shall strip asphalt, concrete, soil, and / or topsoil and prepare/ excavate areas as
necessary for the building and Sitework. This includes providing structural fill as necessary to establish this elevation. Area should be rolled to seal the surface and protected with temporary erosion controls, etc.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Refer to DIVISIONS 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 for excavation and backfill required in conjunction with
underground mechanical and electrical utilities. B. SECTION 31 1000 - SITE PREPARATION C. SECTION 31 2000 – BUILDING EARTHWORK 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.. Perform earthwork and site grading in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities
having jurisdiction. B. The Owner will employ a licensed soil testing and inspection service (Special Inspector) for field testing of
materials. This shall include one optimum moisture-maximum density curve (Modified Proctor) for each soil type as determined by ASTM D1557-00, Method A, latest issue using a 10 lb. rammer and an 18-inch drop. Field testing shall also include soil-in-place density tests in accordance with the sand cone method ASTM D1556-00 or nuclear method ASTM D2922-01. This Contractor will coordinate day to day scheduling with the Owner's Special Inspector.
C. Provide laboratory testing (mechanical analysis) to determine acceptability of material D. Density Tests: The results of density tests of soil-in-place will be considered satisfactory when all density
tests have a value equal to or greater than the required density. E. Retesting: When, in the opinion of the Architect, based on reports of the testing service and inspection,
the subgrade or fills which have been placed below the specified density, the Architect will require additional compaction and testing.
F. Proof rolling as described in Part 3 of this Section
SA1509-A SITE EARTHWORK 31 2000-2
G. On asphalt and concrete subgrades and in fill areas two (2') feet and greater, provide soil-in-place density tests at twenty-five (25') foot grid for pavements for each eight (8") inch lift of backfill.
H. In non-paved areas where fill areas are two (2’) foot and greater, provide soil-in-place density tests at
intersection points of one hundred (100’) foot grid for each eight (8”) inch lift of backfill. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish name of experienced layout foreman to perform layout and obtain Architect's approval. B. Provide test reports required in Part 1 of this Section. C. Submit written report on layout foreman's letterhead verifying that professional's involvement with the
layout. The report shall briefly state the scope of services performed for the project, the dates work was accomplished and an explanation of any adjustments required, specifically listing asbuilt and FIELD VERIFY requirements as noted in Part 1 of this Section.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Job conditions in SECTION 31 1000 - SITE PREPARATION apply. B. Engineering Layout:
1. Employ an experienced layout foreman to perform layout work. 2. Verify field conditions such as bench marks, monuments, topography, inverts, locations of utilities
and property lines before proceeding. Notify the Architect immediately, of discrepancies prior to commencing work. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of survey and layout information. Additional costs resulting from failure to verify field conditions as noted on drawings shall be paid by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Stake layout up to and including those elevations and dimensions specifically noted on drawings as "FIELD VERIFY" (FV). Ensure that the field elevation and dimension agrees with the elevation and dimension on the drawings before continuing. Notify the Architect immediately, of any discrepancies prior to commencing work. Additional costs resulting from failure to verify dimensions as noted on drawings shall be paid by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Assume sole responsibility for the accuracy of the layout work. 5. Run from point(s) of beginning (POB), base lines, property monuments, bench marks, iron survey
pins, or other points given on the drawings. 6. Roads, Parking Areas, and Walks: Accurately locate and stake curblines, center line, swales,
point of curve and tangency as necessary to accurately build. 7. Buildings and Site Features: Accurately locate and stake corners, offset corners, slopes and
center lines as necessary to accurately build. 8. Pipe Work: Accurately locate with laser.
C. Guarantee:
1. Guarantee slabs, pavements, and retaining walls, free from settlement for a period of one (1) year from the date given on the certificate of substantial completion or final punch list when satisfactorily completed and accepted by the Architect, whichever is later.
2. Repair to proper grade and alignment settlement of slabs, pavements, retaining walls, trenches, utilities, structures, lawns and plant materials adversely affected by settlement within one year after date given on the certificate of substantial completion-or final punch list when satisfactorily completed and accepted by the Architect, whichever is later, at no additional expense to the Owner. In damaged compacted areas, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction.
SA1509-A SITE EARTHWORK 31 2000-3
1.07 UNUSUAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS A. Refer to subsurface information in SECTION 02 0100 – SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION. The data on
subsurface conditions is not intended as representation warranties of the continuity of such conditions between test pits or test borings made by the Owner and included in the specifications. It is expressly understood that the Owner and Architect are not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. The data is made available for convenience for the Contractor.
B. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no additional
cost to the Owner, provided such operations are acceptable to the Architect and Owner. Coordinate test locations with Owner prior to starting work. Backfill immediately when completed and repair to satisfactory conditions as determined by the Architect. It is expressly understood that the Owner and Architect are not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor.
1.08 UNUSUAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS A. Notify the Architect immediately when unusual conditions are encountered during excavation, including
but not limited to flooding, miscellaneous structures, uncharted utilities, foundations, bed rock, toxic and hazardous materials and chemicals, suspected archaeological artifacts, and unsuitable soils. Request clarification before proceeding (see Section Part-3 for this section).
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL FILL A. Structural Fill shall be as specified in Section 31 1000, Site Preparation. 2.02 UNSATISFACTORY SOIL MATERIALS A. Shall be defined as soil with high percentage of decomposed rock, sand, organic matter or moisture laden
clay to prevent adequate compaction. Also, soil with toxins, hazardous wastes and chemicals that may be injurious to humans, animals and plant materials. Also, soil with significant quantities of rubbish, debris, wood, masonry, metal, frost or other deleterious material which cannot be properly compacted shall be classified as unsatisfactory.
B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those in soil classification groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH,
MH, PT, and OH, or a combination of these groups as determined by ASTM D2487, as well as peat and other highly organic soils.
C. When unsatisfactory soil materials are encountered at proposed subgrades and other design elevations,
proceed as described in Part 3 of this section. 2.03 SHORING AND BRACING A. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross-braces, in
good serviceable condition. Use timbers that are sound and free of large or loose knots. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GRADING A. Cut and Fill: Presume the earthwork does not balance on site. Meet the grades shown on the drawings.
Haul in or haul away as may be necessary. Provide earthwork calculations, and provide for imported or exported material as part of bid. No additional costs will be allowed.
B. Grade areas as indicated, including transition areas, with uniform levels and slopes between finish
elevations. C. Cut to grades and profiles indicated.
SA1509-A SITE EARTHWORK 31 2000-4
D. Set grade stakes at fifteen feet (15’) intervals, at corners, and breaks in grade. E. Conduct operations to avoid ponding of water. Provide pumping equipment where and when necessary to
continue work performance on schedule. F. Shape surface of areas to within 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevation, compacted as
required and sloped to provide drainage as shown on the drawings. G. Refer to SECTION 31 1000 – SITE PREPARATION, for topsoil requirements. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Remove and legally dispose of material encountered to obtain required subgrade elevations, including
pavement, obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be removed.
B. Bracing and Shoring:
1. Provide bracing and shoring as required in excavations, to maintain sides and to protect structures from settlement. Slope the sides of excavations over five (5') feet deep to the angle of repose of the material excavated; otherwise, shore, and brace where sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.
2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as the excavation progresses.
3. Remove shoring and bracing before completion of backfilling except where required for structural support or slope stability.
4 The design, installation, and maintenance of such shoring and bracing required to accomplish the above purpose are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
5. Indemnify the Owner and Architect against any action arising from damage to existing structures or injury to persons resulting from the Contractor's actions or failure to act, in carrying out the intent of this section.
C. Protections: Protect structures, vegetation, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities in areas of
work. Barricade open excavations and provide warning lights from dusk to dawn each day. D. Extent of Excavations: Excavate for structures to elevations and dimensions shown, extending excavation
a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of other work and for inspection. Trim bottom to required lines and grades to provide solid base to receive concrete or granular backfill material.
E. When unsatisfactory soil materials are encountered at design elevations, immediately notify the Architect.
Continue as directed by the Architect. When conditions are not a result of Contractor's negligence, additional excavation may be directed by the Architect and paid for as a Change Order on a unit price basis in accordance with Contract Documents.
F. Unauthorized Excavations: Fill the voids created by the removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations with lean concrete (2000 psi); Or, correct by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing to the lower elevation, as directed by the Architect. In either case, at no additional cost to Owner.
G. Pumping Equipment: Contractor shall anticipate seasonal variations of soil moisture content in the Base
Bid. Provide and operate sufficient pumping machinery to keep excavated parts free of water. Dig pits when necessary into which the excavation shall be drained. Take care and proper precautions in the use of pumps so that in no case will foundations and footings already in place or existing foundations and footings of adjacent structures be undermined or disturbed and erosion occur due to pumping. Do not discharge pumped materials into any body of water, adjacent property or subsurface system without prior written authorization from affected property owner(s) and appropriate governing authorities.
H. Prepare subgrade and twelve (12") inches of existing soils below subgrade in excavated areas to density
as described in this Section.
SA1509-A SITE EARTHWORK 31 2000-5
I. Rock Excavation: Boulders over 1/2 cu. yd., solid rock, rock in ledges which cannot be ripped by a D8 dozer with a ripper, and rock- hard cementitious aggregate deposits, when encountered, shall be stockpiled for measurement before removal and paid for on a unit price basis in accordance with Contract Documents. Rock excavations as specified for added Rock Earthwork to the Contract shall be measured each day and verified by the Owner's representative and the Contractor's Superintendent. A daily accounting, attested to by both parties, shall be maintained with copies weekly to the Architect. No claim for extra compensation will be considered except through the procedure outlined above.
3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL A. Preparation of Ground Surface to Receive Fill:
1. Remove vegetation, organic materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Break up and remove existing foundations, concrete slabs, and site features.
2. Break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to the required depth and percentage of maximum density: Proof-roll exposed Subgrade with a fully loaded dump truck or accepted alternative equipment under the observation of the Special Inspector. Areas that rut, weave, or deflect should be over-excavated and replaced with compacted structural fill over geotextile fabric.
3. In no case shall fill be placed on a subgrade that is muddy, frozen or that contains frost. B. Place material in layers not more than eight (8") inches in loose depth. Compact each layer to required
maximum density. Test each layer as described in Part 1 of this Section. C. Compaction:
1. Compact each layer of backfill and fill soil materials. 2. Compact fill material below slab-on-grade, sidewalks, utility trenches, and pavements to minimum
95% of optimum density. 3. Compact fill material below subgrade for lawns or unpaved areas to minimum 90% of optimum
density. D. Moisture Level: Contractor shall anticipate seasonal variations of soil moisture content in the Base Bid.
Apply water to surface or subgrade or layers of soil material when required to achieve compaction densities stated above. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.
E. Equipment:
1. Use sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic tired rollers, tamper rollers, vibrating tampers, and other compaction equipment capable of obtaining the required density throughout the entire layer being compacted.
2. Use power-driven hand tampers for compacting materials adjacent to site structures. F. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where complete compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent
construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, regrade, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. Use hand tamping for recompaction over underground utilities.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspector must inspect and approve density tests, retesting, and proof rolling of subgrades, as
described in Part 1 of this Section, before further construction work is performed thereon. B. Provide Special Inspector with 24 hour advance notification when subgrades and fill layers are
compacted and ready to test. In the presence of the Special Inspector, proof roll the prepared pavement subgrade surface with fully loaded ten (10 c.y.) cubic yard earth moving truck. Check for unstable areas. Subgrades that rut, pump or deflect under the truck's tires may be judged unstable by the Special Inspector. These areas may require further compaction or undercutting as directed by the Special Inspector.
SA1509-A SITE EARTHWORK 31 2000-6
3.05 CLEAN UP A. During the contract and at intervals as directed by the Architect and as earthwork is completed, clear the'
site of surplus earth, large surface stones, debris, tools and equipment. Leave the site in a clean, safe, well draining, and neat condition.
END OF SECTION 31 2000
SA1509A BUILDING EARTHWORK 31 2001-1
SECTION 31 2001 - BUILDING EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including DIVISION 0 AND DIVISION I Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials and complete all work of this Section as shown on the drawings and/or as
specified herein in the footprint of the building, including but not limited to the following: 1. Horizontal and vertical layout 2. Excavation and placement of compacted fill for foundations 3. Placement of compacted fill under slabs-on-grade 4. Installation of all sheeting, shoring and bracing required to execute the work 5. Disposal of all excavated material off site 6. Coordinating with Special Inspector for soil testing and inspection services
B. The contractor shall strip asphalt, concrete, soil, and/or topsoil and prepare/excavate areas as necessary to a DEPTH OF eight (8) INCHES BELOW existing finish grade. This includes providing structural fill as necessary to establish this elevation. Area should be rolled to seal the surface and protected with temporary erosion controls, etc.
1.03 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Mechanical/Electrical drawings for excavation and backfill required in conjunction with
underground mechanical and electrical utilities. B. SECTION 31 1000 - SITE PREPARATION C. SECTION 31 2000 - SITE EARTHWORK D. SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1:04 DEFINITIONS A. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth at the bottom of the excavation B. Structure: Buildings, foundations, or other manmade stationary features C. Engineered Fill: Structural fill placed directly under bottom of slabs or foundations, within the footprint of
the building. D. Backfill: structural fill used to bring exterior building grade elevations up to the required level. E. Borrow: On or Off-site material used in place of structural fill. Borrow material must be approved by
Engineer and meet the requirements for the specific material for which it is to be used. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification
Sections. B. Test Reports: Prior to delivery or use of any fill material, the testing company shall submit the following
reports of each material: 1. Description of material
C. Field Reports: In place soil density tests, calibrated from the modified proctor laboratory compaction test. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform earthwork and site grading in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities
having jurisdiction. B. The Owner will employ a licensed soil testing and inspection service (Special Inspector) for field testing of
materials. This shall include one optimum moisture-maximum density curve (Modified Proctor) for each soil type as determined by ASTM D1557-00, Method A, latest issue using a 10 lb. rammer and an 18-inch drop. Field testing shall also include soil-in-place density tests in accordance with the sand cone method ASTM D1556-00 or nuclear method ASTM D2922-01. This Contractor will coordinate day to day scheduling with the Owner's Special Inspector.
C. Provide laboratory testing (mechanical analysis) to determine acceptability of material. D. Density Tests: The results of density tests of soil-in-place will be considered satisfactory when all density
tests have a value equal to or greater than the required density. E. Retesting: When, in the opinion of the Architect, based on reports of the testing service and inspection,
the subgrade or fills, which have been placed below the specified density, the Architect will require additional compaction and testing.
F. Proof rolling as described in Part 3 of this Section G. On foundation subgrades and in fill areas two (2') feet and greater, provide soil-in-place density tests at
fifty (50') foot intervals for walls for each eight (8") inch lift of backfill. On slab subgrades, provide soil-in-place density tests at a 25’ grid for each 8” lift of backfill
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities are indicated
to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during
excavation, consult Owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility Owner.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary, utility services have been provided. Provide minimum of 48 hour notice to Owner, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.
3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active.
B. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
C. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post
with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
SA1509A BUILDING EARTHWORK 31 2001-3
PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL FILL A. Structural Fill shall be as specified in SECTION 31 1000 - SITE PREPARATION. 2.02 UNSATISFACTORY SOIL MATERIALS
A. Shall be defined as soil with high percentage of decomposed rock, sand, organic matter or moisture laden
clay to prevent adequate compaction. Also, soil with toxins, hazardous wastes and chemicals that may be injurious to humans, animals and plant materials. Also, soil with significant quantities of rubbish, debris, wood, masonry, metal, frost or other deleterious material which cannot be properly compacted shall be classified as unsatisfactory.
B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those in soil classification groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH,
MH, PT, and OH, or a combination of these groups as determined by ASTM D2487, as well as peat and other highly organic soils.
C. When unsatisfactory soil materials are encountered at proposed subgrades and other design elevations, proceed as described in Part 3 of this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Provide planking at all walks, pavements and curbs to be crossed by equipment and erect barricades at
open excavations. B. All utility services and adjacent pavement and property shall be protected and maintained. The Owner
and utility company shall be informed immediately of any damage. Any damage shall be corrected by the Contractor and at his expense.
C. Maintain traffic on all adjacent vehicular and pedestrian ways. Do not close or obstruct any way without
written approval or Owner and the City of Fulton. 3.02 LAYOUT, LINES, AND LEVELS A. Establish base lines. Mark well and protect during construction. B. Check existing elevations. C. Corner, offset corners, and grade stakes shall be located where spot elevations are shown, at breaks in
grade, and as otherwise required to complete the work as shown. D. Accurately locate building. Advise Architect of any discrepancies discovered, prior to commencing work. 3.03 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations and from flooding
project site and surrounding area. B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation
bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain any pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and any other dewatering system components as needed to convey water away from excavations.
C. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run off areas. Establish and
maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
SA1509A BUILDING EARTHWORK 31 2001-4
3.04 EXCAVATION A. Remove and legally dispose of material encountered to obtain required subgrade elevations, including
pavement, obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be removed.
B. Bracing and Shoring: 1. Provide bracing and shoring as required in excavations, to maintain sides and to protect
structures from settlement. Slope the sides of excavations over five (5') feet deep to the angle of repose of the material excavated; otherwise, shore, and brace where sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.
2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as the excavation progresses.
3. Remove shoring and bracing before completion of backfilling except where required for structural support or slope stability.
4. The design, installation, and maintenance of such shoring and bracing required to accomplish the above purpose are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
5. Indemnify the Owner and Architect against any action arising from damage to existing structures or injury to persons resulting from the Contractor's actions or failure to act, in carrying out the intent of this section.
C. Protections: Protect structures, vegetation, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities in areas of
work. Barricade open excavations and provide warning lights from dusk to dawn each day.
D. Extent of Excavations: Excavate for structures to elevations and dimensions shown, extending excavation a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of other work and for inspection. Trim bottom to required lines and grades to provide solid base to receive concrete or granular backfill material.'
E. When unsatisfactory soil materials are encountered at design elevations, immediately notify the Architect.
Continue as directed by the Architect. When conditions are not a result of Contractor's negligence, additional excavation may be directed by the Architect and paid for as a Change Order on a unit price basis in accordance with Contract Documents.
F. Unauthorized Excavations: Fill the voids created by the removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations with lean concrete (2000 psi); Or, correct by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing to the lower elevation, as directed by the Architect. In either case, at no additional cost to Owner.
G. Pumping Equipment: Contractor shall anticipate seasonal variations of soil moisture content in the Base
Bid. Provide and operate sufficient pumping machinery to keep excavated parts free of water. Dig pits when necessary into which the excavation shall be drained. Take care and proper precautions in the use of pumps so that in no case will foundations and footings already in place or existing foundations and footings of adjacent structures be undermined or disturbed and erosion occur due to pumping. Do not discharge pumped materials into any body of water, adjacent property or subsurface system without prior written authorization from affected property owner(s) and appropriate governing authorities.
H. Prepare subgrade and twelve (12") inches of existing soils below subgrade in excavated areas to density as described in this Section.
I. Rock Excavation: Boulders over 1/2 cu. yd., solid rock, rock in ledges which cannot be ripped by a D8 dozer with a ripper, and rock- hard cementitious aggregate deposits, when encountered, shall be stockpiled for measurement before removal and paid for on a unit price basis in accordance with Contract Documents. Rock excavations as specified for added Rock Earthwork to the Contract shall be measured each day and verified by the Owner's representative and the Contractor's Superintendent. A daily accounting, attested to by both parties, shall be maintained with copies weekly to the Architect. No claim for extra compensation will be considered except through the procedure outlined above.
J. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is
